AF3228C - AF3235C MS - v00

CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
SERVICE MANUAL
002366MIU
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
SERVICE MANUAL
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
SERVICE MANUAL
002366MIU
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained

within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY
FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including
desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
2005 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Corporation
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE
B202
B178
B180
GESTETNER
DSc428
DSc435
DSc445
COMPANY
LANIER
RICOH
LD328c
Aficio 3228C
LD335c
Aficio 3235C
LD345c
Aficio 3245C
SAVIN
C2824
C3528
C4535
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO.
*
DATE
06/2005
COMMENTS
Original Printing
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-1
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-1
1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT.................................................1-2
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-2
1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS ..........................................................1-3
1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS ........................................................................1-3
1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS ................................................................1-3
1.3 COPIER.....................................................................................................1-4
1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS .......................................1-4
1.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART .......................................................1-5
1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION........................................................................1-6
1.4.1 COPIER............................................................................................1-6
Accessory Check ..................................................................................1-6
Installation Procedure ...........................................................................1-7
Settings Relevant to Contract .............................................................1-11
1.4.2 MOVING MACHINE........................................................................1-12
1.4.3 TRANSPORTING MACHINE..........................................................1-13
1.5 OPTIONAL UNIT .....................................................................................1-15
1.5.1 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT ....................................................1-15
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-15
Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-16
1.5.2 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT....................................................1-19
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-19
1.5.3 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY ..............................................................1-23
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-23
1.5.4 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER ......................................1-27
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-27
1.5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER...................................................................1-30
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-30
1.5.6 PUNCH UNIT .................................................................................1-33
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-33
1.5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY ...........................................................1-37
Accessories Check List.......................................................................1-37
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 06/2006
Installing the Multi-Bin Output Tray .....................................................1-38

1.5.8 BOOKLET FINISHER .....................................................................1-39
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-39
Adjusting the Height............................................................................1-40
Main Body...........................................................................................1-41
Optional Punch Unit ............................................................................1-44
1.5.9 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION............................................1-48
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.....................................................1-48
ACCESSARY CHECK ........................................................................1-49
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..........................................................1-50
1.5.10 KEY COUNTER HOLDER............................................................1-55
1.5.11 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ................................................1-57
1.5.12 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ................................................1-59
1.5.13 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
(SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION) .......................................1-61
1.6 PRINTER OPTIONS................................................................................1-64
1.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................1-64
I/F Card Slot........................................................................................1-64
SD Card Slot.......................................................................................1-64
1.6.2 POSTSCRIPT 3..............................................................................1-65
1.6.3 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER ........................................................1-66
1.6.4 IEEE 1394 (FIREWIRE)..................................................................1-67
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394........................................................1-68
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394 ........................................................1-68
1.6.5 IEEE 1284 ......................................................................................1-69
1.6.6 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) ...................................................1-70
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN ...................................................1-72
SP MODE SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11B WIRELESS LAN .............1-73
1.6.7 BLUETOOTH..................................................................................1-74
1.6.8 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ...............................1-75
Before You Begin The Procedure .......................................................1-75
Accessory Check ................................................................................1-75
Seal Check And Removal ...................................................................1-76
1.6.9 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS ........................................................1-79
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-1
2.1 SETTINGS.................................................................................................2-1
New Unit Set.........................................................................................2-1
PM Counter Reset ................................................................................2-1
2.2 PM TABLES ..............................................................................................2-2
2.3 OTHERS ...................................................................................................2-4
B202/B178/B180
ii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1
3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ......................................................................................3-1
3.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ..............................................................................3-2
3.2.1 SCANNING.......................................................................................3-2
Scanner sub-scan magnification ...........................................................3-2
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration..............................3-2
Main scan dot position correction .........................................................3-3
3.2.2 ARDF................................................................................................3-4
ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration .................................3-4
3.2.3 REGISTRATION...............................................................................3-5
Image Area ...........................................................................................3-5
Leading Edge........................................................................................3-5
Side to Side ..........................................................................................3-5
Adjustment Standard ............................................................................3-5
Paper Registration Standard.................................................................3-5
Adjustment Procedure ..........................................................................3-6
3.2.4 COLOR REGISTRATION .................................................................3-6
Line Position Adjustment ......................................................................3-6
Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper............................................3-6
3.2.5 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION ..................................................3-7
Copy Mode ...........................................................................................3-7
Printer Mode .......................................................................................3-12
3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT......................................................................3-14
3.3.1 TOP COVER ..................................................................................3-14
3.3.2 DUPLEX CONTROL BOARD .........................................................3-14
3.3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 1 .....................................................3-15
3.3.4 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 2 AND SWITCH .............................3-16
3.3.5 EXIT SENSOR 3 AND DUPLEX INVERTER SENSOR..................3-16
3.3.6 EXIT SENSOR 1 AND 2 .................................................................3-16
3.4 DUPLEX FEED UNIT ..............................................................................3-17
3.4.1 DUPLEX DRIVE BOARD................................................................3-17
3.4.2 DUPLEX FEED MOTOR ................................................................3-17
3.4.3 DUPLEX FEED SENSOR...............................................................3-18
3.5 EXTERIOR COVERS ..............................................................................3-19
3.5.1 REAR, FRONT, AND RIGHT SIDES ..............................................3-19
3.5.2 LEFT SIDE .....................................................................................3-21
3.5.3 OPERATION PANEL AND SCANNER COVERS...........................3-22
3.6 SCANNER UNIT......................................................................................3-23
3.6.1 EXPOSURE GLASS.......................................................................3-23
3.6.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH/WIDTH SENSOR ..........................................3-23
3.6.3 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU).......................................................3-24
When reassembling ............................................................................3-24
3.6.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER ...................................................3-26
3.6.5 XENON LAMP ................................................................................3-26
3.6.6 SCANNER POWER SUPPLY UNIT (PSU) ....................................3-28
3.6.7 SCANNER MOTOR........................................................................3-28
SM
iii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.6.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE ..............................................................3-29
3.6.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE.................................................................3-32
3.6.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT .................................3-35
3.7 LASER OPTICS ......................................................................................3-36
3.7.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS .....................................................3-36
3.7.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT ..................................................3-37
Adjustments after Replacing the Laser Optics Housing Unit...............3-43
3.7.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ........................................................3-44
3.7.4 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR DRIVE BOARD ..............................3-45
3.7.5 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS ........................3-45
3.8 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...........................................................3-46
3.9 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................3-47
3.9.1 PICK-UP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ..........................3-47
Tray 1 and Tray 2 ...............................................................................3-47
By-pass Tray.......................................................................................3-47
3.9.2 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION BOARD ...........................................3-49
3.9.3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR ...............................................3-50
3.9.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT .......................................................................3-50
3.9.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR AND RELAY SENSORS .....................3-51
3.9.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES.............................................................3-51
3.9.7 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH ..............................................................3-52
3.9.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .......................................................................3-52
3.9.9 PAPER FEED MOTOR...................................................................3-53
3.10 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT .....................................3-54
3.10.1 TRANSFER UNIT .........................................................................3-54
3.10.2 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT............................................3-55
3.10.3 CLEANING BLADE AND CLEANING ROLLER ...........................3-56
3.10.4 TRANSFER BELT ........................................................................3-58
When you reinstall the transfer belt ....................................................3-59
3.10.5 TRANSFER UNIT DRIVE MOTOR...............................................3-60
3.11 ID SENSORS ........................................................................................3-61
3.12 FUSING .................................................................................................3-62
3.12.1 FUSING UNIT...............................................................................3-62
3.12.2 UPPER COVER............................................................................3-63
3.12.3 THERMOSTAT AND HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR............3-64
3.12.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR AND FUSE .......................3-65
Reassembling .....................................................................................3-65
3.12.5 HEATING ROLLER LAMP AND PRESSURE ROLLER LAMP ....3-66
3.12.6 FUSING BELT UNIT.....................................................................3-67
3.12.7 HOT ROLLER AND HEATING ROLLER ......................................3-68
Reassembling .....................................................................................3-68
3.12.8 UPPER PAPER GUIDE PLATE AND STRIPPER PAWLS...........3-69
3.12.9 LOWER PAPER GUIDE PLATE AND STRIPPER PAWLS..........3-70
3.12.10 CLEANING ROLLER AND OIL SUPPLY ROLLER ....................3-71
3.12.11 PRESSURE ROLLER.................................................................3-72
Reassembling .....................................................................................3-72
3.12.12 DRIVE GEAR .............................................................................3-72
3.12.13 FUSING UNIT FAN.....................................................................3-73
3.12.14 PAPER EXIT ..............................................................................3-74
B202/B178/B180
iv
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.13 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..............................................................3-75
3.13.1 MOVING THE CONTROLLER BOX OUT OF THE WAY .............3-75
3.13.2 MOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C,
B OUT OF THE WAY ...................................................................3-76
3.13.3 CONTROLLER, IPU, AND BCU ...................................................3-76
3.13.4 HDD..............................................................................................3-78
When reassembling the HDD .............................................................3-78
3.13.5 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE .....................................3-79
NVRAM on the BCU ...........................................................................3-79
NVRAM on the Controller ...................................................................3-80
3.13.6 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B .......3-81
3.13.7 SUB POWER SUPPLY UNIT .......................................................3-81
3.13.8 PSU ..............................................................................................3-82
3.13.9 DRIVER BOARD ..........................................................................3-82
3.14 DRIVE UNIT ..........................................................................................3-83
3.14.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH ...........................................................3-83
3.14.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES ......................................................3-83
3.14.3 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR - CMY .................................................3-84
3.14.4 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - CMY AND DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - K ....3-86
3.14.5 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - K...........................................3-87
3.15 TONER SUPPLY UNIT .........................................................................3-88
M Toner Supply Unit ...........................................................................3-88
C and Y Toner Supply Units ...............................................................3-92
K Toner Supply Unit............................................................................3-93
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS .........................................4-1
4.1.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT .........................................4-1
4.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT ...............................4-3
4.1.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT .......................................4-4
4.2 SCANNER TEST MODE ...........................................................................4-8
4.2.1 VPU TEST MODE ............................................................................4-8
SP4-907-1 VPU Test Pattern: R ...........................................................4-8
SP4-907-2 VPU Test Pattern: G ...........................................................4-8
SP4-907-3 VPU Test Pattern: B ...........................................................4-8
4.2.2 IPU TEST MODE..............................................................................4-8
SP4-904-1 Register Access..................................................................4-8
SP4-904-2 Image Path .........................................................................4-8
4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ...............................................................4-10
4.3.1 SUMMARY .....................................................................................4-10
SC Code Classification .......................................................................4-11
4.4 SC TABLE ...............................................................................................4-12
4.5 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 1 .............................................................4-51
4.5.1 IMAGE QUALITY............................................................................4-51
Work-flow............................................................................................4-51
4.6 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2 .............................................................4-53
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.6.1 IMAGE QUALITY............................................................................4-53
Detailed Explanation ...........................................................................4-57
Copy Image processing ......................................................................4-62
4.6.2 COLOR SHIFT ...............................................................................4-64
Adjustment Standard: Max. 150 mm..................................................4-66
How to measure the gap between color lines .....................................4-72
4.6.3 COLOR SHIFT AFTER TRANSFER UNIT REPLACEMENT .........4-74
Check the color shift level ...................................................................4-74
Fusing/ Registration Roller Speed Adjustment ...................................4-74
4.6.4 BLACK OVER PRINT .....................................................................4-77
Black Over Print Disabled ...................................................................4-77
Black Over Print Enabled....................................................................4-77
4.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................4-78
4.7.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................4-78
4.8 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................4-80
4.9 LEDS (BCU) ............................................................................................4-80
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1
5.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ...........5-1
Entering SP Mode.................................................................................5-1
Exiting SP Mode ...................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES ....................................................................5-2
SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................5-3
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ...........5-4
Selecting the Program Number.............................................................5-4
Exiting Service Mode ............................................................................5-4
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ...................................................................5-5
5.1.3 REMARKS........................................................................................5-6
Display on the Control Panel Screen ....................................................5-6
Others ...................................................................................................5-7
5.2 COPY SERVICE MODE............................................................................5-8
5.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE..................................................................5-8
SP1-XXX (Feed) ...................................................................................5-8
SP2-XXX (Drum).................................................................................5-19
SP3-XXX (Process) ............................................................................5-35
SP4-XXX (Scanner) ............................................................................5-45
SP5-XXX (Mode) ................................................................................5-55
SP6-XXX (Peripherals) .......................................................................5-83
SP7-XXX (Data Log)...........................................................................5-86
SP8-xxx: Data Log2 ............................................................................5-97
5.2.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE .................................................................5-134
ARDF Input Check: SP6-007 ............................................................5-136
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor...........................................................5-137
Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) .................................................5-137
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) ................................................5-137
B202/B178/B180
vi
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Table 4: Original Size Detection .......................................................5-138
5.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE .............................................................5-139
5.2.4 TEST PATTERN (SP5-997) .........................................................5-143
5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ..................................................................5-144
SP1-XXX (Service Mode) .................................................................5-144
5.4 SCANNER SP MODE ...........................................................................5-146
SP1-xxx (System and Others) ..........................................................5-146
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) ..................................................5-146
5.5 REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET ..................................................5-147
5.5.1 SOFTWARE RESET ....................................................................5-147
5.5.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET ...................5-147
System Setting Reset .......................................................................5-147
Copier Setting Reset.........................................................................5-148
5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE ...........................................................................5-149
5.6.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE..................................................................5-149
5.6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ..................................................................5-150
5.6.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE...............................................................5-151
5.6.3 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL.............5-154
5.6.4 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA ..................................................5-155
5.6.5 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................5-156
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card ...................................5-156
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM................................................5-156
5.6.6 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE .........................................5-157
5.6.7 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS...............................5-160
5.7 SD CARD APPLI MOVE........................................................................5-161
5.7.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-161
5.7.2 MOVE EXEC ................................................................................5-162
5.7.3 UNDO EXEC ................................................................................5-163
5.8 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ..................................................5-164
5.8.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-164
5.8.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ................................................5-165
5.9 USING THE DEBUG LOG.....................................................................5-166
5.9.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG ...........5-166
5.9.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD .....................5-169
5.9.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY ...........................................5-170
5.9.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES .........................................................5-171
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key .............5-171
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log ..........................5-171
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log ....................5-171
5.10 DIP SWITCHES...................................................................................5-172
Controller Board................................................................................5-172
BCU Board........................................................................................5-172
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................................6-1
SM
vii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.1.2 PAPER PATH ...................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-3
6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE......................................................................6-4
Overview...............................................................................................6-4
6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS ......................................................................6-6
6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ..............................................................................6-8
6.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................6-8
6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL ...................................................................6-8
Overview...............................................................................................6-8
Process Control Self Check ..................................................................6-9
6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE ....................6-10
Step 1: VSG Adjustment .....................................................................6-10
Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation .......................................6-11
Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection .......................................................6-11
Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation ......................................................6-11
Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment .........................6-12
Step 6: ID Sensor Highlight Pattern Generation .................................6-13
Step 7: Sensor Pattern Density Detection...........................................6-13
Step 8: VL (LD Power) Selection ........................................................6-13
6.2.4 VREF COMPENSATION DURING A PRINT JOB ..........................6-14
Highlight Pattern .................................................................................6-14
Adjustment Process ............................................................................6-14
6.2.5 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL .........................................................6-15
Overview.............................................................................................6-15
Toner Supply Control Modes ..............................................................6-15
6.2.6 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION ............................6-16
Introduction .........................................................................................6-16
Toner Near End Detection 1 ...............................................................6-17
Toner Near End Detection 2 ...............................................................6-17
Toner End Detection ...........................................................................6-18
Toner End Recovery ...........................................................................6-18
6.2.7 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION ......................................................6-19
6.3 SCANNING..............................................................................................6-20
6.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-20
6.3.2 SCANNER DRIVE ..........................................................................6-21
6.3.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................6-22
6.3.4 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ..................................................6-23
6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-24
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-24
6.4.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM .................................................................6-25
Signal Processing ...............................................................................6-25
A/D Conversion...................................................................................6-25
White Level Correction........................................................................6-25
Others .................................................................................................6-25
Black Level Correction ........................................................................6-26
Adjustments ........................................................................................6-26
VPU Test Mode ..................................................................................6-26
6.4.3 IPU BLOCK DIAGRAM...................................................................6-27
Shading Correction .............................................................................6-27
B202/B178/B180
viii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction ..........................................6-28
Scan Line Correction ..........................................................................6-28
Image Separation................................................................................6-28
ACS (Auto Color Select) .....................................................................6-29
Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction) .....................6-30
Filtering ...............................................................................................6-31
ADS (Auto Image Density Selection) ..................................................6-31
Color Conversion ................................................................................6-32
Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................6-33
Printer Gamma Correction ..................................................................6-34
Error Diffusion .....................................................................................6-36
IPU Board Test ...................................................................................6-36
6.5 IMAGE DATA PATH................................................................................6-37
Copier Application...............................................................................6-37
Printer Application...............................................................................6-37
Scanner Application (1 bit/8 bits) ........................................................6-37
Fax Application (Transmission/Reception)..........................................6-37
6.6 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-38
6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-38
6.6.2 OPTICAL PATH..............................................................................6-39
6.6.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR ........................................6-40
Overview.............................................................................................6-40
Main Scan Start Detection ..................................................................6-40
Clock Frequency Adjustment ..............................................................6-40
6.6.4 DUAL BEAM WRITING ..................................................................6-41
Dual Beam Mechanism.......................................................................6-41
Laser Beam Pitch Change Mechanism...............................................6-41
Printing Mode and Black LD Unit Position ..........................................6-42
6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH .....................................................................6-43
Front and Upper Left Cover Switch.....................................................6-43
Error Messages ..................................................................................6-44
6.6.6 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ..............................6-45
Overview.............................................................................................6-45
Summary of Each Adjustment ............................................................6-46
Adjustment Conditions ........................................................................6-47
Main Scan Skew Adjustment ..............................................................6-48
6.6.7 DIFFERENCES IN THE COPY AND PRINTER MODES ...............6-48
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT ...................................................................6-49
6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-49
6.7.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-50
6.7.3 DRUM GEAR POSITION SENSORS .............................................6-51
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-51
Initialization Process and SC Codes ...................................................6-52
6.7.4 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING .............................................6-53
6.7.5 DRUM CLEANING..........................................................................6-54
6.7.6 WASTE TONER COLLECTION .....................................................6-55
Waste Toner Path ...............................................................................6-55
Waste Toner Vibrator..........................................................................6-56
6.7.7 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION ...............................6-57
SM
ix
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.8 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-58
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-58
6.8.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-59
6.8.3 DEVELOPER AGITATION .............................................................6-60
6.8.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ...................................................................6-61
6.8.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM .....................................................6-62
Overview.............................................................................................6-62
Toner Agitation and Attraction ............................................................6-62
Air Flow and Toner Flow .....................................................................6-63
Toner Near End Detection ..................................................................6-63
Toner Transport ..................................................................................6-64
6.8.6 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION ...............................................6-65
6.9 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................6-66
6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-66
6.9.2 DRIVE TRAY 1, TRAY 2, AND BY-PASS TRAY .........................6-67
6.9.3 PAPER LIFT TRAYS 1 & 2..........................................................6-68
6.9.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION TRAYS 1 & 2....................................6-69
6.9.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION TRAYS 1 & 2 ..............................6-70
6.9.6 PAPER END DETECTION TRAYS 1 & 2 ....................................6-70
6.9.7 REGISTRATION.............................................................................6-71
6.9.8 PAPER FEED LINE SPEED...........................................................6-72
6.9.9 GRIP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM .......................................6-73
6.10 DUPLEX UNIT.......................................................................................6-74
6.10.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-74
6.10.2 DUPLEX OPERATION .................................................................6-75
Up to A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF ............................................................6-75
Larger than A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF...................................................6-75
6.10.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT...........................................................6-76
6.10.4 FEED TO EXTERNAL EXIT TRAY (NON-DUPLEX MODE) ........6-77
6.10.5 FEED TO DUPLEX FEED UNIT ...................................................6-78
6.10.6 FEED TO TWO-TRAY FINISHER AND BOOKLET FINISHER ....6-79
With Optional One-Tray Paper Feed Unit ...........................................6-79
With Optional LCT or Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit ...............................6-79
6.10.7 DUPLEX FEED UNIT ...................................................................6-80
Drive ...................................................................................................6-80
Feed-in and feed-out...........................................................................6-80
6.11 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION .................................6-81
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-81
6.11.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE ............................................................6-82
Drive Motor .........................................................................................6-82
Transfer belt speed control .................................................................6-83
Transfer belt mark sensor ...................................................................6-84
6.11.3 TRANSFER CURRENT................................................................6-85
6.11.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING .....................................................6-86
6.11.5 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT ......................................................6-87
Mechanism .........................................................................................6-87
Transfer Belt Sensor ...........................................................................6-88
Copier ACS.........................................................................................6-88
Printer ACS.........................................................................................6-89
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.12 FUSING .................................................................................................6-90
6.12.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-90
6.12.2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE...................................................................6-91
Belt and Rollers ..................................................................................6-91
Fusing Clutch......................................................................................6-91
6.12.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL..........................................6-92
Fusing Temperatures..........................................................................6-92
Temperature Corrections ....................................................................6-93
Overheat Protection ............................................................................6-93
6.12.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES ...........................................................6-94
Overview.............................................................................................6-94
Panel Off Mode ...................................................................................6-95
Auto Off Mode.....................................................................................6-96
6.13 PAPER EXIT .........................................................................................6-97
6.13.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-97
6.13.2 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION ..............................................6-98
6.14 PRINTER FUNCTIONS .........................................................................6-99
6.14.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-99
6.14.2 HARD DISK ................................................................................6-101
Overview...........................................................................................6-101
Data Transfer....................................................................................6-101
6.14.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING .....................................................6-102
RPCS Driver .....................................................................................6-102
PCL5e/PCL6c Driver.........................................................................6-102
PS3 Driver ........................................................................................6-103
CMS (Color Management System) ...................................................6-103
Gray Correction ................................................................................6-103
BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)..........................6-103
Gamma Correction............................................................................6-103
Toner Limitation ................................................................................6-104
Dither Processing and ROP/RIP .......................................................6-104
6.14.4 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS .....................................................6-105
Sample Print .....................................................................................6-105
Locked Print......................................................................................6-105
6.14.5 JOB SPOOLING .........................................................................6-106
Related SP Modes ............................................................................6-106
Paper Source Selection ....................................................................6-107
Auto Continue ...................................................................................6-108
Paper Output Tray ............................................................................6-109
Stapling.............................................................................................6-109
Punching...........................................................................................6-110
6.15 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)...................................................6-111
6.16 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ....................................6-112
6.16.1 AUTO ERASE MEMORY ...........................................................6-112
Types of Data Overwritten and Not Overwritten ...............................6-112
Overwrite timing ................................................................................6-112
SM
xi
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. 7-1
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................7-1
1.1 BASIC..................................................................................................7-1
1.2 PRINTER.............................................................................................7-4
1.3 SCANNER ...........................................................................................7-5
2. SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES......................................................................7-6
2.1 PAPER FEED......................................................................................7-6
2.2 PAPER EXIT .......................................................................................7-7
PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ....................................7-8
3. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES .....................................................................7-9
3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS ............................................................................7-9
3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE ........................................................................7-10
SCANNER ..........................................................................................7-10
Scanner Drivers ..................................................................................7-10
Scanner Utilities ..................................................................................7-10
4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION ...................................................................7-11
5. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ..........................................................................7-13
5.1 ARDF.................................................................................................7-13
5.2 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT .......................................................7-14
5.3 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT ......................................................7-14
5.4 2000-SHEET LARGE CAPACITY TRAY ...........................................7-14
5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER & PUNCH UNIT ...........................................7-15
5.6 BOOKLET FINISHER ........................................................................7-16
5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY ..............................................................7-16
5.8 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION...............................................7-17
PUNCH KIT B377

SEE SECTION B377 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED B598

TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600

ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601

B202/B178/B180
xii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOOKLET FINISHER B602

FAX OPTION TYPE 3245 B712

SM
xiii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
4. The copier drives some of its components when it completes the warm-up
period. Be careful to keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical
components as the copier starts operation.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS
Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by
accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Immediately wash eyes with
plenty of water. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS
The copier and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer service
representative who has completed the training course on those models.
CAUTION
1. The NVRAM module installed on the controller has a lithium battery which
can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an
identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM.
Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in
accordance with local regulations.
2. The optional fax and memory expansion units contain lithium batteries, which
can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace only with the same or an
equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Do not recharge or burn
the batteries. Used batteries must be handled in accordance with local
regulations.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly
when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, the maintenance unit which includes developer or the
organic photoconductor in accordance with local regulations. (These are
non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not
put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired
in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all
chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of
the optical subsystem is required.
WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Optics Housing Unit section. Laser
beams can seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
CAUTION- CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION
WHEN OPEN
AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
VORSICHT- LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B
WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN
CAUTION
VORSICHT

WHEN OPEN
>PS<
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CAUTION
VORSICHT
>PS<
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved
with those marks.
Symbols and Abbreviations

This manual uses several symbols.
Symbol

What it means
Refer to section number
See Core Tech Manual for details
Screw
Connector
E-ring
Clip ring
Short Edge Feed (SEF)
Long Edge Feed (LEF)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED B598

TROUBLESHOOTING
PUNCH KIT B377
SPECIFICATIONS
TAB
POSITION 8
TAB
POSITION 7
TAB
POSITION 6
TAB
POSITION 5
SERVICE TABLES
TAB
POSITION 2
TAB
POSITION 3
B712 FAX OPTION TYPE 3245
TAB
POSITION 4
INSTALLATION
TAB
POSITION 1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Installation
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
Ambient Humidity (%RH)
80%
70%
Recommended conditions:
15 to 25C
30 to 70 %RH
54%
30%
15%
B178I901.WMF
10C
15C
30C 32C
1. Temperature Range:
10C to 32C (50F to 89.6F)
2. Humidity Range:
15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination:
Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)
4. Ventilation:
3 times/hr/person or more
5. Do not exposed the machine to the following:

1) Cool air from an air conditioner
2) Heat from a heater
6. Do not install the machine in areas that are exposed to corrosive gas.
7. Install the machine at locations lower than 2,500 m (8,200 ft.) above sea level.
8. Install the machine on a strong, level base. (Inclination on any side must be no
more than 5 mm.)
9. Do not install the machine in areas that get strong vibrations.
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")
Right to left:
SM
Within 5 mm (0.2")
1-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT

Install the machine near the power source, with the clearance as shown.
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B178I902.WMF
A: Over 100 mm (3.9")

B: Over 100 mm (3.9")
C: Over 550 mm (22")
D: Over 75 mm (3.0")
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
1. Insert the plug firmly in the outlet.
2. Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord.
3. Ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 10 A
220 V ~ 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 6 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10 %
3. Do not put things on the power cord.
B202/B178/B180
1-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS

1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Options
1-tray paper feed unit
2-tray paper feed unit
Large capacity tray
Platen cover
ARDF
Multi-bin output tray
Two-tray finisher
Punch kit (3 types)
Booklet finisher
Punch unit (4 types)
Scanner accessibility option
Remarks
One from the three
One from the two
One from No. 6, No. 7, and No. 9
No. 7 required; One of the three types
No. 9 required; One of the four types
Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)
1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS

No.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Options
Remarks
IEEE 1394
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 1284
Bluetooth
PostScript 3
File Format Converter
Data overwrite security unit
One from the four
Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)
SM
1-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER
1.3 COPIER
1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS
CAUTION
Rating voltage for peripherals.
Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
1. ARDF
Rating voltage output
connector for accessory
Max. DC24V
2. Duplex unit
Max. DC24V
3. Finisher
Max. DC24V
B178I903.WMF
B202/B178/B180
1-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPIER
Installation
1.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

This flow chart shows the installation procedures.
Start
A
Unpack the copier.
Scanner accessbility option
The paper feed
unit or LCT installed?
Yes
Install the scanner accessbility option.
Yes
No
Place the copier on the paper feed unit or

LCT, and install it.
Install the copier.

No
Select the language.
The controller options installed?

Set the date and time.
Yes
Install the controller options.
Perform ACC.
No
Install the platen cover or ARDF.
Check magnification and registration.

The two-tray finisher
or booklet finisher installed?
Adjust the operation panel display if
necessary.
Yes
Specify the settings relevant to the

contract (see section 1.4.1).
The punch unit installed?
Yes
End
Install the punch unit.

No
No
Install the finisher.
A
B178I904.WMF
You need the optional paper tray unit or the LCT if you want to install the finisher.
A punch unit is for to the two-tray finisher or the booklet finisher.
SM
1-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
MACHINE INSTALLATION
1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION

1.4.1 COPIER
CAUTION
Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position before you move
the machine. Otherwise, the transfer belt and the black PCU can be
damaged.
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Description
Qty
1. Operating InstructionsSystem Setting................................1

2. Operating ManualCopy Reference ....................................1
3. Operating ManualPrinter Reference ..................................1
4. CD-ROMPrinter/Scanner Driver.........................................1
5. CD-ROMOperating Instructions .........................................1
6. Ferrite Core .........................................................................1
7. Paper Size Decal .................................................................1
8. Model Name Decal ..............................................................1
9. Operation Panel Indication Decal ........................................1
10. Energy Star Sticker............................................................1
11. DecalInkjet Caution..........................................................1
12. DecalCopy Prohibition .....................................................1
14. External Tray .....................................................................1
15. Power Cord........................................................................1
16. TonerBlack ......................................................................1
17. TonerMagenta .................................................................1
18. TonerCyan .......................................................................1
19. TonerYellow.....................................................................1
20. Exposure Glass Cleaning Cloth .........................................1
21. Cloth Holder.......................................................................1
22. NECR ................................................................................1
B202/B178/B180
1-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation Procedure
CAUTION
Remove the tape from the development units (see step 2) before you turn
the main switch on. The development units can be severely damaged if you
do not remove the tape.
Put the copier on the paper tray unit or the LCT first if you will install an optional
paper tray unit or the optional LCT at the same time. Then install the copier and
other options.
NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine. You may need
them in the future if you transport the machine to another location.
[A]
B178I502.WMF
B178I501.WMF
1. Remove the tape and padding on the copier.

2. Remove the pin [A].
NOTE: Keep the pin. You may need it if you want to transport the machine
( 1.4.3).
3. Remove all tapes from the four development units.
4. Turn the transfer belt release lever clockwise.
SM
1-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
Installation
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
5. Shake the toner cartridge five or six

times.
6. Install the toner cartridges to the copier.
7. Check that the hooks [A] hold the
cartridge correctly.
B178I506.WMF
[B]
8. Install the external tray [B].
B178I507.WMF
9. Attach the cloth holder [C] to the left side of the

scanner unit.
10. Put the contract glass cleaning cloth [D] in the
holder.
[D]
[C]
B178I508.WMF
B202/B178/B180
1-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
11. Attach the duplex inverter guide [A].

12. Attach the guide cover [B].
[B]
[A]
B178I509.WMF
13. Attach the correct model name decal [C] to the

front cover with the cover [D].
14. Pull each paper tray out. Then adjust the side
guides and end guide to match the paper size.
NOTE: To move the side guides, first pull out
the tray fully. Then push down the
green lock at the rear inside the tray.
15. Attach the correct paper tray number decals
[E] to the paper trays.
[C]
[D]
NOTE: Paper tray number decals are also

used for the optional paper tray or the
optional LCT. Keep these decals for
use with these optional units.
B178I510.WMF
16. Install the optional ARDF or the optional platen

cover.
[E]
[F]
17. Plug in the machine.

18. Make sure that the platen or ARDF
is closed and the main power is
turned off.
19. Check if the mark on the breaker
switch [F] appears. It means the
breaker switch has been turned on.
20. Press the test button [G] of the
breaker. This turns off the breaker
switch (switching from right to the
center position).
SM
[G]
B178R016.WMF
1-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMPORTANT
If the breaker switch does not move to the center position:
Make sure that the power cord of the copier is securely connected to the
power supply.
Push the test button again. If the breaker switch does not move to the center
position, replace the breaker switch.
21. Check that the breaker switch is turned off and mark appears on the switch.
22. Turn the breaker switch to the right position first. Then turn it to the On
position (left position).
23. Turn the main power switch on. The machine automatically starts the
initialization procedure. The Start button LED () turns green when this
procedure has finished.
NOTE: The machine makes a sound that is not the same as other machines in
the field. This is normal and there are no defective parts in the machine.
This sound is made by the drum drive motor.
24. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes).
25. Do the Automatic Color Calibration process (ACC) as follows:
1) Print the ACC test pattern (UP mode > Maintenance > ACC > Start).
2) Put the printout on the exposure glass.
3) Put 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart.
4) Close the ARDF or the platen cover.
5) Press Start Scanning on the LCD panel. The machine starts the ACC.
26. Check that the sample image has been copied normally.
27. Check that the circuit breaker works correctly.
B202/B178/B180
1-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Settings Relevant to Contract

Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has
made a service contract.
NOTE: You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in
accordance with the contract ( SP5-045-001).
Item
Counting
method
SP No.
SP5-045-001
/11" x 17"
double
counting
SP5-104-001
(Special Service
Program)
Service Tel.
No. Setting
SM
SP5-812-001
through 004
Function
Specifies if the counting method used in
meter charge mode is based on
developments or prints.
NOTE: You can set this one time only.
You cannot change the setting
after you have set it for the first
time.
Specifies whether the counter is
doubled for 11" x 17" paper.
NOTE: When you change this setting,
contact your supervisor.
Programs the service station fax
number.
The number is printed on the counter
list when the meter charge mode is
selected. This lets the user fax the
counter data to the service station.
1-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Default
0:
Developments
No: Single
counting
B202/B178/B180/
Installation
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.4.2 MOVING MACHINE
CAUTION
Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position before moving the
machine, otherwise the transfer belt and the black PCU may be damaged.
This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to
another floor. See section 1.4.3, Transporting Machine if you will use some
transport equipment.
The machine stands make it difficult to move the copier with an optional paper tray
or LCT installed. You can remove them as necessary.
1. Check that the transfer belt is in its
correct position.
2. Remove all trays from the optional
paper feed unit or LCT.
3. Remove the front stand [A]
( x 2).
[A]
B178I511.WMF
4. Remove the rear stand [B]

( x 2, 2 brackets).
[B]
B178I512.WMF
CAUTION: Reinstall the machine stands after you move the machine. The
machine can fall over when you pull out a paper tray or when you work
on the machine if you do not do this.
B202/B178/B180
1-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.4.3 TRANSPORTING MACHINE
CAUTION
Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position before you move
the machine. Otherwise, the transfer belt and the black PCU can be
damaged.
1. Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position.
2. Remove the machine stands ( 1.4.2)
3. Remove the toner cartridges. This does not let toner flow into the toner supply
tube caused by vibrations at the time of transport. This can also cause the tube
to be clogged with toner.
4. Put air packing into the toner cartridge holder to shield the toner supply
entrance. This does not let toner flow out to the toner cartridge holder.
5. Set the lock pin [A] (which comes
with the machine) in the transfer belt
unit.
NOTE: The lower end of the transfer
belt moves. The surfaces of
the belt and PCU can be
damaged by the friction
between them if you
transport the machine
without locking the belt.
[A]
6. Make sure there is no paper left in

the paper trays. Then fix down the
bottom plates with a sheet of paper
and tape.
B178I513.WMF
7. Empty out the waste toner bottle.

Then attach securing tape to not let
the toner bottle come out.
8. Turn the release lever [B]
counterclockwise to its lowermost
position. (The lever does not stay in
this position if you do not hold it.) Stick
[B]
the lever in this position with tape.
NOTE: The release lever lifts the
transfer belt up and presses it
against the black PCU. The
surfaces of the belt and PCU
B178I514.WMF
may be damaged by the
friction between them if you transport the machine with the two units in
this position.
SM
1-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
Installation
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
9. Do one of the following:

Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.
NOTE: 1) Make sure you do the Auto Adjust (User Program mode) or forced Line
Position Adjustment (SP5-993-002 after you move the machine. This
optimizes color line alignment.
2) Make sure that the side fences in the trays are correctly positioned to
prevent color shifting.
B202/B178/B180
1-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5 OPTIONAL UNIT

1.5.1 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT
Accessory Check
Description
Qty
1. Securing Bracket ................................................................1

2. Right Stand Bracket ............................................................1
3. Left Stand Bracket ..............................................................1
4. Front Stand..........................................................................1
5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1
6. Screw M4 x 10 .....................................................................4
7. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2
B601I929.WMF
SM
1-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
CAUTION
1. Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before
you start the installation procedure.
2. You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly
unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or
property damage.
3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and
grips can be damaged.
1. Remove all tape on the paper tray

unit.
B601I919.WMF
2. Remove the paper tray. Then

remove all tape and padding.
3. Install the front stand [A] ( x 2).
[A]
B601I103.WMF
B202/B178/B180
1-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
4. Install the rear stand [A].

5. Attach the stand brackets [B][C]
( x 1 for each).
[B]
[A]
[C]
B601I921.WMF
[E]
6. Grasp the handle [D] and grips [E] of

the copier.
7. Lift the copier and install it on the
paper feed unit [F].
[D]
[F]
B601I007.WMF
SM
1-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
8. Remove tray 2 of the copier.

9. Fasten the knob screw [A].
10. Install tray 2.
[A]
B601I005.WMF
[B]
11. Open the right cover.

12. Install the link bracket [B]
(1 knob screw).
B601I923.WMF
13. Turn on the main switch.

14. Check the machine's operation and copy quality.
B202/B178/B180
1-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.2 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

Accessory Check
Description
Qty

4. Front Stand..........................................................................1
5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1
6. Screw M4 x 10 .....................................................................4
7. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2
B598I929.WMF
SM
1-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
CAUTION
property damage.
3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and
grips may be damaged.
1. Remove all tape on the paper tray

unit.
B598I002.WMF
2. Remove the paper trays. Then

remove all tape and padding.
3. Install the front stand [A] ( x 2).
[A]
B202/B178/B180
1-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B598I103.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT

( x 1 for each).
[B]
[A]
[C]
B598I901.WMF
[E]

the copier.
7. Lift the copier and install it on the
paper feed unit [F].
[D]
[F]
B598I005.WMF
SM
1-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT

10. Install tray 2.
[A]
B598I904.WMF
[B]

(1 knob screw).
B598I903.WMF

B202/B178/B180
1-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.3 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY

Accessory Check
Description
Qty

4. Front Stand..........................................................................1
5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1
6. Screw M 4 x 10 ....................................................................4
7. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2
B600I929.WMF
SM
1-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
CAUTION
property damage.
3. Do not lift the copier with the LCT installed. The handle and grips may be
damaged.
1. Remove all tape.
B600I002.WMF
[A]
2. Press the stopper [A]. Then pull out
the tray [B].
3. Install the front stand [C] ( x 2).
[B]
[C]
B202/B178/B180
1-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600I004.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT

( x 1 for each).
[B]
[A]
[C]
B600I901.WMF

the copier.
[E]
7. Lift the copier and install it on the LCT

[F].
[D]
[F]
B600I903.WMF
SM
1-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT

10. Install tray 2.
[A]
B600I904.WMF
[B]

(1 knob screw).
B600I918.WMF

B202/B178/B180
1-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.4 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER

Accessory Check
Description
Qty
1. Left stopper bracket .............................................................1

2. Right stopper bracket...........................................................1
3. Knob screw..........................................................................4
4. Stud screw...........................................................................2
5. Screw M4 x 10.....................................................................2
6. Decal ...................................................................................1
7. Decal ...................................................................................1
1
2
3
4
5
7
B714I501.WMF
CAUTION
Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before
1. Unpack the ARDF, and then remove all
tapes and shipping retainers.
B714I502.WMF
SM
1-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
[B]
[C]
[F]
B714I503.WMF
[A]
B714I504.WMF
2. Attach and tighten [A] ( x 2 stud).
[D]
[E]
3. Mount the ADF. To do this, align the screw keyholes [B] of the ARDF support
plate over the stud screws, and then slide the ARDF toward the front of the
machine.
NOTE: To avoid damaging the ADF, hold it as shown above.
4. Secure the ARDF [C] ( x 2).
5. Attach the left [D] and right [E] stopper brackets ( x 2 knob).
6. Connect the I/F cable [F] ( x 1) to the main machine.
B202/B178/B180
1-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
[C]
[A]
[B]
B714I505.WMF
B714I506.WMF
7. Peel off the platen sheet [A] and place it

on the exposure glass [B].
8. Align the rear left corner (of the platen
sheet) flush against the corner [C] on
the exposure glass.
[E]
9. Close the ARDF.

10. Open the ARDF and check that the
platen sheet is correctly attached.
11. Attach the decal [D]. Select the most
suitable language for the installed
machine. Attach the decal to the cover.
The arrow on the decal must align with
the groove [E] on the left scale as
shown.
12. Attach the decal [F] to the top cover as
shown. Select the most suitable
language for the installed machine.
[D]
B714I507.WMF
[F]
13. Turn the main switch on, and check

the operation.
14. Make a full size copy, and check that
the registrations (side-to-side and
leading edge) and image skew are
correct. If they are not, adjust the
registrations and image skew with the
SP mode.
SM
1-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B714I508.WMF
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER

Accessory Check
Description
Qty
1. Duplex-unit support .............................................................1

2. Tray .....................................................................................2
3. Link rail ................................................................................1
4. Link-rail holder .....................................................................1
5. Long M4 x 12.......................................................................6
6. Short M4 x 8 ........................................................................2
1
5
6
4
B599I926.WMF
CAUTION
Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before
1. Remove all tape. Check that no tape remains inside

the front cover and on the left cover.
2. Fold the external tray [A].
[A]
B599I901.WMF
B202/B178/B180
1-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
3. Set the link rail [A] on the link-rail

holder [B].
4. Install the link-rail holder (with the
link rail) to the copier [C] (Long screw
x 2).
[C]
[B]
[A]
B599I906.WMF
5. Install the duplex-unit support [D] to

the copier (Long screw x 3).
[D]
B599I907.WMF
SM
1-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
6. Adjust the position of the connection

bracket [A] as necessary ( x 2):
Upper position for the copier with the
two-tray paper feed unit or LCT.
Lower position for the copier with the
one-tray paper feed unit.
[A]
7. Connect the finisher [B] with the copier

(Long screw x 1).
B599I908.WMF
[B]
8. Connect the finisher cable to the

connector of the copier.
B599I902.WMF
9. Install the two trays [C] (Short screw x 1

for each).
[C]
10. Extend the external tray of the copier

(see step 2).
11. Turn the main switch on and check the
operation.
B599I910.WMF
B202/B178/B180
1-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.6 PUNCH UNIT

Accessory Check
Description
Qty
1. Punch unit............................................................................1
2. Sensor arm ..........................................................................1
3. Spring ..................................................................................1
4. Screw M3 x 6 .......................................................................2
5. Step screw...........................................................................2
6. Hopper.................................................................................1
7. Spacer (2 mm) .....................................................................1
8. Spacer (1 mm) .....................................................................2
3
8
4
B178I515.WMF
SM
1-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
CAUTION
Switch off the main machine and unplug the power cord. If the two-tray
finisher has been installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.
[A]
[C]
[B]
B178I516.WMF
B178I517.WMF
1. Unpack the punch unit. Then remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
2. Open the front door and remove the rear cover [A] ( x 4).
3. Remove the bracket [B] ( x 2) and paper guide [C] (stepped x 1).
B202/B178/B180
1-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
[B]
[A]
[C]
B178I518.WMF
[E]
B178I519.WMF
[D]
4. Remove the hopper cover [A] ( x 2).

5. Install the sensor bracket [B] (stepped x 1).
6. Install the spring [C].
7. Install the 2 mm spacer [D].
8. Install the punch unit [E] ( x 2, stepped x 1).
SM
1-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
[A]
B178I520.WMF
[C]
[B]
B178I521.WMF
9. Connect the harnesses [A] and clamp them as shown.

10. Slide in the hopper [B].
11. Fasten the two 1-mm spacers [C] to the rear frame for future adjustment.
NOTE: The spacers are used to adjust the horizontal positioning of the punch
holes.
12. Reassemble the finisher. Then check the punch operation.
B202/B178/B180
1-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY

Accessories Check List
Description
Qty
1. Front Tray Holder.................................................................1

2. Rear Tray Holder .................................................................1
3. Tray .....................................................................................2
4. Screw (M3 x 14)...................................................................4
5. Discharge Brush ..................................................................2
6. Ground Plate for Left Cover.................................................1
7. Ground Plate for Upper Exit.................................................1
8. Ground Plate for Lower Exit.................................................1
B178I522.WMF
SM
1-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installing the Multi-Bin Output Tray

NOTE: Install the duplex unit before you install the multi-bin output tray.
1. Open the left cover [A] of the duplex

unit.
[D]
[E]
2. Install the ground plate [B] behind the

magnet.
3. Install the ground plate [C] on the rear
of the left cover.
[A]
4. Attach the ground plate to the top

cover. Then align the bottom edges of
the plate [D] and cover [E].
[C]
[B]
B178I523.WMF
5. Attach the discharge brushes [F][G] to

the upper edges of the paper exits.
Make sure that the ends of the brushes
[H][I] touch the ground plates [C][D]
respectively.
NOTE: Make sure the brushes do not
stop paper at the exits.
[H]
[F]
[I]
6. Install the front [A] and rear [B] tray
holders on the top cover ( x 2 for
each).
[G]
[A]
B178I524.WMF
[C]
7. Install the upper [C] and lower [D]

trays.
8. Turn the main switch on. Then select
the SP mode menu, SP69011. Then
change the multi-bin output tray
setting.
[B]
NOTE: The multi-bin output tray is not
automatically recognized by the
B178I525.WMF
printer mainframe. You cannot
[D]
use the multi-bin output tray until you have changed this SP mode setting.
B202/B178/B180
1-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.8 BOOKLET FINISHER

Accessory Check
Description
Qty
1. Regular tray .........................................................................1
2. Rail holder ...........................................................................1
3. Magnet catchrear...............................................................1
4. Magnet catchfront ..............................................................1
5. Duplex-unit support .............................................................1
6. Rail joint...............................................................................1
7. Screw M4 x 12.....................................................................6
8. Screw M4 x 6.......................................................................8
9. Screw M3 x 14.....................................................................4
10. Rail ....................................................................................1
11. Stapler unit ........................................................................1
12. Staple cartridge .................................................................1
13. Pad ....................................................................................3
1
5
10
6
7
8
11
B602I912.WMF
13
12
NOTE: Make sure that you keep the pads. The pads are white and made of
Styrofoam.
SM
1-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Adjusting the Height
[B]
[D]
[A]
[C]
B602I901.WMF
B602I008.WMF
1. Check the optional paper tray type:

Go to step 2 if the optional two-tray paper feed unit or the optional LCT is
installed.
Go to Main Body. if either of them is not installed.
2. Tape the pads [A] to the right-hand side of the machine.
3. Lay the machine on its right-hand side.
4. Remove the adjuster plates [B] ( x 2).
5. Change the height [C].
6. Reinstall the adjuster plates [D] ( x 2).
7. Take the machine out of the box and stand it up.
8. Check that the height is correct. Then remove the pads.
B202/B178/B180
1-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
Main Body
1. Remove all tape and padding.
B602I001.WMF
2. Remove the screw cover [A].

3. Install the rail joint [B] ( x 4).
4. Reinstall the screw cover.
[A]
[B]
B602I902.WMF
5. Install the regular tray [C] ( x 4).

[C]
B602I903.WMF
SM
1-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
6. Install the magnet catches [A][B]

( x 2 for each).
7. Install the duplex-unit support [C] ( x 3). [A]
[C]
[B]
B602I004.WMF
8. Set the rail [D] through the rail holder [E].

9. Install the rail holder (with the rail) to the
copier ( x 2).
[D]
B202/B178/B180
[E]
1-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602I904.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
10. Connect the booklet finisher unit to

the copier ( x 1).
B602I905.WMF
11. Install the stapler unit [A].
[A]
B602I907.WMF
12. Turn the knob [B] clockwise until the

staple-cartridge holder [C] goes to the
front-most position.
13. Install the staple cartridge [D] firmly to
the staple-cartridge holder.
[B]
[C]
[D]
B602I908.WMF
14. Turn on the main switch and check the operation.
SM
1-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Optional Punch Unit

Description
Qty
1. Punch unit............................................................................1
2. Decal ...................................................................................1
3. Screw M4 x 6 (with the base) ..............................................1
4. Cable ...................................................................................2
2
3
4
B602I512.WMF
1. Remove the front lower cover

[A] ( x 2).
[A]
B602I009.WMF
B202/B178/B180
1-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
[E]
[F]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B602I513.WMF
2. Remove the joint guard [A] ( x 2).

3. Open the front door [B].
4. Release the stopper and remove the knob [C].
5. Remove the front cover [D] ( x 2).
6. Remove the rear cover [E] ( x 3).
NOTE: Do not damage the mylar when you remove the screw.
7. Remove the right top cover with the paper entrance cover [F] ( x 4).
SM
1-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
[A]
8. Remove the right top cover [A] from

the paper entrance cover [B].
[B]
B602I514.WMF
9. Install the punch unit [C] ( x 2,

1 screw with the base [D])
[D]
[C]
10. Install the right top cover [E] ( x 2).
B602I515.WMF
[E]
B602I516.WMF
B202/B178/B180
1-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B602I517.WMF
11. Install the cable to the connectors as follows:

J1003 (punch unit) [A] to CN12 (booklet finisher unit) [D]
J1004 (punch unit) [B] to CN14 (booklet finisher unit) [C]
[F]
[E]
B602I518.WMF
B602I911.WMF
12. Fasten the cable with the clamps.

13. Reassemble the booklet finisher unit.
NOTE: Check that the side guide and the front cover correctly join with each
other [E].
14. Attach the decal [F].
15. Turn on the main switch. Then check the punch operation.
SM
1-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
1.5.9 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION

Machine Level
Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")/ 5
Right to left:
Within 5 mm (0.2")/ 5
Location Requirement
Put the scanner on the right side of the mainframe as shown.
NOTE: 1) Make sure that the scanner is placed 660~724 mm above the floor.
2) Make sure that the scanner cable does not touch the floor.
3) Make sure to tell the user not to let the scanner cable get caught in
things such as a wheelchair.
G570I311.WMF
Requirement Conditions
Attach the platen cover option to the mainframe to cover the exposure glass.
Install the scanner on a solid base. Do not install the scanner in areas where the
unit can fall down when the ADF cover is opened.
Make sure you install the unit in areas that let the user get easy access to operate
the unit. Ask the customer what their requirements are before you install the unit.
B202/B178/B180
1-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ACCESSARY CHECK
1. Exposure Glass Cleaner Holder..................................................... 1
2. Exposure Glass Cleaner ................................................................ 1
3. M3 x 6 screw.................................................................................. 12
4. M3 x 8 screw.................................................................................. 1
5. Ground screw................................................................................. 1
6. Core ............................................................................................... 2
7. Left support .................................................................................... 1
8. Right stay ....................................................................................... 1
9. Bracket........................................................................................... 1
1
8
G570I300.WMF
SM
1-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: This installation procedure uses the following symbols.
: Screws
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before you do the following procedure.
1. Remove the all tapes.

2. Remove rear cover [A] ( x 5).
[A]
G570I301.WMF
3. Remove the ground cable [B]

( x 2).
4. Remove the duct [C]
( x 2, x 1).
[C]
[B]
G570I302.WMF
B202/B178/B180
1-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
G570I303.WMF
[E]
5. Remove the DF connector cable [A] ( x 2, x1).

NOTE: Keep these screws. You will use these screws later.
6. Remove the connector bracket [B].
7. Disconnect the connector [C] of the IPU harness and release the clamp [D].
8. Remove the core [E] from the I/F cable.
NOTE: Keep this core. You will use this core later.
[L]
[G]
[K]
[F]
[J]
[H]
[I]
G570I304.WMF
9. Disconnect the I/F cable [F] from the IPU ( x 2). Then put it behind the ground
bracket [G] and to the left side.
10. Disconnect the harness [H] from the scanner unit to the scanner PSU ( x 3,
x 1). Then put this harness inside the scanner frame.
11. Connect the connector of the DF connector cable [I] to the scanner PSU.
12. Bind the IPU harness [J] and DF connector cable [I] with the clamp [K]. Keep
these in the machine.
13. Attach the connector bracket [L] to the scanner PSU to keep this bracket.
SM
1-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
G570I305.WMF
14. Disconnect the PSU cable connector [A].

15. Detach the scanner PSU with bracket [B] ( x4). Then slide it to the right
slightly.
16. Attach the bracket [C] ( x 5).
NOTE: Use the two screws [D], which are removed in step 5.
17. Attach the scanner PSU with the bracket again ( x 4).
[F]
[E]
G570I306.WMF
18. Attach the right support [E] ( x 2).

19. Attach the left support [F] ( x 2).
B202/B178/B180
1-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C]
G570I307.WMF
20. Put the I/F cable [A] through the opening on the frame. Then attach the core [B]
to the I/F cable.
21. Connect the I/F cable connector [C]. Then attach the cable holder [D] ( x 1)
and the ground [E] ( x 1) to the frame.
[F]
[I]
[H]
[G]
G570I308.WMF
22. Put the IPU cable [F] through the opening on the frame. Then attach the two
cores [G] to the IPU cable.
23. Connect the IPU cable connector [H] and attach the ground [I] ( x 1).
SM
1-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
G570I309.WMF
24. Connect the PSU cable connector [A] and attach the ground [B]
(ground screw x 1).
25. Attach the scanner bracket [C] to the supports ( x 3) and the ground [D] ( x
1).
26. Install the duct ( x 2, x 1) and ground cable ( x 2).
27. Cut the panel [E] along the cutout
line.
NOTE: File the edge of the cutout
line.
[F]
28. Make a hole [F] for a screw in the

rear cover with a screwdriver.
29. Attach the rear cover
(M3x8 screw x 6).
[E]
G570I310.WMF
B202/B178/B180
1-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
1.5.10 KEY COUNTER HOLDER

1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 5).
[A]
B178I542.WMF
[B]
2. Cut a 15-mm (0.6") piece [B] off the

tape.
NOTE: You do not need the
smaller piece for the
installation.
15 mm
(0.6")
B178I543.WMF
3. Remove the scanner right

cover [C] ( x 2).
[C]
4. Clean the area [D] with

alcohol.
5. Attach the tape.
[D]
B178I544.WMF
SM
1-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Rev. 09/2005
[A]
[D]
62 mm
(2.4")
[C]
[B]
B178I546.WMF
B178I545.WMF
The view from the back
The view from the top
6. Attach the key counter holder as follows.

The bottom end of the key counter holder [B] is 62 mm (2.4") below the
bottom end of the scanner right cover [A].
The bracket on the back of the key counter holder [C] is aligned to the rear
end of the scanner cover [D].
7.
The CN227 connector on the BCU has 8 pins. Pins # 1 to 4 are used for the
Key Counter, pins # 5 and 6 are used for the mechanical counter and pins # 7
and 8 are not used for US models. The intermediate harness [E] for the key
counter is connected to CN 227. The connector for this harness is located
inside the rear cover by the lower rear. (As shown in the illustration below).
Please connect the harness for Key Counter to this connector.
8. Reassemble the covers.
9.
Set SP 5-113-1 to 8.
[E]
B178I547.WMF
B202/B178/B180
1-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation

[A]
B178I542.WMF
[F]
2. Remove the scanner right cover [B]

( x 2).
[C]
3. Remove the rear scale [C] ( x 3).

4. Remove the exposure glass [D] with
[E]
the left scale [E] ( x 2).
[B]
NOTE: You do not have to remove the

ARDF exposure glass. Put the
glass marker [F] at the rear-left
corner when you reattach it if
the glass is removed.
[D]
B178I548.WMF
SM
1-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
5. Install the anti-condensation heater [A]

in the rear-left corner of the scanner
unit ( x 2).
[A]
6. Pass the cable through the opening

[B] in the rear.
B178I549.WMF
[B]
[D]
7. Attach the clamps [C] to the rear
frame.
8. Fasten the cable with the clamps.
[C]
9. Connect the connector [D].

10. Reassemble the copier.
B178I550.WMF
B202/B178/B180
1-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CAUTION
1. Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following
procedure.
2. After you cut the lower-most rectangular piece off the right-bottom
corner of the rear cover, file the edges to smooth them. Rough edges
can hurt the user. The user pushes the tray-heater switch through this
rectangular opening.

2. Cut the lower-most rectangular piece
[B] off the right-bottom corner (viewed
from the rear) of the rear cover.
[A]
3. File the edges to smooth them.

[B]
B178I565.WMF
4. Remove tray 1 and tray 2.
[D]
5. Swing out the high voltage supply

unit [C] ( x 2).
6. Release the cable [D] for the anticondensation heater ( x 2).
[C]
B178I566.WMF
SM
1-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
Installation
OPTIONAL UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
[C]
7. Align the caution decal [A] with the

mark [B] on the front of the heater [A]
cover [C]. Then attach the caution
decal at this location.
[B]
B178I555.WMF
8. Attach the anti-condensation heater [D]

( x 1).
9. Connect the anti-condensation heater
connector [E] to the connector [F] from
the sub PSU.
[D]
[F]
[E]
B178I567.WMF
10. Reassemble the copier. Then put tray 1

and tray 2 back into the machine.
11. Attach the anti-condensation heater decal [G].
[G]
B178I552.WMF
12. Attach the On/Stand by decal on the lefthand side of the main switch (not the tray
heater switch).
On
Stand by
B178I557.WMF
B202/B178/B180
1-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation

(SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION)
1. Remove the rear scale [A] ( x 3).
[A]
2. Remove the exposure glass [B] with

the left scale [C] ( x 2).
[C]
[B]
G570I351.WMF
3. Remove the rear cover [D] ( x 3).
[G]
[E]
4. Remove the right cover [E] ( x 3).

5. Remove the left cover [F] ( x 3).
6. Remove the rear frame [G]
( x 12, x 2).
[D]
[F]
G570I352.WMF
[H]
7. Install the anti-condensation heater [H]

in the rear-left corner of the scanner
unit ( x 2).
8. Pass the cable through the opening [I]
in the rear rail.
[I]
SM
1-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G570I353.WMF
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
G570I354.WMF
[E]
[F]
1
[G]
G570I355.WMF
9. Remove the cable opening cover [A] ( x 2).

NOTE: Keep these screws. You will use them later.
10. Attach the clamps [B] as shown.
11. Connect the heater connector [C] to the cable connector [D] and then bind the
cable with the clamps.
12. Attach the ground cable [E] to the frame ( x 1).
13. Attach the rear frame [F] ( x 12, x 1).
14. Attach the cable bracket [G] ( x 2).
NOTE: Use the screws that are removed in step 9.
15. Assemble the left, right, rear cover, exposure glass with left scale and rear
scale.
16. Remove the rear cover of the copier ( x 6).
B202/B178/B180
1-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OPTIONAL UNIT
Installation
[F]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[A]
[G]
G570I356.WMF
17. Remove the scanner bracket [A] of the scanner accessibility option ( x 4).
NOTE: If the scanner accessibility option has not been installed, do the
procedures for installing the scanner accessibility option ( 1.5.9)
before this step.
18. Remove the plate [B] in the scanner.
19. Put the cable [C] from the anti-condensation heater through the opening [D] of
the scanner bracket.
20. Connect the connector [E] of the cable to the connector [F] of the copier.
21. Attach the ground cable [G] ( x 1).
22. Attach the scanner bracket [A] ( x 4).
23. Attach the rear cover ( x 6).
SM
1-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
1.6 PRINTER OPTIONS

1.6.1 OVERVIEW
This machine has I/F card slots and SD card slots for optional I/F connections and
applications.
A
B
C
A
1
1
2
3
I/F Card Slot

Ethernet&USB(ver2.0)
File Format Converter
Option
SD Card Slot
Option
Option
Service
B C
B178I562.WMF
B178I561.WMF
I/F Card Slot

Slot A is used for the standard Ethernet and USB ver.2.0 only.
Slot B is used for the File Format Converter only.
Slot C is used for one of the optional I/F connections: (IEEE1394, IEEE1284,
IEEE802.11 (Wireless LAN) or Bluetooth).
SD Card Slot
Slot 1 is used for the standard printer/scanner application only.
Slot 2 is used for one of the optional applications such as postscript 3 or data
overwrite security.
Slot 3 is used for service only.
B202/B178/B180
1-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
Installation
1.6.2 POSTSCRIPT 3
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following
procedure.
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from SD Card

Slot ( x 1).
2. Turn the SD-card face [B] to the rear of
the machine. Then push it slowly into slot
2 until you hear a click.
3. Attach the slot cover ( x 1).
[A]
[B]
B178I532.WMF
4. Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 decal [C] to the

front cover.
[C]
B178I533.WMF
SM
1-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
1.6.3 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER
CAUTION
procedure.
[A]
[B]
B178I535.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot B [A] ( x 2).
2. Install the file format converter board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
B202/B178/B180
1-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
Installation
1.6.4 IEEE 1394 (FIREWIRE)

CAUTION
procedure.
[A]
[B]
B178I536.WMF
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth).
1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot C [A] ( x 2).
2. Install the FireWire board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
SM
1-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394

Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface
settings for IEEE 1394. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
1. Press the User Tools/Counter key.
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
3. Press Interface Settings.
4. Press IEEE1394.
5. Press following soft keys on the touch panel. Then set up the following settings:
IP Address
Set the IP Address and Subnet Mask.
IP over 1394
Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables IP over 1394
as the default setting for the printing method.
SCSI Print
Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables SCSI Print as
the default setting for the printing method.
Bi-directional SCSI Print
Switch bi-directional printing on or off for SCSI print.
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394

The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 1394.
SP No.
5839 004
Name
Host Name
5839 007
Cycle Master
5839 008
BCR Mode
5839 009
5839 010
IRM 1394a
Check
Unique ID
5839 011
Logout
5839 012
5839 013
Login
Login MAX
B202/B178/B180
Function
Sets the name of the device used on the network.
Example: RNPXXXXXXXXXX
Enables or disables cycle master function of the IEEE
1394 standard bus.
Sets the BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) setting for
the Auto Node operation for the standard IEEE1394 bus
for when IRM is not in use. The following three settings
are available: Standard, IRM Color Copy, and
Always Effective.
Determines whether an IRM check for IEEE 1394a is
conducted for the Auto Node when IRM is not used.
Enables the Node_Unique_Id setting for enumeration
on the standard IEEE 1394 bus.
Determines how successive initiator login requests are
handled during login in for SBP-2.
Enables or disables exclusive login for SBP-2.
Sets the limit for the number of logins for SBP-2. Range:
1 ~ 62.
1-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
Installation
1.6.5 IEEE 1284

CAUTION
procedure.
[A]
[B]
B178I537.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F Card Slot C ( x 2).
2. Install the interface board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
SM
1-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
1.6.6 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN)

CAUTION
procedure.
[A]
[B]
B178I538.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F Card Slot C ( x 2).
2. Install the wireless LAN board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
B202/B178/B180
1-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[C]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[F]
[A]
B178I539.WMF
3. If the extended antennas (option) are to be installed, pull off the edge connector
protector [A] and discard it.
4. Insert the card [B] into the PCMCIA slot. Make sure the card label faces to the
front of the machine.
5. Use the provided double-sided tape to install the antennas [C] on the left rear
corner of the machine.
NOTE: The antennas should be separated by at least 40 ~ 60 mm (1.5~2.5").
Always detach the antennas from the corners of the machine and
disconnect them before you move the machine.
6. Put the antennas through the hole in the cover [F].
7. Connect the antennas to the terminals [D].
8. Coil the cables [E]. Then hang them over the antennas as shown.
9. Attach the cover [F] ( x 2).
10. You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear.
Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of
equipment that generates strong magnetic fields.
Put the machine as close as possible to the access point.
SM
1-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
Installation
PRINTER OPTIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN

Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface
settings for IEEE 802.11b. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
NOTE: You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet.
1. Press the User Tools/Counter key.
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
NOTE: The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or
wireless LAN.
3. Select Interface Settings Network (tab) Network I/F Setting
4. Press IEEE 802.11b. Only the wireless LAN options show.
5. Communication Mode. Select either 802.11 Ad hoc, Ad hoc or
Infrastructure.
6. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
7. Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.
Range: 1 ~ 14 (default: 11)
NOTE: The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different
countries.
8. WEP (Encryption) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is
designed to protect wireless data transmission. The same WEP key is required
on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded data. There are 64 bit and 128
bit WEP keys.
WEP:
Selects Active or Inactive. (Inactive is default.)
Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit 10 characters
128 bit 26 characters
9. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to show more settings. Then
select the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps,
1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match the distance between the
closest machine or access point. This depends on which mode is selected.
NOTE: For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine and
the closest PC in the network. For the Infrastructure Mode, this is the
distance between the machine and the closest access point.
11 Mbps
5.5 Mbps
2 Mbps
1 Mbps
B202/B178/B180
140 m (153 yd.)

200 m (219 yd.)
270 m (295 yd.)
400 m (437 yd.)
1-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
Installation
10. Press Return to Default to initialize the wireless LAN settings.

Press Yes to initialize the following settings:
Transmission mode
Channel
Transmission Speed
WEP
SSID
WEP Key
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN

The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11b
SM
SP No.
5840 006
Name
Channel MAX
5840 007
Channel MIN
5840 011
UP mode
WEP Key Select

Name
SSID
WEP Key
WEP Mode
Function
Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the
country.
Sets the minimum range of the channels settings
allowed for your country.
Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
Function
Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
Used to show the maximum length of the string that can
be used for the WEP Key entry.
1-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180/
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
1.6.7 BLUETOOTH
CAUTION
procedure.
[A]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[B]
B178I540.WMF
1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot C [A] ( x 2).
2. Install the Bluetooth board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).
3. Insert the Bluetooth card [C] into the slot in the interface board.
4. Press the antenna [D] to extend it.
5. Attach the antenna cap [E].
B202/B178/B180
1-74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.6.8
DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
Before You Begin The Procedure

1. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:
z Supervisor login password
z Administrator login name
z Administrator login password
If any of these settings are at a factory default value, tell the customer these
settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure.
IMPORTANT NOTE
If the Customer forgets the Supervisor login password after changing it
from the default setting, a service call is required and the NVRAM must be
replaced to reset the Supervisor login and password.
2. Make sure that Admin. Authentication Machine Management is ON.
[System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication
Management] - [Machine Management]
If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the
installation procedure.
3. Make sure that under Machine Management Administrator Tools is enabled
(selected).
[System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication
Management] [Machine Management] - [Available Settings]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be
enabled (selected) before you do the installation procedure.
Accessory Check
The B202/B178/B180 uses a Type D Data Overwrite Security Unit. Check the
accessories and their quantities against this list:
Description
Qty
1. SD Card ............................................................................... 1
SM
1-75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Installation
PRINTER OPTIONS
Rev. 06/2006
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
Rev. 06/2006
Seal Check and Removal
[A]
B735I901.WMF
[B]
B735I903.WMF
1. Ensure a customer witness is present when opening the DOSS option.

2. Make sure that:
1) The box has two pieces of tape [A] attached to the corners in the photo,
AND
2) These two tapes are blank.
If you can see VOID on the surface of the tape, DO NOT install the
components in the box. Stop this procedure and contact the Technical Hotline
via the e-Lert form on the TSC Website. Retain the box and its contents. Any
tampering of the DOSS option will need to be investigated.
3. If the results of Step 1 are OK, remove the two pieces of tape from the box.
Note: After you remove the tapes, you will see VOID written on the box under
the tape [B]. This is normal.
4. The procedures outline in this bulletin needs to be followed if the DOSS option
is replaced due to a failure.
CAUTION
Before you begin any procedure, always turn OFF the machine main power
switch and unplug the power cord.
B202/B178/B180
1-76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CAUTION
The machine must always be turned off and its power cord disconnected
before you do this procedure.
NOTE: You must install the data overwrite protection unit in SD Card slot 2.
However, the postscript option for this machine is also installed in SD Card
slot 2. You must do the SD Card Appli move procedure first if you have the
postscript option installed and you want to install the data overwrite
protection unit. Move the Data Overwriting Security application (slot 3) to
the SD Card that contains the Printer/ Scanner application (slot 1).
( 5.7).
1. If the machine is ON, turn the
operation switch and the main
power switch OFF.
2. If the NIB is installed, disconnect
the network cable.
3. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]
(x1).
4. Turn the SD-Card face [B] to the
rear of the machine. Then push it
slowly into Slot 2 until you hear a
click.
[A]
5. If the NIB is installed, reconnect the

network cable.
6. Turn the main power switch ON.
7. Do SP5878 (Option Setup).
B735I111.WMF
[B]
8. Exit SP mode.
9. Turn the operation switch OFF, and then turn the main power switch OFF.
10. Turn the main power switch ON.
11. Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
SM
1-77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Installation
PRINTER OPTIONS
Rev. 06/2006
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
Rev. 06/2006
12. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version on the diagnostic report are
the same as those in the chart below .
z
[A]: ROM Number/Firmware Version HDD Format Option
[B]: Loading Program GW1a_zoffy (Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C)

Loading Program GW2a_zoffy (Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D)
Diagnostic Report:
ROM No. / Firmware

Version [A]
Loading Program [B]
Data Overwrite Security

Unit Type C
HDD Format Option:
GW1a_zoffy:
B7355050 / 0.04
B7355050 / 0.04
Data Overwrite Security

Unit Type D
HDD Format Option:
GW2a_zoffy:
B7355060 / 0.03
B7355060 / 0.03
Important: The ROM number and firmware version number change when the
firmware is upgraded.
If the ROM numbers are not the same, or the version numbers are not the same,
this means the unit was not installed correctly.
If this happens:
Make sure the MFP model and unit type match (Type C or D).
The B202/B178/B180 uses a Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D.
If they do not match:
1) Do the installation procedure again, from Step 1.
2) Replace the Data Overwrite Security Unit (SD card) with the correct
type. Redo installation procedure.
3) Replace the NV-RAM. Redo installation procedure.
13. Turn Auto Erase Memory Setting ON:

User Tools >> System Settings >> Administrator Tools >> Auto Erase Memory
Setting >> ON
If the customer has enabled Administrator Authentication Management Machine Management they will have to log in to change this User Tool
setting.
[C]
B202/B178/B180
1-78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER OPTIONS
Rev. 06/2006
Installation
14. Exit User Tools.

15. Power the machine OFF/ON.
[A]
[B]
09/09/2003
Origi.
Total
14:13
Copies
16. Make sure the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed on the operation panel.
If it is not displayed, do Step 7 again.
17. Make a sample copy.
18. Make sure the overwrite icon changes as follows:
The bottom of the icon (white part) becomes thicker [B].
Next Copy is displayed for a short time under the icon.
The icon returns to its usual shape [C].
1.6.9 CHECK ALL CONDITIONS

1. Plug in the power cord. Then turn ON the main switch.
2. Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page.
User Tools > Printer Settings > List Test Print > Config. Page
Do Sp1-004 Print Summary if you want to print the same data. All installed
options show the System Reference column.
SM
1-79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SETTINGS
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 SETTINGS
You must enable New Unit Set (SP5-999) before you replace these units:
PCUK (SP5-999-001)
Development UnitY (SP5-999-006)
PCUY (SP5-999-002)
Development UnitM (SP5-999-007)
PCUM (SP5-999-003)
Development UnitC (SP5-999-008)
PCUC (SP5-999-004)
Fusing Unit (SP5-999-009)
Development UnitK (SP5-999-005)
Do this procedure to enable the New Unit Set program (and to replace a unit):
1. Start the SP mode ( 5.1.1).
2. Select a program from SP5-999-001 to 009.
3. Select 1. Enable.
4. Select OK.
5. Quit the SP mode.
6. Turn the main switch off.
7. Replace the unit.
8. Turn the main switch on. The machine starts the initialization for the new unit.
PM Counter Reset
Reset the counter (SP7-804) after you replace these units:
By-pass tray (SP7-804-011)
Tray 4 (SP7-804-015)
Transfer unit (SP7-804-017)
Tray 1 (SP7-804-012)
Tray 2 (SP7-804-013)
Transfer belt cleaning unit (SP7-804018)
Tray 3 (SP7-804-014)
Do this procedure to enable the New Unit Set program (and to replace a unit):
1. Start the SP mode ( 5.1.1).
2. Select a program from SP7-804-011 to 018.
3. Select EXECUTE.
4. Quit the SP mode.
SM
2-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Preventive
Maintenance
New Unit Set
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PM TABLES
Rev. 09/2005
2.2 PM TABLES
Chart: A4 (LT)/5%
Mode: 3 copies/original (prints/job)
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol key:
C: Clean,
R: Replace,
L: Lubricate,
I: Inspect
Copier
Item
Scanner
1st/2nd/3rd mirrors
Front and Rear Rails
Exposure Glass
ADF Exposure Glass
Exposure Lamp
APS Sensor
Development
Dev. UnitK
Dev. UnitC
Dev. UnitM
Dev. UnitY
PCU
Transfer
Waste Toner Bottle
Fusing
Pressure Roller
Fusing Roller
Heat Roller
Pressure Cleaning Roller
Oil Supply Roller
Fusing Belt
Pick-off Pawl Assy
Stripper Pawls
Pressure Roller Thermistor
Heating Roller Thermistor
Spurs
Paper Path
Registration Sensor
Duplex Unit
Inverter Roller
Transport Roller
Inverter Sensor
Miscellaneous
Dust Filter
Breaker
Tray
Feed rollers
Pick-up Rollers
Separation Rollers
B202/B178/B180
60K
B178/B180
120K
150K
C
C
C
C
EM
52K
B202
104K 130K
C
C
C
C
C
C
I
EM
C
C
I
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Remarks
Optics cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth; alcohol
Dry cloth; alcohol
Dry cloth; alcohol
Dry cloth
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
C
C
C
R
R
R
R
C
C
C
C
Dry cloth; alcohol

Dry cloth; alcohol
Dry cloth; alcohol
Dry cloth; alcohol
Blower brush
C
C
C
C
C
C
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Blower brush
Distributed with
development unit-K
R
I
R
R
R
I
R
R
R
2-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PM TABLES
Item
Pick-up Roller
Feed Belt
Separation Roller
Sensors
Platen Sheet Cover
White Plate
Drive Gear
Transport Roller
Exit Roller
Inverter Roller
Idle Rollers
240K
R
R
R
C
EM
C
C
C
C
C
C
L
C
C
C
C
Remarks
Damp cloth; alcohol
Damp cloth; alcohol
Damp cloth; alcohol
Blower brush
Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if required.)
Dry or damp cloth
Grease G501
Damp cloth; alcohol
Damp cloth; alcohol
Damp cloth; alcohol
Damp cloth; alcohol
NOTE: 240k copies (= 80k originals x 3 copies/original)

One-Tray Paper Feed Unit
Item
Feed Roller
Pick-up Roller
Separation Roller
150K
R
R
R
EM
150K
R
R
R
EM
150K
EM
C
C
Remarks
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit

Item
Feed Rollers
Pick-up Rollers
Separation Rollers
Remarks
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
LCT
Item
Relay Roller
Bottom Plate Pad
Feed Rollers
Pick-up Rollers
Separation Rollers
R
R
R
Remarks
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Two-Tray Finisher
Items
Rollers
Discharge Brush
Sensors
Jogger Fences
240K
EM
C
C
C
I
Remarks
Damp cloth
Dry cloth
Blower brush
Replace if required.
EM
C
Discard chad.
Two-Tray Finisher Punch Kit

Item
Punch Chad
SM
240K
Remarks
2-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Preventive
Maintenance
ARDF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OTHERS
Booklet Finisher
Item
Rollers
Shafts
Sensors
Jogger fences
60K
EM
C
C
C
I
Remarks
Damp cloth
Damp cloth
Blower brush
Booklet Finisher Punch Kit

Item
Punch Chad
60K
C
EM
C
Remarks
Discard chad.
2.3 OTHERS
NOTE: These units are considered as EM parts since their expected lifetimes are
relatively long.
Copier
Item
Transfer
Transfer Unit
Belt Cleaning Unit
Bypass Tray
Feed Roller
Pickup Roller
Separation Roller
150K
250K
500K
Remarks
1000K
R
R
R
R
R
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
LCT
Item
Relay Roller
Bottom Plate Pad
B202/B178/B180
150K
250K
500K
R
R
1000K
2-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Remarks
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIAL TOOLS
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

CAUTION
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before you do the
procedures in this section.
3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS

Description
Qty
B6455010
SD Card
B6456700
PCMCIA Card Adapter
B6456800
USB Reader/Writer
A029 9387
Digital Multimeter FLUKE87
G021 9350
Loop-back Connector Parallel
C401 9503
20X Magnification Scope
A2579300
Grease Barrierta S552R
52039501
Silicon Grease G-501
A0929503
C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set)
A0069104
Scanner Positioning Pin (4pcs/set)
G5885140
Plug - IEEE1284 Type C
NOTE
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Part Number
NOTE: The Loop-back ConnectorParallel requires the Plug-IEEE1284 Type C.
SM
3-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
3.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

3.2.1 SCANNING
Check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin
adjustment before you do the following scanner adjustments.
NOTE: Use a C4 test chart to do the following adjustments.
Scanner sub-scan magnification

1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make
a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP4-008 if
necessary.
Standard: 1.0%.
A
A: Sub-scan magnification
B178R505.WMF
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration
1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make

a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration.
Adjust the following SP modes if necessary.
Standard: 0 2mm.
Leading Edge Registration
Side-to-Side Registration
SP mode
SP4-010-001
SP4-011-001
B178R506.WMF
A: Leading Edge Registration

B: Side-to-side Registration
B202/B178/B180
3-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Main scan dot position correction

NOTE: Adjust the printer registration before you adjust the scanner.
1. Enter the SP mode and open SP4-010 and SP4-011.
2. Check that each value is the same as the factory-set value.
4. Check the yellow and cyan vertical lines. (Use a Magnification Scope to do this)
Exit the SP mode to end the adjustment if they exactly overwrite the black line
at the edges of the copy. Go to the next step if the yellow and cyan lines extend
past the black line.
5. Press the SP Mode key to go back to the SP mode. Then open SP4-932.
Compare the current values with this table.
SP4-932-1
SP4-932-2
SP4-932-3
SP4-932-4
SM
Dot Position correction R left edge

Dot Position correction R right edge
Dot Position correction B left edge
Dot Position correction B right edge
3-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Press the COPY Window key and copy the C-4 chart in the full-color photo
mode.
NOTE: Make sure you copy in photo mode. This is because you cannot
correctly check color displacement in text mode.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
3.2.2 ARDF
ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration
B
B178R507.WMF
A: Leading edge registration

B: Side-to-side registration
B178R508.WMF
Use 11 X 17 Inch paper to make a temporary test chart as shown above.

1. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the registration. Use the following SP modes to adjust if necessary.
SP Code
SP6-006-001
SP6-006-002
SP6-006-003
SP6-006-004
B202/B178/B180
What It Does
Side-to-Side Registration
Leading Edge Registration (Simplex)
Buckle: Duplex Front
Buckle: Duplex Rear
3-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Adjustment Range
3.0 mm
42 steps
42 steps
45 steps
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
3.2.3 REGISTRATION
Image Area
Make sure that the registration is
adjusted within the adjustment standard
A
range as shown below.
Feed direction
A = B = C = 4.2mm (1.6") B178R509.WMF

Leading Edge
Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.
Side to Side
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. Use SP mode
(SP1-002) to adjust the side-to-side registration for the optional paper feed unit,
LCT, and duplex unit.
Adjustment Standard
Leading edge (sub-scan direction): 3 0 mm
Side to side (main-scan direction): 2 0 mm
Paper Registration Standard
The registration in both main- and sub-scan directions can change within the
following tolerance.
1st side
Sub-scan direction:
Main-scan direction:
2nd side in duplex
Sub-scan direction:
Main-scan direction:
SM
0 1.5 mm
0 2 mm
0 3 mm
0 4 mm
3-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
Image Area
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP5-997.
2. Print out the pattern (trimming pattern) with SP5-997.
NOTE: Registration can change slightly as shown above. Print some pages of
the trimming pattern for step 3 and 4. Then average the leading edge
and side-to-side registration values and adjust each SP mode.
3. Do the leading edge registration adjustment.
1) Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1-001.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).
3) Input the value. Then press the key.
4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.
4. Do the side-to-side registration adjustment.
1) Check the side-to-side registration and adjust it with SP1-002.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper feed station).
3) Input the value. Then press the key.
4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.
3.2.4 COLOR REGISTRATION

Line Position Adjustment
The automatic line position adjustment usually is done for a specified condition to
get the best color prints.
Do the following if color registration shifts:
Do Auto Color Registration with the user tools (Maintenance menu Color
Registration) or SP5-993-2 to do the forced line position adjustment. You
should also do the line position adjustment at these times:
After you transport or move the machine (you should do the forced line
position adjustment if you install the machine at the user location.) if the
machine is pre-installed at the workshop and moved to the user location,
When you open the drum positioning plate
When you remove or replace the motors, clutches, and/or gears related to
the drum/development/transfer sections
When you remove or replace the transfer belt, transfer belt unit or laser
optical housing unit
Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper
You must adjust the line speed of the fusing unit (the speed of development
motor-K) at these times:
The color registration shifts more on the trailing edge than on the leading
edge.
The problem has not been solved by the line position adjustment.
B202/B178/B180
3-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
3.2.5 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION
Replacement
and
Adjustment
NOTE: The ACC is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance to get the best
print output. You only need the printer gamma correction to fine-tune to
meet user requirements.
Use SP modes if you want to modify the printer gamma curve created with ACC.
You can adjust the gamma data for the following:
Highlight
Middle
Shadow areas
IDmax.
The adjustable range is from 0 to 15 (16 steps).
Copy Mode
KCMY Color Balance Adjustment
The adjustment uses only Offset values.
NOTE: Never change Option values (default value is 0).
Highlight (Low ID)
Middle (Middle ID)
Shadow (High ID)
ID max
Offset
Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale

Level 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire image
density.)
The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID,
middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.
There are four adjustable modes (SP4-918-009):

Copy Photo mode
Copy Letter mode
Copy Letter (Single Color) mode
Copy Photo (Single Color) mode
SM
3-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
B178R510.WMF
B202/B178/B180
3-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
1. Copy the C-4 chart in the mode that you want to adjust.
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Select Copy SP.
4. Select SP4-918-009.
the
NOTE: 1) Never change Option value (default value is 0).

2) Adjust the density in this order: ID Max, Middle, Shadow,
Highlight.
- Photo Mode, Full Color Step

1
Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K, C, M, and Y)
Level on the C-4 chart
B178R968.WMF
2
B178R969.WMF
3
B178R970.WMF
4
B178R971.WMF
B178R9
72.WMF
SM
Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
dirty background does not show
on the copy and the density of
level 3 is slightly lighter than that
of level 3 on the C-4 chart.
the color balance of black scale
levels 3 through 5 in the copy is
seen as gray (no C, M, or Y
should be visible). If the black
scale contains C, M, or Y, do
steps 1 to 4 again.
3-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard (
table below).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
- Photo Mode, Single Color Step

1
Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K)
Level on the C-4 chart
B178R973.WMF
2
B178R974.WMF
3
B178R975.WMF
B178R9
76.WMF
Adjustment Standard
- Text (Letter) Mode, Full Color Step

1
Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K, C, M, and Y)
Level on the C-4 chart (K)
B178R977.WMF
2
B178R978.WMF
3
B178R979.WMF
B178R9
80.WMF
B202/B178/B180
Adjustment Standard
3-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Step
1
Item to Adjust
ID max:
(K)
Level on the C-4 chart (K)
B178R981.WMF
2
B178R982.WMF
3
B178R983.WMF
B178R9
84.WMF
Adjustment Standard
NOTE: Text parts of the test pattern cannot be printed clearly after you adjust
shadow as shown above. At this time, check if the 5 line/mm pattern at
each corner is printed clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset value of shadow
again until it is.
SM
3-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Color -
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Printer Mode
There are six adjustable modes (select these modes with printer SP1-102-001):
1200 x 1200 photo mode
600 x 600 text mode
1800 x 600 text mode
1200 x 1200 text mode
Highlight
Shadow
Middle
IDmax
K
SP1-104-1
SP1-104-2
SP1-104-3
SP1-104-4
C
SP1-104-21
SP1-104-22
SP1-104-23
SP1-104-24
M
SP1-104-41
SP1-104-42
SP1-104-43
SP1-104-44
Y
SP1-104-61
SP1-104-62
SP1-104-63
SP1-104-64
1. Do ACC for the printer mode.
2. Turn the main power off and on.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select Printer SP.
5. Select SP1-102-001. Then select the necessary print mode to adjust.
6. Choose SP1-103-1 to print out a tone control test sheet if you want to examine
the image quality for these settings.
7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104 as shown following table lists. Compare
the tone control test sheet with the C4 test chart.
NOTE: Adjust the density in this order: ID Max, Shadow, Middle,
Highlight.
8. Use SP1-105-001 to keep the adjusted settings.
B202/B178/B180
3-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction

The following tables show the adjustment reference for gamma correction. The
tables show the following:
Level of the color scale on the C4 test chart
Tone control test sheet printed in the printer SP mode.
For example, for K at text mode, grade 12 on the tone control test sheet should be
the same as grade 7 on the C4 chart.
Test
sheet
C4 test chart
600 x 600
Photo
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
600 x 600
Text
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
1
-
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
9
8
8
9
9
9
7
10
10
10
10
10
11
8
11
11
12
11
12
12
9
16
16
15
16
16
15
10
16
16
600 x 600
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
600 x 600
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
1
-
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
5
5
4
4
5
4
5
6
6
5
5
6
5
6
9
8
8
8
9
9
7
10
10
10
10
10
10
8
12
11
11
11
11
11
9
13
12
12
12
12
12
10
14
13
13
13
14
13
600 x 600
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
600 x 600
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
1
-
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
8
8
7
7
8
7
6
11
11
10
10
11
10
7
12
12
12
12
13
12
8
14
15
14
14
14
13
9
16
16
16
16
16
16
10
-
600 x 600
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
3
3
4
5
5
4
9
8
8
5
11
10
10
6
12
11
11
7
14
14
14
9
16
16
16
10
-
600 x 600
10
11
14
15
16
1800 x 600
1200 x 1200
1
1
3
2
6
4
9
7
10
9
12
10
14
13
8
15
15
15
14/
15
15
15
16
16
C4 test chart
Photo
C
Test
sheet
Text
C4 test chart
Photo
M
Test
sheet
Text
C4 test chart
Photo
Y
Test
sheet
Text
SM
3-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
It is not usually necessary to adjust the gamma data as shown in the table since
ACC adjusts the gamma curve automatically. You only need fine-tune of color
balance by gamma data adjustment when the result from ACC and Color
Calibration does not meet the customers requirements.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT
3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT

3.3.1 TOP COVER
1. External tray [A]
[B]
2. Open the duplex left cover [B].
[C]
3. Top cover [C] ( x 4)
[A]
B178R511.WMF
3.3.2 DUPLEX CONTROL BOARD

1. Top cover (
3.3.1)
2. Duplex control board [A] ( x 4, x 7)
[A]
B178R512.WMF
B202/B178/B180
3-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 1

1. Top cover (
3.3.1)
2. Exit tray [A]
[B]
3. Duplex unit [B] ( x 1, x 1)
B178R513.WMF
4. Inner cover [C] ( x 2)

5. Duplex control board bracket [D]
( x 2, x 7)
[C]
[D]
B178R514.WMF
6. Duplex inverter motor 1 [E]

( x 2, 1 timing belt)
[E]
B178R515.WMF
SM
3-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.3.4 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 2 AND SWITCH

1. Duplex control board bracket (
3.3.3)
[A]
2. Duplex inverter unit switch [A]

( x 1, x 1)
3. Duplex inverter motor 2 [B]
( x 2, 1 timing belt)
[B]
B178R516.WMF
3.3.5 EXIT SENSOR 3 AND DUPLEX INVERTER SENSOR

[C]
1. Open the duplex inverter unit [A]

2. Exit sensor 3 [B] ( x 1)
3. Duplex inverter sensor [C]
( x 1, x 2)
[B]
[A]
B178R517.WMF
[B]
3.3.6 EXIT SENSOR 1 AND 2

1. Top cover (
[A]
3.3.1)
2. Open the duplex unit.

3. Exit sensor 1 [A]
( x 1, x 1, 1 bracket)
4. Exit sensor 2 [B] ( x 1)
B178R518.WMF
B202/B178/B180
3-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX FEED UNIT
3.4 DUPLEX FEED UNIT

3.4.1 DUPLEX DRIVE BOARD
[B]
[C]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B178R519.WMF
B178R520.WMF
1. Open the front cover

2. Duplex feed unit [A] ( x 1)
3. Inner cover [B] ( x 1)
4. Duplex drive board [C] ( x 2, x 3)
3.4.2 DUPLEX FEED MOTOR

1. Duplex feed unit (
[A]
3.4.1)
2. Inner cover [A] ( x 1)

3. Duplex feed motor [B]
( x 1, x 1, 1 timing belt)
[B]
SM
3-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B178R521.WMF
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX FEED UNIT
3.4.3 DUPLEX FEED SENSOR
[A]
B178R522.WMF
3.4.1)
2. Duplex feed sensor [A] ( x 1)
B202/B178/B180
3-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR COVERS
3.5 EXTERIOR COVERS

NOTE: 1) Go to section 3.7.2, Laser Optics Housing Unit if you want the removal
procedure for the paper exit tray.
2) Go to section 3.12.14, Paper Exit if you want the removal procedure
for the paper exit cover.
3.5.1 REAR, FRONT, AND RIGHT SIDES

1. ARDF or platen cover (if installed)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
2. Rear cover [A] ( x 5, 2 hooks)
[A]
B178R523.WMF
3. Front cover [B] (2 pins)
[B]
B178R524.WMF
SM
3-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR COVERS
4. Open the by-pass tray [A].
[D]
[C]
5. Right cover [B] ( x 2)

6. Upper right cover [C] ( x 1,
strap x 1)
7. Upper front cover [D] ( x 2)
[A]
B178R525.WMF
[B]
CAUTION: Do not put things on the operation panel. The operation panel can
become unstable when you remove the upper front cover.
8. Scanner right cover (
3.5.3)
9. Rear right cover [E]

( x 4, 1 hook)
[E]
B178R905.WMF
B202/B178/B180
3-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR COVERS
3.5.2 LEFT SIDE
[E]
[D]
[C]
[F]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
[B]
B178R527.WMF
1. Duplex unit (
3.3.3)
2. Duplex unit base cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Duplex inverter guide [B]
4. Duplex unit base [C] ( x 6)
5. Left cover [D] ( x 6, 1 hook)
6. Rear cover (
3.5.1)
7. Open the upper left cover [E]

8. Scanner left cover (
3.5.3)
9. Rear left cover [F] ( x 4)
SM
3-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXTERIOR COVERS
3.5.3 OPERATION PANEL AND SCANNER COVERS

[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B178R528.WMF

2. Rear cover (
3.5.1)
3. Upper front cover (
3.5.1)
4. Operation panel [A] ( x 4, x 1)

5. Scanner left cover [B] ( x 2, 1 hook)
6. Scanner right cover [C] ( x 2)
7. Scanner rear cover [D] ( x 1)
B202/B178/B180
3-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.6 SCANNER UNIT

3.6.1 EXPOSURE GLASS
1. Rear scale [A] ( x 3)
[B]
2. Exposure glass with left scale [B]

( x 2)
[D]
[A]
[C]
3. ARDF exposure glass [C]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
NOTE: Position the glass marker [D] at

the rear-left corner when you
reattach the exposure glass and
ARDF exposure glass.
B178R529.WMF
3.6.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH/WIDTH SENSOR

[B]
1. Exposure glass with left scale

( 3.6.1)
[A]
2. Original length sensors [A]

( x 2, x2)
3. Original width sensor 1 [B]
( x 1, x1)
B178R530.WMF
SM
3-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.6.3 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU)

1. Rear cover (
3.5.1)
2. Exposure glass (
3.6.1)
3. Scanner right cover (
3.5.3)
[A]
4. Inner cover [A] ( x 4)
B178R531.WMF
[B]
5. Sensor board unit
[B] ( x 5, x 4)
NOTE: Connect the connectors to
the SBU holding the SBU
with your hand when you
replace the SBU.
B178R532A.WMF
When reassembling
Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit:
SP4008 (Sub Scan Mag)
SP4010 (Sub Mag Reg.)
SP4011 (Main Scan Mag)
SP4688 (DF: Density Adjustment)
SP4800 (DF: Density Correction for R, G or B)
B202/B178/B180
3-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Replacement
and
Adjustment
SCANNER UNIT
B178R633.WMF
Input the barcode numbers with following SPs. These barcode numbers are printed
on the paper that is provided with the SBU.
Adjusting the gray valance level for each color
Input "4" with SP4-885: Level Convert Adjustment for R
Input "5" with SP4-886: Level Convert Adjustment for G
Input "6" with SP4-887: Level Convert Adjustment for B
Adjusting the printer vector correction
Input "7" with SP4-540-001: Printer Vector for R: Option
Input "8" with SP4-540-002: Printer Vector for R: Red
Input "9" with SP4-540-003: Printer Vector for R: Green
Input "10" with SP4-540-004: Printer Vector for R: Blue
Input "11" with SP4-540-021: Printer Vector for M: Option
Input "12" with SP4-540-022: Printer Vector for M: Red
Input "13" with SP4-540-023: Printer Vector for M: Green
Input "14" with SP4-540-024: Printer Vector for M: Blue
SM
3-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.6.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER

1. Scanner rear cover (
3.5.3)
2. Exposure lamp stabilizer [A]

( x 2, x 2)
NOTE: Connect the connector [B]
vertically to the exposure lamp
stabilizer when you reassemble. [A]
Use caution when you do this
connection. The receptor can get
damaged easily..
[B]
B178R533.WMF
3.6.5 XENON LAMP

1. Rear cover (
[A]
3.5.1)
2. Operation panel and scanner covers

( 3.5.3)
3. Exposure glass with left scale
( 3.6.1)
4. Left frame [A] ( x 2)
5. Front frame [B] ( x 5)
[B]
B178R534.WMF
[C]
6. Release the cable holder [C].
7. Xenon lamp [D] (pulley)
[D]
B178R535.WMF
B202/B178/B180
3-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
8. Disconnect the connector [A] from the

scanner stabilizer.
[A]
[D]
9. Original length sensor [B] ( x 1)

10. Clamp [C] ( x 1)
[C]
11. Cable guide [D] (clamp x 1)
Reassembling
When you reassemble the xenon lamp,
make sure that the bind is positioned and
the cable that has a black tube is run on
the cable guide as shown [E].
[E]
B178R536.WMF
Run the cable so there is no slack. Slide

the clamp [F] to adjust the cable slack.
OK
NG
B178R536A.WMF
SM
3-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[F]
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.6.6 SCANNER POWER SUPPLY UNIT (SCANNER I/O BOARD)

1. Rear cover (
3.5.1)
2. Scanner power supply unit [A]

(all 's, x 5)
[A]
B178R537.WMF
3.6.7 SCANNER MOTOR

1. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)
2. Scanner PSU with bracket [A] ( x 4)
3. Scanner motor [B] ( x 2, Spring x 1)
[C]
[B]
4. Timing belt [C]

[A]
Reassembling
1. Install the motor.
2. Install the timing belt.
3. Install the spring.
4. Fasten the screws.
B178R538.WMF
B202/B178/B180
3-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.6.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE

1. Front frame (
[A]
3.6.5)
2. Front scanner wire clamp [A]

3. Front scanner wire bracket [B]
( x 1)
4. Front scanner wire and scanner
drive pulley [C] ( x 1)
[B]
B178R539.WMF
Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire

1. Position the center ball [A]
in the middle of the forked
holder.
2. Pass the right end (with
the ring) [B] through the
square hole. Pass the left
end (with the ball) [C]
through the notch.
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
3. Wind the right end

counterclockwise (shown
from the machines front)
five times. Wind the left
end clockwise three times.
B178R540.WMF
NOTE: The two red marks [D] come together when you have done this. Stick
the wire to the pulley with tape. This lets you easily handle the
assembly at the time of installation.
SM
3-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[C]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
4. Install the drive pulley on

the shaft [A].
[B]
[C]
[D]
NOTE: Do not attach the

pulley to the shaft
with the screw at
this time.
5. Insert the left end into the
slit [B]. The end should go
via the rear track of the left
pulley [C] and the rear
track of the movable pulley
[D].
[A]
B178R541.WMF
6. Hook the right end onto

the front scanner wire
bracket [E]. The end
should go via the front
track of the right pulley [F]
and the front track of the
movable pulley [G].
[E]
[G]
NOTE: Do not attach the
scanner wire bracket
with the screw at this
time.
B178R542.WMF
[F]
B202/B178/B180
3-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
[D]
[A]
[I]
8. Insert a scanner-positioning
pin [A] through the 2nd
carriage hole [B] and the left
holes [C] in the front rail.
Insert another scanner
positioning pin [D] through
the 1st carriage hole [E] and
the right holes in the front rail
[F].
[B]
9. Insert two more scanner
positioning pins in the holes
in the rear rail.
[G]
[H]
[E]
[C]
10. Screw the drive pulley to the

shaft [G].
[F]
B178R543.WMF
11. Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail [H].
12. Install the scanner wire clamp [I].
13. Pull out the positioning pins.
NOTE: Make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages move smoothly after you remove the
positioning pins. Do steps 8 through 13 again if they do not.
SM
3-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
7. Remove the tape from the

drive pulley.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.6.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE

CAUTION: Do not remove screw [S1], screw [S2], or screw [S3] in the diagram
below. Image adjustment gets difficult if you remove these screws.
[S1]
[S3]
[A]
[S2]
[C]
[B]
[D]
1. Rear cover (
3.5.1)
2. Operation panel and scanner covers (

3. Exposure glass with left scale (
4. Left frame (
B178R544.WMF
3.5.3)
3.6.1)
3.6.5)
5. Scanner PSU (
3.6.6)
6. Five screws on the right-hand side [A] (shown from the front)
7. Two screws on the left-hand side [B] (shown from the front)
8. Pivot brackets [C][D] ( x 1 for each)
B202/B178/B180
3-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
[C]
[A]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
[D]
B178R545.WMF
9. Rear frame [A] ( x 2, x 7)

NOTE: Lift the right-hand side (shown from the front) of the scanner unit to
remove the screw [B] on the bottom-right corner (shown from the front).
10. Rail frame [C] ( x 5)
NOTE: Make sure that the home position sensor [D] is not damaged by the
sensor blade near the rear end of the xenon lamp when you
reassemble.
[F]
[E]
11. Rear scanner wire clamp [E]

12. Rear scanner wire bracket [F]
( x 1)
13. Loosen the two screws on the
scanner-motor bracket ( 3.6.7)
14. Scanner motor gear [G] ( x 1)
15. Rear scanner wire and scanner
drive pulley [H] ( x 1)
[G]
SM
3-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[H]
B178R546.WMF
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire

1. Position the center ball [A]
in the middle of the forked
holder.
2. Pass the left end (with the
ball) [B] through the drive
pulley notch. Pass the
right end (with the ring) [C]
through the drive pulley
hole.
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
3. Wind the left end [B]

clockwise (shown from the
machines front) five times.
Wind the right end [C]
counterclockwise three
times.
B178R547.WMF
NOTE: The two red marks [D] come together when you do this. Attach the wire
to the pulley with tape. This lets you easily handle the assembly at the
time of installation.
4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft.
NOTE: Do not attach the pulley on the shaft with the screw at this time.
5. Install the wire.
NOTE: The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner
should be the same as the winding on the three pulleys at the front.
This must show as a mirror image.
Example: At the front of the machine, the side of the drive pulley with the three
windings must face the front of the machine. At the rear of the machine, it must
face the rear.
6. Do steps 7 through 13 again in the Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire
Section.
B202/B178/B180
3-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER UNIT
3.6.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT

NOTE: It is necessary to calibrate touch panel at the following times:
When you replace the operation panel.
When you replace the controller board.
When the touch panel detection function does not operate correctly
Do not use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are for design
use only.
Replacement
and
Adjustment
1. Press , press , press 5 times to open the Self-Diagnostics

menu.
B178R548.WMF
2. On the touch screen press Touch Screen Adjust (or press ).

3. Use a pointed (not sharp) tool to press the upper left mark
B178R549.WMF
4. Press the lower right mark when
shows.
5. Touch a few spots on the touch panel to make sure that the marker + shows
exactly where the screen is touched.
Press Cancel. Then start from Step 2 again if the + mark does not show
where the screen is touched.
6. Press [#] OK on the screen (or press ) when you are finished.
7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu. Save the
calibration settings.
SM
3-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
3.7 LASER OPTICS

WARNING
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before you do the
procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
3.7.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS

The caution decals locations are shown below.

WHEN OPEN
CAUTION
VORSICHT
>PS<
CAUTION.WMF

WHEN OPEN
CAUTION
VORSICHT
B178R550.WMF
>PS<
CAUTION2.WMF
WARNING
Make sure you turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug
from the power outlet before you disassemble or adjust the laser unit. This
machine uses a class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 655 nm and an
output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.
B202/B178/B180
3-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
3.7.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT

CAUTION: Remove the sponge padding and the tag from the new unit before you
install the new laser optics-housing unit.
[A]
Steps 1 through 4 show the procedure

for a newly supplied unit that replaces
the current one.
1. Top cover of the laser optics
housing unit [A] ( x 4)
2. Sponge padding [B]
[B]
[C]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Tag [C]
4. Reinstall the top cover.
B178R551.WMF

6. Rear cover (
3.5.1)
7. Open the duplex inverter unit [D].
[D]
8. Open the front cover [E].
[E]
B178R552.WMF
9. Right cover, upper right cover, and upper front cover (
3.5.1)
10. Operation panel, scanner left cover, scanner right cover, and scanner rear
cover ( 3.5.3)
SM
3-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
11. Remove the support [A] on the front of

the scanner unit.
[A]
B178R553.WMF
CAUTION: 1) Make sure that the cables on the rear of the scanner unit are not
caught on anything before you go to the next step. The whole
function (not only the scanner unit) can be disabled if some of the
cables are damaged.
2) Do not remove screw [S1], screw [S2], or screw [S3] in the diagram
below. Image adjustment can be difficult if you remove these
screws.
[B]
12. Lift the scanner unit [B] ( x 7) and

prop the unit with the support [C].
NOTE: Remove screw [D] and
screw [E].
[C]
CAUTION: Do not lift the scanner unit

higher than the support
prop after you set the
support under the scanner
unit. The support can come [F]
off the opening [F] if you do
this.
B178R554.WMF
B202/B178/B180
[S1]
[D]
[E]
3-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[S2]
[S3]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
[A]
13. Securing screws for the paper exit tray
[A] ( x 2)
B178R555.WMF
14. Securing screws for the toner supply

unit [B] ( x 4)
[B]
15. Securing screws for the laser optics

housing unit [C] ( x 2)
[C]
B178R556.WMF
[B]
16. Hold the toner supply unit [D] up .
Then lower it . The pins [E] on the
front and rear shafts hold the unit.
[D]
[E]
B178R557.WMF
SM
3-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
NOTE: Do not remove the paper exit

tray at this time.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
17. Paper exit tray [A]
[A]
B178R558.WMF
[B]
18. Connector cover [B] ( x 3)
19. Three connectors [C] ( x 1)
[C]
B178R909.WMF
20. Release the clamps [D] ( x 4).

21. Release the cable from the clamps [E].
[D]
B178R913.WMF
B202/B178/B180
3-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
When reassembling the laser optics housing unit, follow the notes below.
[A]
OK
[C]
NG
OK
[D]
[B]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
NG
B178R908.WMF
Make sure that the clamp [A] is positioned between two binds [B] and the harness
[C] is not bound by the clamp [D].
[E]
[F]
Rear view
B178R910.WMF
When you connect the harnesses from laser optics housing unit to the BCU, make
sure that the binds [E] are positioned and the binds [F] are positioned as diagram
shows.
Enter the SP mode and set "Disable" with SP2-920-1 after you replace the Laser
optics housing unit.
SM
3-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
[A]
22. Duct [A]
23. Securing screws for the laser optics
housing unit [B] ( x 2)
24. Put a sheet of paper [C] between the
laser optic housing unit and the machine
rear frame.
NOTE: This does not let the cables be
caught by the brackets when you
lift the laser optics-housing unit.
25. Hold the unit with both hands and slowly
lift it up. Make sure that the cables from
the laser diode board are not caught by
the brackets when you do this.
NOTE: The cables can be caught by the
brackets and the laser diode
board may be damaged if you are
not careful.
[B]
[C]
B178R561.WMF
26. Do adjustments ( go to the procedures on the following page) after you

reinstall the laser optics-housing unit.
Do the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-2 or User Tools > Maintenance >
Color Registration > Auto Color Registration > OK) after you install the laser opticshousing unit.
B202/B178/B180
3-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
Adjustments after Replacing the Laser Optics Housing Unit

1. Enter SP mode.
2. Select Disable in SP2-920-1. This enables or disables the LD pulse correction.
Decal 1
Value on the left

SP2-109-3
Value on the right

SP2-109-2
Decal 2
Not used
Not used
Decal 3
Not used
Not used
Function
Laser beam pitch
Main-scan registration
correction for black and cyan
Main-scan registration
correction for magenta and
yellow
Decal 3
Decal 2
Decal 1
Jp:xxxxx KC:-2,-2
Jp:xxxxx P:46,41
600dpi
1200dpi
Jp:xxxxx MY:-2,-2
C
B178R563.WMF
Y
B178R564.WMF
B178R562.WMF
NOTE: You do not need to input the values on decals 2 and 3. The machine
does the main scan registration correction for each color at the time of
automatic line position adjustment.
4. Print out the following test pattern (Cross Stitch M) with SP5-997.
5. Check these test patterns. Vertical black strips show if the laser beam pitch is
not correct.
Cross-stitch pattern: The thin lines should be of uniform thickness (no
striping effect should show on the printout).
6. Adjust the laser beam pitch values in SP2-109-2 and 3 until the printout is
correct. Refer to the illustration shown below:
Feed direction
Adjustment not completed
Adjustment completed
B178R565.WMF
7. Do SP5-993-2 or Auto Color Registration in the User Tools (Maintenance >

Color Registration > Auto Color Registration > OK).
SM
3-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Input the values printed on three decals on the new laser optics-housing unit
into the following SPs. Each decal has two values.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
3.7.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR

[A]
[C]
1. Laser optics housing unit

( 3.7.2)
2. Top cover [A] ( x 4)
3. Harness cable on the polygon-mirrormotor drive-board [B]
4. Twelve connectors [C] on the four LD
boards
[B]
B178R566.WMF
5. Upper cover [D] ( x 11, x 6)

NOTE: Two of the eleven
connectors are on the
reverse side of the upper
cover.
[D]
B178R567.WMF
[E]
6. Air-current rectifier [E] ( x 3)
7. Polygon mirror motor [F]
( x 4, x 1)
[F]
B178R568.WMF
B202/B178/B180
3-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER OPTICS
3.7.4 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR DRIVE BOARD

1. Laser optics housing unit
( 3.7.2)
2. Polygon mirror motor drive
board [A] ( x 2, x 2)
B178R569.WMF
3.7.5 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS

1. Laser optics housing unit (
3.7.2)
2. Synchronizing detector boards [A]

( x 1 for each, x 1 for each)
[A]
B178R570.WMF
SM
3-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT
3.8 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT

NOTE: Do not touch the PCU drum. Do not let metal objects touch the
development sleeve.
[B1]
1. Start the SP mode and do the New

Unit Set:
PCU: SP5-999-001 004
Development unit: SP5-999-005
008
[B2]

3. Open the front cover [A].
[C]
4. Loosen the 2 screws [B1][B2] (on the

drum positioning plate).
NOTE: Fasten screw [B1] first. Then
fasten screw [B2] when you
reassemble.
[A]
B178R571.WMF
5. Turn the release lever [C] counterclockwise.

6. Lift the drum positioning plate.
7. Pull the development unit [D] out.
8. Check that the development units are
installed in the correct color order:
(black yellow cyan magenta
from left to right).
NOTE: Keep the units level and shake
them several times from side
to side before you install the
new development units.
[D]
B178R572.WMF
9. Release the lever and pull a PCU [E]

out until you see the handle.
[E]
10. Grasp the handle [F]. Then pull the

PCU out of the machine.
11. Turn the main switch on. The machine
starts the initialization for the new unit.
B178R573.WMF
B202/B178/B180
3-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[F]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.9 PAPER FEED

3.9.1 PICK-UP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
Tray 1 and Tray 2
1. Tray 1 and Tray 2
2. Pick-up roller [A] ( x 1)
3. Feed roller [B] ( x 1)
[A]
[C]
[A]
By-pass Tray
B178R574.WMF
[C]
1. Open the right door.

2. By-pass tray cover [A] (1 hook, x
1)
3. Raise the paper end sensor actuator
[B].
4. Pick-up roller [C] (1 hook)
[B]
B178R575.WMF
SM
3-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
4. Separation roller [C] ( x 1)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
5. Feed roller [D] ( x 1)
[D]
6. Vertical transport cover [E] ( x 4)

NOTE: Remove the right rear
cover ( 3.5.1). This lets
you have easier access to
the four screws.
7. Separation roller [F] ( x 1)
[F]
B178R576.WMF
B202/B178/B180
3-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[E]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.9.2 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION BOARD

[D]
[A]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
[C]
B178R577.WMF
1. Open the by-pass tray.

2. Center the side fences [A].
3. By-pass tray cover [B] ( x 2, 2 hooks)
NOTE: There is a square opening [C] on each side. Push the hooks through
these openings to release them.
4. Paper width detection board [D] ( x 1)
NOTE: Open the bottom cover [E] to
remove the connector.
[E]
B178R578.WMF
SM
3-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.9.3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR
[B]
[A]
B178R579.WMF

2. Vertical transport cover [A] ( x 4)
NOTE: Remove the right rear cover (
access to the four screws.
3.5.1). This lets you have easier
3. Vertical transport sensor [B] ( x 1)
3.9.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT
B178R580.WMF
1. Rear right cover (
[B]
[A]
B178R581.WMF
3.5.1)
2. Open the right door [A].

3. Lift the vertical transport unit [B]. This removes it from its hinges ( x 3, x
1).
B202/B178/B180
3-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.9.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR AND RELAY SENSORS

[B]
[C]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B178R582.WMF
1. Right door unit (
B178R583.WMF
3.9.4)
2. Registration guide [A] ( x 2)

3. Registration sensor [B] ( x 1, x 1)
4. Relay sensor [C] ( x 1, x 1)
3.9.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES

1. Paper trays
2. Rear cover (
[B]
3.5.1)
[A]
3. Swing out the high voltage supply unit

( 3.13.2).
4. Clutch holder [A] ( x 2, 1 bearing)
5. Paper feed clutch for tray 1 [B] ( x 1)
6. Clutch holder [C] ( x 2, 1 bearing)
7. Paper feed clutch for tray 2 [D] ( x 1)
[D]
[C]
B178R584.WMF
SM
3-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
3.9.7 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH

1. Right door unit (
3.9.4)
[B]
2. By-pass tray cover [A]

( x 1, 1 hook)
[F]
3. Loosen the screw on the right

door latch [B].
4. Turn the latch in the opposite
direction.
[A]
[D]
5. Upper guide plate [C]

( x 4, x 1)
[C]
6. Support plate [D] ( x 2)
B178R585.WMF
[E]
7. Relay gear [E] (1 hook)

8. By-pass feed clutch [F] ( x 1)
3.9.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

1. Rear cover (
3.5.1)
2. Swing out the high voltage supply

unit ( 3.13.2).
3. Sub power supply unit [A]
( x 9, x 3)
[A]
4. Tray lift motors (tray 1 [B], tray 2 [C])

( x 2, x 1)
B178R586.WMF
[B]
[C]
B178R587.WMF
B202/B178/B180
3-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3.9.9 PAPER FEED MOTOR
[A]
B178R588.WMF
1. Rear cover (
3.5.1)
2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit (
3.13.2).
3. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)

NOTE: The connector is CN604 on the driver board.
SM
3-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT
3.10 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT

3.10.1 TRANSFER UNIT
NOTE: Grasp the central areas of the front and rear frame when you remove or
install the transfer unit.
NOTE: Do not touch the transfer belt [A]. Do not damage the entrance mylar [B].
Reset the maintenance counter, (SP7-804-17). Then do the output check, (SP5804-66) after you replace the transfer unit.
[A]
[C]
[B]
B178R589.WMF
3.4.1)
2. Turn the release lever counterclockwise. (
3.8)
3. Pull out the transfer unit [C] until the whole unit shows ( x 2).
4. Grasp the transfer unit grips as shown above. Lift the unit to remove it.
NOTE: Grasp the front grip. Use caution not to damage the actuator on the rear.
Do the following after you replace the transfer unit:
Set the adjustment value in SP5-995-020 to FbOn, DncOn".
Execute SP5-993-031 and SP5-993-033. This SP mode measures the belt
speed (middle and low) and stores the data.
Execute SP5-995-027. This SP mode checks the belt regularity and stores the
data.
Execute SP5-995-025. This SP clears the speed control error counter.
Turn the main power off and on after executing above SPs.
Forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or > Maintenance > Color
Registration).
Print the 1-dot grid pattern on A3/11" x 17" paper. Then check the color shift level
( 4.6.3).
B202/B178/B180
3-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10.2 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT
Replacement
and
Adjustment
NOTE: Reset the maintenance counter, (SP7-804-18) after you replace the
transfer belt-cleaning unit.
2
[A]
[B]
B178R590.WMF
Pull out the transfer belt-cleaning unit [A] ( x 1) at the same time you push the
lever.
NOTE: 1) The blade [B] can damage the belt if you do not continue to push the
lever.
2) Make sure that the transfer unit release lever is put back to the original
position ( 3.8) when you reassemble.
Do a forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or > Maintenance > Color
Registration) after you replace the transfer belt-cleaning unit.
SM
3-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10.3 CLEANING BLADE AND CLEANING ROLLER
[A]
[B]
B178R591.WMF
1. Transfer belt cleaning unit (
3.10.2)
2. Cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)

3. Tension spring [B]
[D]
[F]
[E]
[C]
B178R592.WMF
4. Lever [C]
5. Ground plate [D] ( x 1)
6. 3 gears [E] ( x 1)
7. Gear box [F] ( x 1)
B202/B178/B180
3-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
[B]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[C]
B178R593.WMF
8. Roller cover [A] ( x 1)

9. Cleaning brush gear [B] ( x 1)
10. Cleaning brush [C] (Bushing x 1)
Do the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or Maintenance menu
Color registration - Auto Adjust in User Program mode) after you replace the
cleaning blade.
SM
3-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10.4 TRANSFER BELT

NOTE: Do not touch the transfer belt. Hold the belt at its end position when you
replace the belt.
[A]
[B]
B178R594.WMF

2. Transfer unit (
3.10.2)
3.10.1)
3. Transfer entrance guide [A] ( x 3)

4. Right bracket [B] ( x 2)
[C]
[D]
[E]
B178R595.WMF
5. Left bracket [C] ( x 2)

6. Tension roller [D] ( x 2, Spacer [E] x 1)
NOTE: Attach the spacer [E] to the original position when you reassemble.
B202/B178/B180
3-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[C]
B178R575A.WMF
[B]
B178R632.WMF
7. Lay the transfer unit on its side.

8. Grasp the upper end of the transfer belt. Then pull the transfer belt [A] up and
out.
9. Clean the transfer belt mark sensor [C] with Blower brush.
NOTE: Clean the drive rollers with a damp cloth if they are dirty.
When you reinstall the transfer belt

The transfer belt must be installed with the mark [B] at the front side of the
machine.
Do the same procedures mentioned in 3.10.1 after you replace the transfer belt.
SM
3-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.10.5 TRANSFER UNIT DRIVE MOTOR
[B]
[A]
B178R597.WMF

2. Pull out the transfer unit (
3.10.2)
3.10.1).
3. Release lever [A] ( x 1)

4. Front cover [B] ( x 3)
[C]
[D]
B178R598.WMF
5. Front plate [C] ( x 5, x 1, Timing belt x 1, spring x 1)

6. Transfer unit drive motor [D] ( x 2)
B202/B178/B180
3-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ID SENSORS
3.11 ID SENSORS
B178R599.WMF
1. Transfer unit (
3.10.1)
2. Fusing unit (
3.12.1)
3. Black PCU (
3.8)
4. ID sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)

Make sure that the ID sensor bracket fits on the drum-positioning plate correctly
when you reassemble.
SM
3-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12 FUSING
CAUTION
Be careful when you handle the fusing unit. It is very hot.
3.12.1 FUSING UNIT
[A]
B178R173.WMF
1. Start the SP mode. Then execute the New Unit Set (SP5-999-009).
3. Detach the finisher from the copier if it is installed.
4. Open the duplex inverter unit if it is installed.
5. Open the upper left cover. Then pull it out.
6. Fusing unit [A]
7. Turn the main switch on. The machine starts initialization for the new unit.
If the customer uses thick paper, make some test prints on a sample of the paper
used by the customer after you replace the fusing unit. Adjust the line speed for
thick paper with the following SP if there are any color registration problems:
SP1-004-007 (Development Motor Speed[K] L Thick)
B202/B178/B180
3-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.2 UPPER COVER
[C]
[A]
B178R001.WMF
1. Detach the finisher from the printer if it is installed.

2. Open the duplex inverter unit if it is installed.
3. Fusing unit (
3.12.1)
4. Knob [A] ( x 1)
5. Upper cover [B] ( x 4)
NOTE: One of the screws [C] is longer than the other screws. Make sure that
the screw [C] is positioned as shown above when you reassemble this
unit.
SM
3-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.3 THERMOSTAT AND HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR
[A]
[B]
B178R002.WMF
1. Upper cover (
3.12.2)
2. Thermostats [A] ( x 3)
3. Heating roller thermistor [B] ( x 1, x 1, bracket x 1)
B202/B178/B180
3-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3.12.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR AND FUSE
[A]
B178R004.WMF
[B]
[E]
[D]
[C]
B178R017.WMF
1. Lower right cover [A] ( x 2)

2. Pressure roller thermistor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1)
3. Pressure roller thermistor [C] ( x 1)
4. Fuse assembly [D] ( x 1)
5. Fuses [E] ( x 2 each)
Reassembling
Make sure that the white part of both fuses [E] face the front direction of the
machine.
SM
3-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.5 HEATING ROLLER LAMP AND PRESSURE ROLLER LAMP
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
B178R009.WMF
1. Upper cover (
3.12.2)
2. Heating roller lamp [A] ( x 2, terminal bracket x 2)

NOTE: Make sure the front [C] and rear [D] ends of the lamp are on the correct
terminals when you reinstall.
3. Pressure roller lamp [B] ( x 2)
B202/B178/B180
3-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.6 FUSING BELT UNIT
[C]
[B]
B178R010.WMF
1. Upper cover (
3.12.2)
2. Heating roller lamp (
3.12.5)
3. Pressure brackets [A] [B] (spring x 1 each)

NOTE: Use caution when you remove or attach the springs. The springs have
strong tension and require more force than usual to remove them.
4. Fusing upper unit [C] ( x 5, x 1)
[E]
[D]
B178R011.WMF
5. Tension roller [D] (spring x 2, roller holder x 2)

6. Fusing belt unit [E]
SM
3-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.7 HOT ROLLER AND HEATING ROLLER

[A]
[B]
[C]
B178R011.WMF
1. Upper cover (
3.12.2)
2. Heating roller lamp (

3. Fusing belt unit (
3.12.5)
3.12.6)
4. Hot roller gear [A] ( x 1)

5. Hot roller [B]
6. Heating roller [C]
Reassembling
Do the following procedures when you reassemble this unit:
Apply grease to the roller shaft bearing of the pressure roller frame.
Make sure that the edges of the bushings are positioned inside the shaft
bearings.
B202/B178/B180
3-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.8 UPPER PAPER GUIDE PLATE AND STRIPPER PAWLS
[A]
B178R003.WMF
1. Upper cover (
3.12.2)
2. Upper paper guide plate [A] ( x 2)

3. Stripper pawls [B] (spring x 1 each)
SM
3-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.9 LOWER PAPER GUIDE PLATE AND STRIPPER PAWLS
[B]
[A]
B178R006.WMF
1. Upper cover (
3.12.2)
2. Pressure roller lamp (
3.12.5)
3. Lower paper guide unit [A] ( x 4)

NOTE: The screw [B] is different from the others. Make sure that the screw [B]
is positioned as shown above.
[E]
[C]
[D]
B178R007.WMF
4. Lower paper guide plate [C] ( x 3)

5. Stripper pawls [D] (spring x 1 each)
NOTE: The screw [E] is different from the others. Make sure that the screw is
positioned as shown above.
B202/B178/B180
3-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.10 CLEANING ROLLER AND OIL SUPPLY ROLLER
[B]
[A]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[C]
[D]
[B]
[A]
B178R008.WMF
1. Upper cover (
3.12.2)
2. Pressure roller lamp (
3.12.5)
3. Lower paper guide unit (
3.12.9)
4. Remove the springs [A].

5. Slide off the roller holder [B].
6. Cleaning roller [C] and oil supply roller [D]
SM
3-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.11 PRESSURE ROLLER

[B]
[A]
[C]
B178R013.WMF
1. Upper cover (
3.12.2)
2. Heating roller lamp and pressure roller lamp (
3.12.5)
3. Fusing upper unit

4. Lower paper guide unit
5. Pressure roller gear [A] and bushings [B] (C-ring x 2)
6. Pressure roller [C]
Reassembling
Apply grease to both ends of the pressure roller shaft when you reassemble this
unit.
3.12.12 DRIVE GEAR

1. Fusing unit (
3.12.1)
2. Gear hold bracket [A] ( x 1)

3. Drive gear [B] ( x 1)
[B]
[A]
B178R014.WMF
B202/B178/B180
3-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
3.12.13 FUSING UNIT FAN
CAUTION
Make sure that the fan faces to the correct direction when you reinstall it.
The arrow on the fan [D] and the arrow on the duct [D] must face to the
same direction.
1. Rear cover (
3.5.1)
2. Left cover, rear left cover (
3.5.2)
[A]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3. Connector cover (on the top of the

controller box) ( 3.13.1)
4. Fusing fan duct [A] ( x 2, x 1)
B178R600.WMF
5. Release the hooks. Then remove

the upper cover [B].
[B]
6. Fusing fan [C]
[D]
[C]
B178R601.WMF
SM
3-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
[C]
3.12.14 PAPER EXIT

1. Lift the scanner unit (
3.7.2).
[A]
2. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Exit upper limit sensor [B]
4. Paper exit sensor [C]
[B]
B178R938.WMF
B202/B178/B180
3-74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
3.13 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.13.1 MOVING THE CONTROLLER BOX OUT OF THE WAY
1. Rear cover (
3.5.1)
[B]
2. Connector cover [A] ( x 3)

3. Three cables [B]
4. Ground cable ( x 2) [C]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
[C]
B178R911.WMF
5. Duct [D] ( x 1, x 2)
[D]
[E]
6. Ground cable [E] ( x 1)

7. Two connectors [E]
8. Swing out the controller box [F]
( x 5).
[F]
B178R603.WMF
SM
3-75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.13.2 MOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C, B OUT

OF THE WAY
1. Rear cover (
3.5.1)
2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit

[A] ( x 2).
[A]
B178R604.WMF
3.13.3 CONTROLLER, IPU, AND BCU

NOTE: 1) Print out the SMC reports (SP Mode Data and Logging Data) before
you replace the BCU or controller.
2) Remove the NVRAM on the old board. Then install it on the new board
after you replace the BCU or controller.
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B178R605.WMF
1. Controller [A] ( x 3)
2. IPU [B] ( x 2, x 2)
3. Option bracket [C] ( x 2)
4. Rear cover [D] (
B202/B178/B180
3.5.1)
3-76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5. Connector cover (
3.13.1)
[A]
6. Cover bracket [A] ( x 4)
[B]
8. BCU [C] (All 's, x 8)
B178R606.WMF
[C]
B178R607.WMF
[D]
CAUTION: 1) Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static
electricity. Static electricity can damage NVRAM data.
2) Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the board. Attach the
NVRAM with the "half-disk [D] heading down to the NVRAM slot.
3) Make sure that the DIP-switch settings on the old board are the
same for the new board ( 5.11) when you replace the BCU.
NOTE: 1) Make sure you print out the SMC reports (SP Mode Data and Logging
Data) before you replace the NVRAM.
2) Remove the NVRAM on the old board. Then install it on the new board
after you replace the BCU or controller. Replace the NVRAM ( 3.13.5)
if the NVRAM on the old board is defective.
SM
3-77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Replacement
and
Adjustment
7. Inner bracket [B] ( x 2)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.13.4 HDD
You cannot separate the hard-disk drive into two different hard-disk drives. The
controller does not recognize the hard disk drive if you separate it.
1. Controller (
3.13.3)
2. HDD [A] ( x 4, Shoulder-screw x 3)
[A]
B178R608.WMF
When reassembling the HDD

Connect the cable as shown.
NOTE: There are two hard disks. Each
hard disk has a specified
connector. Do not connect the
cable to the wrong connector.
A
B
A
B178R015.WMF
B202/B178/B180
3-78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.13.5 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

NVRAM on the BCU
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes
with the machine.
2. Output the SMC data (
SP5-990-001) if possible.

4. Install an SD card into SD card slot 3. Then turn the main power on.
5. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card (
Replacement
and
Adjustment
6. Turn off the main switch. Then unplug the power cord.
7. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and reassemble the machine.
8. Plug in the power cord. Then turn the main switch on.
9. Select a paper-size type (
SP5-131-001).
10. Specify the device number and destination code of the machine.
NOTE: 1) Contact your supervisor for details on how to enter the device
number and destination code.
2) SC 999 or Fusing Unit Setting Error can be show until the device
number and destination code are correctly programmed.
11. Turn the main switch off and on.
12. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM (
successfully copied them to the SD card.
SP5-825-001) if you have
13. Turn the main switch off. Then remove the SD card from SD card slot 3.
14. Turn the main switch on.
15. Reset the settings for meter charge (
SP5-930-002).
16. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.

17. Do the process control self-check.
18. Do ACC for the copier application program.
19. Do ACC for the printer application program.
SM
3-79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NVRAM on the Controller

1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes
with the machine.
2. Output the SMC data (
3. Turn the main switch off. Then put a blank formatted SD card into SD card slot
3.
5. Copy the NVRAM data ( SP5-824-001) and the address book data in the
HDD ( SP5846-051) to an SD card if possible.
NOTE: 1) An error message shows if local user information cannot be stored in
an SD card because the capacity is not enough.
2) You cannot do this procedure if the SD card is write-protected.
6. Enter SP mode. Then print out the SMC reports (
7. Turn off the main switch. Then unplug the power cord.
8. Replace the NVRAM on the controller. Then reassemble the machine.
9. Check if the serial number shows on the operation panel. ( SP5-811-002).
Input the serial number if it does not show. (Contact your supervisor about this
setting.)
10. Plug in the power cord. Then turn the main switch on.
11. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM ( SP5-825-001) and HDD
( SP5-846-52) if you have successfully copied them to the SD card.
NOTE: 1) The counter data in the user code information clears even if step 11
is done correctly.
2) An error message shows if the download is incomplete. However,
you can still use the part of the address book data that has already
been downloaded in step 11.
3) An error message shows when the download data does not exist in
the SD card, or, if it is already deleted.
4) You cannot do this procedure if the SD card is write-protected.
12. Go out of SP mode. Then turn the main switch off. Then remove the SD card
from SD card slot 3.
14. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.
15. Do ACC for the copier application program.
16. Do ACC for the printer application program.
B202/B178/B180
3-80
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.13.6 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B178R609.WMF
1. Rear cover (
3.5.1)
2. High voltage supply board [A] (All 's, x 8)
3.13.7 SUB POWER SUPPLY UNIT
[A]
B178R586.WMF
1. Rear cover (
3.5.1)
2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit (
3.13.2)
3. Sub power supply unit [A] (All 's, x 3)
SM
3-81
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.13.8 PSU
[A]
B178R611.WMF
1. Left cover (
3.5.2)
2. PSU [A] (All 's, x 5)

NOTE: Make sure that the interlock switches on the PSU operate correctly
after you reinstall the PSU (open/close the left and front doors).
3.13.9 DRIVER BOARD
[A]
B178R612.WMF
1. Rear cover (
3.5.1)
2. Swing out the controller box (
3.13.1).
3. Driver board [A] (All 's, x 4)
B202/B178/B180
3-82
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNIT
3.14 DRIVE UNIT
Replacement
and
Adjustment
3.14.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH
[A]
B178R613.WMF
1. Rear cover (
3.5.1)
3.13.1).
3. Registration clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)
3.14.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES

1. Drum gears (
[C]
3.14.3).
2. Development clutch assembly [A]

( x 1, x 1)
3. Clutch holder [B]
4. Clutch shaft [C] (1 bushing, x 1,
1 hook)
[B]
[A]
B178R614.WMF
SM
3-83
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNIT
3.14.3 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR - CMY

[A]
B178R615.WMF
1. Rear cover (
3.5.1)
3.13.1).
3. Drum gear cover [A] ( x 4, x 5)
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
B178R616.WMF
4. Turn the drum gears [B] counterclockwise. Make sure the shoulder screws
[C][D] are in the three, seven, or eleven o'clock positions.
NOTE: You can align the three corners of each drum-gear shaft to the three
openings on the development-clutch securing plate [E].
B202/B178/B180
3-84
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNIT
[C]
[A]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[B]
B178R617.WMF
5. 4 drum gears [A] ( x 2 for each)

NOTE: 1) Do not move the drum-gear shafts after you remove the drum gears.
2) The print quality can be affected if the teeth on the drum gears are
damaged. Check to make sure that they are not damaged.
6. Timing belt gear [B] (Timing belt x 1, Bushing x 1)
7. Idle gear [C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[H]
[G]
B178R618.WMF
8. 4 gear drive holders [D][G] ( x 1 for each)

9. Development clutch securing plate [H] ( x 8, x 4)
NOTE: Two of the six connectors are on the rear side.
SM
3-85
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNIT
[A]
[B]
B178R619.WMF
10. Development drive motor - CMY [A] ( x 5, x 1, Spring x 1)

NOTE: Remove the three bushings [B] and install the development drive motor
first when you reassemble. Then install the bushings.
3.14.4 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - CMY AND DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - K
1. Swing out the controller box

( 3.13.1)
2. Drum drive motor - CMY [A]
( x 4, x 1)
3. Drum drive motor - K [B]
( x 4, x 1)
[B]
[A]
B178R620.WMF
B202/B178/B180
3-86
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE UNIT
3.14.5 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - K

1. Fusing fan duct (
3.12.13)
2. Development clutch securing plate

( 3.14.3)
3. Solenoid cover [A] ( x 2)
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B178R621.WMF
[C]
2
B178R622.WMF
1
[D]
[B]
4. Development drive motor K [B] (with the fusing clutch [C]) ( x 4, x 2)

NOTE: Remove the bushing [D] and install the development drive motorK
(with the fusing clutch) first when you reassemble. Then install the
bushing.
SM
3-87
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
3.15 TONER SUPPLY UNIT

NOTE: 1) Do not touch the PCU drum. Do not let metal objects touch the
development sleeve.
2) Cover the PCUs with paper or cloth after you remove them. Keep them
in a dark place.
M Toner Supply Unit
[A]
B178R623.WMF
[B]
1. Laser optics housing unit (
3.7.2)
2. All development units and PCUs (

3. Transfer unit (
3.8)
3.10.1)
4. Development clutch securing plate (
3.14.3)
5. Right inner cover with the drum positioning plate [A] ( x 3)

6. M development unit plate [B] ( x 1)
B202/B178/B180
3-88
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
[B]
B178R624.WMF
7. Development unit left guide [A] ( x 1)

9. Registration upper stay [B] ( x 4)
[E]
[C]
[D]
B178R625.WMF
CAUTION: 1) Toner spills out when you remove the toner path cover and toner
supply pipe. Put some paper or cloth under the toner supply unit and
waste toner collection path before you remove them.
2) Use a paper clip or tape to close the pipe after you remove it.
10. Toner path cover [C] ( x 2)
11. Toner supply pipe [D]
12. Toner supply unit [E] ( x 2, x 1)
SM
3-89
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
Reinstalling the M Toner Supply Unit
[B]
[A]
B178R626.WMF
1. Wind the harness [A] on the shaft.

2. Insert the toner collection pipe [B].
NOTE: Make sure that the pipe does not come off the unit.
[C]
B178R627.WMF
3. Remove the toner supply unit bushing [C].
B202/B178/B180
3-90
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
[B]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[A]
B178R628.WMF
4. Install the unit [A] and secure it with the screws.

5. Unwind the harness and connect it.
6. Install the bushing.
7. Connect the toner supply pipe and the waste toner collection pipe [B].
8. Check that the pipes [C] do not come
off the unit.
9. Attach the toner path cover and
secure it with screws.
10. Reassemble the machine.
[C]
B178R629.WMF
SM
3-91
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
C and Y Toner Supply Units
[B]
[A]
B178R630.WMF
1. Development drive motor - CMY (

2. Development unit plates (
3.14.3)
M Toner Supply Unit)
NOTE: Remove the C and M development unit plates to replace the C toner
supply unit. Remove the Y and C development plates to replace the Y
toner supply unit.
3. Development unit left guide (
4. PCU 3C guide rail [A] ( x 2)

NOTE: 1) To replace the C toner supply unit, remove the M PCU guide. To
replace the Y toner supply unit, remove the C PCU guide.
2) Pull the front plate [B] slightly to the front side.
B202/B178/B180
3-92
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
Replacement
and
Adjustment
[C]
[B]
[A]
B178R631.WMF
5. Toner path cover [A] ( x 2)

6. Branch toner path covers [B][C] ( x 1)
NOTE: To replace the C toner supply unit, remove the cover on the right-hand
side [B]. To replace the Y toner supply unit, remove the cover on the
left-hand side [C].
7. Toner supply pipe and toner supply unit (
K Toner Supply Unit

1. K and Y development unit plates (
2. Development unit left guide (
3. PCU 3C guide rail ( C and Y Toner Supply Units)

NOTE: Remove the Y PCU guide.
4. Toner supply unit (
SM
3-93
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TROUBLESHOOTING
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
4.1.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT
SP-3-005-006 (Developer Initialization Result)
Result
Not
performed
Description
Developer
initialization is not
performed.
Possible Causes
When initializing only
the black developer, the
initialization result
becomes 1000.
Successfully Developer
completed
initialization is
successfully
completed.
Forced
Developer
A cover was opened or
termination initialization was
the main switch was
forcibly terminated. turned off during the
initialization.
Vt error
SM
Action
When done in SP mode, do
the developer initialization
again. Reinstall the engine
main firmware if the result is
the same.
Do the following when done at
unit replacement:
Check if a new unit is
installed
Check if the unit detection
system works correctly
Check if SP2-223-001 (auto
initialization at unit
replacement) is enabled.
-
When done in SP mode, do

the developer initialization
again. Reinstall the engine
main firmware if the result is
the same.
Turn the main switch off and

on when done at unit
replacement.
Vt is less than 0.5V 1. Check if the drum stay is correctly set and secured.
and Reset
2. Check if the development unit is correctly set.
development unit 3. Check the following if the problem stays:
is displayed.
Poor connection of connectors
TD sensor defective
Harness damage
BCU board failure
Firmware problem (engine main or MUSIC)
4-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Troubleshooting
No.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
No.
Result
Description
Toner supply During toner fill-up
error
mode, Vt does not
reach the target
value.
Failure
Possible Causes
Action
1. Check if the toner cartridge correctly set.
2. Check if the amount of toner left in the toner cartridge
is sufficient.
3. Check if toner is coagulated. (Shake the toner
cartridge well if it is.)
4. Check if the connectors of the following parts are
correctly set, and/or replace the parts.
Toner attraction pump / Air Pump / Valves
5. Check if the toner supply tube is bent, caught, or
damaged.
1. Shielding tape is not 1. Remove the shielding tape
Vt cannot be
removed.
to supply developer to the
adjusted within 3.0
unit.
0.1V.
2. Development unit is 2. Reinstall the development
SC370 - 373 will
not firmly installed,
unit.
be displayed.
causing poor
Turning the main
connection of the TD
switch off and on
sensor connector.
clears this SC
code.
3. TD sensor defective. 3. Replace the development
unit.
NOTE: The machine starts developer initialization after you set Enable in SP5999-005, 006, 007, or 008. Developer initialization automatically resumes
when you open and close the front door or turn the main switch off and on
if an error other than Error 8 occurs.
B202/B178/B180/
4-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT

SP3-975-001 (Process Control Self-check Result)
0
1
Result
Not
performed
Successfully
completed
ID sensor
adjustment
error
Vmin error
Sampling
data error
Gamma
error
Vk error
6
Vt error
7
SM
Sampling
data error
during LD
power
correction
Forced
termination
Description
Process control selfcheck is not done.
Process control selfcheck successfully
completed.
Vsg cannot be
adjusted within 4.0
0.5V.
Possible Causes
-
Action
Do the process control
self-check again.
-
1. Dirty ID sensor (toner,

1. Clean the ID sensor.
dust, or foreign material)
2. Dirty transfer belt
2. Check the belt
cleaning. Clean or
replace the transfer
belt.
3. Scratched or damaged 3. Replace the transfer
transfer belt
belt.
4. Defective ID sensor
4. Replace the ID
sensor.
Vmin is not within
Vmin is calculated during the self-check. Even when
the specified range. the calculated Vmin value is out of the specified range,
an optimum value is automatically used instead.
Therefore, this error code does not usually occur.
If no problem is observed with image density and/or
development gamma, nothing needs to be done.
If an image problem such as low image density is
observed, check the following points:
Transfer belt / Belt guide plate / ID sensor
1. Check the image
Not enough data can 1. ID sensor pattern
density is too high or
development process
be sampled.
and correct toner
low.
Gamma is out of
density if necessary.
2. Residual image on
range.
2. Check the transfer
transfer belt
0.3 > Gamma, or
belt-cleaning unit.
3. Toner dropped from
6.0 < Gamma
3. Clean the development
development unit
Vk is out of range.
unit and correct toner
4. Scratched or damaged
-150 > Vk or 150 <
density.
transfer belt
Vk
4. Replace the transfer
belt.
1. Development unit not
1. Check.
Vt is out of range.
correctly installed.
0.5 > Vt or 4.8 < Vt
2. Toner density is too low 2. Check and/or correct
or high.
toner density.
3. TD sensor defective.
3. Replace development
unit.
Not enough data can See the possible causes and action for error codes 4,
be sampled during
5, and 6.
the LD power
correction (if LD
Power is set in SP3125-002).
Process control self- A cover was opened or the Do the process control
check was forcibly
main switch was turned off self-check again.
terminated.
during the self-check.
4-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Troubleshooting
No.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.1.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT

SP5-993-007 (Line Position Adjustment Result)
This SP shows the six digits number as a line position adjustment result on the
LCD. It shows which parts of the transfer belt has an error (front, center or rear).
The first and second digits from left-hand indicate the result detected by the front
ID sensor.
The third and fourth digits indicate the result detected by the canter ID sensor.
The fifth and sixth digits indicate the result detected by the rear ID sensor.
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
17
18
19
26
27
28
Result
Successfully
completed
Out of adjustment
range
(over 2 mm)
Calculation Error
Sampling Error
Descending slope
error
Ascending slope
error
Pattern lines
mismatch
(less than 64 lines)
Sampling time-out
Sampling start
error
Pattern length
mismatch
Pattern lines
mismatch
(over 64 lines)
Magnification
mismatch
Description
Data sampling was correctly done and line position
adjustment was successfully completed.
The calculated result for line position correction is
greater than 2.0 mm.
Note
Distance between the lines is greater than 1.4 mm.

Data sampling cannot be done correctly.
The ascending or descending slope of the ID sensor
signal wave is out of specification.
(See Note 1)
(See Note 1)
The detected number of pattern lines is less than 64
lines.
(See Note 1)
Data sampling cannot be done within the allocated

time.
The start mark cannot be detected within the
allocated time.
The pattern length is shorter or longer than specified.
(See Note 1)
The detected number of pattern lines is over 64
lines.
The calculated magnification value does not match

any data in the laser power frequency adjustment
data table.
Toner condition
The machine is in the toner near-end or toner end
condition.
Not executed
The machine is not ready to do the line position
adjustment manually from the user menu.
Potential control
Line position adjustment cannot be done due to
error
failed potential control.
Cyan line error
The necessary mirror angle correction is outside the
adjustment range (cyan only).
Yellow
The detected magnification value is out of the
magnification error adjustment range (yellow only).
Yellow sub scan
The detected sub scan registration is out of the
registration error
adjustment range (yellow only).
Yellow main scan The detected main scan registration is out of the
registration error
B202/B178/B180/
4-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
29
36
37
38
39
46
47
48
49
56
57
58
59
66
67
68
69
76
77
78
79
SM
Result
Yellow skew
correction error
Cyan magnification
error
Cyan sub scan
registration error
Cyan main scan
registration error
Cyan skew
correction error
Yellow & cyan
magnification error
Yellow & cyan sub
scan registration
error
Yellow & cyan
main scan
registration error
Yellow & cyan
skew correction
error
Magenta
magnification error
Magenta sub scan
registration error
Magenta main
scan registration
error
Magenta skew
correction error
Yellow & magenta
magnification error
Yellow & magenta
sub scan
registration error
Yellow & magenta
main scan
registration error
Yellow & magenta
skew correction
error
Cyan & magenta
magnification error
Cyan & magenta
sub scan
registration error
Cyan & magenta
main scan
registration error
Cyan & magenta
skew correction
error
Description
The detected skew correction value is out of the
The detected main scan registration is out of the
adjustment range (yellow + cyan).
Note

adjustment range (magenta only).
Troubleshooting
No.

adjustment range (yellow + magenta).
adjustment range (cyan + magenta).
4-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
No.
86
87
88
89
Result
Yellow & cyan &
magenta
magnification error
Yellow & cyan &
magenta sub scan
registration error
Yellow & cyan &
magenta main
scan registration
error
Yellow & cyan &
magenta skew
correction error
Description
adjustment range (yellow + cyan + magenta).
Note

Note 1: Error codes (05, 06, 07 or 10) stop sampling data at he following time: The
front, center, or, rear ID sensor detect an error. The machine can show the
error codes for all ID sensors in some cases.
Possible causes of errors in the line position adjustment
Possible
Action
Error Code
The pattern does not reach the proper density.
1. Dirty ID sensor (toner, dust, or
04, 05, 06, 07, 1. Clean the ID sensors.
foreign material)
08, 09, 10
2. Incorrect toner density
2. Correct the toner density.
Low: ID sensor cannot detect the
pattern lines.
High: Lines may be partially blank
due to incorrect toner density and/or
paper transfer current.
3. Incorrect transfer current
3. Correct the transfer current.
The ID sensors are affected by electrical noise or dirt/damage on the transfer belt.
1. Scratched or damaged OPC drum 02, 03, 04, 05, 1. Replace PCU
2. Scratched or damaged transfer belt 06, 10, 11, 12 2. Replace transfer belt
3. Dirty transfer belt
3. Clean or replace transfer belt
4. High voltage leak in transfer unit
4. Fix the high voltage leak
5. Residual image on transfer belt
5. Check transfer belt cleaning and
clean the belt
6. Toner dropped from development
6. Clean the development unit and
unit
adjust the toner density
7. Carrier dropped from development
7. Clean the development unit and
unit
adjust the toner density
The transfer belt is covered with toner.
Development does not work correctly. All error codes Check all units and high voltage
cable connectors.
None of the patterns are developed.
Development does not work correctly. 09, 04
Check all units and high voltage
cable connectors.
Some of the patterns are not developed;
Development does not work correctly. 07, 08
Check all units and high voltage
cable connectors.
Possible Cause
B202/B178/B180/
4-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Possible
Action
Error Code
The machine is not in the condition to execute the line position adjustment;
The machine is in the toner near end 13
Replenish toner.
or end condition.
The machine is not ready to do the
17
Wait until machine goes to the ready
line position adjustment manually from
condition from the energy saver or
the user menu.
auto off mode.
Line position adjustment cannot be
18
Fix the problem causing the potential
done due to failed potential control.
control error.
The MUSIC CPU is abnormal (1)
No error code shows. However, the
1. Fix the bias leak and/or replace
machine continues to show
PCU
execution on the screen.
In addition, the green LED on the
BICU stays on or off under the
following condition.
1. The MUSIC CPU resets due to
electrical noise generated by a high
voltage leak on a damaged OPC
drum.
The MUSIC CPU is abnormal (2)
No error code shows. However, the
1. Check the connection between
machine continues to show
the detection board and memory
execution on the screen.
chip.
The green LED on the BICU keeps
2. Replace the toner cartridge.
blinking faintly (this is normal) even
under the following conditions:
1. Poor connection between the toner
cartridge detection board and the
memory chip on the toner cartridge
2. The memory chip on the toner
cartridge fails.
SM
4-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Troubleshooting
Possible Cause
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER TEST MODE
4.2 SCANNER TEST MODE

4.2.1 VPU TEST MODE
Output the VPU test pattern with SP4-907 to make sure the scanner VPU control
operates correctly. The VPU test pattern prints out after you have set the SP mode
settings and pressed the start key.
SP4-907-1 VPU Test Pattern: R

SP4-907-2 VPU Test Pattern: G
SP4-907-3 VPU Test Pattern: B
The CCD on the SBU board may be defective if the copy is abnormal and the
VPU test pattern is normal.
The following can be the cause if the copy is normal and the VPU test pattern is
abnormal:
The harness may not be correctly connected between the SBU and the IPU
The IPU or SBU board may be defective.
4.2.2 IPU TEST MODE

You can check the IPU board with the SP mode menu, SP4-904-1 or 2.
If no error is detected, the test ends. Then the completion code shows in the
operation panel display. If an error is detected, the test is interrupted. Then an error
code shows. The table below lists the completion and error codes.
SP4-904-1 Register Access

There are 16 bits switches in this SP. Each bit indicates each CPU as followings.
The error result is displayed on the operation panel in decimal number.
0: Normal
1: Error
Bit 0: ASIC0 image register

Bit 1: ASIC0 serial register
Bit 2: ASIC1 register

Bit 7: ASIC4 (MC) register
Bit 8: ASIC4 (YK) register
Bit 9 to 15: Not used
SP4-904-2 Image Path

There are 16 bits switches in this SP. Each bit indicates each CPU path as
followings. The error result is displayed on the operation panel in decimal number.
0: Normal
1: Error
Bit 0: ASIC1 to ASIC3

B202/B178/B180/

Bit 6: ASIC2 to ASIC4 (MC)
Bit 7: ASIC2 to ASIC4 (YK)
4-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER TEST MODE
Troubleshooting
Errors may be caused by the following problems:

1) Short circuit on the signal lines
When the IPU board is installed, a pin or two on the ASIC is damaged.
Some conductive matter or object is trapped among the pins.
Condensation
2) Destruction of circuit elements
Over current or a defective element breaks the circuit.
3) Abnormal power supply
The required voltage is not supplied to the devices.
4) Overheat/overcooling
The environment is inappropriate for the board (the scanner unit).
5) Static electricity
Static electricity of a high voltage occurs during the test.
6) Others
The scanner and IPU are incorrectly connected.
When you have completed a check, turn the main switch off and on before you do
another check. When you have completed all necessary checks, turn the main
switch off and on.
SM
4-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4.3.1 SUMMARY
Section 4.4 shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter
(not controller errors) are put into four types. The type is determined by their reset
procedures. The table shows the classification of the SC codes.
Key
Controller
errors
CTL
A
B
Other
errors
Definition
The error has occurred in the
controller.
The error involves the fusing unit.
The machine operation is disabled.
The user cannot reset the error.
The error involves one or some
specific units. The machine
operates as usual, excluding the
related units.
The error is logged. The SC-code
history is updated. The machine
operates as usual.
The machine operation is disabled.
You can reset the machine by
turning the operation switch or main
switch off and on. If the error occurs
again, the same SC code is
displayed.
Reset Procedure
See Troubleshooting Procedure in
the table.
Turn the main switch off and on.
Reset the SC (set SP5-810-1). Turn
the main switch off and on.
Turn the operation switch off and
on.
The SC will not show. Only the SC
history is updated.
Turn the operation switch or main

power switch off and on.
After you turn the main switch off, wait for one second or more before you turn the
main switch on ( SC 672). All SCs are logged. The print log data (SP5-990-004)
in SP mode can check the latest 10 SC codes detected and total counters when
the SC code is detected.
NOTE: 1) If the problem is related to electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then
reconnect the connectors before you replace the PCBs.
2) If the problem is related to a motor lock, first check the mechanical load
before you replace motors or sensors.
B202/B178/B180/
4-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
SC Code Classification
Class 1
SM
Section
1XX
Scanning
2XX
Laser exposure
3XX
Image development 1
4XX
Image development 2
5XX
Paper feed / Fusing
5XX
Paper feed / Fusing
6XX
Communication
7XX
Peripherals
8XX
Controller
9XX
Others
SC Code
100 190 200 220 230 240 260 280 300 330 350 380 400 420 430 440 460 480 500 515 520 530 540 560 570 600 620 630 640 650 670 680 700 720 740 800 820 860 880 900 920 990 -
Detailed section
Scanner
Unique for a specific model
Polygon motor
Synchronization control
FGATE signal related
LD control
Magnification
Charge
Drum potential
Development
Image transfer
Paper separation
Cleaning
Around drum
Unit
Others
Paper feed
Duplex
Paper transport
Fan motor
Fusing
Others
Electrical counters
Mechanical counters
Account control
CSS
Network
Internal data processing
Original handling
Two-tray finisher
Booklet finisher
Error after ready condition
Diagnostics error
Hard disk
Counter
Memory
Others
4-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Troubleshooting
The table shows the classification of the SC codes:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
4.4 SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 101
Exposure lamp
error
The standard white level is

not correctly detected when
scanning the shading plate.
(The shading data peak
does not reach the specified
threshold)
SC 120
Scanner home
position error 1
The scanner home position

sensor does not detect the
on condition during
scanning.
Exposure lamp
defective
Lamp stabilizer
defective
Exposure lamp
connector defective
Standard white plate
dirty
Scanner mirror or
scanner lens out of
position or dirty
SBU defective
Scanner I/O board or
SBU defective
Scanner motor
defective
Harness between
scanner I/O board
and scanner motor
disconnected
Scanner HP sensor
defective
Harness between
SBU and HP sensor
disconnected
Scanner wire, timing
belt, pulley, or
carriage defective
B202/B178/B180
Related
SCs
SC 121
and 122
4-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Troubleshooting Procedure
Type

2. Turn the power key off and on.
3. Check and clean the scanner
mirror(s) and scanner lens.
4. Check and clean the shading plate.
5. Replace the exposure lamp.
6. Replace the lamp stabilizer.
7. Replace the scanner mirror(s) or
scanner lens.
8. Replace the SBU.

2. Check the cable connection between
the scanner I/O board and scanner
motor.
the SBU and HP sensor.
4. Replace the SBU or scanner I/O
board.
5. Replace the scanner motor.
6. Replace the HP sensor.
7. Replace the following:
Scanner wire
Timing belt
Pulley
Carriage
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC 121
Scanner home
position error 2
The scanner home position

sensor does not detect the
off condition during
scanning.
SC
141001
Black level
detection error
SC
141002
Black level
detection error
SC 142
White level
detection error
The black level cannot be

adjusted within the target
value during the zero clamp
after the home position
detection.
The black level cannot be
value during the zero clamp
after the AGC.
The white level cannot be
during auto gain control.
SM
Definition
Related
SCs
SC 120
and 122
Type

the scanner I/O board and scanner
motor.
the SBU and HP sensor.
4. Replace the SBU or scanner I/O
board.
5. Replace the scanner motor.
7. Replace the following:
Scanner wire
Timing belt
Pulley
Carriage
1. Replace the SBU.
Defective SBU
1. Replace the SBU.
Dirty exposure glass

or optics section
SBU board defective
IPU board defective
Exposure lamp
defective
Lamp stabilizer
defective
1. Turn on the main switch off and on.

2. Clean the exposure glass, white plate,
mirrors, and lens.
3. Check if the exposure lamp is lit
during initialization.
4. Check the harness connection
between SBU and IPU.
5. Replace the exposure lamp.
6. Replace the SBU board.
7. Replace the IPU board
Possible Cause
Scanner I/O board or
SBU defective
Scanner motor
defective
Harness between
scanner I/O board
and scanner motor
disconnected
Scanner HP sensor
defective
Harness between
SBU and HP sensor
disconnected
Scanner wire, timing
belt, pulley, or
carriage defective
Defective SBU
4-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
Related
SCs
Type
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 144
SBU
communication
error
IPU error
The SBU hardware is

inconsistent with the
software.
After the command is
written into the DFID selfdiagnosis startup register,
the correct value is not
stored in the register in the
specified duration.
NOTE: This error is
detected when the main
switch is turned on.
After the negate interruption
of FGATE occurs, IPU is not
recognized in the specified
duration.
NOTE: This error is
detected during scanning
operations.
Serial number stored in the
memory does not have the
correct code.
Defective SBU
hardware
Incorrect software
IPU board defective
(defective connection
between ASIC and
DFID, or Defective
LSYNC)

2. Replace the SBU.
3. Update the software.
2. Replace the IPU board.
NVRAM defective
BCU replaced without
original NVRAM
Incorrect DIP-switch
setting
Open the front cover and turn on the

main switch. Check the serial number
with SP5-811-002.
If the stored serial number is incorrect,
contact your supervisor.
For DIP-switch settings, see section
5.10.
SC 161
SC 195
Serial Number
Mismatch
B202/B178/B180
4-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC 201
Polygon motor
error
SC 220
Synch.
detection signal
error 1
220-001: Y
220-002: M
220-003: C
220-004: K0
220-005: K1
SM
Definition
Possible Cause
The polygon mirror motor

does not reach the targeted
operating speed within 10
seconds after turning on.
The lock signal does not
become high within 3
seconds after turning off the
polygon motor.
The lock signal does not
become low within 0.2
second after the polygon
motor reaches the targeted
operating speed.
The front (for K&Y) or rear (for
C&M) laser synchronizing
detector board, (used to
determine the start timing of
laser writing), does not send a
signal while the polygon motor
operates normally and the LD
is on.
Polygon mirror motor

error
Abnormal GAVD
behavior
Cable disconnection
Related
SCs
SC 2211 to 4
Disconnection of the
cable between front
(K&Y) or rear (C&M)
synchronizing
detector board and
the LD unit
Incorrect installation
of front (K&Y) or rear
(C&M) synchronizing
detector board (the
beam does not target
the photo detector.)
Defective LD unit
Defective BCU
Defective +5VLD
circuit
4-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type

2. Check the cables.
3. Replace the polygon motor.

front (for K&Y) or rear (for C&M)
synchronizing detector board and the
LD unit.
3. Check or reinstall the front (for K&Y)
or rear (for C&M) synchronizing
detector board.
4. Replace the front (for K&Y) or rear
(for C&M) synchronizing detector
board.
5. Replace the laser optics-housing unit.
6. Replace the BCU.
7. Replace the PSU.
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC 221
Synch.
detection signal
error 2
221-001: Y
221-002: M
221-003: C
221-004: K
B202/B178/B180
Definition
Possible Cause
Main scan length detection is

not correctly completed ten
consecutive times.
The front (for C&M) or rear (for
K&Y) laser synchronizing
detector boards are used for
the main scan length
detection, which automatically
corrects the main-scan
magnification.
Related
SCs
Damaged or
disconnected cable
between front (C&M)
or rear (K&Y) laser
synchronizing
detector board and
the LD unit
of front (C&M) or rear
(K&Y) synchronizing
detector board (the
beam does not target
the photo detector.)
Defective front (C&M)
or rear (K&Y)
synchronizing
detector board
Defective LD unit
4-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type
After doing one of the following, print ten

jobs or more to see if the same SC code
shows:
2. Check or replace the cableconnecting front (for C&M) or rear (for
K&Y) synchronizing detector board
and the LD unit.
3. Check or reinstall the front (for C&M)
or rear (for K&Y) synchronizing
detector board.
4. Replace the front (for C&M) or rear
(for K&Y) synchronizing detector
board.
6. Replace the BCU.
Do the following as a temporary
measure if you cannot replace the
synch. detector board:
Disable main scan length detection
(SP 2-919-001)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
SC 230
SC 231
SM
Item
FGATE error
230-001: Y
230-002: M
230-003: C
230-004: K
FGATE timeout
231-001: Y
231-002: M
231-003: C
231-004: K
Type
Poor connection
between BCU and LD
units
Defective BCU
Defective LD unit

2. Check the cables between the LD
units and the BCU.
4. Replace the BCU.
Poor connection
between BCU and LD
units
Defective BCU
Defective LD unit

2. Check the cables between the LD
units and the BCU.
4. Replace the BCU.
Possible Cause
The BCU generates the

FGATE signal based on the
registration sensor ON timing.
Then it sends the signal to the
LD units. The LD units send a
feedback signal to the BCU.
When the LD units start
emitting laser beams, the
feedback signal changes from
High to Low.
The SC code generates when
the BCU receives no feedback
signal (stays High) from the LD
unit 1 second after paper
reaches the position where the
laser should start writing.
When LD units emit laser
beams to print a job, the
feedback signal stays Low.
The signal becomes High after
laser exposure for a page is
completed. The SC code is
detected in the following
cases:
When the feedback signal
stays Low 7 seconds after
completing the laser
exposure, or
When the feedback signal
stays Low until the laser
exposure timing for the next
page in multi-page print
mode.
Related
SCs
Definition
4-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 240
LD over
240-001: Y
240-002: M
240-003: C
240-004: K
The power supply for the LD

unit exceeds 110 mA.
SC 260
LD HP sensor
not switched on
(for K only)
During homing, it takes more

than five seconds to switch the
HP sensor on (the sensor
actuator does not cover the
sensor).
SC 261
LD HP sensor
not switched off
(for K only)
After the laser beam pitch is

changed, it takes more than
five seconds for the HP sensor
to switch off.
B202/B178/B180
Related
SCs
LD worn out
(current/light output
characteristics have
changed.)
LD broken (short
circuit)
Defective motor
Defective sensor
Mechanical problem
when switching the
actuator
Brown fuse (FU81) on
the Power supply unit
Defective motor
Defective sensor
Mechanical problem
when switching the
actuator
Brown fuse (FU81) on
the Power supply unit
4-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type
1. Check the sensor actuator position of

the LD positioning motor.
2. Replace the LD positioning motor.
3. Replace the LD home position
sensor.
4. Check and/or replace the PSU.
1. Check the sensor actuator position of

the LD positioning motor.
2. Replace the LD positioning motor.
3. Replace the LD home position
sensor.
4. Check and/or replace the PSU.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
SC 285
Line position
adjustment
(MUSIC) error
Line position adjustment fails

four consecutive times.
SC 370
TD sensor [K]:
Adjustment
error
TD sensor [Y]:
Adjustment
error
TD sensor [C]:
Adjustment
error
TD sensor [M] :
Adjustment
error
Vt error [K]
Vt error [Y]
Vt error [C]
Vt error [M]
During the developer

initialization, the output value
of the TD sensor is out of the
adjustment range (X 0.2V).
NOTE: X is adjusted with
SP3-006-005.
SC 371
SC 372
SC 373
SC 374
SC 375
SC 376
SC 377
SM
During the image

development, Vt value is less
than 0.78V.
Related
SCs
Type
Pattern sampling
error due to
insufficient image
density of patterns
used for the
adjustment
Inconsistency in the
sampling line position
adjustment pattern
due to dust on the
pattern, damage to
the OPC drum,
damage or toner
dropped on the
transfer belt, or a dirty
or defective ID sensor
Poor connection (TD
sensor outputs is less
than 0.5V.)
Defective TD sensor
1. Check and fix the problem that

causes low image density. .
2. Clean or replace the transfer belt
and/or the ID sensor.
3. Replace the PCU or clean the
development unit that causes toner to
drop on the transfer belt.

2. Reset the related color development
unit.
3. Replace the related color
development unit.
Poor connection (TD

sensor outputs is less
than 0.5V.)
Defective TD sensor

2. Reset the related color development
unit.
3. Replace the related color
development unit.
Possible Cause
4-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
SC 380
SC 381
SC 385
SC 386
SC 387
SC 388
SC 389
Item
Black
development
motor error
Color
development
motor error
ID sensor VSG
adjustment
error
Development
gamma error K
Development
gamma error Y
Development
gamma error C
Development
gamma error M
B202/B178/B180
Definition
Possible Cause
When the motor speed is

within the target level, the
motor sends a lock signal
(High to Low at CN214-5) to
the BCU.
SC380 is detected under the
following conditions:
The Lock signal stays High
2 seconds after the motor
turns on.
The Lock signal stays Low 2
seconds after the motor
turns off.
The Lock signal stays High
for more than 2 seconds
while the motor is on.
Vsg is the out of adjustment
range during a process control
self-check.
Adjustment range:
4.0 0.5V
If the following conditions
happen three consecutive
times:
When the development
gamma is out of the
following range:
0.3 6.0
When Vk is out of the
following range:
-150V Vk 150V
Development gamma
calculation error
Related
SCs
Type
Defective motor
Defective BCU

2. Replace the motor.
3. Replace the BCU.
Defective ID sensor
Dirty ID sensor
ID sensor
disconnected
Dirty drum (cleaning
incomplete)
Unsuitable toner
density
Toner supply
mechanism problem
Laser exposure
problem
Image transfer
problem

2. Clean the ID sensor and adjacent
parts.
3. Check the drum cleaning condition.
4. Check the ID sensor connector.
5. Replace the ID sensor.
2. Check the process control self-check
result (SP3-975). If the result is not
1, fix the problem according to the
table in section 4.1.2.
3. Print a full color image by disabling
SC detection (SP5-809-001) and
check if the image quality is OK. If the
image quality is not OK, fix the
problem. Then enable the SC
detection again.
4-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
SC 390
Item
Development
Bias output
error
Definition
Possible Cause
The high voltage supply board

(C/B) checks the circuit and
detects abnormal conditions
such as a voltage leak or no
output condition. If this
happens, the high voltage
supply board sends an error
signal (High to Low at CN204A18) to the BCU.
Loose connection
Defective power pack
C/B output
Damaged cable
Defective
development unit
Defective BCU
Related
SCs
The BCU checks this signal

every 2 ms and generates this
SC code when the error
condition occurs 250
consecutive times.
SC 391
SM
Charge AC:
output error
391-01: K
391-02: Y
391-03: M
391-04: C

sends the feedback signal
(CN228-2 to 5; MCYK). The
BCU checks these feedback
signals every 8 ms. If the
average of the sampled data is
not within the control target 20
consecutive times, this SC
code is generated.
Power pack
disconnected
Charge receptacle or
terminal
Defective PCU bias
input terminal
Incorrect power pack
B/C output
Damaged cable
Defective BCU
PCU not found
4-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type

2. Check if the harness and cables are
correctly connected.
3. Disconnect the high voltage supply
cables from the bias terminals on the
high voltage supply board C/B.
Measure the DC voltage with a multimeter.
Replace the high voltage supply
board if no voltage is supplied.
4. If the result is OK at step 2, check if
the high voltage supply cable or
development unit is grounded.
Replace the high voltage supply
cable if it is damaged.
Replace the development unit if it
is damaged.
5. Check if the PWM signals are sent to
the high voltage supplied board from
the BCU. Replace the BCU or
harness between the BCU and high
voltage supply board if the voltage is
0.
2. Check the connector.
3. Check that the PCU is correctly
installed.
4. Check the PCU charge voltage input
(the spring/conducting shaft) or
replace the PCU.
5. Replace the power pack B/C.
6. Replace the cable.
7. Replace the BCU.
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
SC 392
Air pump motor

error
392-001: MY
392-002: CK
TD sensor error
during warming
up
393-001: K
393-002: Y
393-003: C
393-004: M
Drum motor
error
440-001: Black
440-002: Color
Three consecutive errors are

detected in motor-driver-signal
samples. The samples are
collected every 0.01 second.
The development-unit drive
starts. TD sensor signal is 0.78
V or less.
SC 393
SC 440
SC
460001
Thermistor 1
error (open
circuit)
SC
460002
Thermistor 1
error (short
circuit)
B202/B178/B180
Possible Cause
No drum gear position sensor

signal is detected within 0.8
second (C2a/k: 125 mm/s,
C2b: 162 mm/s) or 2.0
seconds (81 mm/s).
When the temperature
detected by thermistor 1,
which is at the left (fusing unit)
side of the laser optics unit, is
less than -30C for 10 seconds
consecutively, the BCU
determines that the circuit is
open and shows this SC code.
detected by the thermistor 1,
which is at the left (fusing unit)
side of the laser optics unit, is
higher than 70C for 10
seconds consecutively, the
BCU determines that the
circuit is shorted and shows
this SC code
Related
SCs
Type
Damaged cable
Short circuit
Defective motor

2. Replace the air pump.
3. Check the circuit.
Loose cable
connection
Positioning plate out
of place
Defective TD sensor
Development unit not
found
Defective PCU
Defective drum motor
Defective drum gear
position sensor

2. Check that the development unit is
3. Remove the development unit and
check the connector on the rear.
4. Check the positioning plate.
5. Replace the development unit.
2. Check and/or replace the PCU.
3. Check and/or replace the sensor.
Thermistor 1
defective
Cable connection
error
BCU defect
1. Check the cable connections.

2. Replace the thermistor.
3. Replace the BCU.
Thermistor 1
defective
Cable connection
error
BCU defect

3. Replace the BCU.
4-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC
461001
Thermistor 2
error (open
circuit)
SC
461002
Thermistor 2
error (short
circuit)
SC 471
Transfer belt
H.P. error
SC 481
Waste toner
vibrator error
SM
Definition
Possible Cause

which is at the right (paper
feed section) side of the laser
optics unit, is less than -30C
for 10 seconds consecutively,
the BCU determines that the
circuit is open and shows this
SC code.
which is at the right (paper
feed section) side of the laser
optics unit, is higher than 70C
for 10 seconds consecutively,
the BCU determines that the
circuit is shorted and shows
this SC code
The transfer belt HP sensor
signal does not change from
Low to High (home position) or
vice-versa 1 second after the
transfer belt contact motor
turns on.
The waste toner vibrator does

not operate.
Related
SCs
Type
Thermistor 2
defective
Cable connection
error
BCU defect

4. Replace the BCU.
Thermistor 2
defective
Cable connection
error
BCU defect

3. Replace the BCU.
Transfer belt unit not

set correctly
Defective transfer belt
H.P. sensor and/or
transfer belt sensor
Defective transfer belt
contact motor
Transfer belt unit
problem
Loose connector
Defective motor

2. Reset the transfer belt unit.
3. Clean or replace the transfer belt
sensor.
4. Replace the transfer belt contact
motor.
5. Check the contact and release
mechanism of the transfer belt unit.

2. Replace the motor.
4-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 490
Transfer bias /
paper attraction
roller bias leak
error

transfer checks the circuit and
detects current leaks. If this
happens, the high voltage
supply board sends a SC
signal (High to Low at CN2138) to the BCU.
Defective high
voltage supply board
- Transfer
Damaged transfer
belt
Transfer unit
Damaged high
voltage supply cables
Damaged cables
between the BCU and
high voltage supply
board
Defective BCU
Defective paper lift
sensor
Defective tray lift
motor
Defective bottom
plate lift mechanism
The BCU checks this signal

every 2 ms and generates this
SC code when the error
condition occurs 250
consecutive times.
SC 501
SC 502
Paper Tray 1
error
Paper Tray 2
error
B202/B178/B180
When the tray lift motor is

turned on, (if the upper limit is
not detected within 10
seconds), the machine asks
the user to reset the tray. If this
condition occurs three
consecutive times, the SC is
generated.
Related
SCs
4-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type

2. Check the transfer unit and replace
the belt and/or the transfer unit if it is
damaged.
3. Replace the high voltage supply
board - Transfer.
4. Check and/or replace the high voltage
supply cables.
5. Check and/or replace the dc cables
between the BCU and high voltage
supply board.
6. Replace the BCU.

2. Check if the bottom plate smoothly
moves up and down manually.
3. Check and/or replace the paper lift
sensor.
4. Check and/or replace the tray lift
motor.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
SC
503-01
Item
Tray 3 error
(Paper Feed
Unit or LCT)
Definition
Possible Cause
For the paper feed unit:

generated.

Defective tray lift
motor or connector
disconnection
Defective lift sensor
or connector
disconnection
For the LCT:

This SC is generated under
the following conditions:
If the upper or lower limit is
seconds when the tray lift
motor is turned on to lift up
or lower the tray
If the paper stack is not
transported within a specific
number of pulses after the
tray motor and stack
transport clutch turn on to
transport the paper stack
If the end fence home
position sensor stays ON for
a specific number of pulses
after the tray motor and
stack transport clutch turn
on to transport the paper
stack.
SM
Related
SCs
3. Check and/or replace the defective
component.
Type
B
For the LCT:

Defective stack
transport clutch or
connector
disconnection
Defective tray motor
or connector
disconnection
Defective end fence
home position sensor
or connector
disconnection
Defective upper limit
sensor or connector
disconnection
Defective tray lift
motor or connector
disconnection
4-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
SC
503-02
Item
Tray 3 error
(Paper Feed
Unit or LCT)
Definition
Possible Cause
This SC is generated if the

following condition occurs 3
consecutive times.

Defective tray lift
motor or connector
disconnection
or connector
disconnection

When the main switch is
turned or when the tray is set
and if the upper limit is already
detected, the lift motor turns on
to lower the bottom plate until
the lift sensor goes off.
If the motor turns on for 7
seconds or more, the machine
asks the user to reset the tray.
SC
504-01
Tray 4 error (3
Tray Paper
Feed Unit)
B202/B178/B180
For the LCT:

turned on or when the LCT is
set, if the end fence is not in
the home position (home
position sensor ON), the tray
lift motor stops.
generated.
Related
SCs
Type

component.

component.
For the LCT:

Defective stack
transport clutch or
connector
disconnection
Defective tray motor
or connector
disconnection
Defective end fence
or connector
disconnection
Defective tray lift

motor or connector
disconnection
or connector
disconnection
4-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC
504-02
Tray 4 error (3
Tray Paper
Feed Unit)
SC 530
Fusing fan
motor error
SC 541
Heating roller
thermistor error
SM
Definition
Possible Cause

turned or when the tray is set
and if the upper limit is already
detected, the lift motor turns on
to lower the bottom plate until
the lift sensor goes off.
If the motor turns on for 7
seconds or more, the machine
asks the user to reset the tray.
If this condition occurs 3
consecutive times, this SC is
generated.
The BCU does not receive the
lock signal (CN210-B5) 5
seconds after turning on the
fusing fan.
The temperature measured by
the heating roller thermistor
does not reach 7 C for ten
seconds.
Related
SCs
Type
Defective tray lift

motor or connector
disconnection
or connector
disconnection

component.
Defective fusing fan

motor or connector
disconnection
Defective BCU
Loose connection of
the heating roller
thermistor
Defective heating
roller thermistor
Defective BCU

2. Check the connector and/or replace
the fusing fan motor.
3. Replace the BCU.
1. Check if the heating roller thermistor
is firmly connected.
2. Replace the fusing unit.
3. Replace the BCU.
4-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC 542
Heating roller
warm-up error
SC 543
Heating roller
fusing lamp
overheat
Heating roller
fusing lamp
high
temperature
error
Heating roller
fusing lamp
consecutive full
power
SC 544
SC 545
SC 551
Pressure roller
thermistor error
B202/B178/B180
Definition
Possible Cause
When the fusing unit is not

running after the main switch
has been turned on or
recovering, the increment of
the heating roller temperature
per three seconds is 17C or
less. If this condition is
detected five times
consecutively, SC 542 is
defined.
The heating roller temperature
does not reach the ready
temperature while 150
seconds after the heating lamp
has been turned on.
The detected fusing
temperature stays at 250C or
more for 2 seconds.
During stand-by mode or a
print job, the detected heating
roller temperature stays at
230 C or more for 0.2 second.
Heating roller fusing

lamp broken
Defective heating
roller thermistor
Defective BCU

running in the Ready condition,
the heating roller fusing lamp
keeps on with full power for 35
consecutive seconds.
The measured pressure roller
temperature does not reach
7C for 60 seconds.
Related
SCs
SC 552
Type
1. Check if the heating roller thermistor

3. Replace the BCU.
Defective PSU
Defective BCU
SC 553
1. Replace the PSU.

2. Replace the BCU.
Defective heating
roller thermistor
Defective PSU
Defective BCU
SC 543

2. Replace the PSU.
3. Replace the BCU.
Heating roller
thermistor out of
position
SC 555
Loose connection of
pressure roller
thermistor
Defective pressure
roller thermistor
Defective BCU
SC 541
1. Check that the pressure roller

thermistor is firmly connected.
3. Replace the BCU.
4-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC 552
Pressure roller
warm-up error
SC 553
SC 555
Pressure roller
fusing lamp
overheat
Pressure roller
fusing lamp
consecutive full
power
SC 560
Zero cross error
SC 620
ARDF
communication
error
SM
Related
SCs
SC 542
Type
1. Check if the pressure roller thermistor

3. Replace the BCU.

2. Replace the PSU.
3. Replace the BCU.
A
A
Electrical noise in the

supply from the
power cord
1. Replace the PSU.
of ARDF
ARDF defective
IPU board defective
External noise

2. Check the cable connection of the
ARDF.
3. Shut out the external noise.
4. Replace the ARDF.
Definition
Possible Cause
After the main switch is turned

on or the door is closed, the
pressure roller temperature
does not reach the ready
temperature within 210
seconds during fusing unit
warm-up.
The detected pressure roller
temperature stays at 210C or
more for five seconds.
running in the Ready condition,
the pressure roller-fusing lamp
keeps ON with full power for
300 consecutive seconds.
turned on, the machine checks
how many zero-cross signals
are generated during 500 ms.
If the number of zero-cross
signal generated is either more
than 66 or less than 45 and
when this condition is detected
10 consecutive times, this
code is displayed.
After the ARDF is detected,
the break signal occurs or
communication timeout
occurs.
Pressure roller fusing

lamp broken
Defective pressure
roller thermistor
Defective BCU
Defective PSU
Defective BCU
SC 543
Pressure roller
thermistor out of
position
SC 545
4-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
Type
Cable problems
BCU problems
PSU problems in the
machine
Main board problems
in the peripherals

2. Check if the cables of peripherals are
3. Replace the PSU if no power is
supplied to peripherals.
4. Replace the BCU or main board of
peripherals.
Cable problems
BCU problems
PSU problems in the
machine
Duplex control board
problem

2. Check if the cable of the duplex
inverter unit is correctly connected.
3. Replace the PSU if no power is
supplied to the peripherals.
4. Replace the duplex control board in
the inverter unit.
Communication line
error
Logging only.
CTL
Loose connection
between the
controller and the
accounting device

2. Check the connection.
CTL
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 621
Two-tray
finisher/booklet
finisher
communication
error
Bank
communication
error
Duplex unit
communication
error
While the BCU communicates

with an optional unit, an SC
code is displayed if one of
following conditions occurs.
1. The BCU receives the
break signal which is
generated by the
peripherals only just after
the main switch is turned
on.
2. When the BCU does not
receive an OK signal from a
peripheral 100ms after
sending a command to it.
The BCU resends the
command. The BCU does
not receive an OK signal
after sending the command
3 times.
An communication error has
occurred during
communication with the CSS.
The controller sends data to
the accounting device, but the
device does not respond. This
occurs three times.
After communication is
established, the controller
receives the brake signal from
the accounting device.
SC 622
SC 623
SC 630
SC 632
SC 633
CSS
communication
error
MF accounting
device error 1
MF accounting
device error 2
B202/B178/B180
Related
SCs
SC No.
4-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC 634
MF accounting
device error 3
SC 635
MF accounting
device error 4
SC 670
No response
from BCU at
power on
SC 672
Controller-tooperation panel
communication
error at startup
SM
Related
SCs
Type
Definition
Possible Cause
The accounting device sends

the controller the report that
indicates a backup RAM error
has occurred.
The accounting device sends
the controller the report that
indicates the battery voltage
error has occurred.
When the main power is
turned on or the machine
starts warming up from
energy-saving mode, the
controller does not receive a
command signal from the
BCU.
After the machine is
powered on, the
communication between the
controller and the operation
panel is not established, or
communication with
controller is interrupted after
a normal startup.
After startup reset of the
operation panel, the
attention code or the
attention acknowledge code
is not sent from the
controller within 15 seconds.
After the controller issues a
command to check the
communication line with the
controller at 30-second
intervals, the controller fails
to respond twice.
Defective controller of
the MF accounting
device
Battery error

2. Replace the controller board of the
accounting device.
3. Replace the battery.
CTL
Loose connection
Defective controller
Defective BCU

2. Check the connection between the
BCU and controller.
3. Replace the controller.
4. Replace the BCU.
CTL
Controller stalled
Controller board
installed incorrectly
Controller board
defective
Operation panel
connector loose or
defective
The controller is not
completely shutdown
when you turn the
main switch off.

2. Check the condition of the controller
board.
3. Check the condition of the operation
panel.
4. Replace the controller board.
5. Replace the operation panel.
6. Turn the main switch off, wait for one
second or more, and turn the main
switch on.
CTL
4-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 680
BCU/ MUSIC
communication
error
After the engine CPU sends a

message, the Music CPU does
not respond within five
seconds three consecutive
times.
Toner cartridge
memory chip loose
connection
Memory chip problem
Memory chip cable
wiring problem
SC 685
SBU-IPU
communication
error
Loose connection
between SBU and
IPU
SBU board defective
IPU board defective
External noise
SC 686
BCU-IPU
communication
error
During data transfer, a

checksum error occurs.
During any operation except
initialization, the SBU sends
a hardware-reset
acknowledgement to the
IPU.
After the machine is
powered on or recovering
from the power save mode,
timeout occurs during BCU
communication.
The break signal is received
after the communication is
normally established with
the BCU.
Timeout occurs while the
communication with the
BCU is retried after a
communication error.
SC 687
Memory
address
command error
B202/B178/B180
The BCU does not receive a

memory address command
from the controller 120
seconds after paper is in the
position for registration.
Related
SCs
Board connector
between BCU and
controller loose
Board connector
between controller
and motherboard
loose
Board connector
between motherboard
and IPU loose
BCU board defective
IPU board defective
Controller board
defective
Motherboard
defective
Loose connection
Defective BCU
4-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type

2. Check if the toner cartridge is
installed correctly.
3. Replace the toner cartridge.
4. Check if the harnesses are not
damaged.
5. Replace the BCU.
2. Shut out the external noise.
3. Check the cable connection of the
scanner unit.
4. Replace the SBU board.

the board connector and BCU.
controller and motherboard.
motherboard and IPU.
5. Replace the BCU board.
8. Replace the motherboard.

2. Check if the controller is firmly
connected to the BCU.
4. Replace the BCU.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
SC
690001
GAVD
communication
error
690-001: Y
690-002: M
690-003: C
690-004: K
SC 692
GAPCI2C
communication
error
SC 700
ARDF original
pick-up
malfunction
The I2C bus device ID is not

identified during
initialization.
A device-status error occurs
during I2C bus
communication.
The I2C bus communication
is not established due to an
error other than a buffer
shortage.
The I2C bus device ID is not
identified during
initialization.
A device-status error occurs
during I2C bus
communication.
The I2C bus communication
is not established due to an
error other than a buffer
shortage.
After the pick-up motor is
turned on, the original
stopper HP sensor is not
activated.
SC 701
ARDF original
pick-up/paper
lift mechanism
malfunction
SM
The original pick-up HP

sensor is not activated after
the pick-up motor is turned
on.
Related
SCs
Type
Loose connection
Defective BCU
Defective LD
controller board

2. Check the cable connection.
4. Replace the BCU board.
Loose connection
Defective BCU
Defective LD
controller board

2. Check the cable connection.
3. Replace the BCU.
SC 701

4. Replace the pick-up motor.
5. Replace the control board.
SC 700

2. Replace the pick-up motor.
3. Replace the control board.
Possible Cause
Original stopper HP
sensor defective
Pick-up motor
defective (not
rotating)
Timing belt out of
position
ARDF main board
defective
Original pick-up HP
sensor defective
Pick-up motor
defective
ARDF main board
defective
4-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC 722
Two-tray
finisher jogger
motor error
SC 724
Two-tray
finisher staple
hammer motor
error
SC 725
Two-tray
finisher stack
feed-out motor
error
B202/B178/B180
Related
SCs
Type
Definition
Possible Cause
The jogger fences of the

two-tray finisher donot
return to home position
within a specific time.
The two-tray finisher jogger
motor does not leave home
position within a given time.
Stapling does not finish within
150 ms after the staple
hammer motor turns on.
Defective jogger H.P.

sensor
Loose connection
Defective jogger
motor

2. Check the connection of jogger H.P.
sensor and jogger motor connectors
3. Replace the jogger H.P. sensor.
4. Replace the jogger motor.
Staple jam
Loose connection
Overload caused by
stapling too many
pages
Defective staple
hammer motor
Defective stack feedout H.P. sensor
Loose connection
Stack feed-out motor
overload
Defective stack feedout motor

2. Check if the staple hammer motor
connector is correctly connected.
3. Check if the staple jam occurs.
4. Replace the staple hammer motor.

2. Check if the connectors of the stack
feed-out H.P. sensor and motor are
3. Replace the stack feed-out H.P.
sensor.
4. Replace the stack feed-out motor.
The stack feed-out belt H.P.

sensor does not activate within
a specified time after the stack
feed-out motor turns on.
4-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
Type
Loose connection
Defective upper stack
height 1 sensor
Defective shift tray 1
lift motor
Motor overload

2. Check if the connectors of the sensor
and motor are correctly connected.
3. Replace the upper stack height 1
sensor.
4. Replace the shift tray 1 lift motor.
Loose connection
Defective stapler
rotation motor
Motor overload
Loose connection
Defective punch H.P.
sensor
Defective punch
clutch
Defective punch hole
motor
Loose connection
Defective stapler H.P.
sensor
Defective stapler
motor

2. Check if the stapler rotation motor
connector is correctly connected.
3. Replace the stapler rotation motor.
2. Check if the connectors of sensor,
clutch and/or motor are correctly
connected.
3. Replace the punch H.P. sensor.
4. Replace the punch clutch.
5. Replace the punch hole motor.
3. Replace the stapler H.P. sensor.
4. Replace the stapler motor.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 726
Two-tray
finisher shift
tray 1 lift motor
error
SC 727
Two-tray
finisher stapler
rotation motor
error
Two-tray
finisher punch
motor error
The upper stack height 1

sensor is activated
consecutively (detecting
paper) for 15 seconds after
the shift tray starts moving
up.
The upper stack height
sensor 1 is deactivated
consecutively (not detecting
down.
When the upper tray moves
from lower paper exit to the
upper paper exit, the upper
stack height 1 sensor is
activated.
The stapler cannot return to its
home position within a
specified time after the stapler
rotation motor starts rotating.
The punch home position is
not detected within 250 ms
after the punch clutch turns on.
SC 729
SC 730
SM
Two-tray
finisher stapler
motor error
The stapler home position is

not detected within a specified
time after the staple motor
turns on.
Related
SCs
SC No.
4-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
Related
SCs
Type
B
SC 731
Two-tray
finisher exit
guide plate
motor error
The exit guide plate open

sensor is not activated within a
specified time after the exit
guide plate motor turns on.
Loose connection
Defective exit guide
plate open sensor
Defective exit guide
plate motor
SC 732
Two-tray
finisher tray 1
shift motor error
Tray 1 home position is not

detected within a specified
time after the tray 1 shift motor
turns on.
SC 733
Two-tray
finisher tray 2
lift motor error
SC 734
Two-tray
finisher tray 2
shift motor error
The lower stack height 1

sensor is activated
consecutively (detecting
up.
The lower stack height
sensor 1 is deactivated
consecutively (not detecting
down.
Tray 2 home position is not
detected within a specified
time after the tray 2 shift motor
turns on.
Loose connection
Defective tray shift 1
sensor
Defective tray 1 shift
motor
Loose connection
Defective lower stack
height 1 sensor
Defective tray 2 lift
motor
Motor overload

3. Replace the exit guide plate open
sensor.
4. Replace the exit guide plate motor.
3. Replace the tray shift 1 sensor.
4. Replace the tray 1 shift motor.
3. Replace the lower stack height 1
sensor.
4. Replace the tray 2 lift motor.
Loose connection
Defective tray shift 2
sensor
Defective tray 2 shift
motor

3. Replace the tray shift 2 sensor.
4. Replace the tray 2 shift motor.
B202/B178/B180
4-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
Type
Defective transport
motor
Loose connection of
the transport motor
Defective folder home
position sensor
Loose connection of
the holder home
position sensor

2. Check the connection of the transport
motor.
3. Check the connection of the folder
home position sensor.
4. Replace the transport motor.
Defective paddle
motor
Loose connection of
the paddle motor
Defective paddle
Loose connection of
the paddle home
position sensor
Defective stack-tray
upper-roller homeposition sensor
Loose connection of
the stack-tray upperroller home-position
sensor

2. Check that the connection of the
paddle motor.
3. Check the connection of the paddle
4. Check the connection of the stacktray upper-roller home-position
sensor.
5. Replace the paddle motor.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 740
Booklet finisher
transport motor
error
SC 741
Booklet finisher
paddle motor
error
The folder home position

sensor does not turn off
within 2 seconds after the
folder rollers start to move.
The folder home position
sensor does not turn on
folder rollers start
transporting the paper to the
booklet tray.
The paddle home position
paddles start to move.
The paddle home position
paddles start to operate.
The stack-tray upper roller
home position sensor does
not turn off within 2 seconds
after the paddle motor starts
to lower the roller.
The stack-tray upper-roller
home-position sensor does
not turn on with in 2
seconds after the paddle
motor starts to lower the
roller.
SM
Related
SCs
SC No.
4-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 742
Booklet finisher
stapler slide
motor error
The stapler home position

within 1 second after this
same sensor turns on.
The stapler home position
within 1 second when the
stapler is coming back to its
home position.
SC 743
Booklet finisher
front jogger
fence motor
error
The front-jogger-fence
after the front-jogger-fence
motor starts.
The front-jogger-fence
not turn on within 3 seconds
when the front-jogger-fence
motor is driving the fence to
its home position.
SC 744
Booklet finisher
rear jogger
fence motor
error
The rear-jogger-fence
after the rear-jogger-fence
motor starts.
The rear-jogger-fence
not turn on within 3 seconds
when the rear-jogger-fence
motor is driving the fence to
its home position.
Defective stapler slide

motor
Loose connection of
the stapler slide
motor
Defective stapler
Loose connection of
the stapler home
position sensor
Incorrect assembling
of the front jogger
fence
Loose connection of
the front jogger fence
motor
Defective frontjogger-fence homeposition sensor
Loose connection of
the front-jogger-fence
home-position sensor
of the rear jogger
fence
Loose connection of
the rear jogger fence
motor
Defective rear-joggerfence home-position
sensor
Loose connection of
the rear-jogger-fence
B202/B178/B180
Related
SCs
4-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type

2. Check the connection of the stapler
slide motor.
4. Replace the stapler home position
sensor.
5. Replace the stapler slide motor.

2. Check the connection of the front
jogger fence motor.
3. Check the connection of the frontjogger-fence home-position sensor.
4. Replace the front-jogger-fence homeposition sensor.
5. Replace the front jogger fence motor.

2. Check the connection of the rear
jogger fence motor.
3. Check the connection of the rearjogger-fence home-position sensor.
4. Replace the rear-jogger-fence homeposition sensor.
5. Replace the rear jogger fence motor.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 745
Booklet finisher
stack-tray exit
motor error
The stack-tray-belt homeposition sensor does not

turn off within 394
milliseconds after the stacktray exit roller starts to drive
the belts. The stack-tray
exit motor retries to drive
the belts, but the stack-traybelt home-position sensor
still does not turn off within
another 394 milliseconds.
The stack-tray-belt homeposition sensor does not
turn on within 1,084
milliseconds after the same
home-position sensor turns
off. The stack-tray exit
motor retires to drive the
belts, but the stack-tray belt
home-position sensor still
does not turn on within
another 1,084 milliseconds.
Defective stack-tray
exit motor
Loose connection of
the stack-tray exit
motor
Defective stack-traybelt home-position
sensor
Loose connection of
the stack-tray-belt
SM
Related
SCs
4-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2. Check the connection of the stacktray exit motor.
3. Check the connection of the stacktray-belt home-position sensor.
4. Replace the stack-tray-belt homeposition sensor.
5. Replace the stack-tray exit motor.
Type
B
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 746
Booklet finisher
stapler/folder
motor error
The stapler/folder motor

starts. However, the
controller does not receive
the signal from the encoder
sensor within 0.1 second.
starts to drive the stapler
unit, and the stapler switch
is on. However, the
the signal from the home
position sensor for 0.5
second.
The stapler starts to staple
the paper. However, the
any signal from the home
position sensor, and the
stapler switch is off.
starts to drive the folder
rollers. However, the home
position sensor does not
turn off within 9.247
seconds.
The home position sensor
does not turn on within
9.247 seconds after this
same sensor turns off.
Malfunction of the
stapler/folder motor
Loose connection of
the stapler/folder
motor
Loose connection of
the encoder sensor
Defective encoder
sensor
Loose connection of
the stapler switch
Defective stapler
switch
Loose connection of
the stapler home
position sensor
Defective stapler
Loose connection of
the folder-roller
Defective folder-roller
B202/B178/B180
Related
SCs
4-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2. Check the connection of the
stapler/folder motor.
3. Check the connection of the encoder
sensor.
switch.
6. Check the connection of the folderroller home-position sensor.
7. Replace the stapler/folder motor.
8. Replace the encoder sensor.
9. Replace the stapler switch.
10.Replace the stapler home position
sensor.
11.Replace the folder-roller homeposition sensor.
Type
B
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
Type
Defective paper
height sensor
Loose connection of
the paper height
sensor
Defective upper limit
sensor
Loose connection of
the upper limit sensor
Defective lift motor
Loose connection of
the lift motor
of the lift motor
Defective lift motor
encoder sensor
Loose connection of
the lift motor encoder
sensor

2. Check the connection of the paper
height sensor.
3. Check the connection of the upper
limit sensor.
4. Check the connection of the lift motor
encoder sensor.
5. Check the connection of the lift motor.
6. Replace the paper height sensor.
7. Replace the upper limit sensor.
8. Replace the lift motor encoder sensor.
9. Replace the lift motor.
Defective EEPROM
EEPROM not
installed
The finisher controller
cannot communicate
with the punch-unit
controller.
Defective EEPROM
(on the punch-unit
controller)
EEPROM not
installed

2. Check that the EEPROM is installed.
3. Replace the EEPROM.
finisher controller and the punch-unit
controller.
2. Check that the EEPROM is installed.
3. Replace the EEPROM.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 747
Booklet finisher
lift motor error
SC 748
Booklet finisher
backup data
error
Booklet finisher
punch-unit
communication
error
Booklet finisher
punch-unit
controller error
The upper limit sensor

detects the regular tray
while the lift motor is lifting
the regular tray.
The paper height sensor
does not turn off within 10
seconds after the lift motor
starts to lower the regular
tray.
The upper limit sensor does
not turn off within 10
starts to lower the regular
tray.
The paper height sensor
does not turn on within 10
starts to lift the regular tray.
The controller does not
receive the signal from the
lift motor encoder sensor
within 50 milliseconds after
the lift motor starts.
The CPU tries to write data in
the EEPROM three times, but
fails to write data.
A communication-error alarm
is not cleared for 3 seconds.
SC 749
SC 750
SM
The checksum in the backup

data is inconsistent.
Related
SCs
SC No.
4-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
SC 751
Booklet finisher
punch-unit
sensor error 1
SC 752
Booklet finisher
punch-unit
registration
motor error
SC 753
Booklet finisher
punch-unit
punch motor
error
The paper edge and size

sensors receive the 2.5-volt
light or weaker light even when
the source emits 4.4-volt light.
The registration motor
drives the slide unit to the
rear side for 1 second.
However, the home position
sensor does not turn on.
The registration motor
drives the slide unit to the
front side for 1 second.
However, the home position
sensor does not turn off.
The punch motor starts to
drive the punch cams.
However, the controller
does not receive the
encoder-lock signal for 60
milliseconds.
The punch motor start to
drive the punch cams.
However, the home
positions sensor does not
turn on for 250 milliseconds.
SC 754
Booklet finisher
punch-unit
sensor error 2
Watch-dog
error
SC 818
B202/B178/B180
The A/D inputs of the sensor

are not corrected by varying
the D/A outputs.
While the system program is
running, other processes do
not operate at all.
Possible Cause
Related
SCs
Type
Defective sensors
Dirty sensors

2. Clean the sensors.
3. Replace the sensors.
Incorrect assembly of
the registration motor
Loose connection of
the registration motor
Defective home
position sensor
Loose connection of
the home position
sensor

2. Check the connection of the
registration motor.
3. Check the connection of the home
position sensor.
4. Replace the home position sensor.
5. Replace the registration motor.
Malfunction of the
punch motor
Loose connection of
the punch motor
Defective home
position sensor
Loose connection of
the home position
sensor
Loose connection of
the encoder sensor
Defective encoder
sensor
Defective sensor
Dirty sensor

2. Check that the connection of the
punch motor.
3. Check the connection of the home
position sensor.
4. Check the connection of the encoder
sensor.
5. Replace the home position sensor.
6. Replace the encoder sensor.
7. Replace the punch motor.

2. Clean the sensors.
3. Replace the sensors.
3. See NOTE 1 at the end of the SC
table
Software error
4-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CTL
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
SC 819
[696E]
[766D]
[4361]
SC 820
[0001]
to
[06FF]
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
Fatal error
Defective RAM DIMM
Defective ROM DIMM
Software error
Process error
Memory error
System completely down

Unexpected system memory
size
Kernel stop
error
Kernel stop
error
The cache error trap occurs in

the CPU.
Any error in the operation
system (An error message is
output.)
CPU cache error
CPU error
Related
SCs
Type

2. Check and/or replace the RAM DIMM.
3. Check and/or replace the ROM
DIMM.
5. See NOTE at the end of the SC
table.
CTL
CTL
1. Replace the memory.

Defective CPU
Defective memory
Defective flash
memory
Incorrect software
Self-diagnostics error: CPU [XXXX]: Detailed error code
During the self-diagnostic, the
System firmware
controller CPU detects an
2. Reinstall the controller system
problem
error. There are 47 types of
firmware.
error code (0001 to 4005)
depending on the cause of the
error. The CPU detects an
When the problem cannot be fixed with
error and displays the specific
the above procedure, the following
error code with the program
information displayed on the screen
address where the error
needs to be fed back to a technical
occurs.
support center.
CTL
CTL
SC code
Detailed error code
Program address
SM
4-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
[0702]
[0709]
[070A]
CPU/Memory
Error
[0801]
to
[4005]
SC 821
[0B00]
CPU error
[0D05]
Self-diagnosis
error: ASIC
SC 822
[3003]
[3004]
SC 823
[6101]
ASIC error
Timeout error
Command error
MAC address
check sum error
[6104]
PHY IC error
[6105]
PHY IC loopback error
B202/B178/B180
Definition
Possible Cause
Related
SCs
System firmware
problem
Defective RAM-DIMM
Type

software.
3. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
CTL
Same as [0001]
CTL
Self-diagnostics error: ASIC [XXXX]: Detailed error code

The write-&-verify check error
Defective ASIC
has occurred in the ASIC.
device
The CPU checks if the ASIC
System firmware
timer works correctly
problem
compared with the CPU timer.
firmware.
Defective RAM-DIMM
If the ASIC timer does not
3. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
function in the specified range,
this SC code is displayed.
Self-diagnostic error: HDD (Hard Disk Drive)
[XXXX]: Detailed error code
Loose connection
turned on or starting the self2. Check that the HDD is correctly
Defective HDD
diagnostic, the HDD stays
connected to the controller.
busy for the specified time or
3. Replace the HDD.
more.
Self-diagnostic error: NIB
The result of the MAC address Defective controller
check sum does not match the
check sum stored in ROM.
The PHY IC on the controller
cannot be correctly
recognized.
An error occurred during the
loop-back test for the PHY IC
on the controller.
4-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC 824
[1401]
Self-diagnosis
error: Standard
NVRAM
SC 826
[1501]
[15FF]
SC 827
[0201]
[0202]
SC 828
[0101]
SM
Self-diagnostic
Error: RTC/
Optional
NVRAM
Self-diagnostic
Error: RTC/
Optional
NVRAM
Verification
error
Resident
memory error
Check sum
error 1
Definition
The controller cannot
recognize the standard
NVRAM installed or detects
that the NVRAM is defective.
Possible Cause
Related
SCs

2. Check the standard NVRAM is firmly
inserted into the socket.
3. Replace the NVRAM.
Self-diagnostic error: RTC
An RTC device is
RTC defective
2. Replace the NVRAM with another
recognized, and the
NVRAM without RTC
NVRAM with an RTC device.
difference between the RTC
installed
device and the CPU
Backup battery
exceeds the defined limit.
discharged
No RTC device is
recognized.
The RTC device is not
NVRAM without RTC
2. Replace the NVRAM with another
detected.
installed
NVRAM with an RTC device.
Backup battery
discharged
Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM
Error detected during a
Loose connection
write/verify check for the
2. Replace the SDRAM DIMM.
Defective SDRAM
standard RAM (SDRAM
DIMM
DIMM).
The SPD values in all RAM
1. Replace the RAM DIMM.
Defective RAM DIMM
DIMM are incorrect or
Defective SPD ROM
unreadable.
on RAM DIMM
Defective 12C bus
Self-diagnostic error : ROM
The boot monitor and OS
1. Turn the main switch on and off.
Defective ROM DIMM
program stored in the ROM
2. Replace the ROM DIMM
DIMM is checked. If the check
sum of the program is
incorrect, this SC code is
displayed.
Loose connection
Defective standard
NVRAM
4-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
[0104]
SC 829
[0302]
Item
Check sum
error 2
Composition
error (Slot 0)
[0401]
Verification
error (Slot 1)
[0402]
Composition
error (Slot 1)
SC 840
EEPROM
access error
EEPROM read
error
SC 841
SC 850
SC 851
SC 853
Network
interface error
IEEE1394
interface error
Wireless LAN
card not
detected
B202/B178/B180
Definition
Possible Cause
Related
SCs
All areas of the ROM DIMM

are checked. If the check sum
of all programs stored in the
ROM DIMM is incorrect, this
SC code is displayed.
Self-diagnosis error: optional RAM
The result of checking the
Not specified RAM
composition data of the RAM
2. Replace the RAM DIMM.
DIMM installed
in Slot 0 (CN5) on the
Defective RAM DIMM
controller is incorrect.
The data stored in the RAM in
Slot 1 does not match the data
when reading.
The result of checking the
composition data of the RAM
in Slot 1 (CN6) on the
controller is incorrect.
An error has occurred during
Defective EEPROM
1. Replace the EEPROM on the
I/O processing.
controller.
The EEPROM stores three
Defective EEPROM
1. Replace the EEPROM on the
different data in mirrored
controller.
areas.
The network is unusable.
The 1394 interface is
Defective IEEE1394
unusable.
2. Replace the IEEE1394 interface
Defective controller.
board.
The wireless LAN card is not
SC 854
Loose connection
detected before
communication is established,
though the wireless LAN board
is detected.
4-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 854
Wireless LAN
card not
detected
SC 855
Wireless LAN
card error
The wireless LAN card is not

detected after communication
is established, though the
wireless LAN board is
detected.
An error is detected in the
wireless LAN card.
SC 856
Wireless LAN
card error

wireless LAN board.
SC 857
USB interface
error
HDD:
Initialization
error
HDD: Reboot
error
The USB interface cannot be

used due to a driver error.
The controller detects that the
hard disk fails.
Loose connection
Defective wireless
LAN card
Defective wireless
LAN board
Loose connection
Defective USB driver
Loose connection
HDD not initialized
Defective HDD
The HDD does not become

ready within 30 seconds after
the power is supplied to the
HDD.
SC 863
HDD: Read
error
The data stored in the HDD

cannot be read correctly.
Defective HDD
SC 864
HDD: CRC
error
Defective HDD
SC 865
HDD: Access
error
SD card
authentication
error
While reading data from the

HDD or storing data in the
HDD, data transmission fails.
An error is detected while
operating the HDD.
A correct license is not found
in the SD card.
SC 860
SC 861
SC 866
SM
Loose connection
Related
SCs
SC 853
Loose connection
Defective cables
Defective HDD
Defective HDD
SD-card data has
corrupted.
4-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type
CTL

2. Replace the wireless LAN card.
CTL

2. Replace the wireless LAN board.
CTL

2. Replace the USB board.
2. Reformat the HDD.
3. Replace the HDD.
HDD and controller.
3. Check and replace the cables.
4. Replace the HDD.
2. Replace the HDD.
2. Replace the HDD.
CTL

2. Replace the HDD.
1. Store correct data in the SD card.
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 07/05/2006
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
SC 867
SD card error
SC 868
SD card access
error
243-252: File
system error
253: Device
error
Address book
error
SC 870
Definition
Possible Cause
The SD card is ejected from

the slot.
An error report is sent from the
SD card reader.
The SD card is
ejected from the slot.
An error is detected in
the SD card.
An error is detected in the data

copied to the address book
over a network.
Defective software
program
Defective HDD
Incorrect path to the
sever
SC 872
HDD mail data

error

HDD at machine initialization.
Defective HDD
Power failure during
an access to the HDD
SC 873
HDD mail
transfer error

HDD at machine initialization.
Defective HDD
Power failure during
an access to the HDD
SC 880
File format
converter error
Electric counter
error
The file format converter does

not respond.
Abnormal data is stored in the
counters.
Defective file format

converter
Defective NVRAM
SC 900
Related
SCs
B202/B178/B180
4-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Type
1. Install the SD card.

1. For a file system error, format the SD
card on your PC.
2. For a device error, turn the mains
switch off and on.
3. Replace the SD card.
2. Initialize the address book data (SP5846-050).
3. Initialize the user information (SP5832-006).
4. Replace the HDD.
2. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832007).
3. Replace the HDD.
2. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832008).
3. Replace the HDD.
1. Turn the main switch off on.
2. Replace the file format converter.
NVRAM and controller.
3. Replace the NVRAM.
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
CTL
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 07/05/2006
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 901
SC 902
Mechanical
total counter
error 1
Mechanical
total counter
error 2
Printer
application error
The mechanical counter is not

connected.
NOTE: This error is detected
by the North America
model only.
SC 921
Printer font
error
A necessary font is not found

in the SD card.
SC 925
Net file function

error
The management area or

management file on the HDD
is corrupted.
The counter is
manually ejected.
Loose connection
Defective counter
Incorrect DIP-switch
setting
Defective software
Unexpected hardware
resource (e.g.,
memory shortage)
A necessary font is
not found in the SD
card.
The SD card data is
corrupted.
Defective HDD
Data inconsistency
(e.g., caused by
power failure)
SC 990
Software
performance
error
The software makes an

unexpected operation.
Defective software
Software error
SC 991
Software
continuity error
The software has attempted to

perform an unexpected
operation. However, unlike SC
990, the object of the error is
continuity of the software.
Software program
error
Internal parameter
incorrect, insufficient
working memory.
SC 920
SM

printer application program.
Related
SCs
4-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1. Make sure that the counter is
2. Replace the counter.
3. Check that the DIP-switch setting is
correct ( 5.10).
Type
D
CTL
1. Check that the SD card stores correct

data.
CTL
When SC 860-865 keep occurring:

1. Follow the troubleshooting
procedures.
In other cases:
3. Initialize the net file partition.
4. Initialize the hard disk.
5. Replace the HDD.
2. Reinstall the controller and/or engine
main firmware.
3. See NOTE 1 at the end of the SC
table.
This SC is not displayed on the LCD
(logging only).
CTL
CTL
CTL
B202/178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Rev. 07/05/2006
SC TABLE
SC No.
Item
Definition
Possible Cause
SC 992
Undefined error
SC 995
BCU error
SC 997
Application
function
selection error
The application selected by

the operation panel key
does not start or ends
abnormally.
SC 998
Application start
error
No applications start within 60

seconds after the power is
turned on.
An undefined error has

occurred.
The DIP switch on the BCU is
incorrectly set.
Defective software
program
The DIP switch on the
BCU is incorrectly
set.
Software (including
the software
configuration)
defective
An option required by
the application (RAM,
DIMM, board) is not
installed
Related
SCs
Type
CTL
1. Set the DIP switch correctly.

SC 998
Loose connection of
RAM-DIMM, ROMDIMM
Software problem
1. Check the devices necessary for the

application program. If necessary
devices have not been installed,
install them.
2. Check that application programs are
correctly configured.
3. Take necessary countermeasures
specific to the application program. If
the logs can be displayed on the
operation panel, see the logs.
2. Check if the RAM-DIMM and ROMDIMM are correctly connected.
firmware.
D
CTL
CTL
NOTE 1: If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file), the problem may be caused by a software
error. In this case, the following data and information needs to be sent back to your product specialist.
Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken
Summary sheet (SP mode Printer SP, SP1-004 [Print Summary])
SMC - All (SP5-990-001)
SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004)
Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs
All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the problem is logged.)
Image file which causes the problem, if possible
B202/B178/B180
4-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 1
4.5 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 1

4.5.1 IMAGE QUALITY
Work-flow
The following workflow shows the basic troubleshooting steps for the considerable
image quality problems on this product.
Start
Verification of
problem reported
from users
Can the
problem be
duplicated?
Ask customer to
duplicate it.
No
Image Quality?
No
Troubleshoot using
the service manual
or technical bulletin.
No
Troubleshoot
depending on the
type of problem.
Troubleshooting
Yes
Yes
Make copy in the
enlargement or
reduction mode.
Copy
Copy or Print?
Print
Location of
the image problem
shifted?
No
Make a test pattern

in SP5-997.
Colour related?
Possible Symptoms
Yes
Yes
y Vertical white dotted lines

Check the transfer bias or paper
condition.
y Vertical white lines on thick paper
Check the timing when the problem
occurs.
y Dirty lines
Check the transfer belt cleaning section.
y Poor fusing / Fusing offset
Check the paper types selected in the
printer driver.
y Smeared image at trailing edge
Check the fusing unit speed.
y Crow marks
Check the humidity condition and adjust
the transfer bias if necessary.
No problem on pattern
* Font problem
* Image data missing
Especially, problems
related to the above
symptoms and if no
problem is found on the
test pattern, it may be
related to the application
used or driver. Collect a
capture file for further
investigation (select
'Print to File' in the
driver).
B146T901.WMF
B202/B178/B180
4-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
15 February 2005
(From previous page)

A
B
Possible Symptoms
y Colour shift
Check the level of the
colour shift and follow
the troubleshooting
guide if required.
Problem is related to
the scanner section.
Make a test print

from SBU in SP4907 in each colour.
No
Make a test print

from IPU in SP4-417
by selecting related
colour.
Can the
problem be
duplicated?
y Connection of flat cable

between the controller
and laser optic housing
unit.
y Mirror position of related
colour located in the laser
optic housing unit.
y Controller or BCU board
defective
Check the scanner section

(exposure glass, mirrors,
scanner movement, etc.)
No
Check the connection

between the SBU/IPU or
replace the SBU.
All colour?
No
Check Points
Can the
problem be
duplicated?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Colour missing
No
Specify the colour

that caused the
image problem.
Check the image

processing area of
the colour specified
in the previous step
Yes
Check connection
between the IPU/
Controller, or
replace the IPU.
Considerable Symptom
y Faint image (K)
Check the image transfer unit position lever.
y Cyan/Magenta jitter
Check if the registration roller speed is suitable for the type of paper used.
y Toner blasting
Check which colour is blasting and adjust the toner limit or transfer bias.
y Image density change
Check when the problem is reported and follow the necessary steps.
y Dirty Background
Check in which condition the problem is reported, and follow the required procedure.
y Colour vertical bands/lines/dirty background
Check the OPC drum and/or development unit.
y Colour shift
Check the level of the colour shift and follow the troubleshooting guide if required.
y Colour lines/bands/dirty background
When the PCU/development unit is close to its life end, the developer or the cleaning blade of the
PCU wears out, causing vertical colour lines, bands, or dirty background. Check the related colour
unit and replace it if necessary.
B146T902.WMF
B202/B178/B180
4-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.6 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

4.6.1 IMAGE QUALITY
The table below shows the troubleshooting procedure for the following image problems.
Smeared image for 4C thin lines or White lines in solid image areas
Dirty background
Fireflies
Crow marks
Image density change
Toner blasting
Subject
Smeared image for 4C
thin lines or white lines
in solid image areas
Symptom
4C thin lines become
smeared in the paper feed
direction or white lines
appear in solid image areas.
Cause
Spurs are located just before the fusing
section to prevent paper from touching
the fusing unit. When paper touches the
spurs and the spurs do not rotate, the
spurs scratch the mage.
Action
Clean the edges of the spurs and change the
position of the spurs as shown below.
If 4C thin lines become smeared:
B146T903.WMF
If white lines appear in solid image areas:
B146T904.WMF
SM
4-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Subject
Dirty background
Symptom
Dirty background may
continuously appear on the
left side (relative to paper
feed) under very low
temperature and humidity
conditions.
Cause
Action
When the developer has deteriorated or

when prints are made in a very low
humidity condition, dirty background may
appear continuously.
Perform forced toner refresh mode (SP3-921-1 or

2).
The machine automatically does this in the
following sequence. (It takes about 20 minutes to
complete this mode.)
1. Consumes toner in the development unit
without toner supply until toner end is detected.
2. Starts toner recovery mode.
3. Starts process control self-check.
NOTE: It takes about 20 minutes to complete this
mode, to prevent carrier flowing out.
Fireflies

intermittently appear with
originals that have a high
image area ratio after making
multiple prints of originals
with a low image area ratio.
While making prints with a low image

area ratio, the toner-carrier attraction
tends to increase. Then, when a large
amount of toner is supplied under this
condition, the supplied toner cannot be
correctly charged, causing toner to flow
out from the development unit.
Fireflies may appear with

originals that have a high
image area ratio after making
multiple prints of originals
with a low image area ratio.
While making prints with a low image

area ratio, developer is agitated with less
toner supplied. This may cause some
toner to coagulate and harden. Then,
when switching over to originals with a
high image area ratio, this toner may
cause fireflies.
Change the settings of the following SP modes:

SP3-906-1 Job End Process Control Self-check
200 (Default) to 100
SP3-920-3 OPC Refresh Prints
200 (Default) to 100
SP3-920-6 Auto Toner Refresh Mode
0 (Disable) to 1 (Default: Enable)
During the above mode, toner refresh will
automatically be done after job end process
control self-check, and will consume the
coagulated or overcharged toner.
SP3-125-3 Auto TD Adjust
"Disable", "Initial", "Job End", "Initial & Job End"
Making prints with a low image area ratio causes
the toner-carrier attraction to increase, resulting in
low image density. Activating the Auto TD
Adjustment corrects toner density within the target
range; however, it takes up to 6 minutes to
complete the self-check and Auto TD Adjustment.
B202/B178/B180
4-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Subject
Crow marks

(1)
SM
Symptom
Cause
When making duplex prints in

low temperature and humidity
conditions, crow marks may
appear on black images,
especially in halftone areas
on the 2nd side.
A charge is applied to the paper at each

color station in order to attract each
toner onto the paper. Therefore, the
initial toner colors will receive multiple
charging as they pass each station,
which increases the attractive force
between the toner and paper. Since
black is the last toner to be applied, the
attractive force between it and the paper
is lowest. Black toner moves on the
paper during transport to the fusing
section, due to discharge from the toner
to the surrounding guide plates.
Using SP2-301 (Transfer Current), increase the

paper transfer current for black in the mode in
which the problem occurs.
When the machine is tuned

on in the morning (having
been unused for a while), the
ID of the initial outputs may
be relatively low or high, in
which case the machine
needs to compensate by
raising or lowering the ID
during machine operation.
When the machine is off, the

environmental conditions can begin to
affect the machines development
capability. When the main switch is
tuned on, the machine starts a process
control self-check and adjusts the
development parameters to achieve the
proper development potential gap
without adjusting the toner
concentration. Over the course of the
print operation, the ID will then get closer
and closer to the target level.
If this is often pointed out by users who are very

particular about image density, turn on Auto TD
Adjustment (SP3-125-3) as a solution.
4-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action
NOTE: White dotted lines may appear on outputs

if the transfer current is increased too
much. Therefore, after adjusting the
transfer current, it is necessary to check
the results by making a solid or halftone
image in duplex mode.
NOTE: It takes about 5 minutes to complete the

self-check.
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Subject
(2)
Toner blasting
B202/B178/B180
Symptom
Image density is too low or
high.
Toner may blast, causing

smeared text characters
and/or lines in 2C or process
black mode (depending on
the PDL setting or type of
paper used.)
Cause
If the machine has never been turned off
and Energy Saver 2 (Auto Off mode) is
disabled, the machine has never
performed the initial process control selfcheck, causing the image density to
become low or high.
An excessive amount of toner is used for

development.
4-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Action
SP3-906-3 Non-use Time 1
0 (Default) to 999
0 to 2550 (Default: 480)
If Energy Saver 1 is activated (Default: Off), the
non-use time process control self-check will not
function. Therefore, make sure that Energy
Saver 1 is Off (UP mode).
With the above setting, the self-check
automatically starts after 500 prints and after no
prints have been made for 480 minutes (8
hours). Based on the average daily printing
volume of 500 prints, self-check would be
performed first thing every morning. These
settings are suitable for machines, which are
used during the day and then kept On in Ready
status throughout the night. Therefore, this SP
mode should be set based on the particular way
the customer uses the printer.
Change the toner limit setting in SP mode.
If toner blasted images appear for text or lines
in 2C, decrease the setting for Text from 190%
to 150 - 170%.
If toner blasted images for text and lines
recognized as pure image data (i.e. not
processed as text/line data), decrease the
setting for Photo from 260% to 170 - 190%.
NOTE: If the toner limit is lowered too much, it
may cause the density of shadow areas to
be not smooth.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Detailed Explanation
The table below shows the troubleshooting procedure for the considerable image problems.
Subject
Symptom
Cause
Action
Symptoms not related to color

Vertical white dotted
lines
If the paper transfer bias is

excessive for the paper type
used in the low humidity
condition, vertical white
dotted lines may appear.
In the low humidity condition, the

electrical resistance of paper tends to
increase. Excessive paper transfer bias
may cause electrical leak, causing
vertical white lines.
Check if the optional heater has been installed

in the paper tray and it is activated.
In high temperature and

humidity conditions, vertical
white lines may appear in
halftone areas on thick paper
after multiple prints of the
same image.
In this condition, the drum sensitivity

tends to drop. Since the image transfer
efficiency differs between plain and thick
paper, sensitivity drop may cause
changes in image transfer efficiency on
thick paper, causing vertical white lines.
The drum sensitivity recovers, and this symptom

disappears after waiting for about 5 minutes after
this symptom has been observed.
Dirty lines/bands or
background on 2nd
side
The cleaning blade of the transfer belt

cleaning may be worn away or damaged
when the transfer belt cleaning unit
becomes close to its life (500KP).
Check and replace the transfer belt-cleaning unit.
Poor fusing / Fusing

offset
The type of paper selected in the printer

driver does not match the paper type
used for printing, causing the fusing
temperature not to be controlled for the
paper used.
Please instruct users to select the correct paper

type in the printer driver.
The papers trailing edge tends to flip up

and come very close to the fusing belt
after it passes the paper transfer unit.
The static electricity built up on the
fusing belt may cause toner to move,
resulting in the smeared image.
This is most noticeable with 600x600dpi
printing.
Please instruct users to select 1800x600 or

1200x1200dpi.
Vertical white lines
Smeared image
SM
When making prints of an

original with a solid image
near the trailing, a smeared
image may appear.
4-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Customize (decrease) the paper transfer

current for the related mode (SP2-301).
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Subject
Crow marks
Symptom
Cause
Action
When making duplex prints in

low temperature and humidity
conditions, crow marks may
appear on black images,
especially in halftone areas
on the 2nd side.
A charge is applied to the paper at each

color station in order to attract each
toner onto the paper. Therefore, the
initial toner colors will receive multiple
charging as they pass each station,
which increases the attractive force
between the toner and paper. Since
black is the last toner to be applied, the
attractive force between it and the paper
is lowest. Black toner moves on the
paper during transport to the fusing
section, due to discharge from the toner
to the surrounding guide plates.
Using SP2-301 (Transfer Current), increase the

paper transfer current for black in the mode in
which the problem occurs.
NOTE: White dotted lines may appear on outputs
if the transfer current is increased too
much. Therefore, after adjusting the
transfer current, it is necessary to check
the results by making a solid or halftone
image in duplex mode.
Symptoms related to color

Faint image (black)
Only black becomes lighter.
The transfer belt position is not in the

correct position.
Check the transfer belt unit position and/or the

transfer belt unit release lever.
Magenta and/or cyan

jitter
Magenta jitter may appear at

67 mm and/or cyan jitter at
165 mm from the trailing
edge.
If the registration roller speed is too fast

for the paper types used, the shock
when the trailing edge has just passed
the registration roller generates
vibration, causing the jitter.
Adjust the registration roller speed depending on

the paper types and/or mode selected.
This may appear especially when using

thick paper because of its stiffness.
SP1-004-4: Normal paper (1200 dpi)

SP1-004-5: Normal paper (600 dpi)
SP1-005-3: Thick paper (1200 dpi)
If SP1-005-3 cannot improve the level even when
setting it to -1.0, follow the procedure below.
1. Set SP1-005-3 to -1.0.
2. Print the samples by adjusting SP1-004-4 from
100% (-0.2% to -0.8%).
After adjusting SP1-004-4, check the image
quality also with normal paper in the 1200 dpi
mode. Readjust it so that the image quality
level is acceptable for both thick and normal
paper if necessary.
B202/B178/B180
4-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Subject
Toner blasting (1)
Toner blasting (2)
Symptom
Cause
Action
Toner may blast, causing

smeared text characters
and/or lines in 2C or process
black mode (depending on
the PDL setting or type of
paper used.)
An excessive amount of toner is used for

development.
Change the toner limit setting in SP mode.
Black toner may blast on the

2nd side of paper under the
low temperature.
Black toner moves on the paper during

transport to the fusing section, due to
discharge from the toner to the
surrounding guide plates.
Increase the paper transfer current in SP data

from the default setting to a recommended value
depending on the mode selected as shown below.
If toner blasted images appear for text or lines

in 2C, decrease the setting for Text from 190%
to 150 - 170%.
If toner blasted images for text and lines
recognized as pure image data (i.e. not
processed as text/line data), decrease the
setting for Photo from 260% to 170 - 190%.
be not smooth.
SP2-301-3 ([K] Middle speed): 16 to 21

SP2-301-4 ([K] High speed): 27 to 32
SP2-301-16 ([FC, K] Middle speed): 9 to 13
SP2-301-17 ([FC, K] High speed): 15 to 20
be not smooth.

(1)
SM
When the machine is tuned

on in the morning (having
been unused for a while), the
ID of the initial outputs may
be relatively low or high, in
which case the machine
needs to compensate by
raising or lowering the ID
during machine operation.
When the machine is off, the

environmental conditions can begin to
affect the machines development
capability. When the main switch is
tuned on, the machine starts a process
control self-check and adjusts the
development parameters to achieve the
proper development potential gap
without adjusting the toner
concentration. Over the course of the
print operation, the ID will then get closer
and closer to the target level.
4-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
If this is often pointed out by users who are very

particular about image density, turn on Auto TD
Adjustment (SP3-125-003) as a solution.
NOTE: It takes about 5 minutes to complete the
self-check.
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Subject
(2)
Dirty background
Symptom
Image density is too low or
high.

continuously appear on the
left side (relative to paper
feed) under very low
temperature and humidity
conditions.
Cause
If the machine has never been turned off
and Energy Saver 2 (Auto Off mode) is
disabled, the machine has never
performed the initial process control selfcheck, causing the image density to
become low or high.
When the developer has deteriorated or

when prints are made in a very low
humidity condition, dirty background may
appear continuously.
Action
0 (Default) to 999
0 to 2550 (Default: 480)
If Energy Saver 1 is activated (Default: Off), the
non-use time process control self-check will not
function. Therefore, make sure that Energy
Saver 1 is Off (SP5-101-3 or UP mode).
With the above setting, the self-check
automatically starts after 500 prints and after no
prints have been made for 480 minutes (8
hours). Based on the average daily printing
volume of 500 prints, self-check would be
performed first thing every morning. These
settings are suitable for machines, which are
used during the day and then kept On in Ready
status throughout the night. Therefore, this SP
mode should be set based on the particular way
the customer uses the printer.
Perform forced toner refresh mode (SP3-921-001
or 002).
The machine automatically does this in the
following sequence. (It takes about 20 minutes to
complete this mode.)
4. Consumes toner in the development unit
without toner supply until toner end is detected.
NOTE: It takes about 20 minutes to complete this
mode, to prevent carrier flowing out.
B202/B178/B180
4-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Subject
Symptom
Cause
Action
Color Shift
Color shift level is out of the

adjustment standard.
The adjustment standard on this product

is maximum 150 m.
The color shift level may change
depending on a type of paper used.
Check the level of the color shifts reported from

user and follow the troubleshooting procedure
described in section 4- if necessary.
Color missing
Color(s) is missing on the

outputs.
The position of 3rd mirror moves due

to the rough transportation of service
part; and then, becomes out of
position.
When replacing the laser optic housing unit

due to any reason, make a color demo page in
the UP mode. If color(s) is missing, open the
unit and reposition the mirror(s).
Flat cable(s) is not correctly

connected to the BCU board.
Reconnect the flat cable(s) firmly.
SM
4-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Copy Image processing

Symptom
Black image is weaker
when the ACS is on.
Mode
ACS
Cause
The ACS Mode use K toner and CMY toner to
create black images. CMY toner makes black
images weaker.
Action
Specify Black & White in the following menu:
> Copier/Document Server Features > Adjust
Color Image > ACS Priority
Black ballpoint pen

images are colored.
FC
This symptom is caused by the characteristic of

ballpoint pen ink.
Specify Darker level in the following menu:

> Copy Quality > Adjust UCR > Darker
Generation copy makes

less colorful images.
FC
Generation copy is executed in the text mode.

Photo images become less colorful.
Select Photo as the original type.
Maps are incorrectly

colored.
FC
The Map Mode uses CMYK toner to create black

letters. Sometimes black images are somewhat
colored.
Specify Darker level in the following menu:

> Copy Quality > Adjust UCR > Darker
Raise the Sharp level in the following menu:
> Copy Quality > Sharp/Soft > Sharp
Specify Full Color in the following menu:
> Copier/Document Server Features > Adjust
Color Image > ACS Priority
The ACS does not

correctly distinguish
between color and black &
white images.
ACS
Color images are

enclosed by black lines.
Black letters are enclosed
by while lines.
FC,
Text/Photo
When the following originals are used, color

images are sometimes incorrectly taken as black
letters, or black letters are incorrectly enclosed
by white lines:
Outputs from a printer (laser or ink-jet)
Copied images
Raise the Photo level in the following menu:

> Copy Quality > Text/Photo Sensitivity > Photo
Black letters and black

lines are colored.
FC,
Text/Photo
Black letters and lines are colored when the

background of the original is not clear.
Mono color images are

not sharp enough.
B&W,
Text/Photo,
ACS
This symptom is based on the copier

characteristics.
Raise the Text level in the following menu:

> Copy Quality > Text/Photo Sensitivity
NOTE: If you raise the Text level too much, some
weaker images are enclosed by black lines.
Raise the Soft level in the following menu:
> Copy Quality > Sharp/Soft > Soft
B202/B178/B180
Darker images are sometimes incorrectly taken

as black & white images.
4-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Symptom
Mode
Letters are not clear when

the background is shaded.
B&W,
Text/Photo,
ACS

characteristics.
Letters are not clear when

the background is slightly
shaded.
B&W,
Text/Photo,
ACS

characteristics. This symptom tends to occur
when the background is shaded with a rough dot
pattern.
SM
Cause
Action
4-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

Specify the full-color mode when using color originals.
Specify the text mode when using black-and-white
originals.
Specify the full-color mode when using color originals.
Specify the text mode when using black-and-white
originals.
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.6.2 COLOR SHIFT

The following briefly explain the factors causing color shifts and what to do on the machine to correct it:
Temperature change causes the optical components in the laser
optics housing unit to contract, causing the main scan
The black development motor drives the
magnification to change. To correct the line position, the machine
fusing unit pressure roller. The motor
automatically does the line position adjustment when the
speed is adjustable in the SP mode.
temperature changes by 5C since the last position adjustment.
If the line position adjustment functions correctly, no color shift
occurs. If the line position adjustment fails (result: SP5-993-007),
color lines may shift anywhere on the outputs.
The process speed at each stage (registration roller, transfer belt,
and fusing belt/roller) affects the paper transport speed. If the
paper transport speed changes during image transfer of a color,
K
the color line being transferred shifts with respect to the color line
Y
already transferred to the paper. The registration roller speed
C
(adjusted by color development motor speed) and fusing belt/roller
speed (adjusted by black development motor speed) are adjusted
M
The transfer motor drives the
by the manufacturer.
transfer belt. The motor speed
Paper speed may slightly change due to the type of paper used or
is not adjustable.
after replacing the parts related to the drive sections of the
registration section, transport unit, and fusing unit. (After replacing
the fusing unit, the speed adjustment should be done in the User
The color development motor drives
Program mode.) Also, the position where color shift occurs
the registration rollers. The motor
depends on which section starts moving at the incorrect speed.
speed is adjustable in SP mode.
B178T905.WMF
Paper skew directly affects the color shift between the front and
rear sides. There are several factors. One of them is the position of
the side fences.
B202/B178/B180
4-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
As explained on the previous page, there are several types of color shift problem. The following table shows the symptoms,
factors, action required, and the page to see for details.
1
Symptom
Color shift on entire image in
main-scan and/or sub-scan
directions
Factors
Line position adjustment does not
function correctly.
Transfer belt unit has just been
replaced.
Action Required
Check the result of the line position
adjustment (SP5-993-007) and solve the
problem if an error was detected.
Check which color lines are shifted from
black line and adjust the SP modes for
Color shifts only at the

leading edge area
(sometimes causing shock
jitter, magenta or cyan lines)
Color shifts only at the trailing
edge area
Registration roller speed is not

appropriate.
Adjust the color development motor speed

(SP1-004-4, 5, and SP1-005-003) depending
on the process speed.
Fusing belt/roller speed is not

appropriate.
Color shifts between the front

and rear sides
Paper skew on transfer belt

Side fences are not correctly set.
Pressure between the paper
attraction roller and transfer belt is
not even at the front and rear
sides.
Adjust the black development motor speed

(SP1-004-001, 002, and 007, or Fuser
Adjust in the User Program mode) depending
on the process speed.
Reposition the side fences.
Reposition the paper attraction roller unit.
Refer to #
registration and magnification.

2
SM
4-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Adjustment Standard:
Max. 150 m
The flowchart illustrates the procedure to adjust line positions.

NOTE: The allowance of color shift is 150m. Keep the color shift in the range of 0 to
150m.
Start
Print out the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002).

SP2-103-055 (M: [K] 64.3 MHz) is ...
250 or higher
Set the factory settings in the following SPs:

SP2-909-001, 002, and 003
SP2-103-055, 056, 057, and 058
2 mm or more
Set the factory settings in the following SPs:

SP2-909-001, 002, and 003
SP2-916-008, 009, and 010
SP2-103-056, 057, and 058
Less than 250

Print out a pattern with the following settings:
SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"
SP5-997-004 "Full Color"
SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"
How much do the lines shift?

Less than 2 mm
Execute the line position adjustment (SP5-993-002).
Has the SP ended normally?
No
Are the
transfer belt and ID sensors
clean?
Yes
SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"
SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"
Do the lines shift?
No
Replace or clean the

transfer belt and/or the
ID sensors.
Yes
Execute the forced toner-density
adjustment with the following SP:
SP3-126-002
No
Yes
A
End
B146T906.WMF
B202/B178/B180
4-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
A
Main-scan direction
How the lines shift?
When you have come to

this step, the lines shift
0.2 mm or less.
Sub-scan direction
Yes
Are the black

lines and color lines parallel?
Which part
of the lines shift?
No
Whole part
Leading or trailing edge

Yes
Adjust the main-scan registration with the
following SPs:
SP5-993-010
SP5-993-011
SP5-993-012
Execute the line position adjustment with the

following SP:
SP5-993-002

SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"
SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"
Do the lines shift?
Adjust the magnification

with the following SPs:
SP5-993-013
SP5-993-014
SP5-993-015
Leading edges
Adjust the developmentmotor speed with the
following SPs:
SP1-004-005
SP1-004-004
SP1-005-003
SP1-007-001
Check the transfer-belt speed with

the following SPs:
SP5-993-031
SP5-993-033
Leading or trailing edge
Disable the transfer-belt feedback
feature with the following SP:
SP5-995-020
Which
edges of the color lines has
shifted?
Trailing edges
Adjust the development-motor speed
with the following SPs:
SP1-004-002
SP1-004-001
SP1-004-007
Enable the transfer-belt feedback

feature with the following SP:
SP5-995-020
No
No
Adjust the sub-scan

registration with the
following SPs:
SP5-993-016
SP5-993-017
SP5-993-018
SP5-993-019
SP5-993-020
SP5-993-021
Yes
Execute the line position
adjustment with the
following SP:
SP5-993-002
Print out a pattern with the

following settings:
SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"
SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"
and "1200 x 1200"
Do the lines shift?
End
B146T907.WMF
SM
4-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Direction
Sub-scan
Area
Leading
edge
Symptom
Color shift,
especially 100 mm
from the leading
edge.
Possible Cause
Color shift,
especially 100 mm
from the trailing
edge.
(Refer to pattern 2 in
the "How to measure
the gap between
color lines"
described after this
table.)
B202/B178/B180
Output Mode
SP Mode
Procedure / Remarks
Registration roller Normal Paper SP1-004004

speed is not
1200 dpi
suitable for the
paper used.
Normal Paper SP1-004005
600 dpi
Check the magenta line position against the black line.

If the registration roller is too fast or slow, the magenta
line appears above or below the black line.
SP1-005003
When adjusting the speed, change the setting in 0.05

steps, and check the result by printing the grid pattern.
Then, repeat this until the shift between magenta and
black is minimized.
the "How to measure
the gap between
color lines"
described after this
table.)
Trailing
edge
Action Required
Thick Paper
1200 dpi
(by-pass feed)
Above: Speed is too fast: Decrease speed

Below: Speed is too slow: Increase Speed
NOTE: If the registration roller is too fast, magenta jitter

may appear at 67 mm and/or cyan jitter at 165
mm from the trailing edge. This is caused by
the mechanical shock when the trailing edge of
the paper passes the registration rollers.
Fusing roller
speed is not
suitable for the
paper used.

1200 dpi
Check the magenta line position against the black line.

If the fusing roller is too fast or slow, the magenta line
appears above or below the black line.

600 dpi
Above: Speed is too fast: Decrease speed
Thick Paper
1200 dpi
SP1-004007
(by-pass feed)
4-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Below: Speed is too slow: Increase Speed

When adjusting the speed, change the setting in 0.1
steps, and check the result by printing the grid pattern.
Then, repeat this step until the shift between magenta
and black is minimized.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Direction
Sub-scan
Area
Entire
image
Symptom
Color shift on the
entire image, and
the amount of shift
from leading to
trailing edge is
almost the same.
Possible Cause
Action Required
Output Mode
Procedure / Remarks
SP Mode
SP mode setting Normal Paper SP5-993016 (Y)

is not suitable for
600 dpi
the paper used.
SP5-993017 (M)
SP5-993018 (C)
Normal Paper SP5-993019 (Y)
1200 dpi
SP5-993020 (M)
SP5-993021 (C)
Measure the gap between the black line and other

colors (YMC) using a magnification scope.
Convert the measured value from [m] to [dots] with the
following formula. Then, add or subtract the calculated
dot value in the SP mode.
Correction [dots] = Measured value [m] / 21.2 or 42.4
600 dpi mode: 1 dot = 42.4 m
1200 dpi mode: 1 dot = 21.2 m
If color (YMC) has shifted up in relation to black, add the
above value to the current value.
If color (YMC) has shifted down in relation to black,
subtract the above value from the current value.
Examples
If the magenta line has shifted up in relation to black
by 40m in 600dpi mode, add 1 to the current setting
of SP5-993-017.
Correction [dots] = +(40/42.4) = Approx. +1
If the magenta line has shifted down in relation to
black by 70m in 600dpi mode, subtract 2 from the
current setting of SP5-993-17.
Correction [dots] = -(70/42.4) = Approx. 2
SM
4-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Direction
Area
Main-scan Entire
image
Symptom
Color shifts on the
entire image, and
the amount of shift
differs at front,
center, and rear.
Possible Cause
Main-scan
magnification is
not correctly
adjusted.
Action Required
Output Mode
-
Procedure / Remarks
SP Mode
SP5-993013 (Y)
SP5-993014 (M)
SP5-993015 (C)
the How to measure
the gap between
color lines described
after this table.)

Convert the measured value [mm] to [%] with the
value in the SP mode
Correction [%] = Measured value [mm] / 287 x 10000
If the color line is enlarged in relation to black, add the
correction value to the current setting.
If the color line is reduced in relation to black, subtract
the correction value from the current setting.
NOTE: Line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or Auto
Adjust in User Program mode) should be done
to check the result after changing the mainscan magnification data. This is because the
changes will affect the line position adjustment.
Examples
If the magenta line is enlarged by 0.1mm in relation to
the black line, add 4 to the current setting of SP5993-014.
Correction [%] = (0.1/287) x 10000 = Approx. +4
If the magenta line is reduced by 0.05 mm in relation
to the black line, subtract 2 from the current setting
of SP5-993-014.
Correction [%] = -(0.05/287) x 10000 = Approx. -2
B202/B178/B180
4-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Direction
Area
Main-scan Entire
image
Symptom
Color shifts on the
entire image and
amount of shifts is
almost the same at
front, center, and
rear sides.
Possible Cause
Action Required
Output Mode
Main-scan
registration is not
correctly
adjusted.
SP5-993010 (Y)
SP5-993011 (M)
SP5-993012 (C)
SM
The amount of color

shift at the front and
rear sides becomes
gradually bigger
toward the trailing
edge.

Convert the measured value [m] to [dots] with the
dot value in the SP mode.
Correction [dots] = Measured value [m] / 21.2
If color (YMC) has shifted to the left in relation to black,
add the above value to the current setting.
the How to measure
the gap between
color lines described
after this table.)
Front or
rear
Procedure / Remarks
SP Mode
If color (YMC) has shifted to the right in relation to black,

subtract the above value from the current setting.
Examples
Side fence
position
Transfer belt
position
4-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
If the magenta line has shifted to the left by 40m,

add 4 to the current setting of SP5-993-011
Correction [dots] = +(40/21.2) = Approx. +2
If the magenta line has shifted to the right by 70m,
subtract 3 from the current setting of SP5-993-011.
Correction [dots] = -(70/21.2) = Approx. -3
Check if the side fences of the paper trays are
correctly positioned. If there is clearance between the
paper and the side fences, this causes paper to skew
during paper transport.
Check if the transfer belt is in correct position, if the
tension springs are correctly set, or if the paper
attraction roller is correctly installed..
( 3.7.4 Transfer Belt)
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
How to measure the gap between color

lines
Use a magnification scope to measure the

gap [A] between the two lines. Measure the
distance between the same sides of the two
lines. For example (see the illustration),
measure between the left edges of the lines.
Magnification
scope
Pattern 1
Black
line
Color
line
B178T908.WMF
Color shift in the sub-scan direction at the

leading edge
This illustration shows that the colored
(dotted) line is above the black line. This
means that the registration roller speed is too
high for the paper used. Therefore, the
registration roller speed needs to be reduced.
To do this, decrease the setting (percentage)
of SP1-004-004, 005, and SP1-005-003. This
depends on the mode selected.
SP1-004-004 Normal paper,
Color mode, 1200 dpi (81 mm/s)
SP1-004-005 Normal Paper,
Color mode, 600 dpi (C2a/k: 125 mm/s,
C2b: 162 mm/s)
SP1-005-003 Thick Paper (81 mm/s)
B178T909.WMF
Pattern 2
Color shift in the sub-scan direction at the
trailing edge
This illustration shows that the colored
(dotted) line is above the black line. This
means that the fusing roller speed is too high
for the paper used. Therefore, the fusing
roller speed needs to be slower. To do this,
decrease the setting (percentage) of SP1004-001, 002, or 007. This depends on the
mode selected.
SP1-004-001 Normal paper,
Color mode, 1200 dpi (81 mm/s)
SP1-004-002 Normal Paper,
Color mode, 600 dpi (C2a/k: 125 mm/s, C2b: 162 mm/s)
SP1-004-007 Thick Paper (81 mm/s)
B202/B178/B180
4-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B178T913.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Pattern 3
Color shift (magnification change) in the main-scan direction
Troubleshooting
Fig. 1 and 2 shows that the colored (dotted) line has shifted away from the black
line. The amount of shift is not the same as at the front, center, and rear. Both Fig.
1 and Fig. 2 show that the color grid is larger than the black grid. Yellow becomes
larger from left to right in Fig. 1. Cyan and magenta become larger from right to left.
This is because the laser writing direction for B&Y is different from C&M.
B178T911.WMF
Fig. 1 (Yellow)
B178T910.WMF
Fig. 2 (Cyan & Magenta)
Pattern 4
Color shift (registration) in the mainscan direction
Colored line shifts in the main-scan
direction. This keeps the amount of
shift the same at the left, center, and
right.
This is caused by incorrect color
registration.
B178T912.WMF
SM
4-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.6.3 COLOR SHIFT AFTER TRANSFER UNIT REPLACEMENT

Do the following procedure below if the color shift level is not within the target
range (max 150m) after you replace the transfer unit and do the forced line
position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or Auto Color Registration):
Check the color shift level

1. Make sure that OPC Refresh (SP3-920-005) has been done.
2. Print out the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002).
3. Print a 1-dot grid pattern with A3/11" x 17" paper. Refer to the following table
for detailed SP mode settings:
SP5-997 (Test Pattern) Setting
Mode
Normal, color, 600 dpi
Tray
selection
2
2
Pattern
Color mode
Resolution
05
05
Full Color
Full Color
600x600
1200x1200
Paper size
(By-pass)
NOTE: You need to do each adjustment with the paper type normally used by
the customer.
4. Check the tendency of color shift in the grid pattern printed in step 3. At times,
a magnification scope must be used to measure the amount of color shift
between colors.
5. Go to the next step (fusing/registration roller speed adjustment) if the result is
not within the target.
Fusing/ Registration Roller Speed Adjustment

SP mode (sub-scan registration) reset
1. Make sure that the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002) have been printed out.
2. Reset the setting of SP5-993-016 to 021 to "0."
Transfer belt aging

1. Remove all PCUs. Place them on clean sheets of paper. Cover the drums with
a few sheets of paper to keep the drums away from light. Then secure the drum
positioning plate (2 screws). Then return the transfer unit release lever to the
original position.
2. Perform the transfer belt idling with SP5-804-066 (Drum M M CW) for about 3
minutes. (This stabilizes the transfer belt side-to-side movement.)
3. Reinstall the PCUs.
4. Perform adjustments ( 3.10.1).
5. Print a 1-dot grid pattern with A3/11" x 17" paper in 600 dpi mode.
6. Follow the troubleshooting guide if the color shift in the main-scan direction is
not within the adjustment standard.
B202/B178/B180
4-74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fusing roller speed adjustment

1. Do the line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or Auto Adjust in User Program
mode).
2. Print a 1-dot grid pattern for each of the following modes with A3/11" x 17"
paper.
(1) Normal, 600 dpi
(2) Normal, 1200 dpi
(3) Thick, 1200 dpi
3. Do the troubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Trailing edge) if the color has
shifted within 100 mm from the trailing edge.
Registration roller speed adjustment (for color mode)
2. Print a 1-dot grid pattern for each of the following modes with A3/11" x 17"
paper.
(1) Normal, 600 dpi
(2) Normal, 1200 dpi
3. Do the troubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Leading edge) if the color has
shifted within 100 mm from the leading edge.
NOTE: The registration roller speed for by-pass paper feed is the same as for
normal 1200 dpi mode.
Line position fine adjustment for sub-scan

1. Print a 1-dot grid pattern each for each of the following modes with A3/11" x 17"
paper.
Mode
Thick paper
Tray
selection
2
2
0

Color
Pattern
Resolution
mode
05
Full Color
600x600
05
Full Color 1200x1200
05
Full Color 1200x1200
Paper size
(By-pass)
A3 / 11x17
2. Check if there is any color shift from the black line by the same amount all the
way down the page from leading to trailing edge. Follow the troubleshooting
procedure (Sub-scan/Whole image) if there is.
SM
4-75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Troubleshooting
1. Do the line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or Auto Adjust in User Program

mode).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Registration roller speed adjustment (For B&W mode)

1. Input the following values in the SP modes:
SP1-004-006 = (Value of SP1-004-005)
SP1-007-002 = (Value of SP1-004-005)
SP1-005-002 = (Value of SP1-004-005) 0.2%
2. Print a 2-dot pattern (pattern 12) with A3/11" x 17" paper.
Mode
Normal color 600 dpi
Tray
selection
2

Single
Pattern
Color Mode Resolution
Color
12
6 (Black) Single Color 600x600
3. A horizontal band may show at 60 mm (2.76") from the leading edge on A3 (11"
x 17") paper. This depends on the paper used. Decrease the setting of SP1004-006 in 0.05% steps until the problem is solved if the horizontal band shows
on the 2-dot pattern.
B202/B178/B180
4-76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.6.4 BLACK OVER PRINT

Black over print does not let unexpected white lines show when black letters or
lines are printed with color background. You can enable or disable this feature from
the printer driver (default: disabled).
Black over print has the following bad effects when it is enabled:
Crispness may deteriorate because the black toner spreads out.
More toner is consumed.
The background color may be seen through black letters or lines.
[D]
Black Over Print Disabled
1. The color toner (for example,

magenta [B] and yellow [A] toner)
is transferred on the paper [C].
Some space [D] is left blank for
the black toner.
[A]
Y
M
Y
M
[C]
Y
K
2. The black toner [E] is transferred

in the blank space.
An unexpected white line [F] shows if
the line position of the black toner is
not correct.
[B]
[E]
Y
Y
K
M
B178T920.WMF
[F]
Black Over Print Enabled

Black lines and color background are
printed as follows:
[A]
1. The color toner (for example,

magenta [B] and yellow [A] toner)
is transferred on the paper [C].
2. The black toner [D] is transferred
on the color toner.
K
Y
Y
M
Y
M
[B]
[C]
[D]
An unexpected white line does not

show even if the line position of the
black toner is not correct.
Y
M
B178T921.WMF
SM
4-77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Troubleshooting
Black lines and color background are

printed as follows:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
4.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.7.1 SENSORS
Component
Scanner Home
Position
Platen Cover
CN
648-5
Condition
Open
Shorted
Open
648-2
Shorted
Original Width
632-13
632-14
Open
Symptom
SC121
SC120
APS and ARE do not function
correctly.
No symptom
CPU cannot detect the original size
properly. APS and ARE do not
function correctly.
Shorted
Original Length-1
632-8
632-9
Open

correctly. APS and ARE do not
function correctly.
Shorted
Original Length-2
Open
632-3
LD H.P. sensor
220-B12
TD sensor
K: 210-A3
C: 210-B9
M: 209-A19
Y: 210-A9
Transfer belt
sensor
210-A12
ID sensor
Rear: 228-3
Center: 228-4, 7
Front: 228-8
Paper end sensor
Paper lift sensor
Tray1: 205-A5
Tray2: 205-B9
By-pass: 209-A15
Tray1: 205-A2
Tray2: 205-B6
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
B202/B178/B180
SC471
SC385
Open
The Paper End indicator lights even

if paper is placed in the paper tray.
The Paper End indicator does not
light even if there is no paper in the
paper tray.
The bottom plate of the paper feed
unit is not lifted up.
SC501/502
Paper Jam is detected whenever a
print is made.
Paper Jam is detected even if there
is no paper.
print is made.
Shorted

is no paper.
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
205-A8
Shorted
Vertical transport
sensor
SC261
SC260
SC370/371/372/373
SC370/371/372/373 or
SC374/375/376/377
Shorted
Open
Relay sensor

properly. APS and ARE do not
function correctly.
208-B11
4-78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Component
CN
Condition
Open
Registration
sensor
209-B2
Fusing exit sensor
212-A7
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Paper exit sensor
212-B5
Shorted
Paper overflow
sensor
Open
212-A2
Shorted
Toner end sensor
K: 209-A2
Y: 206-A7
C: 206-A4
M: 206-A1
Drum gear
position sensor
K: 213-13
CMY: 210-B12
Belt mark sensor
215-3
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Shorted
Open
Waste toner
sensor
213-4
Shorted
Symptom
print is made.
is no paper.
print is made.
is no paper.
print is made.
is no paper.
The paper overflow message is not
shown even when a paper overflow
condition exists. This causes a
paper jam.
The paper overflow message
shows.
Toner near end may not be
detected even when the toner near
end condition is satisfied.
Toner near end may be detected
even when the toner near end
condition is not satisfied.
SC440
Dancing control does not function.
Waste toner near full message
shows, even when a waste toner
near full condition does not exist.
Waste toner near full message is
not shown even when a waste toner
near full condition exists. This
causes a waste toner leak.
NOTE: The CN numbers are the connector numbers on the BCU.
SM
4-79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Troubleshooting
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
4.8 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

Fuse
Rating
115 V
Power Supply Unit

FU1
15A/125V
CB1
220 - 240 V
8A/250V
FU2
10A/125V
5A/250V
FU91
10A/125V
10A/125V
FU92
10A/125V
10A/125V
FU94
6.3A/125V
6.3A/125V
Symptom when turning on the

main switch
No response (No power is supplied
to the electrical components.)
No response (24V DC power is not
supplied to the all electrical
components.)
24V DC power to the duplex feed
motor, DRB, high voltage supply
board and fusing control is not
supplied. The LED lights. But you
see no other response.
24V DC power to the scanner unit,
finisher and duplex inverter motor is
not supplied.
24V DC power to the BCU and DRB
is not supplied. SC902 (NA)/ SC471
(EU/ASIA) occurs.
Sub Power Supply Unit

FU3
4A/125V
4A/250V
FU101
4A/250V
4A/250V
FU201
6.3A/250
6.3A/250V
No response (No power is supplied

to the electrical components.)
12VE power to the BCU and
controller is not supplied.
5VE power to the BCU and controller
is not supplied.
4.9 LEDS (BCU)

LED
LED 3 (Red)
LED 2 (Green)
LED 1 (Yellow)
B202/B178/B180
Status
Blinking
The Main CPU functions
correctly.
The MUSIC CPU functions
correctly.
The DSP functions correctly.
Stays OFF or ON
The Main CPU does not function
correctly.
The MUSIC CPU does not function
correctly.
The DSP does not function correctly.
4-80
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE TABLES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
!CAUTION
Make sure that the data-in LED (!) is not on before you go into the SP mode.
This LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is
on, wait for the copier to process the data.
5.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

NOTE:
The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only. If

this mode is used by anyone other than service representatives for any
reason, data might be deleted or settings might be changed. In such case,
product quality cannot be guaranteed any more.
Entering SP Mode
"#
1. Press the Clear Mode key.
$%&#
2. Use the keypad to enter 107.
'#
3. Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.

4. Enter the Service Mode.
Exiting SP Mode
SM
5. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
5-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Service
Tables
Exit
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES

Copy SP ...........SP modes related to the engine functions
Printer SP .........SP modes related to the controller functions
Scanner SP ......SP modes related to the scanner functions
Fax SP..............SP modes related to the fax functions
Select one of the Service Program modes (Copy, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from
the touch panel as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode.
This section explains the functions of the Printer/Copy/Scanner SP modes. Refer to
the Fax service manual for the Fax SP modes.
B178S910.WMF
B202/B178/B180
5-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
"
& ' (
)
,
B178S911.WMF
!
"
#
Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then press
(. (The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing (. If not, just
press the required SP Mode number.)
Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal
operation.
&
'
(
Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
)
*
Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).
SM
Closes all open groups and sublevels, and restores the initial SP mode display.
Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.

Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
5-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode
(highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen,
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing

1) In the SP mode, select the test print. Then press Copy Window.
2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings
(paper size, etc.) for the test print.
3) Press Start ) to start the test print.
4) Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat
from step 1.
Selecting the Program Number
Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before you
begin.
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP
that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to show the SP
number that you want to open. Then press that number to expand the list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item
that you want to set and press it. The small entry box on the right activates and
shows the below default or the current settings.
B178S912.WMF
NOTE:
Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings.
5. Do this procedure to enter a setting:

Press " to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter
the appropriate number. The number you enter writes over the previous
setting.
Press ( to enter the setting. (The value is not registered if you enter a
number that is out of range.)
Press Yes when you are prompted to complete the selection.
6. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window
and select the settings for the test print. Press Start ) and then press SP
Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode display.
7. Press Exit two times to return to the copy window when you are finished.
Exiting Service Mode
Press the Exit key on the touch-panel.
B202/B178/B180
5-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NOTE:
You must turn the main switch off and on after exiting service mode to
make the following settings effective.
SP Modes Related to the Engine
SP2-208-009
SP2-213-001
SP2-224-001 to 004
SP5-150-001
SP5-994-001 and 002
SP5-998-001
SP5-999
NOTE:
SP Modes Related to the Controller

SP5-302-002
SP5-801-003 to 013
SP5-824-001
SP5-825-001
SP5-832-001 to 011
If the settings of SP modes 5-993-013 to 015 are changed, these changes

will affect the next line position adjustment.
Service Mode Lock/Unlock
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User
Tool and then set Service Mode Lock to OFF after he or she logs in:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock >
OFF
This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
The CE can service the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is not
necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is
turned on.
2. Go into the SP mode and set SP 5169 to 1 if you must use the printer bit
switches.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
Change SP 5169 from 1 to 0.
Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed
servicing the machine.
The Administrator will then set the Service Mode Lock to ON.
SM
5-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer
cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off.
This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the
permission of the Administrator.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.1.3 REMARKS
Display on the Control Panel Screen
The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is
limited to 20 characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the
screen need to be abbreviated. The following are abbreviations used for the SP
modes for which the full description is over 20 characters.
Paper Type
N: Normal paper
MTH: Middle thick paper
TH: Thick paper
Paper Feed Station

P: Paper tray
B: By-pass table
Color Mode [Color]

[K]: Black in B&W mode
[Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode
[YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan
[FC]: Full Color mode
[FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full
color mode
Fusing Section
H: Heating roller
P: Pressure roller
Print Mode
S: Simplex
D: Duplex
Process Speed
L: Low speed 81 mm/s (for all models)
M: Middle speed 125 mm/s (for C2a/k) or 165 mm/s (for C2b)
H: High speed 185 mm/s (for C2a/k) or 222 mm/s (for C2b)
As shown in the following table, the process speed (mm/s) depends on the model,
the print mode (B&W or Color), resolution, and/or type of paper selected. Some SP
mode settings depend on the process speed.
Mode
Resolution
(dpi)
Line speed
(mm/s)
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
C2a/k: 162
C2b: 222
1,200 x 1,200
162
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
C2a/k: 125
C2b: 162
1,200 x 1,200
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
81
Print speed
(ppm)
C2a: 35
C2b: 45
C2k: 28
C2a: 28
C2b: 35
C2k: 24
C2a: 28
C2b: 35
C2k: 24
17
81
17
B/W
Color
OHP/Thick
B202/B178/B180
5-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Others
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.
FA: Factory setting
(Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory
setting sheets enclosed. You can find it under the jammed paper removal decal.)
DFU: Design/Factory Use only
Do not touch these SP modes in the field.
A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main
switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.
An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this
mode is stored in the NVRAM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to
the default value. BCU and CTL show which NVRAM contains the data.
BCU: NVRAM on the BCU board
CTL: NVRAM on the controller board
The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP
table in the following way.
[Adjustable range / Default setting / Step] Alphanumeric
If Alphanumeric is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the
setting of the SP mode shows on the screen using alphanumeric
characters instead of only numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in
the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers.
SP number set in bold-italic (e.g. x-001-1):
This denotes a Special Service Program mode setting.
SM
5-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
NOTE:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5.2 COPY SERVICE MODE

5.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE
SP1-XXX (Feed)
1001
1001 1
1001 2
1001 3
1001 4
1001 5
1001 6
1001 7
1001 8
1001 9
1002
1002 1
1002 2
1002 3
1002 4
1002 5
1002 6
1003
1003 1
1003 2
1003 3
1003 4
1003 5
1003 6
1003 7
1003 8
[Lead Edge Reg.] Leading Edge Registration

(Paper Type, [Color], Process Speed), Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP, TH: Thick
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch operation
timing for each mode.
Normal [K] L
*BCU [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA
Normal [K] M
*BCU
Normal [K] H
*BCU
Normal [FC] L
*BCU
Normal [FC] M
*BCU
Thick [K]
*BCU
Thick [FC]
*BCU
OHP [K]
*BCU
OHP [FC]
*BCU
[Side to Side Reg.] Side-to-Side Registration
Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for
each mode.
By-pass Table
*BCU [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA
Paper Tray 1
*BCU
Paper Tray 2
*BCU
Paper Tray 3
*BCU [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Paper Tray 4
*BCU
Duplex
*BCU
[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle
(Paper Tray or By-pass, Paper Type, Process Speed), Paper Type: N: Normal, TH:
Thick
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the paper
feed timing.
Paper Tray L
*BCU [-5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Paper Tray M
*BCU
Paper Tray H
*BCU
By-pass N L
*BCU
By-pass N M
*BCU
By-pass N H
*BCU
By-pass TH
*BCU
By-pass OHP
*BCU
B202/B178/B180
5-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
1004
1004 1
1004 2
1004 3
1004 4
1004 5
1004 6
1004 7
[Dev. Motor Speed] Development Drive Motor Speed

([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick
Adjusts the development drive motor speed for correcting color shifts at the leading
edge or trailing edge area.
Black Motor [K]: Adjusts fusing roller speed for the trailing edge area.
Color Motor [YMC]: Adjusts registration roller speed for the leading edge area.
NOTE:
SP1-004-002 and 005 is for color mode. Fine adjustment for B&W mode can be
done with SP1-005-001 and 002.
SP1-004-004 is for normal paper. Fine adjustment for thick paper can be done with
SP1-005-003.
[K] L Normal
*BCU [90.0 to 108.0 / 93.9 / 0.1 %/step]
[K] M
*BCU [90.0 to 108.0 / 93.6 / 0.1 %/step]
[K] H
*BCU [90.0 to 108.0 / 93.2 / 0.1 %/step]
[YMC] L
*BCU [96.00 to 104.00 / 100.00 / 0.05 %/step] FA
[YMC] M
*BCU
[YMC] H
*BCU
[K] L Thick
*BCU [90.0 to 108.0 / 93.9 / 0.1 %/step]
[Dev. Motor Speed2] Development Drive Motor Speed 2

([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> TH: Thick
1005 1 [K]
*BCU [-0.2 to 1.0 / 0.2 / 0.1 %/step]
Adjusts the black development drive motor speed for the B&W middle process speed.
The value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-002 (see the note for SP
1-004).
At the middle process speed, the transfer unit position for B&W is different than for
color mode. The transfer unit position affects the paper transport quality, causing the
paper to flip up at the fusing section if the same speed as color mode is used for B&W
mode. To minimize the occurrence of paper flipping up, which causes smeared
images in the trailing area, this SP mode can change the motor speed in B&W mode.
1005 2 [YMC]
*BCU [-1.00 to 1.00 / 0 / 0.05 %/step] FA
Adjusts the color development drive motor speed for the B&W middle process speed.
1-004).
At the middle process speed, the transfer unit position for B&W is different than for
color mode. The transfer unit position affects the paper transport speed slightly. This
SP mode can adjust the motor speed for B&W mode.
1005 3 [YMC] Thick
*BCU [-0.30 to 0.30 / 0 / 0.05 %/step]
Adjusts the color development drive motor speed for thick paper in by-pass mode.
1-004).
Normal and thick paper are different types of paper, and this sometime causes color
shift due to paper slippage. This SP mode can change the motor speed for thick
paper.
SM
5-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
1005
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
1006
1006 1
1006 2
1006 3
1006 4

([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> SP: Special
Adjusts the development motor speed for special paper.
[K] L Special
*BCU [-4.0 to 4.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
[K] M Special
*BCU
[YMC] L Special
*BCU [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.1 / 0.05 %/step]
[YMC] M Special
*BCU

1007
1007 1 [YMC] Post Card
*BCU [-1.00 to 0.00 / -0.40 / 0.05%/step]
Adjusts the development motor speed for postcards.
1007 2 [YMC] L [K]Thick
[-0.40 to 0.40 / 0.00 / 0.05%/step]
Adjusts the development motor speed in black mode for thick paper.
1008
1008 1
1008 2
1008 3
1008 4
1008 5
1008 6
1008 8
[Drum Motor Speed] Drum Motor Speed Adjustment

Adjusts the drum speed of each line-speed mode (low, middle and high speed); this
adjusts drum speed but not transfer belt speed.
[CL] L
*BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU
[CL] M
*BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU
[Bk] L
*BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU
[Bk] M
*BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU
OHP
*BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU
MUSIC
*BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU
[Bk] H
*BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU
B202/B178/B180
5-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
1104 25
1104
1104 26
1104 27
1104 28
1104 29
1104 31
SM
*BCU
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric
0: ON/OFF Control
1: Phase Control
Selects the fusing control method.

NOTE: This mode can be used only for N. America models
Process Speed
*BCU [0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: Color: Low (temperature specified by SP 1105-8 and 19)
1: Color: Mid (temperature specified by SP 1105-9 and 20)
2: Thick / OHP (temperature specified by SP 1105-13 and 24)
3: B/W: Mid (temperature specified by SP 1105-4 and 15)
4: B/W: High (temperature specified by SP 1105-5 and 16)
5: Color Mid MTH (temperature specified by
SP 1-105-60 and 68)
6: B/W: High MTH (temperature specified by
SP1-105-56 and 64)
Selects the power-on default target fusing operation temperature.
The target operating fusing temperature depends on the process speed. When the
machine is switched on, it starts warming up for the process speed specified in this
SP mode.
[Fusing Stand By]
H: Offset Temp
*BCU [20 to 20 / 15 / 1oC /step]
Sets the heating roller offset temperature for the 1st print condition after the heating
roller temperature reaches the ready temperature.
P: Offset Temp
*BCU [20 to 20 / 5 / 1oC /step]
Sets the pressure roller offset temperature for the 1st print condition after the
pressure roller temperature reaches the ready temperature.
H: Offset Temp
*BCU [20 to 20 / 15 / 1oC /step]
Sets the heating roller offset temperature for the 1st print condition before the heating
roller temperature reaches the ready temperature.
P: Offset Temp
*BCU [20 to 20 / 5 / 1oC /step]
Sets the heating roller offset temperature for the 1st print condition before the
pressure roller temperature reaches the ready temperature.
Temp Control
*BCU [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: off
1: out of FD/FUS S ON
2: on
Selects the temperature control.
5-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
1104
[Fusing Control]
1104 1 Control Method
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 02/2006
1105
[Fusing Temperature]
(Heating or Pressure roller: Paper Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex, Process Speed)
Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP. MTH: Middle Thick, TH: Thick, SP: Special
Some settings of fusing temperature depend on the destination (US or Europe/Asia).
US: Setting for US, EU: Setting for Europe/Asia
1105 1 H: Ready
*BCU [10 to 100 / 10 / 1oC/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for the print ready condition.
After the main switch has been turned on, the machine enters the print ready
condition when the heating roller temperature reaches the temperature specified in
this SP mode.
When the machine is in the recovery mode from the energy saver or auto off mode,
the machine becomes ready when both heating and pressure roller temperatures
reach the specified temperature.
Ready temperature = (Target temperature specified in SP1-104-25 or 105-4 to 30)
Temperature specified in this SP mode.
1105 2 P: Ready
*BCU [10 to 100 / 30 / 1oC/step]
Sets the pressure roller temperature for the printing ready condition.
Ready temperature = (Target temperature specified in SP1-104-25 or 105-4 to 30)
Temperature specified in this SP mode
The following SPs set the target operating temperatures of the heating and pressure
rollers in various modes. (The default settings are different for C2a and C2b)
1105 4 H:N [K] S M
*BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 140, C2b: 160 / 5C/step]
1105 5 H:N [K] S H
1105 6 H:N [K] D M
1105 7 H:N [K] D H
1105 8 H:N[FC] S L
*BCU [100 to 190 / 135 / 5C/step]
1105 9 H:N[FC] S M
*BCU [100 to 190 / 140 / 5C/step]
1105 10 H:N[FC] D L
*BCU [100 to 190 / 135 / 5C/step]
1105 11 H:N[FC] D M
1105 13 H:OHP
*BCU [100 to 190 / 145 / 5C/step]
1105 15 P:N [K] S M
1105 16 P:N [K] S H
1105 17 P:N [K] D M
1105 18 P:N [K] D H
1105 19 P:N[FC] S L
*BCU [0 to 190 / 130 / 5C/step]
1105 20 P:N[FC] S M
1105 21 P:N[FC] D L
*BCU [0 to 190 / 130 / 5C/step]
1105 22 P:N[FC] D M
1105 24 P:OHP
*BCU [0 to 190 / 130 / 5C/step]
1105 26 H:TH
*BCU [0 to 190 / 155 / 5C/step]
1105 28 P:TH
*BCU [0 to 190 / 5C/step] 155 for (B180)
150 for (B178, B202)
1105 29 H:Envelope
*BCU [ 0 to 190 / 155 / 5C/step]
1105 30 P:Envelope
*BCU [0 to 190 / 135 / 5C/step]
1105 31 H: Slow Down
*BCU [1 to 20 / 5 / 1C/step]
Sets the heating roller temperature for the printing start condition when changing the
process speed.
Fusing temperature must be decreased when the machine changes to a process
speed that is slower than the current process speed (for example, when the speed
changes from high speed to low speed). The machine idles while reducing the fusing
temperature. When the fusing temperature becomes lower than the ready
temperature, the machine starts printing.
Ready Temperature = Target temperature + Temperature specified in this SP mode.
B202/B178/B180
5-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1105
1105 32
1105 33
1105 34
1105 35
1105 36
1105 37
1105 38
1105 55
1105 56
1105 57
1105 58
1105 59
1105 60
1105 61
1105 62
1105 63
1105 64
1105 65
1105 66
1105 67
1105 68
1105 69
1105 70
[Fusing Temperature]
(Heating or Pressure roller: Paper Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex, Process Speed)
Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP. MTH: Middle Thick, TH: Thick, SP: Special
Some settings of fusing temperature depend on the destination (US or Europe/Asia).
US: Setting for US, EU: Setting for Europe/Asia
P: Slow Down
*BCU
[1 to 20 / 10 / 1C/step]
Sets the pressure roller temperature for the printing start condition when changing the
process speed.
H:SP L
*BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1C/step]
H:SP M
*BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1C/step]
H:SP H
*BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1C/step]
P:SP L
*BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1C/step]
P:SP M
*BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1C/step]
P:SP H
*BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1C/step]
H: MTH [K] S M
H: MTH [K] S H
H: MTH [K] D M
H: MTH [K] D H
H: MTH [FC] S L
*BCU [100 to 190 / 140 / 5C/step]
H: MTH [FC] S M
H: MTH [FC] D L
*BCU [100 to 190 / 140 / 5C/step]
H: MTH [FC] D M
P: MTH [K] S M
P: MTH [K] S H
*BCU [100 to 190 / 150 / 5C/step]
P: MTH [K] D M
P: MTH [K] D H
*BCU [100 to 190 / 150 / 5C/step]
P: MTH [FC] S L
*BCU [100 to 190 / 135 / 5C/step]
P: MTH [FC] S M
P: MTH [FC] D L
*BCU [100 to 190 / 135 / 5C/step]
P: MTH [FC] D M
[Temperature Display] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure)

Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers.
1106 1 Heat Roller
[0 to 230 / - / 5C/step]
1106 2 Pressure Roller
1106
SM
5-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 02/2006
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 02/2006
[Paper Size] Tray Paper Size

1902
1902 1 Tray 1 A4/LT
*BCU
Specifies the paper size for tray 1.

1902 2 Tray 2 B4/LG
*BCU

1902 3 Tray 2 A4/LT
*BCU

1902 4 Tray 2 B5/LT
*BCU
0: A4 sideways, 1: LT sideways
Tray 1 can only use these two sizes.
US: 1 FA
0: B4 lengthwise, 1: LG lengthwise
This specifies which size is detected for a
sensor output of 1101 (see section 6 for
details).
US: 1 FA
0: A4 lengthwise, 1: LT lengthwise
details).
US: 1 FA
0: LT, 1: B5 lengthwise
details).

1902 5 Fix Size
*BCU
0: OFF, 1: ON
ON: The by-pass tray automatically detects the
paper size and orientation. The process speed
is decreased to 1/2.
OFF: The by-pass tray does not detect the
paper size. The process speed stays at normal
speed.
Turns On or Off auto paper size diction for the by-pass tray
1910
[Fusing Idling Time]

Specifies the timer for deciding whether to do fusing idling when receiving a print
command.
When receiving a new job within the time specified in this SP mode after the last job
is completed, fusing idling is not done because the fusing section was already
warmed up during the last job.
1910 1 Idling Time
*BCU [0 to 180 / 1 / 1 minute/step] DFU
B202/B178/B180
5-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 02/2006
1912 1
1912 2
1912 3
1912 4
1912 5
1912 6
1912 7
1913
1913 1
1913 2
1913 3
1913 4
1913 5
1913 6
1913 7
1913 8
1913 9
1913 10
SM
[Machine Temp. Cor.] Machine Temperature Correction

Th: Threshold, Heating or Pressure roller
Corrects the fusing temperature depending on the temperature inside the machine.
If the temperature inside the machine is too high or low, this may cause hot or cold
offset image at the fusing section. To avoid the offset image, the fusing temperature is
corrected depending on the temperature inside machine. This is monitored by the
thermistor located on the right side of the laser optics-housing unit.
If the temperature inside the machine is detected as high or low (based on the
settings of SP1-912-001 or 002), the fusing temperature is decreased or increased by
the temperature specified in SP1-912-003 to 006.
Also, see SP 1-917-1.
Th:High Temp
*BCU [0 to 50 / 30 / 1C/step]
Sets the threshold for entering the high temperature condition.
Th:Low Temp
*BCU [0 to 50 / 17 / 1C/step]
Sets the threshold for entering the low temperature condition.
H:High Temp
*BCU [0 to 15 / 0 / 1C/step]
Sets the fusing temperature decrease for the high temperature condition.
P:High Temp
*BCU [0 to 15 / 0 / 1C/step]
H:Low Temp
*BCU [0 to 15 / 5 / 1C/step]
Sets the fusing temperature increase for the low temperature condition.
P:Low Temp
*BCU [0 to 15 / 5 / 1C/step]
H: Temp Control
*BCU [10 to 50 / 34 / 1C/step]
Decreases the fusing temperature by 10 C if the temperature inside machine, which
is monitored by the thermistor located on the left side of the laser optics housing unit,
reaches the set temperature in this SP.
[Temperature. Cor. 1] Fusing Temperature Correction (Correction Timing)
Specifies the number of sheets to determine whether or not to apply the fusing
temperature correction.
During a multi print job, the fusing temperature tends to slightly overshoot around the
10th sheet and then stabilize. Temperature overshooting may cause the glossiness to
increase.
To minimize the overshooting, both fusing and pressure roller temperatures are
decreased by the amount specified in SP1-914 at the number of sheets specified in
this SP mode, until the end of the job.
The temperatures are decreased in two steps.
Example: Middle speed
First step (also called Mode 1): After 5 sheets (SP 1-913-2), temperature drops by
5C (SP 1-914-2).
Second step (also called Mode 2): After 20 sheets (SP 1-913-7), temperature drops
by 10C (SP 1-914-7).
Narrow: LT/A4 SEF width or less
Wide: Wider than LT/A4 SEF
Mode 1 H
*BCU
[0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
Mode 1 M
*BCU
[0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
Mode 1 L
*BCU
[0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
Mode 1 OHP narrow
*BCU
[0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
Mode 1 H wide
*BCU
[0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
Mode 2 H
*BCU
[0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
Mode 2 M
*BCU
[0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
Mode 2 L
*BCU
[0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
Mode 2 H narrow
*BCU
[0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
Mode 2 H wide
*BCU
[0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
5-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
1912
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
1914
1914 1
1914 2
1914 3
1914 4
1914 5
1914 6
1914 7
1914 8
1914 9
1914 10
Rev. 02/2006
[Temperature Cor. 2] Fusing Temperature Correction (Temperature Setting)

Specifies the temperature to be subtracted from the targeted temperatures specified
in SP1-105-4 to-30.
Narrow: LT/A4 SEF width or less
Wide: Wider than LT/A4 SEF
Temp 1 H
*BCU [0 to 20 / C2a/k: 0, C2b: 5 / 5C /step]
Temp 1 M
*BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5C /step]
Temp 1 L
*BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5C /step]
Temp 1 OHP narrow
*BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5C /step]
Temp 1 OHP wide
*BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5C /step]
Temp 2 H
*BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5C /step]
Temp 2 M
*BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5C /step]
Temp 2 L
*BCU [0 to 20 / 0/ 5C /step]
Temp 2 OHP narrow
*BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5C /step]
Temp 2 OHP wide
*BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5C /step]
1915
[Stand-by Time]
1915 1 Job Receiving
[0 to 180 / 60 / 10 seconds/step]
0: The machine does not shift to the stand-by
mode.
Specifies the time to shift the machine into the stand-by mode when not receiving a
print start command after receiving a print preparation command.
1915 2 Job End
*BCU [0 to 180 / 30 / 10 seconds/step]
0: The machine does not shift to the stand-by
mode.
Specifies the time to shift the machine into the stand-by mode after the last job is
completed.
B202/B178/B180
*BCU
5-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 02/2006
1916
1916 2
1916 3
1916 4
1916 5
*BCU
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
1: On
Executes the extra idling operation after the fusing unit becomes ready just after the
main switch has been turned on.
Idling Time
*BCU [10 to 120 / 30 / 10 sec/step]
Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed.
Pre-Job Mode
*BCU [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
1: On (4 sec)
2: On (Specifies the extra idling operation time
set with SP 1916 7)
Executes the extra idling operation after the fusing unit becomes ready when a print
job arrives at the copier.
Idling Time
*BCU [0 to 360 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed when special paper is used
and the line speed is 185 mm/s.
Pre Job Mode
*BCU [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: H: on, M: off
1: H: on, M: on
2: H: off, M: on
3: H: off, M: off
Executes the idling operation if the process speed of a job meets this setting
(combination between high and middle speed) after meeting following conditions. The
idling operation continues until the fusing temperature reaches the printing ready
condition.
Turning the main power on
Recovering energy saver mode and off mode
Jam recovery
Door open
Using Fax
L: Low speed
M: Middle speed
H: High speed
1916 6 Pre Job Mode
81 mm/s (for all models)

125 mm/s (for C2a/k) or 165 mm/s (for C2b)
185 mm/s (for C2a/k) or 222 mm/s (for C2b)
*BCU [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Executes the idling operation for 2 seconds if the fusing temperature reaches the
printing ready condition when receiving a job for middle thick paper in color printing
mode.
1916 7 Pre Job Mode
*BCU [1 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed after the fusing unit
becomes ready when a print job arrives at the copier.
1917
1917 1
SM
[Env Condition] Environmental Correction Condition

Time
*BCU [0 to 23.5 / 23.5 / 0.5 hour/step]
The machine cancels the environmental correction for low temperature
(SP1-912) after a prescribed time has passed after the machine is turned on, or,
recovers from energy saver mode.
5-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
[Idling Mode]
(High speed, Middle speed)
1916 1 Mode Set
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[OHP/TH Fusing] OHP/Thick Paper Fusing Temperature Correction

(Heating or Pressure Roller)
Specifies the temperature for starting a print job.
The fusing section is already warmed up when the last print job was completed. If
prints are made on OHP or thick paper at this time, the fusing temperature tends to
be higher than the target, causing exit roller marks or a paper jam in the fusing
section.
To prevent this, the print job will not start if the heating and pressure roller
temperatures are higher than the following:
(Target temperature specified by SP1-105-13, -24, -26, -28) - (Temperature specified
by this SP mode (default: 5C for heating roller, 10C for pressure roller))
1996 4 H:Print Temp
*BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 1C /step]
1996 5 P:Print Temp
*BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 1C /step]
1996 6 PreJob Mode
*BCU
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
1: On
This SP enables or disables the 30-second fusing unit idling at the start of an OHP
print job. When enabled, idling is done even if the machine is in the ready condition.
1996
B202/B178/B180
5-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP2-XXX (Drum)
2001 1
2001 2
2001 3
2001 4
2001 5
2001 6
2001 7
2001 8
2001 9
2001 10
2001 11
2001 12
2001 13
2001 14
2001 15
2001 16
2001 17
2101
2103 1
2103 2
2103 3
2103 4
SM
[Charge Bias] Charge Roller Bias (DC or AC component: [Color], Process Speed)
U: Upper, L: Lower
Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
Charge bias (DC component) is automatically adjusted during process control;
therefore, adjusting these settings does not effect while process control mode (SP3125 Default: ON) is activated. When deactivating process control mode with SP3-125,
the values in these SP modes are used for printing.
DC:[K]
*BCU [300 to 1000 / 620 / 10 -volts/step] DFU
DC:[Y]
*BCU
DC:[M]
*BCU
DC:[C]
*BCU
Displays the AC component of the charge roller bias adjusted during machine
initialization or process control self-check.
Sets AC bias in the various print modes for test purposes.
AC:[K] L
[0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
AC:[K] M
[0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
AC:[K] H
[0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
AC:[Y] L
[0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
AC:[Y] M
[0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
AC:[M] L
[0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
AC:[M] M
[0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
AC:[C] L
[0 to 255 / 170 0 / 1/step] DFU
AC:[C] M
[0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU
Sets the target of the AC bias for black.
The actual target of AC bias is calculated by the machine.
AC Target [K]
*BCU [0 to 255 / C2a/k: 79, C2b: 117 / 1/step] DFU
AC Target [Y]
AC Target [M]
AC Target [C]
[TrimAdjust] Trimming Adjustment
This program adjusts the trimming area (the area in which no image is created).
front
*BCU [0.0 to 6.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
back
*BCU [0.0 to 6.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
lead
*BCU [0.0 to 6.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
trail
*BCU [0.0 to 6.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
5-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
2001
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2103
2103 1
2103 2
2103 4
2103 5
2103 7
2103 8
2103 10
2103 11
2103 13
2103 14
2103 15
2103 26
2103 27
2103 55
2103 56
2103 57
2103 58
2103 59
2103 63
2103 64
2103 65
2103 66
2103 101
2103 102
2103 103
2103 104
2103 105
2103 106
2103 107
2103 108
2103 109
2103 110
[LD Control] LD Power Control

([Color Mode, Color], Process Speed, K or Color mode) P: Power, M: Magnification
Adjusts the laser power by changing the current applied to LD.
Laser power is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore, adjusting
these data has no effect while Process Control (SP3-125 Default: ON) is activated.
After deactivating Process Control with SP3-125, the values in these SP modes are
used for printing.
P:[K] L C
*BCU [0 to 1023 / 702 / 1/step] DFU
P:[K] M C
*BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU
P:[Y] L C
*BCU [0 to 1023 / 702 / 1/step] DFU
P:[Y] M C
*BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU
P:[M] L C
*BCU [0 to 1023 / 702 / 1/step] DFU
P:[M] M C
*BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU
P:[C] L C
*BCU [0 to 1023 / 702 / 1/step] DFU
P:[C] M C
*BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU
P:[K] L K
*BCU [0 to 1023 / 702 / 1/step] DFU
P:[K] M K
P:[K] H K
*BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU
P:[0 1] M K
P:[0 1] H K
*BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU
Main Scan Magnification ([Color], Laser Exposure Frequency)
Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects the
main scan magnification; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next
line position adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5993-013 to 015 (this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be
effective from the next line position adjustment).
NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can
be adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case, the
line position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.
M:[K] 64.3/83.4MHz
*BCU [0 to 560 / 280 / 1/2 dot/step]
M:[Y] 64.3/83.4MHz
*BCU 1 dot = 20 DFU
M:[M] 64.3/83.4MHz
*BCU
M:[C] 64.3/83.4MHz
*BCU
M:[K] 57.1MHz
*BCU
M:[K] 83.4MHz
*BCU [0 to 560 / 280 / 1/2 dot/step]
M:[Y] 83.4MHz
*BCU 1 dot = 20 DFU
M:[M] 83.4MHz
M:[C] 83.4MHz
CF:[K,K] 1
CF:[K,K] 2
CF:[FC,K]
CF:[FC:Y]
CF:[FC,M]
CF:[FC,C]
CF:[K] OHP/TH
CF:[Y] OHP/TH
CF:[M] OHP/TH
CF:[C] OHP/TH
B202/B178/B180
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
[0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU
[0 to 1023 / 635 / 1/step] DFU
5-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2109
2109 2
2109 3
2109 5
2109 6
[LD Beam Pitch] LD Beam Pitch

Sets the beam pitch for black in 1200 dpi or 600 dpi mode.
NOTE: After replacing the laser optics-housing unit, the data printed on the decal
attached to the new unit must be input with this SP mode.
Pitch 1200
*BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 50 pulse/step] FA
Pitch 600
*BCU [0 to 255 / 42 / 50 pulse/step] FA
Display 1200
[0 to 255 / - / 1 pulse/step]
Display 600
[0 to 255 / - / 1 pulse/step]
[Polygon OFF Timing 1] Polygon Mirror Motor OFF Timing

2112
2112 1 Warming-up
*BCU [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 second/step]
0: Not turned off except for Energy Saver mode
The polygon mirror motor turns off if the machine receives no print start command for
the time specified in this SP mode after receiving the print preparation command.
2112 2 Job End
0: Not turned off except for Energy Saver mode
The polygon mirror motor turns off if the machine receives no print job for the time
specified in this SP mode after the previous job was completed.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
[Polygon OFF Timing 2]
Polygon Mirror Motor OFF Timing
0: Enable, 1: Disable
2131 1 The polygon mirror motor does not turn on until the copier enters the ready condition
even after receiving the print start command.
NOTE: When a user complains about high frequency noise, enabling this mode can
minimize the noise.
2150
2150 1
2150 2
2150 3
2150 4
2150 5
2150 6
2150 7
2150 8
2150 9
2150 10
2150 11
2150 12
2150 13
2150 14
2150 15
2150 16
2150 17
2150 18
2150 19
SM
[LD Pulse] LD Pulse Area Correction (Color, Area) FA

Adjusts the area correction value for color shift comparing with black. The main scan
(320 mm) is divided into 12 areas. The area 1 is at front side of the machine (left side
of an image) and area 12 is at rear side of the machine (right side of an image).
When you decrease this value, an image shifts to the left side on a print.
When you increase this value, an image shifts to the right side on a print.
1 pulse = 1/16 dot
Y: Area1
*BCU [1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
Y: Area2
*BCU
Y: Area3
*BCU
Y: Area4
*BCU
Y: Area5
*BCU
Y: Area6
*BCU
Y: Area7
*BCU
Y: Area8
*BCU
Y: Area9
*BCU
Y: Area10
*BCU
Y: Area11
*BCU
Y: Area12
*BCU
M: Area1
*BCU [1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
M: Area2
*BCU
M: Area3
*BCU
M: Area4
*BCU
M: Area5
*BCU
M: Area6
*BCU
M: Area7
*BCU
5-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
2113
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2150
2150 20
2150 21
2150 22
2150 23
2150 24
2150 25
2150 26
2150 27
2150 28
2150 29
2150 30
2150 31
2150 32
2150 33
2150 34
2150 35
2150 36
2151
2151 1
2151 2
2151 3
2151 4
2152
2152 1
2152 2
2152 3
2152 4
2152 5
2152 6
2152 7
2152 8
2152 9
2152 10
2152 11
2152 12
[LD Pulse] LD Pulse Area Correction (Color, Area) FA

Adjusts the area correction value for color shift comparing with black. The main scan
(320 mm) is divided into 12 areas. The area 1 is at front side of the machine (left side
of an image) and area 12 is at rear side of the machine (right side of an image).
When you decrease this value, an image shifts to the left side on a print.
When you increase this value, an image shifts to the right side on a print.
1 pulse = 1/16 dot
M: Area8
*BCU [1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
M: Area9
*BCU
M: Area10
*BCU
M: Area11
*BCU
M: Area12
*BCU
C: Area1
*BCU
C: Area2
*BCU
C: Area3
*BCU
C: Area4
*BCU
C: Area5
*BCU
C: Area6
*BCU
C: Area7
*BCU
C: Area8
*BCU
C: Area9
*BCU
C: Area10
*BCU
C: Area11
*BCU
C: Area12
*BCU
[LD Mag. Pulse] LD Pulse Magnification Correction (Color) DFU
Adjusts the correction value for main scan magnification.
When you decrease this value, an image is reduced.
When you increase this value, an image is enlarged.
1 pulse = 1/16 dot
Bk
*BCU [1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
Y
*BCU
M
*BCU
C
*BCU
[LD Control] LD Power Control (Color, Area) DFU

Adjusts the LD power for each area. The main scan (320 mm) is divided into 32
areas. The areas from 2 to 31 are effective image areas. The area 2 is at front side
of the machine (left side of an image) and area 31 is at rear side of the machine
(right side of an image).
Bk: Area0
*BCU [50 to 150 / 108.19 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area1
*BCU [50 to 150 / 107.28 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area2
*BCU [50 to 150 / 106.32 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area3
*BCU [50 to 150 / 105.35 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area4
*BCU [50 to 150 / 104.40 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area5
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.49 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area6
*BCU [50 to 150 / 102.65 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area7
*BCU [50 to 150 / 101.90 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area8
*BCU [50 to 150 / 101.24 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area9
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.68 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area10
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.23 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area11
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.90 / 0.01%/step]
B202/B178/B180
5-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2152
2152 13
2152 14
2152 15
2152 16
2152 17
2152 18
2152 19
2152 20
2152 21
2152 22
2152 23
2152 24
2152 25
2152 26
2152 27
2152 28
2152 29
2152 30
2152 31
2152 32
2152 33
2152 34
2152 35
2152 36
2152 37
2152 38
2152 39
2152 40
2152 41
2152 42
2152 43
2152 44
2152 45
2152 46
2152 47
2152 48
2152 49
2152 50
2152 51
2152 52
2152 53
2152 54
2152 55
2152 56
2152 57
2152 58
2152 59
SM

Bk: Area12
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.67 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area13
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.56 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area14
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.55 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area15
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.66 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area16
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area17
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area18
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.55 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area19
*BCU [50 to 150 / 101.03 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area20
*BCU [50 to 150 / 101.58 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area21
*BCU [50 to 150 / 102.21 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area22
*BCU [50 to 150 / 102.89 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area23
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.63 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area24
*BCU [50 to 150 / 104.42 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area25
*BCU [50 to 150 / 105.24 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area26
*BCU [50 to 150 / 106.10 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area27
*BCU [50 to 150 / 106.99 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area28
*BCU [50 to 150 / 107.91 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area29
*BCU [50 to 150 / 108.85 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area30
*BCU [50 to 150 / 109.82 / 0.01%/step]
Bk: Area31
*BCU [50 to 150 / 110.83 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area0
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.31 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area1
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.92 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area2
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.89 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area3
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.44 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area4
*BCU [50 to 150 / 102.78 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area5
*BCU [50 to 150 / 102.04 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area6
*BCU [50 to 150 / 101.33 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area7
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.70 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area8
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.19 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area9
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.81 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area10
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.56 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area11
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.43 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area12
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.40 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area13
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.46/ 0.01%/step]
Y: Area14
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.58/ 0.01%/step]
Y: Area15
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.73/ 0.01%/step]
Y: Area16
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area17
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area18
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.28 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area19
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.45 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area20
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.62 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area21
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.80 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area22
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.99 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area23
*BCU [50 to 150 / 101.20 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area24
*BCU [50 to 150 / 101.45 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area25
*BCU [50 to 150 / 101.75 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area26
*BCU [50 to 150 / 102.11 / 0.01%/step]
5-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
COPY SERVICE MODE
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2152
2152 60
2152 61
2152 62
2152 63
2152 64
2152 65
2152 66
2152 67
2152 68
2152 69
2152 70
2152 71
2152 72
2152 73
2152 74
2152 75
2152 76
2152 77
2152 78
2152 79
2152 80
2152 81
2152 82
2152 83
2152 84
2152 85
2152 86
2152 87
2152 88
2152 89
2152 90
2152 91
2152 92
2152 93
2152 94
2152 95
2152 96
2152 97
2152 98
2152 99
2152 100
2152 101
2152 102
2152 103
2152 104
2152 105
2152 106

Y: Area27
*BCU [50 to 150 / 102.52 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area28
*BCU [50 to 150 / 102.98 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area29
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.45 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area30
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.88 / 0.01%/step]
Y: Area31
*BCU [50 to 150 / 104.18 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area0
*BCU [50 to 150 / 112.42/ 0.01%/step]
M: Area1
*BCU [50 to 150 / 111.23 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area2
*BCU [50 to 150 / 106.63 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area3
*BCU [50 to 150 / 105.55 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area4
*BCU [50 to 150 / 104.49 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area5
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.48 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area6
*BCU [50 to 150 / 102.56 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area7
*BCU [50 to 150 / 101.75 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area8
*BCU [50 to 150 / 101.06/ 0.01%/step]
M: Area9
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.49/ 0.01%/step]
M: Area10
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.06/ 0.01%/step]
M: Area11
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.75 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area12
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.56 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area13
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.49/ 0.01%/step]
M: Area14
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.52/ 0.01%/step]
M: Area15
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.64/ 0.01%/step]
M: Area16
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area17
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area18
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.53 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area19
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.96/ 0.01%/step]
M: Area20
*BCU [50 to 150 / 101.45 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area21
*BCU [50 to 150 / 101.99 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area22
*BCU [50 to 150 / 102.59 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area23
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.23 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area24
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.91 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area25
*BCU [50 to 150 / 104.64 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area26
*BCU [50 to 150 / 105.42 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area27
*BCU [50 to 150 / 106.24 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area28
*BCU [50 to 150 / 107.12 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area29
*BCU [50 to 150 / 108.05 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area30
*BCU [50 to 150 / 109.04 / 0.01%/step]
M: Area31
*BCU [50 to 150 / 110.10 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area0
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.04/ 0.01%/step]
C: Area1
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.60 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area2
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.79 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area3
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.50 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area4
*BCU [50 to 150 / 102.86 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area5
*BCU [50 to 150 / 102.08 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area6
*BCU [50 to 150 / 101.29 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area7
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.59 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area8
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.03/ 0.01%/step]
C: Area9
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.63/ 0.01%/step]
B202/B178/B180
5-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2152 107
2152 108
2152 109
2152 110
2152 111
2152 112
2152 113
2152 114
2152 115
2152 116
2152 117
2152 118
2152 119
2152 120
2152 121
2152 122
2152 123
2152 124
2152 125
2152 126
2152 127
2152 128
2201
2201 1
2201 2
2201 3
2201 4
2201 5
2201 6
2201 7
2201 8
2201 9
2207
2207 1
2207 2
2207 3
2207 4
SM
[Development Bias] Development Bias ([Color], Process Speed)

Adjusts the development bias.
Development bias is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore,
adjusting these settings has no effect while Process Control (SP3-125 Default: ON) is
activated.
After deactivating Process Control with SP3-125, the values in these SP modes are
used for printing.
[K] L
*BCU [200 to 800 / 500 / 10 V/step] DFU
[K] M
*BCU
[K] H
*BCU
[Y] L
*BCU
[Y] M
*BCU
[M] L
*BCU
[M] M
*BCU
[C] L
*BCU
[C] M
*BCU
[Forced Toner Supply] Forced Toner Supply ([Color])
Forces toner to be supplied to the development unit.
The toner supply clutch turns on for 0.7 s and off for 1.3 s.
[K]
[Y]
[M]
[C]
5-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
2152

C: Area10
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.38/ 0.01%/step]
C: Area11
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.27/ 0.01%/step]
C: Area12
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.28/ 0.01%/step]
C: Area13
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.38/ 0.01%/step]
C: Area14
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.54/ 0.01%/step]
C: Area15
*BCU [50 to 150 / 99.72/ 0.01%/step]
C: Area16
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area17
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area18
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.23 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area19
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.35/ 0.01%/step]
C: Area20
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.45 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area21
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.53 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area22
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.62 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area23
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.73 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area24
*BCU [50 to 150 / 100.89 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area25
*BCU [50 to 150 / 101.12 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area26
*BCU [50 to 150 / 101.44 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area27
*BCU [50 to 150 / 101.84 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area28
*BCU [50 to 150 / 102.32/ 0.01%/step]
C: Area29
*BCU [50 to 150 / 102.83 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area30
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.30 / 0.01%/step]
C: Area31
*BCU [50 to 150 / 103.61 / 0.01%/step]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2208
2208 1
2208 2
2208 3
2208 4
2208 5
2208 6
2208 7
2208 8
2208 9
2208 10
2208 11
2208 12
2208 13
2208 14
2208 15
2208 16
2208 17
2208 18
2208 19
2208 20
2208 21
2208 22
2208 23
2208 24
2208 25
[Toner Supply Mode] Toner Supply Mode ([Color])

Selects the toner supply method.
[K]
[Y]
*BCU 0: Fixed supply (with the supply rates stored
with SP2-208-5 to 8)
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU 1: Fuzzy control supply
2: Proportional control supply (using the Vref
values stored with SP2-224-5 to 8)
Sets the toner supply rate used when the toner supply method (SP2-208-1 to 4) is set
to 0 (fixed supply mode).
Fixed Rate [K]
*BCU [0 to 100 / 5 / 1%/step]
Fixed Rate [Y]
*BCU
Fixed Rate [M]
*BCU
Fixed Rate [C]
*BCU
Specifies the maximum possible toner supply, expressed as a percentage of the
maximum amount of toner that can possibly be supplied for a sheet of paper.
If too much toner is supplied to the development unit especially for black or in the low
humidity condition, this may cause dirty background due to insufficient agitation. This
SP mode limits the maximum possible toner supply for black and only in the low
humidity condition for color.
NOTE: The main switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.
Upper Limit
*BCU [0 to 100 / 63 / 1 %/step] DFU
#
Adjusts the toner supply amount (fixed rate) when making multiple prints of pages
with low image ratio (coverage).
When printing with a low image ratio, toner concentration is controlled only with Vt
outputs since pixel count is not done for low image ratios. This may cause the
attraction force between toner and carrier to increase, resulting in low image density
on outputs. To prevent this, the machine counts the number of pixels and supplies a
fixed amount of toner if the accumulated number of pixels becomes greater than the
specified level.
*BCU [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 %/step] DFU
Low Coverage [K]
Low Coverage[Y]
LowCoverage[M]
LowCoverage[C]
Specifies each constant to adjust the toner supply amount. The optimum value is
specified before shipment.
*BCU [0 to 2.0 / 0.3 / 0.01%/step] DFU
Vt Coeff[Bk]
Vt Coeff[Y]
[0 to 2.0 / 0.28 / 0.01%/step] DFU
[0 to 2.0 / 0.25 / 0.01%/step] DFU
Vt Coeff[M]
Vt Coeff[C]
*BCU [0 to 2.0 / 0.45 / 0.01%/step] DFU
Img Coeff[Bk]
Img Coeff[Y]
Img Coeff[M]
Img Coeff[C]
*BCU
[0 to 2.0 / 0.1 / 0.01%/step] DFU
ImgCrctCoef[Bk]
ImgCrctCoef[Y]
ImgCrctCoef[M]
ImgCrctCoef[C]
B202/B178/B180
5-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2210 5
2210 6
2210 7
2210 8
2212
2212 1
2212 2
2212 5
2212 6
2212 7
2212 8
2212 9
2212 10
2212 11
2212 12
2212 13
2212 14
2212 15
SM
[Toner Supply Counter] Toner Supply Counter ([Color])

Displays the total time that the toner supply clutch has been on.
This data is stored in the memory chip on each toner cartridge.
[K]
[Y]
*BCU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
[Toner Near/End] Toner Near End / End Detection Threshold ([Color])
When the amount of toner amount left in the cartridge becomes less than this value,
the machine starts monitoring the Vt values for toner near end detection.
Start [K]
*BCU [0 to 1000 / 100 / 10 g/step]
Start [YMC]
*BCU
Specifies the threshold for toner near-end detection.
The machine detects toner near-end when the following happens 10 times
consecutively.
Vt > Vref + Threshold
Near [K]
*BCU [0 to 5.0 / 0.4 / 0.1 V/step]
Near [YMC]
*BCU
Specifies the threshold for toner end detection.
The machine detects toner end when the following happens 10 times consecutively.
Then, the machine stops printing, even during a print job.
Vt > Vref + Threshold
End [K]
*BCU [0 to 5.0 / 0.5 / 0.1 V/step]
End [YMC]
*BCU
Specifies the number of sheets with full image coverage that can be printed after
toner near-end has been detected.
When near-end is detected, the pixels in the images are counted. The machine
detects toner end when the following happens, and the machine stops printing even
during a print job.
image coverage
Pixel count = 5 A4/LT sheets with full
NOTE: The setting of SP2-212-11 has priority for deciding when to stop printing.
Pixel [K]
*BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
Pixel [YMC]
*BCU
Specifies the minimum number of sheets that can be printed after toner near-end has
been detected.
However, when the following happens 10 consecutive times, the machine stops
printing even during a print job or if this guaranteed minimum has not been met.
Vt > Current Vref value + 1.2V or Vt > 4.8V
Min. Print
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
Displays the average signal value of the toner end sensor. Printed images can be
weak when the value is larger.
Each toner sensor detects the toner that is falling through the toner path beneath the
toner cartridge. Each sensor outputs 0 when it detects toner in the toner path, or
outputs 1 when it does not detect toner. The signal is 1 if toner is not passing
through the path even though the toner cartridge contains toner. These signals, 0
and 1, are periodically checked and used to calculate the signal average. When
enough toner is in the cartridge, the signal average is a smaller value (0 or its
vicinity). When toner is insufficient, the average is a larger value (1 or its vicinity).
*BCU [0 to 1 / 0 / 0.01/step]
sensor avg [K]
sensor avg [Y]
sensor avg [M]
sensor avg [C]
5-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
2210
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[Toner End ON/OFF] Toner End Detection ON/OFF

Enables or disables toner near-end and end detection (if disabled, the toner supply
clutch on time is still counted).
Use this SP only when tests are necessary under the toner end or toner near end
condition. Specify the default value after the tests.
2213 1 T End ON/OFF
*BCU [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step] Alphanumeric, DFU
#
0: Both sensors disabled
1: Both sensors enabled
2: Toner end sensor disabled and TD sensor
enabled
2213
[TD Vcnt Control] TD Sensor Vcnt Control

2223
2223 1 Initialization
*BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric, DFU
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the Vcnt Auto Adjustment when detecting a new development
unit.
When the machine detects a new development unit, developer initialization
automatically starts. During the developer initialization, Vcnt is automatically adjusted
so that Vt is within 3.0 0.1V.
2223 2 Humidity
*BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the Humidity Auto Correction. This corrects the Vcnt value for the
current humidity. This correction is applied to both the Vcnt values automatically
adjusted during developer initialization and manually adjusted with SP2-224-1 to 4.
If this correction does not work well under certain environmental conditions or due to
a defective humidity sensor, deactivate the Humidity Auto Correction and adjust the
Vcnt value in SP2-224-1 to 4 (by trial and error).
2223 3 Toner Fill Up
*BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric, DFU
0: Deactivate
1: Activate
Activates or deactivates the Toner Fill Up mode, which fills up the toner supply tube
with toner during developer initialization.
This function is required only at machine installation. Although the default is 0, the
factory setting is 1. After toner fill-up occurs during machine installation, the setting
is changed to 0 automatically.
B202/B178/B180
5-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2224 1
2224 2
2224 3
2224 4
2224 5
2224 6
2224 7
2224 8
2301
2301 1
2301 2
2301 3
2301 4
2301 6
2301 7
2301 8
2301 9
2301 10
2301 11
2301 12
2301 13
2301 14
2301 15
2301 16
2301 17
2301 18
2301 19
2301 20
2301 21
2301 22
2301 23
2301 24
2301 25
2301 26
2301 27
SM
[Vcnt / Vref] Vcnt / Vref ([Color])

Adjusts the Vcnt value manually.
The value in this SP mode is effective until after the next process control self-check.
To always use this value for some reason, select proportional control supply mode
with SP2-208-1 to 4.
*BCU [8 to 22.0 / 13.5 / 0.1 V/step] FA
Vcnt [K]
#
Vcnt [Y]
Vcnt [M]
Vcnt [C]
Adjusts the Vref value manually.
The value in this SP mode is effective until the next process control self-check. To
always use this value for some reason, select proportional control supply mode with
SP2-208-1 to 4.
Vref [K]
*BCU [0 to 5.0 / 2.8 / 0.1 V/step]
Vref [Y]
*BCU
Vref [M]
*BCU
Vref [C]
*BCU
[Transfer Current]
([Color Mode, Color], Paper Tray or By-pass, Simplex or Duplex, Process Speed)
Paper Type -> TH: Thick Paper, MTH: Middle Thick Paper, SP: Special Paper, OHP
Adjusts the transfer current for each color and each print mode.
NOTE: If the transfer current is increased too much, image offset may occur
especially in halftone areas.
[K]P S M
*BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 15, C2b: 20 / 1 A/step]
[K]P S H
[K]P D M
[K]P D H
[K]B S M
[K]B S H
[FC,K]P S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC, K]P S M
[FC,Y]P S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,Y]P S M
[FC,M]P S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,M]P S M
[FC,C]P S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,C]P S M
[FC,K]P D L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,K]P D M
[FC,Y]P D L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,Y]P D M
[FC,M]P D L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,M]P D M
[FC,C]P D L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,C]P D M
[FC,K]B S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,K]B S M
[FC,Y]B S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,Y]B S M
5-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
2224
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2301
2301 28
2301 29
2301 30
2301 31
2301 32
2301 33
2301 34
2301 35
2301 36
2301 37
2301 38
2301 39
2301 40
2301 41
2301 43
2301 44
2301 45
2301 46
2301 47
2301 48
2301 49
2301 50
2301 51
2301 52
2301 57
2301 58
2301 59
2301 60
2301 61
2301 63
2301 64
2301 65
2301 66
2301 67
2301 68
2301 69
2301 70
2301 71
2301 72
2301 80
2301 81
2301 82
2301 83
2301 84
2301 85
2301 86
2301 87
2301 88
2301 89
2301 90
[Transfer Current]
[FC,M]B S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,M]B S M
[FC,C]B S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,C]B S M
[K]OHP L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step]
[FC,K]OHP L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,Y]OHP L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,M]OHP L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,C]OHP L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[K]TH R L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step]
[FC,K]TH R L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,Y]TH R L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,M]TH R L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,C]TH R L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[K]SP S M
[K]SP S H
[FC,K]SP S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,Y]SP S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,M]SP L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,C]SP L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,K]SP M
[FC,Y]SP M
[FC,M]SP M
[FC,C]SP M
[K]TH S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 7 / 1 A/step]
[FC,K]TH S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,Y]TH S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,M]TH S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,C]TH S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[K]SP D M
[K]SP D H
[FC,K]SP D L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,Y]SP D L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,M]SP D L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,C]SP D L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,K]SP D M
[FC,Y]SP D M
[FC,M]SP D M
[FC,C]SP D M
[K]MTH M
[K]MTH H
[FC,K]MTH L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,Y]MTH L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,M]MTH L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,C]MTH L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 A/step]
[FC,K]MTH M
[FC,Y]MTH M
[FC,M]MTH M
[FC,C]MTH M
[K]MTH D M
B202/B178/B180
5-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2301 91
2301 92
2301 93
2301 94
2301 95
2301 96
2301 97
2301 98
2301 99
2309
2309 5
2309 6
2309 7
2309 8
2309 9
2309 10
2309 11
2310
2301 1
[Transfer Current]
[K]MTH D H
[FC,K]MTH D L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,Y]MTH D L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,M]MTH D L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,C]MTH D L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 A/step]
[FC,K]MTH D M
[FC,Y]MTH D M
[FC,M]MTH D M
[FC,C]MTH D M
[Current Paper Size] Transfer Current - Paper Size Correction
Paper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick, MTH: Middle Thick, OHP
Corrects the transfer current for paper size.
When small paper is used for printing, the transfer current flows to the drum at the
non-image areas where the transfer belt touches the OPC drum. This may cause an
abnormal image due to insufficient current at the image areas.
NOTE: Increase only when an abnormal image (insufficient image transfer) occurs on
a small paper size. However, increasing the current too much may cause
image offset.
N LT SEF
*BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.1 / 0.1/step]
N A5 SEF
*BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1/step]
TH LT SEF
*BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1/step]
TH A5 SEF
*BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1/step]
OHP LT SEF
*BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.4 / 0.1/step]
MTH LT SEF
*BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.1 / 0.1/step]
MTH A5 SEF
*BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1/step]
[Transfer Cur.] Transfer Current - Environment Correction
Applies the transfer current correction if the humidity exceeds the current set
value.
*BCU [25 to 90 / 55 / 5%/step]
H Humidity
[Transfer Ctrl] Transfer Control

2402
2402 1 C Mode Posit
*BCU [0 to 500 / 170 / 10/step] DFU
Adjusts the transfer belt position for color printing.
SP2-402-1 is valid only when auto correct (SP2-402-2) is disabled (- 6.11.5).
2402 2 Auto Correct
*BCU [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step] DFU
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enable or disable the auto-adjustment of the transfer belt position.
When SP2-402-2 is enabled, the transfer belt position for color printing is decided in
accordance with the result of the initialization processing (- 6.11.5).
SP2-402-2 validates the setting of SP2-402-1, but does not affect the setting of
SP2-402-3.
2402 3 Bk Mode Posit
*BCU [0 to 500 / 130 / 10/step] DFU
Adjusts the transfer belt position for monochrome printing.
SP2-402-3 is always valid regardless of the setting in SP2-402-2.
SM
5-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
2301
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2801
2801 1
2801 2
2801 3
2801 4
2801 6
2801 7
2801 8
2801 9
2801 14
2801 15
2801 16
2801 17
2801 18
2801 19
2801 20
2801 21
2801 22
2801 23
2801 24
2801 25
2801 26
2801 27
2801 30
2801 31
2801 32
2801 33
2801 34
2801 35
2801 36
2801 37
[PA Roller Current] Paper Attraction Roller Current

([Color], Simplex or Duplex/ Reverse, Process Speed): Current Adjustment
(Paper or By-pass): Paper Size Correction
Adjusts the paper attraction roller current for color printing.
If paper misfeeds occur at the transfer unit in color mode, check and/or adjust the
paper attraction roller current.
NOTE: The magenta development section is close to the paper attraction roller.
Decreasing the current may not cause paper misfeed.
If the current is increased too much, the following image problems may occur
depending on the humidity.
High humidity:
Insufficient image transfer in magenta due to current flow to the magenta OPC drum
Low humidity:
Offset image in magenta halftone areas due to paper charged positive too much
When adjusting the current with this SP mode, the value should be lower than transfer
current.
[K] S M
*BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 5, C2b 8 / 1 A/step]
[K] S H
[K] R M
[K] R H
[FC] S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 A/step]
[FC] S M
*BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 A/step]
[FC] D L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 A/step]
[FC] D M
[K] B TH S
*BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 A/step]
[FC] B TH S
*BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 A/step]
[K] B OHP
*BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 A/step]
[FC] B OHP
*BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 A/step]
[K] B TH D
*BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 A/step]
[FC] B TH D
*BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 A/step]
[K] SP S M
[K] SP S H
[K] SP R M
[K] SP R H
[FC] SP S L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 A/step]
[FC] SP S M
*BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 A/step]
[FC] SP R L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 A/step]
[FC] SP R M
[K] MTH M
[K] MTH H
[K] MTH D M
[K] MTH D H
[FC] MTH L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 A/step]
[FC] MTH M
*BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 A/step]
[FC] MTH D L
*BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 A/step]
[FC] MTH D M
B202/B178/B180
5-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2802
2802 1
2802 2
2802 3
2802 4
2802 5
2802 7
2802 8
[PA Current Paper Size] Paper Attraction Roller Current - Paper Size Correction
Paper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick, MTH: Middle Thick, OHP
Adjusts the correction, depending on the paper size.
When small-width paper is used for printing, the paper attraction roller current flows to
the non-image areas of OPC drum where the transfer belt touches the drum. This
may cause paper misfeed due to insufficient current.
To increase the current by 1.5 times, set the SP mode to 1.5.
NOTE: Adjust only when a paper misfeed occurs with a small paper size. Increasing
the current too much may cause image offset in magenta halftone areas.
N LT SEF
*BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step]
N A5 SEF
*BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step]
TH LT SEF
*BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step]
TH A5 SEF
*BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step]
OHP LT SEF
*BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 2.4 / 0.1/step]
MTH LT SEF
*BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step]
MTH A5 SEF
*BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step]
[Mirror Motor] Mirror Positioning Motor ([Color])

mirror position, which corrects the optically skewed image; however, this will be
automatically corrected at the next line position adjustment.
NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can be
adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case,
the line position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.
2908 2 [C]
*BCU [128 to 127 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] DFU
2908 3 [M]
*BCU
2908 4 [Y]
*BCU
2909
2909 1
2909 2
2909 3
2909 4
2909 9
2909 10
2909 11
2909 12
SM
[Main-scan Reg.] Main-scan Registration ([Color])

main scan registration; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next line
position adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-010
to 012 (this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be effective from the
next line position adjustment.
1 dot = 20
[Y] DOT
*BCU [-500 to 500 / 0 / 1 dot/step] DFU
[M] DOT
*BCU
[C] DOT
*BCU
[K] DOT
*BCU
[Y] 1/16 DOT
*BCU [15 to 15 / 0 / 1/16dot/step] DFU
[M] 1/16 DOT
*BCU
[C] 1/16 DOT
*BCU
[K] 1/16 DOT
*BCU
5-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
2908
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
2916
2916 1
2916 2
2916 3
2916 4
2916 5
2916 6
2916 7
2916 8
2916 9
2916 10
[Sub-scan Reg.] Sub-scan Registration ([Color Mode, Color], Resolution)

Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects the sub
scan registration; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next line position
adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-016 to 021
(this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be effective from the next
line position adjustment.
600 dpi: 1 dot = 40, 1200dpi: 1 dot = 20
[K] 1200
*BCU [0 to 20000 / 7510 / 1 dot] DFU
[FC, K] 1200
*BCU [0 to 20000 / 15038 / 1 dot] DFU
[FC,Y] 1200
*BCU [0 to 20000 / 10402 / 1 dot] DFU
[FC,M] 1200
*BCU [0 to 20000 / 1136 / 1 dot] DFU
[FC,C] 1200
*BCU [0 to 20000 / 5762 / 1 dot] DFU
[K] 600
*BCU [0 to 20000 / 3755 / 1 dot] DFU
[FC,K] 600
*BCU [0 to 20000 / 7519 / 1 dot] DFU
[FC,Y] 600
*BCU [0 to 20000 / 5201 / 1 dot] DFU
[FC,M] 600
*BCU [0 to 20000 / 568 / 1 dot] DFU
[FC,C] 600
*BCU [0 to 20000 / 2881 / 1 dot] DFU
[MScan Lgth Det] Main-scan Length Detection

Enables or disables the main-scan length detection.
2919 1 OFF/ON
*BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric
0: Disable, 1: Enable
2919 2 Interrupt time 1
Non interrupt during a job (default on)
2919 3 Interrupt time 2
Interrupt during a job (default on)
2919
2920
2920 1
2994
2994 1
2994 2
2994 3
2994 4
[LD Pulse]
Enables or disables the LD pulse area correction (SP2-150).
When the "0" is selected, the setting values of the SP2-150 become 0.
NOTE: Set the "Disable" after replacing the laser optics-housing unit.
OFF/ON
*BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -]
[Main Scan Reg Cor] Main-scan Registration Correction ([Color])

Not used. DFU
[Y]
[M]
[C]
[K]
B202/B178/B180
5-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[Motor Reset] Mirror Positioning Motor Reset
Rotates the mirror position motors (CMY) by 250 pulses clockwise; then by 125
pulses counterclockwise. This moves the mirrors back to the initial position. Then, the
settings of SP2-908-002 to 004 are reset to 0.
When the line position adjustment fails, it is one of possible causes when the mirror
position motor locks. Performing this SP mode can move the mirrors back to the
original position if it locks. Then, do the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993002).
2995 1 Motor Reset
*BCU
2995
3005
3005 1
3005 2
3005 3
3005 4
3005 5
3005 6
[TD Initial] TD Sensor Initialization ([Color])

[K]
Initializes the developer. DFU
[Y]
[M]
[C]
[All Color]
Result
*BCU [1 to 9 / - / -]
1: Success
2 to 9: Failure
Displays the developer initialization result.
All colors are displayed. Values are displayed in the order K Y C M.
e.g., 1 1 2 1: Initialization of Cyan failed but the others succeeded - 4.1.1.
3006
[TD Initial] TDt Initial Setting Display ([Color])
3006 1
3006 2
3006 3
3006 4
3006 5
3006 6
3006 7
3006 8
3007
3007 1
3007 2
3007 3
3007 4
3007 5
3007 6
3007 7
3007 8
3007 9
SM
Vcnt Display [K]

Vcnt Display [Y]
Vcnt Display [M]
Vcnt Display [C]
Target [Bk]
Target [Y]
Target [M]
Target [C]
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
Displays the initial Vcnt value.

[0 to 24.0 / - / 0.1 V/step]
Adjusts the target Vcnt for the initial setting.

[0 to 5.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 V/step]
[TD Vcnt] TD sensor Current Vcnt Value ([Color])

Displays the current Vcnt value.
Vcnt Current: K
*BCU [0 to 24.0 / - / 0.1 V/step]
Vcnt Current: Y
*BCU
Vcnt Current: M
*BCU
Vcnt Current: C
*BCU
Vcnt Mode Select
*BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -]
Enables or disables the Vcnt correction.
Vcnt Max
*BCU [0 to 4 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]
Adjusts the maximum Vcnt at developer initialization
Vcnt Min
*BCU [0 to 4 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]
Adjusts the minimum Vcnt at developer initialization
Vcnt SelfChk Max
*BCU [0 to 5.4 / 5.4 / 0.1 V/step]
Adjusts the maximum Vcnt at process control self check
Vcnt SelfChk Min
*BCU [0 to 5.4 / 5.4 / 0.1 V/step]
Adjusts the minimum Vcnt at process control self check
5-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
SP3-XXX (Process)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
3008
[Humidity]
3008 1 Humidity
[0 to 100 / - / 1%/step]
Displays the humidity measured by the humidity/temperature sensor.
3008 2 Temp 1
[0 to 100 / - / 1%/step]
Shows the temperature measured
by thermistor 2 on the laser optics
unit.
3008 3 Temp 2
Shows the temperature measured
by thermistor 1 on the laser optics
unit
[Vsg Display] Vsg Display (Front or Rear)
3107
3107 1 Vsg Front
*BCU [0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step]
Displays the Vsg value of the front ID sensor.
Vsg is normally 4.0 0.5 V.
If Vsg is out of the adjustment range and this is detected 3 times consecutively, it
leads to SC385.
3107 2 LED Current Front
*BCU [0 to 1023 / - / 1]
Displays the ID sensor LED current adjusted during Vsg adjustment.
3107 3 Vsg Center
*BCU [0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step]
Displays the Vsg value of the center ID sensor.
leads to SC385.
3107 4 LED Current Center
*BCU [0 to 1025 / - / 1]
3107 5 Vsg Rear
*BCU [0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step]
Displays the Vsg value of the rear ID sensor.
leads to SC385.
3107 6 LED Current Rear
*BCU [0 to 1025 / - / 1]
3107 7 Vsg avg bk
*BCU [0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step]
Displays the average black Vsg value of the center ID sensor.
B202/B178/B180
5-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
3120 1
3120 2
3120 3
3120 4
3120 5
3120 6
3120 7
3120 8
3120 9
3121
3121 1
3121 2
3121 3
3121 4
3122
3122 1
3122 2
3122 3
3122 4
3123
3123 1
3123 2
3123 3
3123 4
[Dev. Gamma Target] Development Gamma Target ([Color])

Adjusts the development gamma by changing the Vref value used for toner density
control.
Vref is automatically corrected so that the gamma measured during the process
control self-check becomes the value set with this SP mode 0.15
Set [K]
*BCU [0.50 to 1.00 / 0.70 / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV / step]
Set [Y]
*BCU DFU
Set [M]
*BCU
Set [C]
*BCU
Display [K]
*BCU [0.50 to 3.00 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV / step]
Display [Y]
*BCU
Display [M]
*BCU
Display [C]
*BCU
Mode Select
*BCU [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Non
1: Humidity
2: Dev. Rotation
3: All
[Dev. Gamma Display] Development Gamma Display ([Color])

Displays the development gamma measured during the process control self-check.
[K]
*BCU [0.00 to 10.00 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV /step]
[Y]
*BCU Normal Range: 1.00 to 2.00
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
[Vk Display] Vk Display ([Color])
Displays the current Vk value.
[K]
*BCU
[Y]
*BCU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
Service
Tables
3120
[-255 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

Normal Range: -50 to 50
[Vref Display] Current Vref Display ([Color])

Displays the current Vref value.
[K]
*BCU [0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step]
[Y]
*BCU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
3125
[Process Control]
3125 1 ON/OFF
*BCU
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: OFF (Use the fixed values for VD, VL and
VB set with SP2-001, SP2-103, and SP2201.)
1: ON
Enables or disables process control.
SM
5-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
3125
[Process Control]
3125 2 LD Control
*BCU
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: Fixed (at the value in SP2-103)
1: Process Control
2: LD Power
Selects the LD control mode.

3125 3 Auto TD Adj.
*BCU
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: Disable
1: Initial
2: Job end
3: Initial & Job end
Specifies when to perform the Auto Toner Density Adjustment. When performing the
Auto Toner Density Adjustment, the machine supplies or consumes toner so that the
development gamma is within 0.15 of the gamma target.
Change if the customer complains of toner density fluctuations. Before changing the
setting away from 0, check whether the forced TD adjustment (3-126-2) is effective. If
the problem is persistent, then change to 1, 2, or 3. However, the machine takes
several minutes to do this adjustment.
3125 4 ACC
*BCU [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
0: Disable
1: Process Control Self-check
2: Auto TD Adjustment & Process Control Selfcheck
Enables or disables the process control self-check before printing the ACC pattern.
NOTE: If color balance changes during multi-copy runs after ACC is performed, select
1 or 2. Setting 2 can precisely adjust the image density; however, it takes
about 6 minutes. Select 1 or 2 depending on the customers requirement.
3125 5 TD Adj. Cndtn
*BCU [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: No
1: Yes
Specifies whether temperature and humidity are taken into account when deciding the
timing of the auto toner density adjustment (described in SP 3-125-3).
Timing for the auto toner density adjustment is determined by the setting of SP3-125003. In addition, if SP 3-125-5 is set to 1, the auto toner density adjustment is done
when the temperature and humidity meet specified conditions (same conditions as
used for transfer current correction).
Specify 1 when both temperature and humidity are both high or both
low.
3125 6 TD Adj. Times
*BCU [1 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]
Limits the number of auto toner density adjustments.
The auto toner density adjustment consists of three steps: detecting the development
gamma, supplying or consuming toner, and detecting the development gamma again.
When these three steps are all complete, it means a single auto toner density
adjustment is complete.
3125 7 Temperature
[0 to 200 / 60 / 1C /step]
Fusing temperature threshold for process control execution when the main switch is
turned on.
3125 8 Pic Vb Max
[600 to 800 / 680 / 10 V /step]
Adjusts the development bias upper limit.
3125 9 Pic Vb Min
[200 to 400 / 300 / 10 V /step]
Adjusts the development bias lower limit.
B202/B178/B180
5-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
3126
[Forced Self Check] Forced Self-check
3126 1 Forced Self Check
Performs a forced process control self-check.
3126 2 Forced TD Adj.
Performs a forced auto toner density
adjustment.
3902 1
3902 2
3902 3
3902 4
3902 5
3902 6
3902 7
3902 8
3903
3903 1
3903 2
3903 3
3903 4
3903 5
3903 6
3903 7
3903 8
3904
3904 1
3904 2
3904 3
3904 4
3904 5
3904 6
3904 7
3904 8
SM
[Pointer Display] Pointer Table Display ([Color])

Displays the number in the pointer table that was selected during the latest process
control self-check.
Printer [K]
*BCU [1 to 40 / - / 1/step]
Printer [Y]
*BCU
Printer [M]
*BCU
Printer [C]
*BCU
CF [K]
*BCU
CF [Y]
*BCU
CF [M]
*BCU
CF [C]
*BCU
[M/A Target] M/A Target ([Color])
Adjusts the M/A (Mass per Area, mg/cm2) value used during the process control selfcheck.
Adjusting this changes the development bias. This causes the solid ID to increase or
decrease. If developer capability causes an ID problem, toner density needs to be
adjusted with SP3-120-1 to 4, depending on the color.
Printer [K]
*BCU [0 to 1.50 / 0.40 / 0.05 mg/cm2 /step] DFU
Printer [Y]
*BCU
Printer [M]
*BCU
Printer [C]
*BCU
CF [K]
*BCU
CF [Y]
*BCU
CF [M]
*BCU
CF [C]
*BCU
[M/A for LD] M/A Target for LD Correction ([Color])
Adjusts the M/A value used during the LD correction mode. This value is effective
when SP3-125-2 LD Control Selection is set to 2.
Adjusting this data effects the image reproduction especially in highlight areas.
Printer [K]
Printer [Y]
*BCU
Printer [M]
*BCU
Printer [C]
*BCU
CF [K]
CF [Y]
*BCU
CF [M]
*BCU
CF [C]
*BCU
5-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
3902
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
3905
3905 1
3905 2
3905 3
3905 4
3905 5
3905 6
3905 7
3905 8
3905 9
3905 10
3905 11
3905 12
[Intrvl Procon] M/A Target for Paper Interval Process Control

Adjusts the target amount of each toner on paper sheets.
These values are optimized before shipment. Do not change the values. Changing
these values does not affect toner density on paper sheets.
Intrvl [K]
Intrvl [Y]
*BCU
Intrvl [M]
*BCU
Intrvl [C]
*BCU
Displays the amount of each toner on the paper.
A problem may have occurred in the copier engine if the value is high or low (i.e., if
the difference between SP3-905-1/2/3/4 and SP3-5/6/7/8 is larger than 0.03
mg/cm2).
Possible problems: Defective TD sensor, defective ID sensor, toner near-end (if the
value is lower than the target), defective toner supply mechanism
Intrvl [K]
*BCU [0 to 1.500 / - / 0.001 mg/cm2 /step]
Intrvl [Y]
*BCU
Intrvl [M]
*BCU
Intrvl [C]
*BCU
Gamma Correct [K]
*BCU [0.50 to 0.50 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU
Gamma Correct [Y]
*BCU
Gamma Correct [M]
*BCU
Gamma Correct [C]
*BCU
[PC Self Check] Process Control Self-checks

3906
3906 1 Job End
*BCU [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 print/step]
Specifies the execution timing of the job end process control self-check.
The job end process control self-check is automatically done after a job is completed
when 200 prints have been made since the last self-check.
The counter for the job end process control self-check resets when one of the
following process control self-checks is done.
Initial
Interval: Interrupt
Non-use Time
During Toner End
When K prints are made, the number of prints is calculated with the K coefficient in
SP3-906-5.
3906 2 Interrupt
*BCU [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 print /step]
Specifies the execution timing of the interrupt process control self-check.
The interrupt process control self-check is automatically done if the number of prints
in the job exceeds the number set in this SP mode. When the print job is completed,
the counter is reset, even if the interrupt self check did not occur.
When K prints are made, the number of prints is calculated with the K coefficient in
SP3-906-5.
3906 3 Non-use Time 1
*BCU [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 print/step]
0: Disable
Specifies the executing timing of the non-use time process control self-check.
The non-use time process control self-check is automatically done after the number of
prints set with this SP mode have been made and no prints have been made for the
time set with SP mode 3-906-4 since the last print job.
If the conditions are met, the self-check will be done after the print job is completed.
The counter is reset when the initial process control self-checks is done or when a
print is made.
B202/B178/B180
5-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[PC Self Check] Process Control Self-checks
3906
3906 4 Non-use Time 2
*BCU [0 to 2550 / 480 / 10 minutes/step]
0: Disable
Specifies the executing timing of the non-use time process control self-check.
3906 5 K Coefficient
*BCU [0 to 1.00 / 1.00 / 0.01 /step] DFU
Sets the coefficient to calculate the counter value for black-and-white prints.
With the default setting (100), counters used for process control count up by 1 when 1
black-and-white print has been made.
[Vmin Display] Vmin Display ([Color])
3910
3910 1 [K]
*BCU [0 to 2.00 / 0 / 0.01 /step]
Displays the current Vmin value for K
3910 2 [Color]
*BCU [0 to 2.00 / 0 / 0.01 /step]
Displays the lowest current Vmin value for the colors (CMY).
3911 1
3911 2
3911 3
3911 4
3912
3912 1
3912 2
3912 3
3912 4
3913
3913 1
3913 2
3913 3
3913 4
SM
[Vt Current Display] Vt Current Display ([Color])

Displays the current Vt value.
[K]
*BCU [0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.01 V/step]
[Y]
*BCU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
[Vt Average Display] Vt Average Display ([Color])
Displays the average Vt value.
[K]
*BCU [0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.01 V/step]
[Y]
*BCU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
Service
Tables
3911
[Toner Supply Time] Toner Supply Time Display ([Color])

Displays the toner supply clutch on time for the most recent page.
[K]
*BCU [0 to 5000 / - / 1 ms/step]
[Y]
*BCU
[M]
*BCU
[C]
*BCU
5-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
3920
[OPC Refresh]
3920 1 Temperature
*BCU [10 to 30 / 25 / 1C /step]
This SP determines the temperature threshold for determining whether refresh mode
is done just after the machine is switched on.
The charge roller generates NOx (nitrogen oxides), and these contaminate the OPC
drum surface and may cause a smeared image.
Just after the main switch is turned on, if the temperature measured by both the
thermistor located at the right side on the laser optics housing unit and the
temperature/humidity sensor is greater than the temperature specified in this SP
mode, refresh mode is done before initial process control.
During refresh mode, toner is developed on the OPC with 50V development potential
and cleaned to remove NOx. This cycle is repeated a few times.
3920 2 Humidity
*BCU [10 to 90 / 75 / 1%/step]
This SP determines the humidity threshold for determining whether refresh mode is
done just after the machine is switched on.
Just after the main switch is turned on, if the humidity measured by the
temperature/humidity sensor is greater than the humidity specified in this SP mode,
refresh mode is done before the initial process control self-check.
3920 3 Prints
*BCU [10 to 2550 / 200 / 10 prints/step]
Specifies how often refresh mode is done.
When the total number of prints since the last refresh mode exceeds the number
specified in this SP mode, refresh mode is done before the job end process control
self-check.
3920 4 Mode Set
0: Disabled
1: Mode 1 (Done at power on and toner end
recovery)
2: Mode 2 (Done at power on, toner end
recovery, and after the specified number of
prints.)
Enables/disables refresh mode.
NOTE: Refresh mode is done during the toner end recovery self-check after a new
toner cartridge is installed.
3920 5 Forced
Executes a forced refresh mode.
Use this mode when the image is smeared. It takes about 1 minute.
Also, use after replacing the components of the transfer unit (see section 3).
3920 6 Auto Toner Refresh
*BCU
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
(Auto Toner Refresh)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Performs a toner refresh during the OPC refresh mode by changing the development
bias from 50V to 400V.
Enable this SP mode when dirty background and/or firefly spots appear intermittently
on prints with a low image area ratio.
While making prints with a low image area ratio, developer is agitated with less toner
supplied. This may cause the toner-carrier attraction force to increase or toner to
coagulate.
This sometimes causes firefly spots or dirty background when a large amount of toner
is supplied.
NOTE: When enabling this SP mode, the following SP modes should be changed.
SP3-906-001 Job End Process Control Self-check
200 (Default) -> 100
SP3-920-003 OPC Refresh Mode / Prints
200 (Default) -> 100
B202/B178/B180
5-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[Forced Toner Refresh] Forced Toner Refresh

Perform forced toner refresh mode.
When the developer has deteriorated or when prints are made in a very low humidity
condition, dirty background may appear continuously.
When this kind of dirty background appears, check whether the development gamma
is within the target (SP3-120 and 121). If the development gamma is not within the
target, do this SP mode.
The machine automatically does the toner refresh mode in the following sequence.
1. Consumes toner in the development unit without toner supply until toner end is
detected
NOTE: If toner is drastically consumed for a short time, this may cause carrier to flow
out. To prevent this, toner is consumed over a long period of time. (It takes
about 20 minutes to complete this toner refresh mode).
3921 1 [K]
3921 2 All Color
3921
[OPC Refresh2]
Specifies when the OPC refresh is executed for CMY drums, which forcibly creates a
temporary 15mm-wide toner line on the drum surface by applying the development
bias (200V) and turning on the development clutch at the end of a job.
Note that this OPC refresh is a separate process from the one controlled by SP 3-920
and 3-921.
3922 1 Mode Set
*BCU [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Disable (OPC refresh is not executed.)
1: Low coverage (OPC refresh is executed
after an output of low coverage ratio.)
2: Every time (OPC refresh is executed after
every job.)
3923
3923 1
3923 2
3923 3
SM
[Trans P Pat] Line Pattern between transferred papers.

Generates line patterns between sheets on the transfer belt during a print job to
prevent the transfer cleaning blade from rolling up.
Temperature setting
*BCU [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: No Line
1: Input HH
2: Input HH, MM
3: Input All
HH (high temperature, high humidity)
MM (middle temperature, middle humidity)
Paper width
*BCU [1 or 2 / 1 / -]
1: <= LT Lengthwise (LT lengthwise or less)
2: All
Pat Interval
*BCU [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
If this SP is set to n, line patterns are generated once per (n +1) x 4 intervals.
5-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
3922
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
3924
3924 1
3924 2
[Thin out P Pat] Thin out Process Control Pattern

Vref compensation is skipped during a print job.
Pat Interval
*BCU [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 /step]
If this SP is set to n, Vref compensation is skipped n times per (n + 1) times.
Cndtn Interval
*BCU
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: LL condition
1: in LL, MM condition
2: in all condition
LL (low temperature, low humidity)
[Process Control Result] Process Control Self-check Result

Displays the result of the latest process control self-check.
All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order K Y C M
e.g., 1 1 9 1: The self-check for Cyan failed but the others were successful
See the troubleshooting section for details
3975 1 Process Control Result
*BCU [0 to 9999 / - / 1/step]
3975
B202/B178/B180
5-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP4-XXX (Scanner)
4008
[SubScanMagnification] Sub-scan Magnification Adjustment

Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.
4008 1 SubScanMagnification
*CTL [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA
[Sub Mag Reg.] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment

Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the subscan direction.
4010 1 Leading Edge Reg.
*CTL [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA
4010
[Main Scan Mag] Side-to-Side registration Adjustment

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the scanning start timing in the main
scan direction.
4011 1 Side-to-Side Reg.
*CTL [2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA
4011
4012 1
4012 2
4012 3
4012 4
[Blank Margin] Blank Margin Adjustment

Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by the gap
between the original and the scale.
*CTL [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA
Leading Edge
Trailing Edge
Left
Right
4013
[Scanner Free Run]

Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT
4013 1 Lamp: OFF
4013 2 Lamp: ON
4017
[Scan Operation]
Makes one scan with generating an F-Gate signal and shading on or off in the
following mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT
Uses this SP mode to check if the F-Gate signal is properly generated (F-Gate tells
the engine to start printing data).
4017 1 Shading ON
4017 2 Shading OFF
4020
4020 1
4020 2
SM
[Dust Check]
Dust detect: ON/OFF
*CTL#
Detect Level
*CTL
Turns the ADF scan glass dust check on/ off.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
selects the detect level.
[0 to 8 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: lowest detection level
8: highest detection level
5-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
4012
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
4020
4020 3
[Dust Check]
Dust Reject: Lvl
*CTL
Selects the level of the sub scan line correction

when using the ARDF.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
1: Weakest
2: Weak
3: Strong
4: Strongest
4301
[APS Operation Check]

Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original sensors.
(See Input Check Table.)
4301 1 APS Operation Check
4303
[APS Min Size (A5/HLT/16K)]

Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors are all
OFF.
4303 1 APS A5size Check
*CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / -]
0: out of detection
(A5/HLT/16K)
1: A5 LEF (EU) / SEF (NA)
2: A5 LEF (EU)/ LEF (NA)
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: A/B
1: 8K/16K
4305 1 This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K/16K size.
4305
[8K/16K Detection]
*BCU
4417
[IPU Test Pattern]

Selects the IPU test pattern.
4417 1 IPU Test Pattern
[0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Scanned image
1: Gradation main scan A
2: Gradation main scan B
3: Gradation main scan C
4: Gradation main scan D
5: Gradation sub scan (1)
6: Grid pattern
7: Slant grid pattern
8: Gradation RGBCMYK
9: UCR pattern
10: Color patch 16 (1)
11: Color patch 16 (2)
12: Color patch 64
B202/B178/B180
13: Grid pattern CMYK

14: Color patch CMYK
15: Gray pattern (1)
16: Gray pattern (2)
17: Gradation Pattern (3)
18: Shading pattern
19: Thin line pattern
20: Scanned + Grid pattern
21: Scanned + Gray scale
22: Scanned + Color patch
23: Scanned + Slant Grid C
24: Scanned + Slant Grid D
5-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[Saturation Adj.] Saturation Adjustment

Adjusts the level of saturation for copying.
[0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]
4440 1 Saturation Adj. 1
*CTL
0: High
4440 2 Saturation Adj. 2
*CTL 1: Lowest
2: Lower
3: Default
4: Higher
5: Highest
4440
4460
[Digital Black ADS Level]

Specifies the level of deleting the background in the ADS mode. You can adjust its
level for each scanning method (platen, ADF).
4460 1 Book/ADF
*BCU [0 to 128 / 10 / 1 step]
4460 2 ADF
*BCU [127 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
SM
[Printer V]
R: Option
R: R
R: G
R: B
Y: Option
Y: R
Y: G
Y: B
G: Option
G: R
G: G
G: B
C: Option
C: R
C: G
C: B
B: Option
B: R
B: G
B: B
M: Option
M: R
M: G
M: B
*CTL
Specifies the printer vector correction value.

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
Service
Tables
4540
4540 1
4540 2
4540 3
4540 4
4540 5
4540 6
4540 7
4540 8
4540 9
4540 10
4540 11
4540 12
4540 13
4540 14
4540 15
4540 16
4540 17
4540 18
4540 19
4540 20
4540 21
4540 22
4540 23
4540 24
5-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
4550
4550 5
4550 6
4550 7
4550 8
4551
4551 5
4551 6
4551 7
4551 8
4552
4552 5
4552 6
4552 7
4552 8
4553
4553 5
4553 6
4553 7
4553 8
4554
4554 5
4554 6
4554 7
4554 8
[SApli: Txt Prt] Scanner Application: Text/Printing DFU

MTF Lv1: 015
*CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
Selects the MTF filter level for the B/W Text mode.
Select a higher number for a stronger filter
Smooth: 07
*CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
Selects the smoothing level for the B/W Text mode.
A larger value could cause moir to appear in the image.
Brightness: 1255
*CTL [1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Selects the brightness level for the B/W Text mode.
Level 255 is the brightest.
Contrast: 1255
*CTL [1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Selects the contrast level for B/W the Text mode.
[SApli: Txt OCR 1] Scanner Application: Text OCR (except drop out color) DFU
MTF Lv1: 015
*CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
Smooth: 07
*CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
Brightness: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Contrast: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[SApli: Txt OCR 2] Scanner Application: Text OCR (drop out color) DFU
MTF Lv1: 015
*CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
Smooth: 07
*CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
Brightness: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Contrast: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[SApli: T/P] Scanner Application: Text/Photo DFU

MTF Lv1: 015
*CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
Smooth: 07
*CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
Brightness: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Contrast: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[SApli: Photo] Scanner Application: Photo DFU

MTF Lv1: 015
*CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
Smooth: 07
*CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
Brightness: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Contrast: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
B202/B178/B180
5-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
4555 6
4555 7
4555 8
4558
4558 5
4558 6
4558 7
4558 8
4559
4559 5
4559 6
4559 7
4559 8
4560
4560 5
4560 6
4560 7
4560 8
4561
4561 5
4561 6
4561 7
4561 8
4562
4562 5
4562 6
4562 7
4562 8
4600
4600 1
SM
[SApli: Gray] Scanner Application: Grayscale DFU

MTF Lv1: 015
*CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
Smooth: 07
*CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
Brightness: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Contrast: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[SApli: Col: T/P] Scanner Application: Color: Text/Photo DFU

MTF Lv1: 015
*CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
Smooth: 07
*CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
Brightness: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Contrast: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[SApli: Col: PPr] Scanner Application: Printing Paper/Photo DFU

MTF Lv1: 015
*CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
Smooth: 07
*CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
Brightness: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Contrast: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[SApli: sRGB: T/P] Scanner Application: sRGB: Text/Photo DFU

MTF Lv1: 015
*CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
Smooth: 07
*CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
Brightness: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Contrast: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Service
Tables
4555
4555 5
[SApli: sRGB: Per] Scanner Application: sRGB: Printing Paper/Photo DFU

MTF Lv1: 015
*CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
Smooth: 07
*CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
Brightness: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Contrast: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[SApli: Auto Col] Scanner Application: Auto Color DFU

MTF Lv1: 015
*CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
0: MTF Off
Smooth: 07
*CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
Brightness: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
Contrast: 1255
*CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
[SBU Version Display]

Displays the ID of the SBU.
5-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
4623
4623 1
4623 2
4623 5
4623 6
4624
4624 1
4624 2
4624 5
4624 6
4625
4625 1
4625 2
4625 5
4625 6
[R Black Adjustment] Red CCD - Black Offset Level Display

R EVEN
Displays the black offset value for the even red
signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing
speed).
R ODD
Displays the black offset value for the odd red
speed).
R BK EVEN
Displays the black offset value for the even red
signal in the CCD circuit board (black and white
printing speed).
R BK ODD
Displays the black offset value for the odd red
printing speed).
[G Black Adjustment] Green CCD - Black Offset Level Display

G EVEN
Displays the black offset value for the even
green signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
G ODD
Displays the black offset value for the odd
green signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
G BK EVEN
green signal in the CCD circuit board (black
and white printing speed).
G BK ODD
Displays the black offset value for the odd
green signal in the CCD circuit board (black
[B Black Adjustment] Blue CCD - Black Offset Level Display

B EVEN
blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
B ODD
Displays the black offset value for the odd blue
speed).
B BK EVEN
blue signal in the CCD circuit board (black and
white printing speed).
B BK ODD
Displays the black offset value for the odd blue
printing speed).
[R Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Red

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
4628 1 R EVEN
4628 2 R ODD
4628
4629
4629 1
4629 2
4629 3
4629 4
[G Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Green

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the
G EVEN
controller for Green.
G ODD
G BK EVEN
G BK ODD
B202/B178/B180
5-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[B Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Blue

4630
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the
4630 1 B EVEN
controller for Blue.
4630 2 B ODD
4623 2
4623 5
4623 6
4655
4655 1
4655 2
4655 5
4655 6
4656
4656 1
4656 2
4656 5
4656 6
[R Black Adjustment: Prev] Red CCD - Black Adjustment Previous Value Display
R EVEN
Displays the previous black offset value for the
even red signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
R ODD
odd red signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
R BK EVEN
even red signal in the CCD circuit board (black
R BK ODD
odd red signal in the CCD circuit board (black
[G Black Adjustment: Prev] Green CCD - Black Adjustment Previous Value Display
G EVEN
even green signal in the CCD circuit board
(color printing speed).
G ODD
odd green signal in the CCD circuit board
(color printing speed).
G BK EVEN
even green signal in the CCD circuit board
(black and white printing speed).
G BK ODD
odd green signal in the CCD circuit board
[B Black Adjustment: Prev] Blue CCD - Black Adjustment Previous Value Display
B EVEN
even blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
B ODD
odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color
printing speed).
B BK EVEN
even blue signal in the CCD circuit board
B BK ODD
odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board (black
[R Gain Display (Prev)] Gain Adjustment Red (Previous Adjustment)

4661
*BCU This program displays the previous result of
4661 1 R EVEN
SP4-628.
4661 2 R ODD
SM
5-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
4654
4623 1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[G Gain Display (Prev)] Gain Adjustment Green (Previous Adjustment)
4662
*BCU This program displays the previous result of
4661 1 G EVEN
SP4-629.
4661 2 G ODD
[B Gain Display (Prev)] Gain Adjustment Blue (Previous Adjustment)
4663
*
4661 1 B EVEN
This program displays the previous result of
BCU SP4-630.
4661 2 B ODD
[DF: Density Adj.] DF Density Adjustment

Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF.
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is
different.
4688 1 DF: Density Adj.
*BCU [83 to 100 / 87 / 1 %/ step]
4688
4800
[DF: Density Correction]

Sets a coefficient to adjust the image density level when scanning an image with the
ARDF.
4800 1 R
*CTL [20 to 20 / 0 / 1/step] DFU
4800 2 G
4800 3 B
4885
[Level Convert Adj.: R]
*BCU
[128 to 127 / 49 / 1 /step]
4885 1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of red.

4886
[Level Convert Adj.: G]
*BCU
[128 to 127 / 17 / 1/step]
4886 1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of green.

4887
[Level Convert Adj.: B]
*BCU
[128 to 127 / 29 / 1/step]
4887 1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of blue.

4902
4902 1
4902 2
4902 3
4902 4
4902 5
4902 6
[Display ACC Data]

R DATA1
G DATA1
B DATA1
R DATA2
G DATA2
B DATA2
B202/B178/B180
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
Displays the ACC data for each color element.
5-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
4904
[Scanner IPU Test]
4904 1 Test1: Register Access
Bit0: ASIC0 image register

Bit1: ASIC0 serial register
Bit2: ASIC1 register
Bit7: ASIC4 (MC) register
Bit8: ASIC4 (YK) register
0: OK, 1: Error
- 6.4.3 for IPU diagram
Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the scanner IPU board and displays
the result.
4904 2 Test2: Image Path
Bit0: ASIC1 to ASIC3
Bit6: ASIC2 to ASIC4 (MC)
Bit7: ASIC2 to ASIC4 (YK)
0: OK, 1: Error
- 6.4.3 for IPU diagram
Performs an image path check on the scanner IPU board and displays the result.
[Dither Selection]
Changes the parameters for error diffusion.
4905 1 Dither Selection
*CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
Service
Tables
4905
4907
[VPU Test Pattern]
4907 1 Test Pattern: R
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Default (Scanning Image)
1: Gradation(C) main scan (1)
2: Gradation(C) main scan (2)
3: Gradation(C) sub scan (1)
4: Gradation(C) sub scan (2)
5: Grid pattern (C)
Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board.
4907 2 Test Pattern: G
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Default (Scanned Image)
1: Gradation (M) main scan (1)
2: Gradation (M) main scan (2)
3: Gradation (M) sub scan (1)
4: Gradation (M) sub scan (2)
5: Grid pattern (M)
Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board.
SM
5-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
4907
[VPU Test Pattern]
4907 3 Test Pattern: B
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Default (Scanned Image)
1: Gradation (Y) main scan (1)
2: Gradation (Y) main scan (2)
3: Gradation (Y) sub scan (1)
4: Gradation (Y) sub scan (2)
5: Grid pattern (Y)
Selects the test pattern generated by the scanner IPU board.
4918
[Manual Gamma Adj.]
4918 9 Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode.
See Replacement and Adjustment Gamma Correction Copy Mode for how to
use.
*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1 /step]
Offset: Highlight
Offset: Middle
Offset: Shadow
Offset: Imax
Adjusts the option data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode.
*CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
Option: Highlight
Option: Middle
Option: Shadow
Option: IDmax
4932
4932 1
4932 2
4932 3
4932 4
[Dot Position Cor.] Main Scan Dot Position Correction

Corrects the left or right side alignment of the red or blue filter on the CCD.
For details on this adjustment, see Replacement and Adjustment Image Adjustment
- Scanner
*CTL [0 to 9 / 5 / 1 /step]
R: Left
R: Right
B: Left
B: Right
B202/B178/B180
5-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 02/2006
SP5-XXX (Mode)
5005
[IP Address Display]

Display the IP address on the display
5005 1
0: No (default)
1: Yes
5024
[mm/inch Display Selection]

Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.
5024 1 mm/inch display
*CTL 0: mm (Europe/Asia)
1: inch (USA)
5045
[Accounting Counter]
Selects the counting method if the meter charge mode is enabled with SP5-930-001.
NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether the
counter value is negative or positive.
5045 1 Counter Method
*CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Developments
1: Prints
5051
[Toner Refill Detection Display]

Enables or disables the toner refill detection display.
5051 1 Toner Refill Detection
*CTL [0 or 1 / 0 /-] Alphanumeric
Display
0: ON
1: OFF
[A3/DLT Double Count]
Specifies whether the counter is double clicked for 11 X 17 inch size prints.
*CTL [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
5104 1 Double Count
0: Normal count
1: Double count
2: Normal count for unknown size
5104
5113
[Optional Counter Type]
5113 1 Default Optional Counter
Type
5113 2 External Optional Counter

Type
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
5118
[Disable Copying]
5118 1 This program disables copying.
SM
This program specifies the counter type.

0: None
1: Key card (RK 3, 4)
2: Key card (down) 3: Prepaid card
4: Coin lock
5: MF key card
8: Key counter + Vendor
9: Bar-code Printer
This program specifies the external counter
type.
0: None
1: External optional counter type 1
[0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]
5-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 02/2006
*CTL [0: Yes (removed)/ 1: Standby (installed but not

[Mode Clear Opt. Counter
used)/ 2: No (not removed)]
Removal]
5120 1 This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install or
remove an optional counter, check the settings.
5120
*CTL [0: Feed/ 1: Exit]

5121
[Counter Up Timing]
5121 1 This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to paper feed
and paper exit respectively.
*CTL
5127
[APS Mode]
5127 1 This program disables the APS.
[0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]
5128
[Code Mode With Key/Card Option]
5128 1 DFU
*CTL
*CTL [0: DOM (Japan)/1: USA /2: ERP (Europe)]

[Paper Size Type
Selection]
5131 1 The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives: the AB
system (0), the LT system (1), and the AF system (2).
5131
5150
5150 1
*CTL [ 0: Off/ 1: On]

[By-Pass Length Setting]
Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.
Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is limited
to 600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.
*CTL [ 0: Soft Key Set/1: Hard Key Set]

5162
[App. Switch Method]
5162 1 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.
5167
5167 1
5169
5169 1
[Fax Printing Mode at Optional]

Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This SP is
used when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting device.
Fax Printing Mode at
*CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / ]
Optional Counter Off
0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing
[CE Login]
If you will change the printer bit switches, you must log in to service mode with this
SP before you go into the printer SP mode.
CE Login
*CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
B202/B178/B180
5-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 02/2006
*CTL
[Page Numbering]
This program adjusts the position of the second side page numbers.
A " value" moves the page number positions to the left edge. A "+ value" moves the
page number positions to the right edge.
5212 3 Duplex Printout Right/Left Position
[ 10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
5212 4 Duplex Printout High/Low Position
[ 10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
5212
5302
[Set Time]
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
NA :-300 (New York) CH :+480 (Peking)
EU :+ 60 (Paris)
TW :+480 (Taipei)
AS :+480 (Hong Kong)
5302 2 Set Time
*CTL [ -1440 to 1440 / 60 / 1 min./step ]
#
5307
[Summer Time]
5307 1 Setting
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]

3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
4th and 5th digits: The day of the week.
[0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
6th digit: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time.
[0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time.
[0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP4-307-1 is set to "1".
5307 4 Rule Set (End)
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week.
[0 to 7 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP4-307-1 is set to "1".
SM
5-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
[ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0
Enables or disables the summer time mode.
NOTE: Make sure that both SP4-307-2 and -3 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is
not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
5307 3 Rule Set (Start)
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the first
digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5401
5404 200
5404 201
5404 210
5404 211
5404 220
5404 221
Rev. 02/2006
[Access Control]
When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following settings. DFU
SDK1 Unique ID
*CTL This ID is overwritten by SAS (VAS) when you
install or uninstall the SDK application.
SDK1 Certification
*CTL [ 0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Method
SDK2 Unique ID
*CTL
SDK2 Certification
*CTL [ 0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Method
SDK3 Unique ID
*CTL
SDK3 Certification
*CTL [ 0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Method
5404
[User Code Counter Clear]
5404 1 UCodeCtrClr
5501
5501 1
5501 2
Clears all counters for users.

*CTL
[ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
0:
Alarm off
1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to 9999) x
1000 PM counter
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / ]
0: No alarm sounds
1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing
through the ARDF 10,000
[PM Alarm]
PM Alarm Level
Original Count Alarm
5504
5504 1
*CTL
[Jam Alarm]
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not
included).
[ 0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
5505
[Error Alarm]
B202/B178/B180
*CTL
[0 to 255 / 19 / 100 copies /step] Japan only
5-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[Supply Alarm]
Paper Supply Alarm
Staple Supply Alarm
Toner Supply Alarm
Interval :Others
Interval :A3
Interval :A4
Interval :A5
Interval :B4
Interval :B5
Interval :DLT
Interval :LG
Interval :LT
Interval :HLT
5508*
5508 1*
*CTL
[CC Call]
Jam Remains
Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.
Continuous Jams
Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.
Continuous Door Open
Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.
Low Call Mode
0: Normal mode, 1: Reduced mode
Enables/disables the new call specifications designed to reduce the number of
calls.
Jam Detection: Time Length
[ 03 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute /step]
Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an unattended paper jam. This
setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
Jam Detection: Continuous
[ 02 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]
Count
Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call. This setting is
enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
Door Open: Time Length
[ 03 to 30 / 10 / 1 /step]
Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call.
This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
Jam Operation: Time Length
0: Automatic Call
1: Audible Warning at Machine
Determines what happens when a paper jam is left unattended.
Jam Operation: Continuous
0: Automatic Call
Count
1: Audible Warning at Machine
Determines what happens when consecutive paper jams occur.
Door Operation: Time Length
0: OFF, 1: ON
Determines what happens if the door remains open (15 min.).
Displays a warning if set to ON. Pressing the call button will contact the service
center. This setting is available for setting only if SP5508 004 is set for 1.
5508 2*
5508 3*
5508 4*
5508 11*
5508 12*
5508 13*
5508 21*
5508 22*
5508 23*
SM
5-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
*CTL
0: Off, 1: On, DFU
0: Off, 1: On, Japan only
0: Off, 1: On, DFU
[00250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 /step] DFU
5507
5507 1
5507 2
5507 3
5507 128
5507 132
5507 133
5507 134
5507 141
5507 142
5507 160
5507 164
5507 166
5507 172
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5610
[ACC Factory Setting]
5610 4 Recall
Recalls the factory settings.
5610 5 Overwrite
Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings.
5610 6 Previous Setting
Recalls the previous settings.
5611
5611 1
5611 2
5611 3
5611 4
5611 5
5611 6
5801
5801 1
5801 2
5801 3
5801 4
5801 5
5801 6
5801 7
5801 8
5801 9
5801 10
[Toner Ratio in 2C]

Adjusts the color balance of a single color (blue, green, or red) by changing the
proportion of color toner (C, M, and/or Y).
B-C
*CTL [ 0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %/step ]
B-M
[ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]
G-C
[ 0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %/step ]
G-Y
[ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]
R-M
[ 0 to 100 / 100 / 1 %/step ]
R-Y
[ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]
[Memory Clear]
NOTE: For more information, see NOTE 1 following "SP8-xxx" table.
All Clear
Resets all correction data for process control and all software counters, and returns
all modes and adjustments to their default values.
To execute, hold down $ for over 3 seconds, and then turn the copier off and on
again.
Use this SP only after replacing the NVRAM, or after the copier has malfunctioned
due to a damaged NVRAM.
ENG All
Clears the engine settings.
SCS
Clears the system settings.
IMH Memory Clr
Clears IMH data. DFU
MCS
Clears MCS data. DFU
Copier Application
Clears the copy application settings.
Fax Application
Clears the fax application settings.
Printer Application
Clears the printer application settings.
Scanner Application
Clears the scanner application settings.
Web Service/Network
Application
Delete the netfile application management files and thumbnails, and initializes the
job login ID.
5801 11 NCS
Initializes the system default and interface settings (IP address also),
SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
B202/B178/B180
5-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5801
5801 12
5801 13
5801 14
5801 15
5801 16
5801 17
[Memory Clear]
NOTE: For more information, see NOTE 1 following "SP8-xxx" table.
R-FAX
Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
IPU
Clears the IPU settings
Clear DCS Settings
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
Clear UCS Settings
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.
MIRS Setting
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service) settings.
CCS
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service) settings.
5802
[EngineFreeRun]
5802 1 EngineFreeRun
Performs a free run on the copier engine.
NOTE:
The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence of A4/LT
printing from the 1st tray. Therefore, paper should be loaded in the 1st tray, but
paper is not fed.
The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode for a
test.
[Input Check]
[Output Check]
See section 5-2-2.

See section 5-2-3.
Service
Tables
5803
5804
[Destination Code] Destination Code Display

Displays the destination code.
5808 1 Destination
*BCU [ 0 to 3 / 0 / ]
0: DOM
1: NA
2: EURO
3: ASIA
5808
[SC Detection ON/OFF] SC Detection ON/OFF

Enables or disables the service call detection (SC codes will be ignored if disabling
this SP mode).
5809 1 All
*BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: Enable
1: Disable
5809
5810
[SC Reset]
Resets a type A service call condition.
NOTE: Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code.
5810 1 SC Reset
SM
5-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[Machine Serial No.] Machine Serial Number Display
Displays the machine serial number.
5811 2 Serial No. Display
*BCU
5811
5812
[Service Tel. No. Setting]
5812 1 Service
*CTL
Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on
the Counter List, which can be printed with the users Counter menu.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be
input).
5812 2 Facsimile
*CTL
Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is
printed on the Counter List.
This can be up to 13 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be
input).
5812 3 Supply
*CTL
Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables. Enter the
number and press #.
Press the " key to input a pause. Press the Clear modes key to delete the
telephone number.
5812 4 Operation
*CTL
Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number and
press #.
Press the " key to input a pause. Press the Clear modes key to delete the
telephone number.
5816
[Remote Service]
5816 1 I/F Setting
5816 2 CE Call
5816 3 Function Flag
5816 6 Device Information Call

Display Setting
5816 7 SSL Disable
B202/B178/B180
*CTL
Selects the remote service setting.
[ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: NRS remote service on
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001
is set to 2.
Enables or disables the remote service function.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Displays or does not display the device information call
content.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL
when calling the RCG.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification
1: Does no use the RCG certification
5-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5816
[Remote Service]
5816 8 RCG Connect Timeout
5816 9 RCG Write Timeout
5816 10 RCG Read Timeout
5816 11 Port 80 Enable
*CTL
Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the
RCG.
[1 to 90 / 10 / 1 second /step]
Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the
RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the
RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP
method.
[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5821
[Remote Service Address]
*CTL
5821 1 CSS-PI Device Code
5821 2 RCG IP Address
[ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU
5824
[NV-RAM Data Upload]

Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number) from
the NVRAM to a flash memory card.
5824 1 NV-RAM Data Upload
#
[NV-RAM Data Download]

Downloads the UP and SP mode data from a flash memory card to the NVRAM
5825 1 NV-RAM Download
#
5828
[Network Setting]
5828 50 1284 Compatibility
(Centro)
5828 52 ECP (Centro)
5828 65 Job Spooling
5828 66 Job Spooling Clear: Start

Time
SM
*CTL
Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50 is
set to "1".
Enables/disables Job Spooling.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at
power on.
0: ON (Data is cleared)
1: OFF (Automatically printed)
5-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
5825
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5828
[Network Setting]
5828 69 Job Spooling (Protocol)
5828 84 Print Settings List

5828 90 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON)
5828 91 Web (0: OFF 1: ON)
5832
5832 1
5832 2
5832 3
5832 4
5832 5
5832 6
5832 7
5832 8
5832 9
5832 10
5832 11
[HDD] HDD Initialization

HDD Formatting (ALL)
HDD Formatting (IMH)
HDD Formatting
(Thumbnail)
HDD Formatting (Job Log)
HDD Formatting (Printer
Fonts)
HDD Formatting (User Info)
Mail RX Data
Mail TX Data
HDD Formatting (Data for a
Design)
HDD Formatting (Log)
HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F)
5833
[e-Cabinet enable]
5833 13 e-Cabinet enable
B202/B178/B180
*CTL
Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for
each protocol.
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR
bit1: FTP
bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: (Reserved)
bit7: (Reserved)
Prints the NCS parameter list
Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / ]
Enables or disables the Web operation.
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / ]
*CTL
Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only if
there is a hard disk error.
Enables or disables the e-Cabinet.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable
1: Enable
The e-Cabinet supplies the interface for
registration, editing, deleting and obtaining the
users code name.
NOTE: Turn the main switch on and off after
using this SP.
5-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
*CTL
[Capture Settings]
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be
initialized, displayed, or selected.
5836 2 Panel Setting
0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed
Displays or does not display the capture function buttons.
5836 71 to 5836 78, Copier and Printer Document Reduction
The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent to the
document management server via the MLB.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed
5836 71 Reduction for Copy Color
0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
5836 72 Reduction for Copy B&W Text
0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
5836 73 Reduction for Copy B&W Other
0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
5836 74 Reduction for Printer Color
0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
5836 75 Reduction for Printer B&W
0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
5836 76 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ
0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
5836 77 Reduction for Printer Color 1200
1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: skipped)
5836 78 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200
1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: skipped)
5836 81 to 5836 86, Stored document format
The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents sent to
the document management server via the MLB.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed
5836 081 Format for Copy Color
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
NOTE: This SP is not used in this model.
5836 082 Format for Copy B&W Text
5836 083 Format Copy B&W Other
5836 084 Format for Printer Color
NOTE: This SP is not used in this model.
5836 085 Format for Printer B&W
5836 086 Format for Printer B&W HQ
5836 091 Default for JPEG
[ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management
server via the MLB with JPEG selected as the format.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.
5839
5839 4
[IEEE1394]
Host Name
5839 7
Cycle Master
5839 8
BCR mode
SM
*CTL
Displays the 1394 host name.
[Text up to 64 bytes / NULL / /step]
Turns the cycle master function on/off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: OFF
1: ON
Selects either Standard, 'IRM Color Copy', or 'Always
Effective'.
5-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
5836
5836 1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5839
5839 9
[IEEE1394]
IRM 1394a Check
5839 10
Unique ID
5839 11
Logout
5839 12
Login
5839 13
Login MAX
5840
[IEEE 802.11b]
5840 6 Channel Max
*CTL
Turns the IRM 1394a check on/off.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF
1: ON
If the IRM is not defined as 1394a standard, its node is
used as IRM.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF
1: ON
Prevents initiators from logging on or makes initiators
log off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF
(Prevents the initiators, having already logged on, to
log on if they try to log on.)
1: ON
(Makes initiators, having already logged on, to log off if
they try to log on.)
Allows/disallows an initiator to exclusively log on.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: OFF (Disallows)
1: ON (Allows)
Specifies the maximum initiators able to log on.
[0 to 63 / 8 / 1 /step]
[ 1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the
wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The
default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area. Adjust the
upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels. DFU
Note: Do not change the setting
5840 7 Channel Min
*CTL
[ 1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Europe: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the
wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The
default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust the
lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels. DFU
Note: Do not change the setting
5840 11 WEP key Select
*CTL
[00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary]
00: Key #1
01: Key #2 (Reserved)
Selects the WEP key.
B202/B178/B180
*CTL
5-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5841
[Supply Name Setting]
5841 1 Toner Name Setting:
Black
Cyan
Yellow
Magenta
5841 5 Staple Std
5841 6 Staple Bind
5841 7 OrgStamp
5841 11 Staple Std1
5841 12 Staple Std2
5841 13 Staple Std3
5841 14 Staple Std4
[Net File Analysis Mode Setting] DFU

Net File Analysis Mode
*CTL Default: 00000000 do not change
Setting
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document
server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder
software
5844
[USB]
5844 1 Transfer Rate
*CTL
Adjusts the USB transfer rate.

5844 2 Vendor ID
*CTL
5844 3 Product ID
*CTL
5844 4 Device Release Number
*CTL
5845
5845 1
5845 2
5845 6
5845 8
SM
Specifies supply names. These appear on the

screen when the user presses the Inquiry
button in the user tools screen.
[ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Auto Change
1: Full speed
Displays the vendor ID. DFU
Displays the product ID. DFU
Displays the development release version
number. DFU
*CTL
[Delivery Server Setting]
Provides items for delivery server settings.
FTP Port No.
[ 0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]
Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
IP Address (Primary)
Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting.
Delivery Error Display Time
[ 0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]
Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed
when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and
an external device.
IP Address (Secondary)
Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the
secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting of the IP
address without reference to the DNS setting.
5-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
5842
5842 1
*CTL
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5845 9
5845 10
5845 11
5846
5846 1
5846 2
5846 3
5846 6
5846 7
5846 8
5846 10
5846 47
5846 48
Delivery Server Model

[ 0 to 4/ 0 / 1 /step]
Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Delivery Svr Capability
[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Changes the
capability of
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
the registered
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
that the I/O
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
device
registered.
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to 0)
Delivery Svr Capability (Ext)
[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.
Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)
Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link
Bit5 to 0: Not used
[UCS Settings]
*CTL
Machine ID (For Delivery Server)
Displays ID
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is
only displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC or
IEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server)
Clears ID
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory.
Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable.
After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the
machine off and on.
Maximum Entries
[ 2000 to 20000/ 2000 /1 /step]
Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared,
and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Retry Timer
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
Delivery Server Retry Times
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
Delivery Server Maximum Entries
[2000 to 50000 / 2000 / 1/step]
Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user information
managed by UCS.
LDAP Search Timeout
[1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
Initialize Local Addr Book
Clears the local address book information,
including the user code.
Initialize Delivery Addr Book
Clears the distribution address book information,
except the user code.
B202/B178/B180
5-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5846 50
Initialize All Addr Book
5846 51
5846 52
Backup All Addr Book

Restore All Addr Book
5846 53
Clear Backup Info
5846 90
Plain Data Forbidden
5846 91
FTP Auth Port Setting
5846 94
Encryption Stat
5846 98
5846 99
Bit SW2
Bit SW
5847
5847 1
5847 2
5847 3
5847 4
5847 5
5847 6
5847 7
5847 8
5847 21
SM
[UCS Settings]
Initialize LDAP Addr Book
*CTL
Clears the LDAP address book information,
except the user code.
Clears all directory information managed by UCS,
including all user codes.
Uploads all directory information to the SD card.
Downloads all directory information from the SD
card.
Deletes the address book data from the SD card
in the service slot.
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this
machine.
This feature does not work if the card is writeprotected.
NOTE: After you do this SP, go out of the SP
mode, and then turn the power off.
Do not remove the SD card until the
Power LED stops flashing.
Allows you to prevent the address from being
written to the HDD or SD card in plain data. This
is a security function that prevents unauthorized
access to address book data.
0: No check. Address book data not protected.
1: Check. Allows operation of UCS without data
from HDD or SC card and without creating
address book information with plain data.
Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution
server address book that is used in the
identification mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]
Shows the status of the encryption function for the
address book data.
DFU
DFU
[Net File Resolution

*CTL
Reduction]
5847 1 through 5847 8 changes the default settings of image data transferred
externally by the Net File page reference function. [ 0 to 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by NetFile.
Net files are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software.
Rate for Copy Color
0: 1x
Rate for Copy B&W Text
1: 1/2x
Rate for Copy B&W Other
2: 1/3x
3: 1/4x
Rate for Printer Color
4: 1/6x
Rate for Printer B&W
5: 1/8x
Rate for Printer B&W HQ
Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi
Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi
Network Quality Default for JPEG
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This
function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
5-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
5846
5846 49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5848
5848 1
5848 2
5848 3
5848 4
5848 5
5848 7
5848 9
5848 11
5848 12
5848 13
5848 14
5848 15
5848 21
5848 22
5848 23
5848 41
5848 100
5849
5849 1
5849 2
[Web Service]
*CTL
5848 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of
0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The default is
equal to 1 gigabyte.
Access Control: Netfile
Bit switch settings.
Protocol (Lower 4 bits only)
0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan Router
have no effect on capture.
Access Control: Repository
(only Lower 4 bits)
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
0010: No writing control
Access Control: Doc. Svr. Print Switches access control on and off.
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Control: User Directory 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
(only Lower 4 bits)
Access Control: Delivery Input
(only Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower 4
bits)
Access Ctrl: Device
management (Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Copy
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Fax
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Printer
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl
Scanner (Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4
bits)
Access Ctrl: Administration
(Lower 4bits)
Access Ctrl: Image Edit (Lower
4bits)
Security Setting (Lower 4bits
only)
Repository: Download Image
Specifies the max size of the image data that the
Max. Size
machine can download.
[1 to 1024 / 1024 / 1 MB /step]
[Installation Date]
Display
Switch to Print
B202/B178/B180
*CTL
DFU
DFU
5-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5850
5850 3
*CTL Japan Only

[Address Book Function]
Replacement of Circuit Classification
The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line. This SP allows you to switch all at
once to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line. Conversely, if for some reason the
G4 line becomes unusable, you can easily switch back to G3.
5853
[Stamp Data Download]

Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROM
and copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as required. This
SP must be executed after replacing or formatting the hard disks.
NOTE: This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed.
[Remote ROM Update]

Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable when updating
the remote ROM.
5856 2 Local Port
*CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Disable
1: Enable
5857
5857 1
5857 2
5857 5
5857 6
5857 9
5857 10
5857 11
5857 12
5857 13
5857 14
5857 15
5857 16
5857 17
SM
*CTL
[Save Debug Log]
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
0: ON, 1: OFF
Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured until
this feature is switched on.
Target (2: HDD 3: SD)
2: HDD, 3: SD Card
Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions set
with SP5-858 are satisfied.
[ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
[Save to HDD]
DFU
Saves the debug log in memory to the HDD.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD
Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one
by one to each SD Card.
Save to SD Card
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Erase HDD Debug Data
Erase SD Card Debug Data
Free Space on SD Card
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB)
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Make HDD Debug
Make SD Debug
5-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
5856
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5858
5858 1
5858 2
5858 3
5858 4
5859
5859 1
5859 2
5859 3
5859 4
5859 5
5859 6
5859 7
5859 8
5859 9
5859 10
*CTL
[Debug Save When]
These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
destination selected by SP5857 002.
SP5858 3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC error
codes.
Engine SC Error
Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes generated by
copier engine errors.
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Controller SC Error
Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes generated by
GW controller errors.
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Any SC Error
[ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
Jam
Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors.
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
[Debug Save Key No.]

Key 1
Key 2
Key 3
Key 4
Key 5
Key 6
Key 7
Key 8
Key 9
Key 10
B202/B178/B180
*CTL
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files
for functions that use common memory on the
controller board. (- 5.9.1)
[ 9999999 to 9999999 / 0 / ]
5-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5860 21
5860 22
5860 25
5866
5866 1
5866 5
5870
5870 1
5870 3
5871
SM
*CTL
[SMTP/POP3/IMAP4]
Partial Mail Receive Timeout
[ 1 to 168 / 72 / ]
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception.
The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received
during this prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance
[ 0 to 1 / 1 / ]
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.
0: No
1: Yes
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement
[ 0 to 1 / 0 / ]
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated
account after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. From item not switched.
1: Yes. From item switched.
SMTP Auth. Direct Setting
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / ]
Selects the authentication method for SMPT.
Bit switch:
Bit 0: LOGIN
Bit 1: PLAIN
Bit 2: CRAM MD5
Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP mode.
[E-mail Alert] Not Used
Notice function of E-Mail
Enables or disables the E-mail alert function.

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / ] 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Add Date Field
[Common Key Info Writing]

Writing
*CTL
Initialize
*CTL
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for

validating the device for NRS specifications.
Formats the common proof area of the flash
ROM. FA
*CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / ] (0: OFF, 1: ON)

[HDD Function Disable]
Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to the HDD.
After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on to enable the
setting.
When "1" is selected, the effective partition of the HDD is limited for the Data
Overwrite Security B735.
NOTE: This SP must be activated when the Data Overwrite Security is installed.
5-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
5860
5860 20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 02/2006
5873
[SD Card Appli Move]
5873 1 Move Exec
5873 2 Undo Exec
This SP copies the application programs from the

original SD card in SD card slot 3 to an SD card in SD
card slot 1.
This SP copies back the application programs from an
SD card in SD Card Slot 1 to the original SD card in SD
card slot 3. Use this menu when you have mistakenly
copied some programs by using "Move Exec"
(SP5873-1).
5875
5875 1
[SC Auto Reboot]

SC Auto Reboot
5878
5878 1
[Option Setup]
Option Setup
5886
5886 1
[Remote Firmware Update Function]

ROM Update
0: Yes 1 (Default)
1: No
Allows to access the ROM by the Remote Firmware Update Function
B202/B178/B180
*CTL
Enables or disables the automatic reboot

function when an SC error occurs.
[ 0 or 1/ 1 / ]
0: The machine reboots automatically when
the machine issues an SC error and logs
the SC error code. If the same SC occurs
again, the machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC
error occurs.
The reboot is not executed for Type A, B or C
SC codes.
Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit.

Press "EXECUTE" on the operation panel.
Then turn the machine off and on.
5-74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 02/2006
[Plug & Play Maker/Model Name] Plug & Play Name Selection
Specifies the manufacturer and model name.
5907 1 Plug/Play
*BCU [ 0 to 17 / 0 / 1 /step ] FA
5907
5913
5913 1
5913 102
MF
RICOH
RICOH
RICOH
SAVIN
SAVIN
SAVIN
Gestetner
Gestetner
Gestetner
NRG
NRG
NRG
infotec
infotec
infotec
LANIER
LANIER
LANIER
Model Name
Aficio 3235C
Aficio 3245C
Aficio 3228C
C3528
C4535
C2824
DSc435
DSc445
DSc428
DSc435
DSc445
DSc428
ISC 2835
ISC 3545
ISC 2428
LD335c
LD345c
LD328c
NetBeui
Aficio3235C
Aficio3245C
Aficio3228C
C3528
C4535
C2824
DSc435
DSc445
DSc428
DSc435
DSc445
DSc428
ISC2835
ISC3545
ISC2428
LD335c
LD345c
LD328c
[Switchover Permission Time]

Print Application Timer
*CTL [ 3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second /step]
Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and the
operation panel keys have not been used) before another application can gain
control of the display.
Print Application Set
*CTL [ 0 or 1 / 1 / ] DFU
5961
*CTL 0: OFF, 1: ON
[Large Capacity Exit
Mode]
Selects whether or not all stapled copies are sent to Shift Tray 1 when the Two-Tray
finisher is installed.
5967
*CTL
0: ON, 1: OFF
[Copy Server Set
Function[
Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that prevents
image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing this
setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.
5970
*CTL
[Debug Serial Output]
Enables and disables the debug serial output.
Bit 7: 0 (disable), 1 (enable)
SM
5-75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 02/2006
[Cherry Server]
Specifies which version of ScanRouter, Lite or Full, is installed.
5974 1 Cherry Server Setting
*CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: Lite
1: Full
5974
5989
5989 1
5989 3
5989 4
5989 5
5990
5990 1
5990 2
5990 3
5990 4
5990 5
5990 6
5990 7
5990 8
5990 21
5990 22
5990 23
[Loop Back Test]

Executes a communication test with peripherals by using a special tool (connector),
which is unique for each peripheral.
The machine checks if the communication with the peripherals is OK or NG; then
displays the result.
DFU
Duplex
Finisher
Paper Supply Unit
ADF
[SP print mode]
Prints out the SMC sheets.
All (Data List)
SP (Mode Data List)
User Program
Logging Data
Diagnostic Report
Non-Default
NIB Summary
Capture Log
Copier User Program
Scanner SP
Scanner User Program
[Jam OFF/ON] Jam ON/OFF

Enables or disables jam detection.
5991 1 Jam OFF/ON
5991
5993
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
0: Enable
1: Disable
[Line Position Adj.] Line Position Adjustment

Line Positioning Adjustment ([Color])
M: Main-scan, S: Sub-scan, Reg.: Registration, Mag.: Magnification
For example: M Reg = Main scan registration
B202/B178/B180
5-76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5993
5993 1
5993 2
5993 3
5993 4
5993 5
5993 6
5993 7

Mode Selection
*BCU [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step ] Alphanumeric
0: Never done
1: Process Control
Done at
a) all process control self checks except
after toner end recovery and developer
initialisation.
b) new PCU detected.
c) the temperature has changed by 5C
since the last adjustment.
2: Except ProCon
As for setting 1, except it is not done
during self-checks. However, it is done
at the initial process control self check.
Specifies when the automatic line position adjustment is done.
The size of the 5C difference can be changed with SP5-993-3.
Execute
Uses to make a line position adjustment.
Temperature
*BCU [ 3 to 15 / 5 / 1oC /step]
Specifies the temperature for starting the line positioning adjustment.
The line position adjustment automatically starts when the temperature differs by the
amount specified in this SP mode from the temperature when the last adjustment was
done.
There are two thermistors on the laser optics-housing unit. The thermistor close to the
fusing unit monitors the temperature for this adjustment.
Interrupt
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the line position adjustment during a print job when the
temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the temperature at
the last adjustment.
Stand-by
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the line position adjustment during stand-by mode when the
temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the temperature at
the last adjustment.
Job Start
*BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enables or disables the line position adjustment just before starting a color print job
when the temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the
temperature when the machine woke up from energy saver mode.
Result
*BCU
Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment in 4 digits.
First and second digits: Error detected on the rear ID sensor

Third and fourth digits: Error detected on the center ID sensor
Fifth and sixth digits:
Error detected on the front ID sensor
010101
The 6th digit
The 1st digit
Refer to the Troubleshooting section for more details about the two-digit codes.
5993 8 Exe. Counter
*BCU
SM
5-77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
COPY SERVICE MODE
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5993
5993 9
5993 10
5993 11
5993 12
5993 13
5993 14
5993 15
5993 16
5993 17
5993 18
5993 19
5993 20
5993 21

Displays how many times the line position adjustment has been executed.
Counts up by +1 normally.
After a forced adjustment and a PCU replacement, it counts up +3
Also includes adjustments done at the factory.
Error Counter
*BCU Displays how many times errors have been
detected during the line position adjustment.
The way that the auto line position adjustment is done can be adjusted using the
following SP modes (SP5-993-010 to 021). These are coefficients used for the
adjustment.
Normally, do not change except if the automatic adjustment gives poor results
immediately after installing a new optics-housing unit. Change the value then do a
forced line position adjustment (SP 5-993-2) to check the effects of the changes.
Example: If magenta is always shifted one dot to the left, reduce 5-993-11 by 1.
M Offset [Y]
*BCU A fine adjustment to the main-scan registration.
M Offset [M]
*BCU [ 128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] FA
M Offset [C]
*BCU 1 dot = 20
M Mag. Offset [Y]
*BCU A fine adjustment to the main-scan
M Mag. Offset [M]
*BCU magnification.
M Mag. Offset [C]
*BCU [ 1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001% /step] FA
NOTE: The setting changes in this SP mode
will start after the next line position
adjustment.
S Offset 600[Y]
S Offset 600[M]
S Offset 600[C]
S Offset 1200[Y]
S Offset 1200[M]
S Offset 1200[C]
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
A fine adjustment to the sub-scan registration

for each color (color registration).
[ 128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step] FA
600dpi: 1 dot = 40
1200 dpi: 1 dot = 20
5993 22 Interrupt
*BCU [10 to 250 / 100 / 10 sheets/step]
Specifies the number of sheets to be printed before a line position adjustment is done
during a print job.
SP 5-993-4 must be set to enabled.
When the temperature difference meets the conditions specified in SP5-993-3, the
machine starts counting the number of prints in the job. The machine interrupts the
print job and does the line position adjustment if the number of prints exceeds the
number specified in this SP mode.
If the counted number of prints does not exceed the number specified, the machine
resets the counter, then continues to monitor the temperature and does the line
position adjustment next time.
5993 25 Drm Gear Phase
*BCU [0 to 345 / 0 / 15 degrees/step] DFU
Adjusts the phases of the black drum gear and the color drum gear.
5993 26 Initialization
*BCU [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enables or disables the line position adjustment during initialization.
5993 27 Toner Refresh
*BCU [0 to 3 / 1 / 1/step] DFU
0: Disable,
1: Line adj.,
2: PPS,
3: Line adj. 2
Selects the toner refreshing operation timing.
Repetitive line position adjustments can cause abnormal outputs such as white spots.
To prevent this, toner is consumed and supplied after line position adjustment.
B202/B178/B180
5-78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5993 31
5993 32
5993 33
5993 34
5993 35

PPS: M
This SP measures the transfer PPS in the middle speed mode.
PPS Set: M
*BCU C2a: [6043 to 6166 / 6105 / 1 /step]
C2b: [7832 to 7991 / 7912 / 1 /step]
This SP adjusts the transfer PPS in the middle speed mode.
PPS: L
This SP measures the transfer PPS in the low speed mode.
PPS Set: L
*BCU [7832 to 7991 / 7912 / 1 step]
This SP adjusts the transfer PPS in the low speed mode.
Adj. level
*BCU [0 to 5 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: HIGH
1: MID
2: LOW
3: BW-HI
4: BW-MID 5: BW-LOW
This SP specifies the level of color adjustment. This SP sets the following SPs as
listed.
SP2-919-0030
SP3-125-003
SP3-906-001
SP3-906-002
SP3-906-003
SP3-906-004
SP3-906-005
SP5-993-001
SP5-993-003
SP5-993-004
SP5-993-005
SP5-993-006
SP5-993-022
SP5-993-026
SP5-993-055
HI
0
1
200
200
200
480
1.00
1
3
1
0
1
100
1
1
MID
0
0
200
0
0
480
1.00
1
5
1
0
1
100
0
0
LOW
0
0
255
0
0
480
0.5
1
7
1
0
0
250
0
0
BW-HI
0
1
200
200
0
480
0.20
1
3
1
0
1
100
1
100
BW-MID BW-LOW
0
0
0
0
200
999
0
0
0
0
480
480
0.20
0.20
1
1
5
7
1
1
0
0
1
0
100
250
0
0
200
999
The adjustment numbers from 3 to 5 are for users who mainly use this machine for
black and white printing and copying.
36 to 39
5993 36
5993 37
5993 38
5993 39
5993 40
SM
Finely adjusts the main-scan registration. This SP can adjust the main scan
registration more precisely than the SP5993-10 to -12. Used for fine main scan offset.
S: Off Set: [Y]
*BCU [15 to 15 / 0 / 1/16dot /step] FA
S: Off Set: [M]
*BCU
S: Off Set: [C]
*BCU
Execute
*BCU
Use to make a rough line position adjustment. If color registration errors are more
than 1.4 mm, use this SP. After doing this SP, do SP5993-2 (Line position
adjustment).
Color_Adj_level (for
*BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / ] Alphanumeric
warming up)
Sets the line position adjustment type when the fusing temperature is 60C or less
immediately after the main power is turned on.
0: High (Skew adjustment once, main and sub scan magnification and registration
adjustment twice)
1: Mid (Skew adjustment once, main and sub scan magnification and registration
adjustment once)
5-79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
5993
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5993
5993 41
42 to 44
5993 42
5993 43
5993 44
45 to 47
5993 45
5993 46
5993 47
5993 48
5993 49
5993 50
51 to 53

Color_Adj_level
*BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / ]
Sets the line position adjustment type when the fusing temperature is more than 60C
immediately after the main power is turned on.
0: Mid (Main and sub scan magnification adjustment twice)
1: Low (Main and sub scan magnification adjustment once)
These SPs adjust the main scan registration when it is in 1200 dpi printing mode. The
polygon motor speed is different between the 1200 dpi printing mode and other dpi
printing modes. Because of this, the registration position of 1200 dpi printing mode is
slightly different from other printing modes.
Example: If magenta is always shifted one dot to the left, reduce 5-993-43 by 1.
[128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] FA
M: Offset: 1200 [Y]
*BCU
M: Offset: 1200 [M]
*BCU
M: Offset: 1200 [C]
*BCU
These SPs adjust the main scan registration by 1/16 dot when it is in 1200 dpi printing
mode.
M Offset 2 1200 [Y]
*BCU [15 to 15 / 0 / 1/16dot /step] FA
M Offset 2 1200 [M]
*BCU
M Offset 2 1200 [C]
*BCU
Displays the correction pulse value of the
Pulse: Y
*BCU
main-scan magnification for yellow, cyan and
Pulse: M
*BCU
magenta adjusted by the line position
Pulse: C
*BCU
adjustment.
Specifies the correction pulse value at the center of the image. This SP is used when
color registration errors occur at the center of the main scan but not at the sides, after
the line position adjustment is done. The values of these SPs are added to the
correction values that are adjusted by the center ID sensor when doing the line
position adjustment.
A "" value shifts the image to the front side of the machine (left side of the image).
A "+" value shifts the image to the rear side of the machine (right side of the
5993 51
5993 52
5993 53
5993 54
image).
D Mag Offset [Y]
D Mag Offset [M]
D Mag Offset [C]
D Mag Adj
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
*BCU
[1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse /step] FA
[0 or 1 / 1 / ] DFU
Enables or disables the main-scan magnification adjustment with the center ID
sensor. When this SP is at "0", main-scan correction is done only with the rear and
front ID sensor during the line position adjustment.
5993 55 FC Pre-job Music
*BCU [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 sheet /step]
Specifies the threshold for the line position adjustment when changing from black and
white printing and copying mode to color printing mode. When color printing starts
after the counter has got to the value set by this SP, the line position adjustment is
done before the color printing starts.
If the line position adjustment is done because of other conditions, the counter of this
SP is cleared.
[Unit Detection ON/OFF] Maintenance Unit Detection ON/OFF

5994
5994 1 Dev. Unit/PCU
*BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric DFU
#
0: Enable
1: Disable
B202/B178/B180
5-80
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Enables or disables PCU and development unit detection.
NOTE: If this mode is disabled, new unit detection also does not function. Use this
mode as a temporary measure, only when the micro-switches are defective.
[ColorGapAdj2] Color Gap Adjustment 2
Transfer belt speed affects image processing. The transfer belt speed needs to be
adjusted to uniform speed to ensure good quality image production. This machine has
the following two methods to adjust the transfer belt speed:
1. Transfer belt feedback
2. Dancing control
5995 20 Trans Drv FB
*BCU Enables or disables the transfer belt feedback
feature and dancing control.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
5995
0
1
2
5995 28
Dancing control
ON
OFF
OFF
[Trans Drv Danc]

Dancing control corrects the belt speed for changes that are caused by deflection of
the belt regularity.
Ampli Param
*BCU DFU
Phase Param
*BCU DFU
Error Counter
*BCU Clears the dancing control error counter.
Target
Do this SP to detect the HP mark and measure
the belt regularity as a standard value.
Drv Rev Set
*BCU DFU
5997
[Test Pattern]
5997 1 Tray Selection
[0 to 4 / 1 / 1/step]
0: By-pass Table
1: Tray 1
2: Tray 2
3: Tray 3
4: Tray 4
Selects the tray for making a test print.
NOTE: The machine makes a test pattern on the paper size loaded in the selected
paper tray.
SM
5-81
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
5995 23
5995 24
5995 25
5995 27
Transfer belt
feedback feature
ON
ON
OFF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5997
[Test Pattern]
5997 2 Pattern
5997 3
5997 4
5997 5
5997 6
5997 7
[0 to 23 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric
0: None
1: 1-dot sub-scan line
3: 1-dot main-scan line
5: 1-dot grid pattern (Fine)
7. 1-dot grid pattern (Rough)
9. 1-dot slant grid pattern
11. 1-dot pattern
12. 2-dot pattern
13. 4-dot pattern
14. 1-dot trimming pattern
16. Cross stitch: sub-scan
17. Cross stitch: main-scan
18. Belt pattern (Horizontal)
19. Belt pattern (Vertical)
20. Checkered Flag
21. Grey scale (Vertical)
22. Grey scale (Horizontal)
23. Solid
Selects a test pattern. After selection press "O.K".
Single Color
[0 to 6 / 6 / 1 /step] Alphanumeric
0: Red
1: Green
2: Blue
3: Yellow
4: Magenta
5: Cyan
6: Black
Selects the color for making a test pattern.
Color Mode
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
0: Full Color
1: Single Color
Selects the color mode for making a test print.
Resolution
0: 600x600
1: 1200x600
2: 1200x1200
Selects the resolution for making a test print.
By-pass Paper Size
0: A4 LEF
1: LT LEF
2: A3
3: DLT
Selects the paper size for making a test pattern from the by-pass table.
Print
Prints the test pattern with the settings specified with SP5-997-001 to 006.
NOTE: When exiting the SP mode, the test print mode is automatically canceled.
5998
[Memory Clear]
NOTE: For more information, see NOTE 1 following the "SP8-xxx" table.
5998 1 ENG Setting
Clears the engine settings except for counters.
5998 2 ENG Counter
Clears all counters.
5999
[New Unit Set]
*BCU
[0: Disable/1: Enable]
#
5999 1 PCU: Bk
5999 2 PCU: Y
5999 3 PCU: M
B202/B178/B180
This program makes the machine to start the

initialization processing for a newly installed
unit. You set 1: Enable before installing a
5-82
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
PCU: C
Dev. U: Bk
Dev. U: Y
Dev. U: M
Dev. U: C
Fuser
new unit.
Service
Tables
5999 4
5999 5
5999 6
5999 7
5999 8
5999 9
SM
5-83
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
[Original Size Priority] Original Size Detection Priority

Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since original
sensors cannot recognize all sizes.
6016 1 Original Size Priority
*CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Setting 1
1: Setting 2
6016
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Setting 1
A4 (L)
11" x 15"
DLT (L)
LT (S)
LT (L)
LG (L)
A4 (L)
8K (L)
Setting 2
LT (L)
DLT (L)
11" x 15"
US Exec (S)
8" x 10" (L)
F4 (L)
16K (L)
DLT (L)
Bits used for detection differ depending on

destination as shown below.
Bit 7 to 6: Only for Japan
Bit 5 to 2: Only for US
Bit 1 to 0: Only for EU/AA
[DF Magnification Adj.] DF Magnification Adjustment
Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF.
6017 1 DF Magnification Adj.
*CTL [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
6017
6110
[Punch Position]
Adjusts the punching position.
Punch 1
US: 2 punch holes
Europe: 2 punch holes
North Europe: 4 punch holes
Punch 2
US: 3 punch holes
Europe: 4 punch holes
Increment: Holes move toward the paper center.

Decrement: Holes move toward the paper edge.
6110 1 MF Fin 1
*BCU [-7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]
6110 2 MF Fin 2
*BCU
6110 3 Booklet Fin
[-2.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]
B202/B178/B180
5-84
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
6111
[Staple Position]
Adjusts the stapling position.
Increment: Staple position moves toward the edge of paper.
Decrement: Staple position moves toward the center of paper.
NOTE: Although the adjustable range is 3.5 mm, the stapling position can be
changed only by 1.0 mm when stapling one position at the front or rear side even
when the input value is more than 1.0.
6111 1 MF Fin
*BCU [-3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]
6111 2 Booklet Fin
[-3.75 to 3.75 / 0 / 0.25 mm/step]
6112
6111 1
6111 2
6112 3
6112 4
6112 5
6112 6
[Fold Position]
A3/DLT
B4/LG
A4/LT
A3/DLT
B4/LG
A4/LT
*BCU
[-3.75 to 3.75 / 0. / 0.25 mm/step]

Adjusts the folding positions of the optional
booklet finisher.
[Multi Bin Set]

Specifies whether or not the optional multi-bin output tray is installed. When installing
the multi-bin output tray, this SP mode should be set to 1.
6901 1 Multi Bin Set
*BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Not installed
1: Installed
Service
Tables
6901
SM
5-85
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP7-XXX (Data Log)

7001
*BCU Display: 00000000~99999999 min

Working Time
The number of prints and drive time for drum revolutions can be obtained by counting
the main motor revolution time. If the amount of time required for the drum to revolve
to print 1 copy increases, this data combined with the number of copies can be used
to analyze problems and could be useful for future product development.
7002
[Original Counter]
Displays the total original count (number of originals fed) for the selected mode.
Total
*CTL
Copy
Fax
Doc. Svr. Application
Scanner
Others
7002 1
7002 2
7002 3
7002 4
7002 5
7002 6
7003
7003 1
7003 2
7003 4
7003 5
7003 7
7003 8
7003 10
7003 11
7003 12
7003 13
7003 20
7003 21
7003 22
7003 23
7003 24
7003 25
7003 26
7003 27
7003 28
7003 29
7003 30
[Print Counter] Meter Charge Counter

(Print, Development)
Displays the values of the color counters.
Total Count
*CTL
[-9999 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
Copy: B&W
Copy: Full Color
FAX: B&W
Print: B&W
Print: Full Color
*CTL These SP modes are development counters for
Development: CMY
the meter charge mode.
Development: K
*CTL Displays the values of the color counters.
Copy: Single Color
Copy: Twin Color
Total: Full Color
*CTL These SP modes are used for Japanese
market only.
Total: B&W Single
Total: Single
Total: B&W
*CTL This SP mode is print counters for the meter
charge mode.
*CTL These SP modes are used for Japanese
Copy: Full Color
market only.
Print: Full Color
Copy: Color
*CTL These SP modes are print counters for the
meter charge mode.
Copy: B/W
Print: Color
Print: B&W
Total: Color Total
7007
[Other Counter]
Displays counter values.
7007 1 Duplex
7007 2 A3/DLT
7007 3 Staple
B202/B178/B180
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
5-86
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7101 5
7101 6
7101 14
7101 38
7101 44
7101 132
7101 133
7101 134
7101 141
7101 142
7101 160
7101 164
7101 166
7101 172
7101 255
7105
7105 1
7105 2
7105 3
7105 4
7105 5
7105 6
7105 7
7105 8
7105 9
7105 11
7105 12
[Print CountPaper Size] Paper Size Counter

Displays the counter values for each paper size.
A4 LEF
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
A5 LEF
B5 LEF
LT LEF
HLT LEF
A3 SEF
A4 SEF
A5 SEF
B4 SEF
B5 SEF
DLT SEF
LG SEF
LT SEF
HLT SEF
Other
[Print CountPaper Size] Paper Size Counter
Displays the counter values for each paper size.
Normal
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Recycled
Special
Color
Letterhead
Letterhead
Label
Thick
Used
Index
Others
7201
[Total Scan Counter]

Displays the total number of scans.
7201 1 Total Scan Counter
*CTL
7204
7204 1
7204 2
7204 3
7204 4
7204 5
7204 6
SM
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 scan/step]
[Print CounterPaper Tray] Paper Feed Section Counter

Displays the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
Bypass
*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Duplex
5-87
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
7101
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7205
[Total ADF Counter]

Displays the total number of originals fed by the ARDF.
7205 1 ADF Total Counter
*CTL
7206
[Staple Counter]
7206 1 Normal Staple
7206 2 Binding Staple
*CTL
Displays the number of stapler operations.
7209
[Punch Counter]
Displays the number of times hole punching has been done.
7209 1 Punch
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
7401
[Total SC Counter]
Displays the number of SC codes detected.
7401 1 SC Counter
*CTL
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
7403
7403 1
7403 2
7403 3
7403 4
7403 5
7403 6
7403 7
7403 8
7403 9
7403 10
[SC History]
Logs the SC codes detected.
The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but can be
seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
Latest
*CTL
Latest 1
Latest 2
Latest 3
Latest 4
Latest 5
Latest 6
Latest 7
Latest 8
Latest 9
7502
[Total Paper Jam Counter]

Displays the total number of jams detected.
7502 1 Total Jam
*CTL
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
7503
[Total Original Jam Counter]

Displays the total number of original jams.
7503 1 Original Jam counter
*CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 original/step]
B202/B178/B180
5-88
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Rev. 11/2005
7504
[Paper Jam Location]

D: Duplex, MB: Mail Box, F; Finisher, E: External, I: Internal
ON: On check, OFF: Off Check
Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected.
7504 3 Tray 1: ON
*CTL
SM
Tray 2: ON
Tray 3/LCT: ON
Tray 4: ON
Regist.: ON
External Tray: ON
Internal Tray: ON
Duplex: ON
Duplex Exit 1: ON
Duplex Exit 2: ON
Duplex Exit 3: ON
Duplex Feed: ON
Tray 1: OFF
Tray 2: OFF
Tray 3/LCT: OFF
Tray 4: OFF
Registration: OFF
External Tray: OFF
Internal Tray: OFF
Duplex: OFF
Duplex Exit 1: OFF
Duplex Exit 2: OFF
Duplex Exit 3: OFF
Duplex Feed: OFF
Finisher Entrance
Finisher Shift Tray 1
Finisher Shift Tray 2
Finisher Staple
Finisher Exit
Finisher Drive
Finisher Tray Up/Down
Finisher Jogger
Finisher Staple
Finisher Exit
Finisher Punch
Finisher Jam Clear
Finisher Entrance: ON
Finisher Entrance: OFF
Finisher STACK Exit
Finisher Folder: ON
Finisher Folder: OFF
Finisher Stapler
Finisher Punch
Finisher Transport Motor
Finisher Paddle Motor
Finisher Stapler Slide Motor / Stapler Folder Motor
Finisher Jogger Motor
Finisher Lift Motor
5-89
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Service
Tables
7504 4
7504 5
7504 6
7504 8
7504 9
7504 10
7504 11
7504 12
7504 13
7504 14
7504 15
7504 51
7504 52
7504 53
7504 54
7504 61
7504 63
7504 64
7504 65
7504 66
7504 67
7504 68
7504 69
7504 100
7504 101
7504 102
7504 103
7504 104
7504 105
7504 106
7504 107
7504 108
7504 109
7504 110
7504 111
7504 120
7504 121
7504 122
7504 123
7504 124
7504 125
7504 126
7504 127
7504 128
7504 129
7504 130
7504 131
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7505
7505 1
7505 3
7505 4
7505 5
7505 6
7505 7
7505 53
7505 54
7505 55
7505 56
7505 57
7506
7506 5
7506 6
7506 14
7506 38
7506 44
7506 132
7506 133
7506 134
7506 141
7506 412
7506 160
7506 164
7506 166
7506 172
7506 255
7507
7507 1
7507 2
7507 3
7507 4
7507 5
7507 6
7507 7
7507 8
7507 9
7507 10
[Original Jam Detection]

Displays the total number of original jams by location.
At Power On
*CTL
Skew Correction Sensor (On Check)
Interval Sensor (On Check)
Registration Sensor (On Check)
Relay Sensor (On Check)
Inverter Sensor (On Check)
Skew Correction Sensor (Off Check)
Interval Sensor (Off Check)
Registration Sensor (Off Check)
Relay Sensor (Off Check)
Inverter Sensor (Off Check)
[Jam Count by Paper Size]
Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.
A4 LEF
*CTL
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
A5 LEF
B5 LEF
LT LEF
HLT LEF
A3 SEF
A4 SEF
A5 SEF
B4 SEF
B5 SEF
DLT SEF
LG SEF
LT SEF
HLT SEF
Others
[Plotter Jam History]
Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.
Latest
*CTL
Latest 1
Latest 2
Latest 3
Latest 4
Latest 5
Latest 6
Latest 7
Latest 8
Latest 9
B202/B178/B180
5-90
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7508
7508 1
7508 2
7508 3
7508 4
7508 5
7508 6
7508 7
7508 8
7508 9
7508 10
[Original Jam History]

Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams.
Latest
*CTL
Latest-1
Latest-2
Latest-3
Latest-4
Latest-5
Latest-6
Latest-7
Latest-8
Latest-9
[ROM No./Firmware Version]

Displays the version of each firmware
7801 Firmware Version
255
7803
7803 1
7803 2
7803 3
7803 4
7803 5
7803 6
7803 7
7803 8
7803 9
7803 10
7803 11
7803 12
7803 13
7803 14
7803 15
7803 16
7803 17
SM
[PM Counter]
(Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color])
Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Oil Supply: Oil Supply Unit, Fusing:
Fusing Unit, Transfer: Transfer Unit
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.
PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets printed.
Therefore, the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double Count cannot be
deactivated.
When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is
installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM
Counter - Previous (SP7-906-1 to 10) and is reset to 0.
The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked with
SP7-906-1 to 10.
*BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Paper
S: PCU [K]
S: PCU [Y]
S: PCU [M]
S: PCU [C]
S: Dev. [K]
S: Dev. [Y]
S: Dev. [M]
S: Dev. [C]
S: Oil Supply
PF By-pass
PF Tray 1
PF Tray 2
PF Tray 3
PF Tray 4
S: Fusing
S: Transfer
5-91
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
7801
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7803
7803 18
7803 19
7803 20
7803 21
7803 22
7803 23
7803 24
7803 25
7803 26
7803 27
7803 28
7803 29
7803 30
7803 31
7803 32
7803 33
7803 34
7803 35
7803 36
7803 37
7803 38
7803 39
7803 40
7803 41
7803 42
7803 43
7803 44
7803 45
[PM Counter]
Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current
maintenance unit.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]
When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is
installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM
Counter - Previous (SP7-906-11 to 20) and is reset to 0. The total number of
revolutions made with the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7-906-11 to 20.
R: PCU [K]
*BCU Target Revolution: 300,000
R: PCU [Y]
Target Revolution: 319,000
R: PCU [M]
R: PCU [C]
R: Dev. [K]
Target Revolution: 1,142,000
R: Dev. [Y]
R: Dev. [M]
R: Dev. [C]
R: Oil Supply
R: Fusing
R: Transfer
Displays the number of sheets printed until the waste toner bottle becomes full or
toner runs out.
S: Waste Toner
*BCU [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 sheet/step]
S: Toner [K]
S: Toner [Y]
S: Toner [M]
S: Toner [C]
Displays the total operating time for the toner attraction pump.
*BCU [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 s/step]
Toner Supply [K]
Toner Supply [Y]
Toner Supply [M]
Toner Supply[C]
Displays the value given by the following formula:
(Current revolution Target revolution) 100. This shows how much of the units
expected lifetime has been used up.
The R% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reaches
the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the print count lifetime is
reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the R% counter
is still less than 100%.
Oil supply unit: When the R% counter reaches 100%, it enters the near-end condition,
not the end condition. The end condition occurs some number of rotations after this
(not adjustable).
NOTE: The machine internally adjusts or compensates as necessary, depending on
conditions of machine usage. Due to this, at the oil supply unit near-end
condition, the R% counter of the oil supply unit can be 100%, lower than
100%, or higher than 100%.
R(%): PCU [K]
*BCU
R(%): PCU [Y]
R(%): PCU [M]
R(%): PCU [C]
R(%): Dev [K]
R(%): Dev [Y]
R(%): Dev [M]
R(%): Dev [C]
B202/B178/B180
5-92
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7803 46
7803 47
7803 48
7803 49
7804
7804 1
7804 2
7804 3
7804 4
7804 5
7804 6
7804 7
7804 8
7804 9
7804 10
7804 11
7804 12
7804 13
7804 14
7804 15
7804 16
7804 17
7804 18
7804 50
[PM Counter]
R(%): Oil Supply
R(%): Fusing
S: Trans Cln
R: Trans Cln
[PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear
(Unit, [Color])
Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Transfer: Transfer Unit
Clears the PM counter.
Press the Enter key after the machine asks Execute?, which will store the PM
counter value in SP7-906-1 to 35 (PM Counter - Previous) and reset the value of the
current PM counter to 0.
Paper
PCU [K]
PCU [Y]
PCU [M]
PCU [C]
Dev. [K]
Dev. [Y]
Dev. [M]
Dev. [C]
Oil Supply
PF By-pass
PF Tray 1
PF Tray 2
PF Tray 3
PF Tray 4
Fusing
Transfer
Trans Cln
All
7807
[SC/Jam Counter Reset]

Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.
7807 1 SC/Jam Clear
7808
[Counter Reset]
NOTE: For more information, see NOTE 1 following this table.
Clears all counters.
7808 1 Counter Clear
7810
[Access Code Clear]

Use to clear the access code if the customer forgets the code (password).
7810 1 Access Code Clear
7811
SM
[Original Counter Clear]
5-93
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
7803
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7811 1 This program reset the original counter (SP7-002-001 through 006).
7816
7816 1
7816 2
7816 3
7816 4
7816 5
7816 6
[Tray Clear] Paper Tray Counter Clear

Clears the counters (SP7-204) for the number of sheets fed from the paper feed
stations.
Bypass Tray
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3/LCT
Tray 4
Duplex
7826
[MF Error Counter] Japan Only
7826 1 Error Total
7826 2 Error Staple
7827
[MF Error Counter Clear] Japan Only
7832
[Self-Diagnose Result Display]

Displays the result of the diagnostics.
7832 1 Diag. Result
*CTL
7833 1
7833 2
7833 3
7833 4
[Coverage] Pixel Coverage Ratio

Displays the image coverage ratio for each color of the last output.
This SP mode displays the coverage ratio of the output, i.e. the ratio of the total
pixel area of the image data to the total printable area on the paper. Note that this
value is not directly proportional to the amount of toner consumed, although of course
it is one factor that affects this amount. The other major factors involved include: the
type, total image area and image density of the original, toner concentration and
developer potential.
*BCU [0 to 100.00 / - / 0.01 %/step]
Last [K]
Last [C]
Last [M]
Last [Y]
Displays accumulated average value of image coverage ratio for each color.
SP 7-833-5 to -8 vs SP 8-831-1 to 4
The averages for K (SP 7-833-5 and SP 8-831-1) are the same.
For CMY, SP 8-831 does not include black-and-white pages in the middle of a color
job. However, SP 7-833 does include these pages in the average. As a result, the
readings of SP 7-833 will be lower, because these averages include pages for which
there is zero for CMY, but the averages calculated for SP 8-831 do not include these
pages.
7833 5
7833 6
7833 7
7833 8
Average [K]
Average [C]
Average [M]
Average [Y]
7833
B202/B178/B180
*BCU
[0 to 100.00 / - / 0.01 %/step]
5-94
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7833 11
7833 12
7833 13
7833 14
Displays the total number of toner cartridges replaced.

*BCU [0 to 65535 / - / 1 cartridge/step]
Toner [K]
Toner [C]
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011
Toner [M]
through 014 and the data in SP8-781-001
Toner [Y]
through 004 are the same.
[Coverage Clr] Coverage/Toner Data Clear

7834
7834 1 Average
This menu resets the data in SP7-833-005
through 008.
7834 2 Toner
through 014 and SP8-781-001 through 004.
7834 3 S: PREV Toner
through 004.
7834 4 S: Coverage 0-100
through 004, SP8-861-001 through 004, SP 8871-001 through 004, and SP8-881-001
through 004.
7834 255 All
This menu resets all the data listed above.
*CTL
[0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Displays the number of times ACC has been
done.
7836
Total Memory Size

Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
7852
ADF Scan Glass Dust Check Counter

Counts the number of occurrences (0 ~ 65,535) when dust was detected on the
scanning glass of the ADF. Counting is done only if SP4020 1 (ADF Scan Glass Dust
Check) is switched on. Memory All Clear (SP5801) resets this counter to zero
7901
[Assert Info]
Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data stored in
this SP is used for problem analysis. DFU
7901 1 File Name
7901 2 Number of Lines
7901 3 Location
7905
[Alert Display]
7905 10 Wst Oil: Full
*BCU [232 to 464 / 232 / 1 kilo-revolutions/step]
Specifies the number of revolutions the development drive motor-K can make after
the message, Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full, is displayed.
The machine stops after the motor has made the specified number of revolutions.
This SP specifies the interval from near end to end for the waste oil bottle. 232k
revolutions equals 2.5k prints. If it is set to 464, the end condition is 5.0k prints after
near end.
7905 14 Oil: Alert: Page
*BCU [25.0 to 27.5 / 27.5 / 0.1 kilo-sheets/step]
Specifies the number of sheets the machine can output after the oil supply reaches
the near-end condition.
SM
5-95
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
7835
ACC Counter
7835 1 Copy ACC
7835 2 Printer ACC
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
7906
7906 1
7906 2
7906 3
7906 4
7906 5
7906 6
7906 7
7906 8
7906 9
7906 10
7906 11
7906 12
7906 13
7906 14
7906 15
7906 16
7906 17
7906 18
7906 19
7906 20
7906 21
7906 22
7906 23
7906 24
7906 25
7906 26
7906 27
7906 28
7906 29
7906 30
7906 31
7906 32
7906 33
7906 34
7906 35
[PM Counter: Previous]

(Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units.
S:PCU [K]
*BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
S:PCU [Y]
S:PCU [M]
S:PCU [C]
S:Dev. [K]
S:Dev. [Y]
S:Dev. [M]
S:Dev. [C]
S:Oil Supply
S:Fusing
Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous
maintenance units.
R:PCU [K]
*BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]
R:PCU [Y]
R:PCU [M]
R:PCU [C]
R:Dev. [K]
R:Dev. [Y]
R:Dev. [M]
R:Dev. [C]
R:Oil Supply
R:Fusing
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or toner
cartridge.
S:Waste Toner
*BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
S:Toner [K]
S:Toner [Y]
S:Toner [M]
S:Toner [C]
Displays the value given by the following formula:
(Current count Yield count) x 100, where Current count is the current values in the
counter for the part, and Yield count is the recommended yield.
R(%): PCU [K]
*BCU [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 %/step]
R(%): PCU [Y]
R(%): PCU [M]
R(%): PCU [C]
R(%): Dev [K]
R(%): Dev [Y]
R(%): Dev [M]
R(%): Dev [C]
R(%): Oil Supply
R(%): Fusing
7907
[Check Sum]
Displays the check sum of the firmware.
*BCU
7907 1 Engine Main
7907 2 Engine MUSIC
B202/B178/B180
5-96
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
SP8-xxx: Data Log2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available,
such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes
that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers
SP8 211~SP8 216
SP8 401~SP8 406
SP8 691~SP8 696
What They Do
The number of pages scanned to the document server.
The number of pages printed from the document server
The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

How is the document server actually being used?
What application is using the document server most frequently?
What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of
operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an application). Before reading
the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes
mean.
Total: (Grand Total).
C:
F:
P:
S:
L:
Copy application.
Fax application.
Print application.
Scan application.
Local storage
(document server)
O:
Other applications
(external network
applications, for
example)
SM
What it means
Grand total of the items counted for all
applications (C, F, P, etc.).
Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each
application when the job was not stored on the
document server.
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document
server. The L: counters work differently case by
case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored
on the document server; this can be in
document server mode (from the document
server window), or from another mode, such as
from a printer driver or by pressing the Store
File button in the Copy mode window.
Sometimes, they include occasions when the
user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
Refers to network applications such as Web
Image Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK
(Software Development Kit) will also be counted
with this group in the future.
5-97
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
Prefixes
T:
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of

displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs.
Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name
of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation
/
>
AddBook
Apl
B/W
Bk
C
ColCr
ColMode
Comb
Comp
Deliv
DesApl
Dev Counter
Dup, Duplex
Emul
FC
FIN
Full Bleed
GenCopy
GPC
IFax
ImgEdt
K
LS
LSize
Mag
MC
NRS
Org
OrgJam
Palm 2
PC
B202/B178/B180
What it means
By, e.g. T:Jobs/Apl = Total Jobs by Application
More (2> 2 or more, 4> 4 or more
Address Book
Application
Black & White
Black
Cyan
Color Create
Color Mode
Combine
Compression
Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,
Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Duplex, printing on both sides
Emulation
Full Color
Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
No Margins
Generation Copy Mode
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter
does not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this
counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10
(e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI,
e.g. border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
Black (YMCK)
Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
Large (paper) Size
Magnification
One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to
monitor machines remotely. NRS is used overseas, CSS
is used in Japan.
Original for scanning
Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that
allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers
on the network, and allows files to moved around,
combined, and converted to different formats.
Personal Computer
5-98
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Abbreviation
PGS
PJob
Ppr
PrtJam
PrtPGS
R
Rez
SC
Scn
Sim, Simplex
S-to-Email
SMC
Svr
TonEnd
TonSave
TXJob
YMC
YMCK
What it means
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.
Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as
two pages if the 11 X 17 inch counter SP is switched ON.
Print Jobs
Paper
Printer (plotter) Jam
Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model
A2 only. This machine is under development and currently
not available.
Resolution
Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scan
Simplex, printing on 1 side.
Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8
counters are recorded in the SMC report.
Server
Toner End
Toner Save
Send, Transmission
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
Service
Tables
NOTE: All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.
SM
5-99
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 001
8 002
8 003
8 004
8 005
8 006
8 007
T:Total Jobs
C:Total Jobs
F:Total Jobs
P:Total Jobs
S:Total Jobs
L:Total Jobs
O:Total Jobs
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of times each

application is used to do a job.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the
other applications are used to send a job to the
document server, plus the number of times a file
already on the document server is used.
These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of
pages processed.
When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer
engineer using the SP modes are not counted.
When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job),
the job is counted at the time when either Delete Data or Specify Output is
specified.
A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L:
counter does not (the document server is not used).
A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the
broadcast are not counted separately).
A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their
destinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not
be counted until the transmission has been completed.
A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments,
and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also
increments.
When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and
L: counters both increment.
When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter
increments.
When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter
increments.
When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter
increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax
application, the F: counter increments.
B202/B178/B180
5-100
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 011
8 012
8 013
8 014
8 015
8 016
8 017
T:Jobs/LS
C:Jobs/LS
F:Jobs/LS
P:Jobs/LS
S:Jobs/LS
L:Jobs/LS
O:Jobs/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the

document server by each application, to reveal how
local storage is being used for input.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from
within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel.
When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments.
When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter
increments.
When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter
increments.
When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter
increments.
When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
T:Pjob/LS
C:Pjob/LS
F:Pjob/LS
P:Pjob/LS
S:Pjob/LS
L:Pjob/LS
O:Pjob/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs reveal how files printed from the

document server were stored on the document
server originally.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the C: counter increments.
When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on
the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the
C: and P: counters both increment.
When a job already on the document server is printed with another application,
the L: counter increments.
When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within
document server mode, then the L: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including
Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network
application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
SM
5-101
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
8 021
8 022
8 023
8 024
8 025
8 026
8 027
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 031
8 032
8 033
8 034
8 035
8 036
8 037
T:Pjob/DesApl
C:Pjob/DesApl
F:Pjob/DesApl
P:Pjob/DesApl
S:Pjob/DesApl
L:Pjob/DesApl
O:Pjob/DesApl
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs reveal what applications were used

to output documents from the document server.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
printed from within the document server mode
When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count
for the application that started the print job is incremented.
When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web
Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
8 041
8 042
8 043
8 044
8 045
8 046
8 047
T:TX Jobs/LS
C:TX Jobs/LS
F:TX Jobs/LS
P:TX Jobs/LS
S:TX Jobs/LS
L:TX Jobs/LS
O:TX Jobs/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the applications that stored

files on the document server that were later
accessed for transmission over the telephone
line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or
as a fax image by I-Fax).
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted
separately.
scanned from within the document server mode
When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter
increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2
is sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
8 051
8 052
8 053
8 054
8 055
8 056
8 057
T:TX Jobs/DesApl
C:TX Jobs/DesApl
F:TX Jobs/DesApl
P:TX Jobs/DesApl
S:TX Jobs/DesApl
L:TX Jobs/DesApl
O:TX Jobs/DesApl
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the applications used to send

files from the document server over the
telephone line or over a network (attached to an
e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs
merged for sending are counted separately.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent
from within the document server mode screen
at the operation panel.
If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example,
then the O: counter increments.
B202/B178/B180
5-102
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 061
T:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
8 062
C:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
8 063
F:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
P:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is
8 065
8 066
8 067
SM
S:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
L:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified
from the print window within document server mode.
O:FIN Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
8 06x 1
Sort
8 06x 2
8 06x 3
8 06x 4
8 06x 5
Stack
Staple
Bookle
t
Z-Fold
8 06x 6
Punch
8 06x 7
Other
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is set
for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter
increments. (See SP8 066 1)
Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple
mode, the Staple counter also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode
and set for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a
print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8 064 6.)
Reserved. Not used.
5-103
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
8 064
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 071
8 072
8 073
8 074
8 075
8 076
8 077
8 07x 1
8 07x 2
8 07x 3
8 07x 4
8 07x 5
8 07x 6
8 07x 7
T:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages
in the job, regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
F:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
P:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on
S:Jobs/PGS
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on
L:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of
pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of Other application jobs (Web
Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the
job.
1 Page
8 07x 8
21~50 Pages
2 Pages
8 07x 9
51~100 Pages
3 Pages
8 07x 10
101~300 Pages
4 Pages
8 07x 11
301~500 Pages
5 Pages
8 07x 12
501~700 Pages
6~10 Pages
8 07x 13
701~1000 Pages
11~20 Pages
8 07x 14
1001~ Pages
For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in
document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is
counted at the time the error occurs.
For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by
multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One
duplex page counts as 2.)
The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the
number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the
page is counted.
B202/B178/B180
5-104
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 111
8 113
8 11x 1
8 11x 2
T:FAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a
telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
FAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by
fax directly on a telephone line.
B/W
Color
These counters count jobs, not pages.

This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application,
including documents stored on the document server.
If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the
job started.
If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination
where both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x)
also increments.
The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
T:IFAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent,
either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images
using I-Fax.
8 123
IFAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not
stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
8 12x 1 B/W
8 12x 2 Color

The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not
available at this time.
The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is
sent.
SM
5-105
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
8 121
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 131
T:S-to-Email Jobs
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was
used or not.
8 135
S-to-Email Jobs
*CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and
attached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.
8 13x 1 B/W
8 13x 2 Color
8 13x 3 ACS

If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined
to be color or black-and-white then counted.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending
on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or
Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. Each send is
counted separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email
as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once
for Scan-to-PC).
8 141
8 145
8 14x 1
8 14x 2
8 14x 3
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
and sent to a Scan Router server.
Deliv Jobs/Svr
*CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in
scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
B/W
Color
ACS

The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the
Scan Router server cannot be confirmed.
If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is
counted as a Color job.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
B202/B178/B180
5-106
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 151
T:Deliv Jobs/PC
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts.
8 155
S:Deliv Jobs/PC
*CTL
and sent with Scan-to-PC.
8 15x 1 B/W
8 15x 2 Color
8 15x 3 ACS
8 161
8 163
T:PCFAX TX Jobs
F:PCFAX TX Jobs
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of PC Fax

transmission jobs. A job is counted from when it
is registered for sending, not when it is sent.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending
the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier.
8 191
8 192
8 193
8 195
8 196
T:Total Scan PGS

C:Total Scan PGS
F:Total Scan PGS
S:Total Scan PGS
L:Total Scan PGS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the pages scanned by each

application that uses the scanner to scan
images.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number
of physical pages.
These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to
adjust color.
Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
SM
5-107
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables

If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Examples
If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not
stored, the S: count is 4.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using
the Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L:
count is 6.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
8 201
8 205
8 211
8 212
8 213
8 215
8 216
T:LSize Scan PGS

*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission
are not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display.
S:LSize Scan PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are
not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display.
T:Scan PGS/LS
C:Scan PGS/LS
F:Scan PGS/LS
S:Scan PGS/LS
L:Scan PGS/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages scanned

into the document server.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
Reading user stamp data is not counted.

If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S:
count is 4.
If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not
change.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C:
count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
B202/B178/B180
5-108
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 221
8 221 1
8 221 2
ADF Org Feeds

*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and
backside scanning.
Front
Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either
simplex or duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front
side scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user
loads face up.)
Back
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side
scanning.
8 231
8 231 1
8 231 2
8 231 3
8 231 4
8 231 5
Scan PGS/Mode
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the workload on the ADF.
Large Volume
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded
in the ADF at one time.
SADF
Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the
ADF.
Mixed Size
Selectable. Select Mixed Sizes on the operation
panel.
Custom Size
Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Platen
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the
original directly on the platen.
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application
so if the originals page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
If the user selects Mixed Sizes for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size
count is enabled.
In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2
pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
SM
5-109
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count
is 1.
If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double
counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet
is output.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 241
T:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all
jobs, regardless of which application was used.
8 242
C:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy
jobs.
8 243
F:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
8 245
S:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan
jobs.
8 246
L:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen
8 247
O:Scan PGS/Org
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type by Other
applications.
8 241
8 242
8 243
8 245
8 246
8 247
8 24x 1: Text
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 24x 2: Text/Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 24x 3: Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 24x 4: GenCopy, Pale
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 24x 5: Map
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
8 24x 6: Normal/Detail
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
8 24x 7: Fine/Super Fine
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
8 24x 8: Binary
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
8 24x 9: Grayscale
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
8 24x 10: Color
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
8 24x 11: Other
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
B202/B178/B180
5-110
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 251
8 252
8 254
8 256
8 257
T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs show how many times Image Edit

features have been selected at the operation
panel for each application. Some examples of
these editing features are:
Erase> Border
Erase> Center
Image Repeat
Centering
Positive/Negative
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the
edit features have been used. A detailed
breakdown of exactly which features have been
used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs show how many times color creation
features have been selected at the operation
panel.
8 281
8 285
T:Scan PGS/TWAIN
S:Scan PGS/TWAIN
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages scanned

using a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal
how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery
functions.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
8 291
8 293
8 295
8 296
T:Scan PGS/Stamp
F:Scan PGS/Stamp
S:Scan PGS/Stamp
L:Scan PGS/Stamp
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages stamped

with the stamp in the ADF unit.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
SM
5-111
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
8 261
T:Scan PGS/ColCr
8 262
C:Scan PGS/ ColCr
8 266
L:Scn PGS/ColCr
8 26x 1 Color Conversion
8 26x 2 Color Erase
8 26x 3 Background
8 26x 4 Other
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 301
8 302
8 303
8 305
8 306
8 30x 1
8 30x 2
8 30x 3
8 30x 4
8 30x 5
8 30x 6
8 30x 7
8 30x 8
8 30x 9
8 30x 10
8 30x 254
8 30x 255
T:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
F:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
output page size [SP 8-443].
S:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
output page size [SP 8-445].
L:Scan PGS/Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to
compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446].
A3
A4
A5
B4
B5
DLT
LG
LT
HLT
Full Bleed
Other (Standard)
Other (Custom)
B202/B178/B180
5-112
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 311
8 315
8 31x 1
8 31x 2
8 31x 3
8 31x 4
8 31x 5
T:Scan PGS/Rez
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
Scan PGS/Rez
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
1200dpi ~
600dpi~1199dpi
400dpi~599dpi
200dpi~399dpi
~199dpi
Service
Tables
Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

The Fax application does not allow finely adjusted resolution settings so no count
is done for the Fax application.
SM
5-113
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 321
8 325
8 32x 1
8 32x 2
8 32x 3
8 32x 4
8 32x 5
8 32x 6
8 381
8 382
8 383
8 384
8 385
8 386
8 387
T:Scan PGS/Comp
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by compression method the total number of pages
scanned.
S:Scan PGS/Comp
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by compression method the total number of pages
scanned by the Scan application.
JPEG
JPEG2000
TIFF (Comp OFF)
TIFF (Comp ON)
PDF
Other
T:Total PrtPGS
C:Total PrtPGS
F:Total PrtPGS
P:Total PrtPGS
S:Total PrtPGS
L:Total PrtPGS
O:Total PrtPGS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed

by the customer. The counter for the application
used for storing the pages increments.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored
with the Store File button from within the Copy
mode screen go to the C: counter.
When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT
page is counted as 2.
When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored
is counted for the application that stored them.
These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine,
so the following pages are not counted as printed pages:
Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slipsheets.
Reports printed to confirm counts.
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine
maintenance reports, etc.)
Test prints for machine image adjustment.
Error notification reports.
Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
B202/B178/B180
5-114
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 391
8 401
8 402
8 403
8 404
8 405
8 406
LSize PrtPGS
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
T:PrtPGS/LS
C:PrtPGS/LS
F:PrtPGS/LS
P:PrtPGS/LS
S:PrtPGS/LS
L:PrtPGS/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL

from the document server. The counter for the
application used to print the pages is
incremented.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Service
Tables
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the
L: count.
Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F:
count.
SM
5-115
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 411
Prints/Duplex
8 421
8 422
8 423
8 424
8 425
8 426
8 427
8 42x 1
8 42x 2
8 42x 3
8 42x 4
8 42x 5
8 42x 6
8 42x 7
8 42x 8
8 42x 9
8 42x 10
8 42x 11
8 42x 12
8 42x 13
*CTL
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back

counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing.
Last pages printed only on one side are not
counted.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the copier application.
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window
at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
pages processed for printing by Other applications
Simplex> Duplex
Duplex> Duplex
Book> Duplex
Simplex Combine
Duplex Combine
2>
2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
4>
6>
8>
9>
16>
Booklet
Magazine
These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who
need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper
consumption.
Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1
page.
Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
B202/B178/B180
5-116
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 431
8 432
8 434
8 436
8 437
8 43x 1
8 43x 2
8 43x 3
SM
Magazine
Original
Count
Pages
1
1
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
4
6
4
7
4
8
4
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with Other applications.
Cover/Slip Sheet
Total number of covers or slip-sheets inserted. The
count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
Series/Book
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
User Stamp
The number of pages printed where stamps were
applied, including page numbering and date stamping.
5-117
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
Booklet
Original
Count
Pages
1
1
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
3
6
4
7
4
8
4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 441
8 442
8 443
8 444
8 445
8 446
8 447
8 44x 1
8 44x 2
8 44x 3
8 44x 4
8 44x 5
8 44x 6
8 44x 7
8 44x 8
8 44x 9
8 44x 10
8 44x
254
8 44x
255
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within
the document server mode window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
A3
A4
A5
B4
B5
DLT
LG
LT
HLT
Full Bleed
Other (Standard)
Other (Custom)
These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
B202/B178/B180
5-118
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 451 1
8 451 2
8 451 3
8 451 4
8 451 5
8 451 6
8 451 7
8 451 8
8 451 9
8 451 10
8 461
8 462
8 463
8 464
8 466
8 46x 1
8 46x 2
8 46x 3
8 46x 4
8 46x 5
8 46x 6
8 46x 7
8 46x 8
SM
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
Bypass
Bypass Tray
Tray 1
Copier
Tray 2
Copier
Tray 3
Paper Tray Unit (Option)
Tray 4
Paper Tray Unit (Option)
Tray 5
LCT (Option)
Tray 6
Currently not used.
Tray 7
Currently not used.
Tray 8
Currently not used.
Tray 9
Currently not used.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is
based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed
rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
Normal
Recycled
Special
Thick
Normal (Back)
Thick (Back)
OHP
Other
5-119
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
8 451
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 471
8 471 1
8 471 2
8 471 3
8 471 4
8 471 5
PrtPGS/Mag
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
~49%
50%~99%
100%
101%~200%
201% ~
Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation
panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of
performing magnification adjustment as well.
Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as
Excel are also counted.
Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on
the document server are not counted.
Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge
copying are counted.
The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip-sheets, etc. are automatically
assigned a rate of 100%.
8 481
8 484
T:PrtPGS/TonSave
*CTL
P:PrtPGS/TonSave
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results, as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 491
8 492
8 493
8 496
8 49x 1
8 49x 2
8 49x 3
8 49x 4
T:PrtPGS/Col Mode
C:PrtPGS/Col Mode
F:PrtPGS/Col Mode
L:PrtPGS/Col Mode
B/W
Single Color
Two Color
Full Color
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL

in the Color Mode by each application.
8 501
8 504
8 50x 1
8 50x 2
8 50x 3
T:PrtPGS/Col Mode
P:PrtPGS/Col Mode
B/W
Single Color
Full Color
*CTL
*CTL

in the Color Mode by the print application.
B202/B178/B180
5-120
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 511
8 514
8 514 1
8 514 2
8 514 3
8 514 4
8 514 5
8 514 6
8 514 7
8 514 8
8 514 9
8 514 10
8 514 11
8 514 12
8 514 13
8 514 14
T:PrtPGS/Emul
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
RPCS
RPDL
PS3
R98
R16
GL/GL2
R55
RTIFF
PDF
PCL5e/5c
PCL XL
IPDL-C
BM-Links
Japan Only
Other
Service
Tables
SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results, as they are both limited to the
Print application.
Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
SM
5-121
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 521
8 522
8 523
8 524
8 525
8 526
8 52x 1
8 52x 2
8 52x 3
8 52x 4
8 52x 5
8 52x 6
8 52x 7
T:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Copy application.
F:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Fax application.
NOTE: Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
P:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Print application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
Sort
Stack
Staple
Booklet
Z-Fold
Punch
Other
NOTE: 1) If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling,
the unstapled pages are still counted.
2) The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so
jam recoveries are counted.
8 531
Staples
8 581
T:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of
the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
Total
Total: Full Color
B&W/Single Color
Development: CMY
Development: K
Copy: Color
Copy: B/W
Print: Color
8 581 1
8 581 2
8 581 3
8 581 4
8 581 5
8 581 6
8 581 7
8 581 8
B202/B178/B180
*CTL
This SP counts the amount of staples used

by the machine.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
5-122
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 581
8 581 9
8 581 10
8 581 11
8 581 12
8 581 13
8 581 14
8 581 15
8 581 16
8 582
8 582 1
8 582 2
8 582 3
8 582 4
T:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of
the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
Print: B/W
Total: Color
Total: B/W
Full Color: A3
Full Color: B4 JIS or Smaller
Full Color Print
Mono Color Print
Full Color GPC
C:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by
color output.
B/W
Single Color
Two Color
Full Color
F:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color
output.
8 583 1 B/W
8 583 2 Single Color
8 584
P:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by
color output.
8 584 1 B/W
8 584 2 Single Color
8 584 3 Full Color
8 586
8 582 1
8 582 2
8 582 3
8 582 4
SM
L:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color
output.
B/W
Single Color
Two Color
Full Color
5-123
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
8 583
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 591
8 591 1
8 591 2
8 591 3
8 631
8 633
8 63x 1
8 63x 2
O:Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
A3/DLT
Duplex
Staple
T:FAX TX PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
FAX TX PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
B/W
Color
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8631 and SP8633 are the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
B202/B178/B180
5-124
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 641
T:FAX TX PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
images using I-Fax.
8 643
IFAX TX PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax
images using I-Fax.
8 64x 1 B/W
8 64x 2 Color
Service
Tables
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are
counted separately as B/W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so
SP8641 and SP8643 are the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,
the count is done for each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each
destination.
SM
5-125
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 651
8 655
8 656
8 65x 1
8 65x 2
T:S-to-Email PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an email for both the Scan and document server applications.
S-to-Email PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an email for the Scan application only.
L:S-to-Email PGS
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an email for LS applications only.
B/W
Color
NOTE: 1) The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored
on the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not
counted.
2) If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses,
the count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
3) If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the
count is 50 (the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP
server).
4) Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a
10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may be
divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is
sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and
the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
B202/B178/B180
5-126
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 661
T:Deliv PGS/Svr
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
8 665
Deliv PGS/Svr
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Router server by the Scan application.
8 666
L:Deliv PGS/Svr
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Router server by LS applications.
8 66x 1 B/W
8 66x 2 Color
NOTE: 1) The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the
HDD of the Scan Router server.
2) If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes,
the counts are not done.
3) The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at
the Scan Router server.
T:Deliv PGS/PC
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
8 675
Deliv PGS/PC
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scanto-PC with the Scan application.
8 676
L:Deliv PGS/PC
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scanto-PC function with the LS applications.
8 67x 1 B/W
8 67x 2 Color
SM
5-127
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
8 671
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 681
8 683
T:PCFAX TXPGS
PCFAX TXPGS
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC

Fax. These SPs are provided for the Fax
application only, so the counts for SP8 681 and
SP8 683 are the same.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC
through the copier to the destination.
When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting,
the pages are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location
A and location B. The counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
8 691
8 692
8 693
8 694
8 695
8 696
T:TX PGS/LS
C:TX PGS/LS
F:TX PGS/LS
P:TX PGS/LS
S:TX PGS/LS
L:TX PGS/LS
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages sent from

the document server. The counter for the
application that was used to store the pages is
incremented.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored
from within the document server mode screen at
the operation panel. Pages stored with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen go
to the C: counter.
NOTE: 1) Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are
added to the count.
2) If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages
stored is counted for the application that stored them.
3) When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is
done for the number of pages sent to each destination.
8 701
8 701 1
8 701 2
8 701 3
8 701 4
8 701 5
8 715
8 715 1
8 715 2
8 715 3
8 715 4
TX PGS/Port
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via
ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
PSTN-1
PSTN-2
PSTN-3
ISDN (G3,G4)
Network
S:Scan PGS/Comp
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode.
JPEG/JPEG2000
TIFF(Multi/Single)
PDF
Other
B202/B178/B180
5-128
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 741 1
8 741 2
8 741 3
8 741 4
8 741 5
8 771
8 771 1
8 771 2
8 771 3
8 771 4
8 771 5
8 781
8 781 1
8 781 2
8 781 3
8 781 4
RX PGS/Port
*CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port
used to receive them.
PSTN-1
PSTN-2
PSTN-3
ISDN (G3,G4)
Network
Dev Counter
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.
Total
K
Y
M
C
Toner Bottle Info.
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in SP8781-001 through 004 are the same.
Toner [BK]
The number of black-toner bottles
Toner [Y]
The number of yellow-toner bottles
Toner [M]
The number of magenta-toner bottles
Toner [C]
The number of cyan-toner bottles
8 791
LS Memory Remain
8 801
Toner Remain
*CTL
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps)
is better than other machines in the market that can only measure in
increments of 10 (10% steps).
K
Y
M
C
8 801 1
8 801 2
8 801 3
8 801 4
SM
*CTL
This SP displays the percent of space

available on the document server for
storing documents.
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
5-129
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
8 741
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 831
8 831 1
8 831 2
8 831 3
8 831 4
8 841
8 841 1
8 841 2
8 841 3
8 841 4
8 851
8 851 1
8 851 2
8 851 3
8 851 4
8 861
8 851 1
8 851 2
8 851 3
8 851 4
8 871
8 871 1
8 871 2
8 871 3
8 871 4
8 881
8 881 1
8 881 2
8 881 3
8 881 4
Coverage
*BCU
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the average coverage by color. ( SP 7-833)
Average [BK]
Average [Y]
Average [M]
Average [C]
Coverage
*BCU
[0~100/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the coverage of the last print by color. ( SP 7-833)
Last [BK]
Last [Y]
Last [M]
Last [C]
Coverage: 0-10%
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is from 0% to 10%.
S: BK
S: Y
S: M
S: C
Coverage: 11-20%
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
S: BK
S: Y
S: M
S: C
Coverage: 21-30%
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
S: BK
S: Y
S: M
S: C
Coverage: 31%*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
each color is 31% or higher.
S: BK
S: Y
S: M
S: C
B202/B178/B180
5-130
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 891 1
8 891 2
8 891 3
8 891 4
8 901
8 901 1
8 901 2
8 901 3
8 901 4
8 941
8 941 1
8 941 2
8 941 3
8 941 4
8 941 5
8 941 6
8 941 7
8 941 8
8 941 9
SM
PM Counter
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of sheets output by the scan application.
S: Toner [BK]
S: Toner [Y]
S: Toner [M]
S: Toner [C]
PM Counter: Previous
*BCU
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of sheets output by the scan application with
the previously replaced units.
S: Toner [BK]
S: Toner [Y]
S: Toner [M]
S: Toner [C]
Machine Status
*CTL
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine
operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
Operation Time
Engine operation time. Does not include time while
controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
Standby Time
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller
saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
Energy Save Time
Includes time while the machine is performing
background printing.
Low Power Time
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing.
Off Mode Time
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing. Does not include time machine
remains powered off with the power switches.
Down Time/SC
Total down time due to SC errors.
Down Time/PrtJam
Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
Down Time/OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning.
Down Time/TonEnd Total down time due to toner end.
5-131
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
8 891
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
8 951
8 951 1
8 951 2
8 951 3
8 951 4
8 951 5
8 951 6
8 951 7
8 951 8
8 951 9
8 951 10
AddBook Register
*CTL
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
User Code
User code registrations.
[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]
Mail Address
Mail address registrations.
Fax Destination
Fax destination registrations.
Group
Group destination registrations.
Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrations
for relay TX.
F-Code
F-Code box registrations.
Copy Program
[0~255 / 0 / 255]
Copy application registrations with
the Program (job settings) feature.
Fax Program
Fax application registrations with
the Program (job settings) feature.
Printer Program
Printer application registrations
with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Scanner
Scanner application registrations
Program
with the Program (job settings)
feature.
B202/B178/B180
5-132
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5801
[Memory Clear]
5801 1 All Clear
5801 2 ENG All
5801 3 SCS
5801 4 IMH
5801 5 MCS
5801 6 Copier application
5801 7 Fax application
5801 8 Printer application
5801 9 Scanner application

5801 10 Netfile application
5801 11 NCS
5801 12 IPU
5801 13 R-Fax
5801 14 Clear DCS Settings
5801 15 Clear UCS Settings
5801 16 MIRS Setting
5801 17 CCS
5998
[Memory Clear]
5998 1 ENG Setting
5998 2 ENG Counter
SM
Resets all correction data for process control and all

software counters, and returns all modes and
adjustments to their default values.
Clears the engine settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System
Control Service) settings, operation display
coordinates, and ROM update information.
No SP modes are cleared. But, all files stored in the
HDD are cleared.
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
No SP modes are cleared.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
Initializes all copier application settings.
Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.
The following service settings:
Bit switches
Gamma settings (User & Service)
Toner Limit
The following user settings:
Tray Priority
Menu Protect
System Setting except for setting of Energy Saver
I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout)
PCL Menu
Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all
the scanner SP modes.
Deletes the network file application management files
and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)
(NCS: Network Control Service)
Clears the IPU settings
Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service)
settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report
Service) settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control
Service) settings.
All engine related SP modes except for the following:

Serial number information
SP modes related to meter charge
Counters and logging data
All counters and logging data related to engine
5-133
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
NOTE: Memory Clear (SP5-801)

The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information,
meter charge setting and meter charge counters (SP8-581, 582, 583, 584, and
586) are not cleared.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5.2.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE

When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each
digit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No.
Result
5803
7
0 or 1
Bit
6
0 or 1
5
0 or 1
4
0 or 1
3
0 or 1
2
0 or 1
Paper end
Paper detected
Activated
(Actuator not
inside sensor)
Deactivated
2 Paper Height Sensor 1
3 Paper Height Sensor 2
4 Tray Set
5803 2 Paper Tray 2
0 Paper End Sensor
1 Paper Lift Sensor
See Table 1.
Not set
Set
Paper end
Paper detected
Activated
Deactivated
(Actuator not
inside sensor)
See Table 1.
1: Activated
(Actuator inside sensor)
Paper Height Sensor 1

4 Paper Size Switch 1

5803 3 By-pass Table
0 Paper End Sensor
1 Paper Size 1
2 Paper Size 2
3 Paper Size 3
4 Paper Size 4
5803 4 Doors
0 Front Door Switch
1 Left Door Switch
2 Right Door Switch
3 Vertical Transport Switch
4 Duplex Inverter Unit Switch
5 Right Door Switch (LCT/PFU)
5803 5 Paper Feed
0 Relay Sensor
1 Vertical Transport Sensor
2 Upper Relay Sensor (PFU)
3 Lower Relay Sensor (PFU)
4 Registration Sensor
5 Duplex Inverter Sensor
6 Duplex Feed Sensor
B202/B178/B180
0
0 or 1
Reading
Description
5803 1 Paper Tray 1

0 Paper End Sensor
1 Paper Lift Sensor
2
3
1
0 or 1
See Table 2.
1: Pushed
Paper end
Paper detected
See Table 3.
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Paper not detected

Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
5-134
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Paper not detected

Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Not full
Not set
Set
0 to 1 : New unit installed
Set
Not set
1 to 0 : New unit installed
US
Europe
Not Set
Set
Not full
Full
Not locked
Not locked
Not locked
Not locked
Not locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Not set
Not set
Not set
Not set
Not set
Not set
Not set
Not set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Not end
Not end
Not end
Not end
End
End
End
End
Not H.P.
Not contact
Not full
Not set
H.P.
Contact
Full
Set
Activated
(Actuator inside
sensor)
Activated
(Actuator inside
sensor)
Deactivated
6
Drum Gear Position Sensor - CMY

Deactivated
SM
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Full
5-135
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
5803 6 Paper Exit

0 Fusing Exit Sensor
1 Paper Exit Sensor
2 Duplex Exit Sensor 1
5 Exit Upper Limit Sensor
5803 7 Fusing Unit
0 Fusing Unit (Set)
1 Fusing Unit (New)
2 Oil Supply Unit (Set)
3 Oil Supply Unit (New)
4 European Version
5 Waste Oil Bottle Set Sensor
6 Waste Oil Sensor
5803 8 Motor Lock
0 Development Drive Motor - CMY
1 Development Drive Motor - K
2 Fusing Fan Motor
3 Air Pump Motor - MY
4 Air Pump Motor - CK
5803 9 Dev. Unit/ PCU
0 Development Unit - K
1 Development Unit - C
2 Development Unit - M
3 Development Unit - Y
4 PCU - K
5 PCU - C
6 PCU - M
7 PCU - Y
5803 10 Toner End Sens
0 Black Toner
1 Cyan Toner
2 Magenta Toner
3 Yellow Toner
5803 13 Others
0 LD H.P. Sensor
1 Transfer Belt Sensor
2 3 Used Toner Sensor
4 Used Toner Bottle Set Sensor
5 Drum Gear Position Sensor - K
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5803
Bit
Reading
Description
5803 15 Mail Box 1 (Not used)

0 Tray 1 Paper Overflow Sensor
1 Tray 1 Paper Sensor
5803 16 Mail Box 2 (Not used)
0 Vertical Transport Sensor 1
1 Vertical Transport Sensor 2
2 Door Safety Switch
Not full
Paper not detected
Not full
Paper not detected
Not full
Paper not detected
Not full
Paper not detected
Full
Paper detected
Full
Paper detected
Full
Paper detected
Full
Paper detected
Paper not detected

Paper not detected
Opened
Paper detected
Paper detected
Closed
ARDF Input Check: SP6-007

6007
Bit
6007 1 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
6007 2 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
6007 3 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
Original width sensor 4
Skew correction sensor
Original set sensor
Original length sensor 1*
Original stopper HP sensor
Pick-up HP sensor
Top cover Sensor
Lift sensor
Inverter sensor
Exit sensor
Registration sensor
Interval Sensor
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
Reading
0
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Original stopper up
Cover closed
Cover closed
Pick-up roller up
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
Paper not detected
1
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Original stopper down
Cover opened
Cover opened
Pick-up roller down
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
NOTE: The original length sensors detect the following paper sizes: B5 (sensor 1),
LG (sensor 2), and A4 (sensor 3).
B202/B178/B180
5-136
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor

Remaining paper
Full
Nearly full
Near end
Almost empty
Low: Deactivated, High: Activated (actuator inside sensor)

Paper height sensor 1
Paper height sensor 2
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
Low
Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)

Models
North America
Europe/Asia
11" x 17" SEF
11" x 17" SEF
A3 SEF
A3 SEF
81/2" x 14" SEF *1
B4 SEF *1
81/2" x 11" SEF *2
A4 SEF *2
11" x 81/2" LEF *3
11" x 81/2" LEF *3
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
B5 LEF
B5 LEF
A5 LEF
A5 LEF
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0: Not pushed, 1: pushed

Switch Location
2
3
4
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
Service
Tables
NOTES:
*1
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-2
*2
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 11" SEF or A4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-3
*3
: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)

Models
North America
Europe/Asia
11" x 17" SEF
11" x 17" SEF
A3 SEF
A3 SEF
B4 SEF
81/2" x 11" SEF
A4 SEF
8" x 13" SEF
F SEF
A5 SEF
51/2" x 181/2" SEF
B6 SEF
Post Card
Post Card
SM
Bit No.
4
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
3
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
5-137
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
Table 4: Original Size Detection

Original Size
A4/A3 version
A3
B4
F4
A4-L
B5-L
A4-S
B5-S
A5-L, A5-S
B202/B178/B180
Length Sensor
LT/DLT version
11" x 17"
10" x 14"
8.5" x 14" (8" x 13")
8.5" x 11"
11" x 8.5"
5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5"
L3
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
L2
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
L1
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
5-138
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Width
Sensor
W2
W1
O
O
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
X
O
X
X
SP4-301
display
132
141
165
133
142
5
14
128
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE

CH: Charge
PF: Paper Feed
TS: Toner Supply
CW: Clockwise
CCW: Counterclockwise
MB: 4-bin Mailbox
DI: Duplex Inverter
5804 1
5804 2
5804 3
5804 4
5804 5
5804 6
5804 7
5804 8
5804 9
5804 10
5804 11
5804 12
5804 13
5804 14
5804 19
5804 20
5804 21
5804 22
5804 23
5804 24
5804 25
5804 26
5804 27
5804 28
5804 29
5804 30
5804 31
5804 32
5804 33
5804 34
5804 35
5804 36
5804 37
5804 38
5804 39
5804 40
5804 41
5804 42
5804 43
5804 44
SM
Description
Lift M UP (1)
Lift M DOWN(1)
Lift M UP(2)
Lift M DOWN(2)
By-pass CL
Pick-up SOL
PF CL (1)
PF CL (2)
PF GRP SOL
Regist CL
Junction SOL
Oil Supply SOL
Fusing CL
Wst Tn Vib M
K Dev CL
C Dev CL
M Dev CL
Y Dev CL
K Dev M H
K Dev M M
K Dev M L
K Dev M Card
FC Dev M H
FC Dev M M
FC Dev M L
TS CL [Y]
TS CL [M]
TS CL [C]
TS CL [K]
Valve SOL [K]
Valve SOL [C]
Valve SOL [M]
Valve SOL [Y]
Toner Sply Mt1
Toner Sply Mt2
Air Supply [Y]
Air Supply [M]
Air Supply [C]
Air Supply [K]
T End Sens [Y]
Tray 1 Lift Motor / UP

Tray 1 Lift Motor / DOWN
Tray 2 Lift Motor / UP
Tray 2 Lift Motor / DOWN
By-pass Feed Clutch
Pick-up Solenoid
Paper Feed Clutch - Tray 1
Paper Feed Clutch - Tray 2
Grip Roller Release Solenoid
Registration Clutch
Exit Junction Gate Solenoid
Oil Supply Unit Solenoid
Fusing Clutch
Waste Toner Vibration Motor
Development Unit Clutch - K
Development Unit Clutch - C
Development Unit Clutch - M
Development Unit Clutch - Y
Development Motor - K / High Speed
Development Motor - K / Middle Speed
Development Motor - K / Low Speed
Black Development Motor - Thick paper
Color Development Motor - 185mm/s
Color Development Motor - 125mm/s
Color Development Motor - 62.5mm/s
Toner Supply Clutch for Yellow
Toner Supply Clutch for Magenta
Toner Supply Clutch for Cyan
Toner Supply Clutch for Black
Air Flow Valve solenoid for Black
Air Flow Valve solenoid for Cyan
Air Flow Valve solenoid for Magenta
Air Flow Valve solenoid for Yellow
Toner Supply Motor 1 - yellow and magenta
Toner Supply Motor 2 - cyan and black
Air Pump Motor and Valve for Yellow
Air Pump Motor and Valve for Magenta
Air Pump Motor and Valve for Cyan
Air Pump Motor and Valve for Black
Toner End Sensor - Y
5-139
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
5804
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5804
5804 45
5804 46
5804 47
5804 50
5804 51
5804 52
5804 53
5804 54
5804 55
5804 56
5804 57
5804 58
5804 59
5804 65
5804 66
T End Sens [M]

T End Sens [C]
T End Sens [K]
PSU Fan
Fusing Fan H
Fusing Fan L
M Fan
Belt M CW
Belt M CCW
Belt M Break
Fusing Relay
Heat Lamp
Pressure Lamp
Drum M L CW
Drum M M CW
5804 67
5804 76
5804 77
5804 78
5804 79
5804 80
5804 81
Drum M H CW
PF M L CW
PF M M CW
PF M H CW
PF M Feed
By-Pass M L CW
By-Pass M C CW
5804 82
5804 89
5804 90
5804 91
5804 92
5804 93
5804 94
5804 95
5804 96
5804 97
5804 98
5804 99
5804 100
5804 101
5804 102
5804 103
5804 104
5804 105
5804 106
5804 107
5804 108
5804 109
5804 110
5804 111
By-Pass M M CW
CH DC [Y]
CH DC [M]
CH DC [C]
CH DC [K]
CH AC [FC] 62.5
CH AC [K] 62.5
CH AC [FC] 125
CH AC [K] 125
CH AC [FC] 185
CH AC [K] 185
Dev DC [Y]
Dev DC [M]
Dev DC [C]
Dev DC [K]
Dev AC [FC] 62.5
Dev AC [K] 62.5
Dev AC [FC] 125
Dev AC [K] 125
Dev AC [FC] 185
Dev AC [K] 185
Transfer [Y]
Transfer [M]
Transfer [C]
B202/B178/B180
Description
Toner End Sensor - M
Toner End Sensor - C
Toner End Sensor - K
PSU Cooling Fan Motor
Fusing Fan Motor / High Speed
Fusing Fan Motor / Low Speed
Laser Optics Housing Unit Cooling Fan
Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Clockwise
Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Counterclockwise
Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Break
Fusing Relay
Heating Roller Fusing Lamp
Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp
Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / Low Speed / Clockwise
Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / Middle Speed /
Clockwise
Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / High Speed / Clockwise
Paper Feed Motor / Low Speed / Clockwise
Paper Feed Motor / Middle Speed / Clockwise
Paper Feed Motor / High Speed / Clockwise
Paper Feed Motor / Feed Speed / Clockwise
Paper Feed Motor / Low Speed / Clockwise
Paper Feed Motor / Thick paper or OHP mode /
Clockwise
Paper Feed Motor / Middle Speed / Clockwise
Charge DC Bias for Yellow / 125 mm/s
Charge DC Bias for Magenta / 125 mm/s
Charge DC Bias for Cyan / 125 mm/s
Charge DC Bias for Black / 125 mm/s
Charger AC / Full Color / 62.5 mm/s
Charger AC / Black / 62.5 mm/s
Charger AC / Full Color / 125 mm/s
Charger AC / Black / 125 mm/s
Charger AC / Full Color / 185 mm/s
Charger AC / Black / 185 mm/s
Development DC Bias for Yellow
Development DC Bias for Magenta
Development DC Bias for Cyan
Development DC Bias for Black
Development AC Bias for Color - 62.5 mm/s
Development AC Bias for Black - 62.5 mm/s
Development AC Bias for Color - 125 mm/s
Development AC Bias for Black - 125 mm/s
Development AC Bias for Color - 185 mm/s
Development AC Bias for Black - 185 mm/s
Transfer Current for Yellow
Transfer Current for Magenta
Transfer Current for Cyan
5-140
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5804
5804 112
5804 113
5804 114
5804 115
5804 116
5804 117
5804 118
5804 119
5804 120
5804 121
5804 122
5804 123
5804 124
5804 125
5804 126
5804 127
5804 128
5804 129
5804 130
5804 131
5804 132
5804 133
5804 134
5804 136
5804 137
5804 141
5804 142
5804 143
5804 144
5804 145
5804 146
5804 147
5804 148
5804 149
5804 150
5804 151
5804 152
5804 153
5804 154
5804 155
5804 156
5804 157
5804 158
5804 159
5804 165
Transfer [K]
Cleaning Bias
PA Roller Bias+
PA Roller BiasDevAC TRG [FC]
DevAC TRG [K]
DevPWM TRG [K]
DevPWM TRG [C]
DevPWM TRG [M]
DevPWM TRG [Y]
CHdcPWM TRG [K]
CHdcPWM TRG [C]
CHdcPWM TRG [M]
CHdcPWM TRG [Y]
CHac1 TRG [FC]
Chac2 TRG [FC]
Chac3 TRG [FC]
CHac1 TRG [K]
Chac2 TRG [K]
Chac3 TRG [K]
ID Sensor LED
TD Vcnt
Memory Chip
PCU Cln Bias K
PCU Cln Bias YMC
Polygon M 29
Polygon M 21
LD FC[K]62.5
LD FC[K]125
LD FC[Y]62.5
LD FC[Y]125
LD FC[M]62.5
LD FC[M]125
LD FC[C]62.5
LD FC[C]125
LD1 [K] 62.5
LD1 [K] 125
LD1 [K] 185
LD2 [K] 62.5
LD2 [K] 125
LD2 [K] 185
LD [K]62.5
LD [K]125
LD [K]185
PSU M
5804 166 PF CL PFU (1)

5804 167 PF CL PFU (2)
SM
Description
Transfer Current for Black
Transfer Belt Cleaning Roller Bias
Paper Attraction Roller Bias
Paper Attraction Roller Bias
Development AC Trigger for Color
Development AC Trigger for Black
Development PWM Trigger for Black
Development PWM Trigger for Cyan
Development PWM Trigger for Magenta
Development PWM Trigger for Yellow
Charge DC PWM Trigger for Black
Charge DC PWM Trigger for Cyan
Charge DC PWM Trigger for Magenta
Charge DC PWM Trigger for Yellow
Charge AC1 Trigger for Color
Charge AC1 Trigger for Black
ID Sensor LED
TD Sensor / Vcnt
Memory Chip / Power (5V) Supply
PCU Cleaning Bias Black
PCU Cleaning Bias YMC
Polygon Motor / 29.528
Polygon Motor / 21.850
LD Power for Black in Color Mode / 62.5
LD Power for Black in Color Mode / 125
LD Power for Yellow in Color Mode / 62.5
LD Power for Yellow in Color Mode / 125
LD Power for Magenta in Color Mode / 62.5
LD Power for Magenta in Color Mode / 125
LD Power for Cyan in Color Mode / 62.5
LD Power for Cyan in Color Mode / 125
LD1 Power for Black / 62.5
LD1 Power for Black / 125
LD2 Power for Black / 62.5
LD Power for Black / 62.5
LD Power for Black / 125
LD Power for Black / 185
Optional Paper Feed Unit (PSU: Paper Supply Unit) /
Motor
Paper Feed Clutch / Optional Paper Feed Unit / Tray 1
Paper Feed Clutch / Optional Paper Feed Unit / Tray 2
5-141
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
COPY SERVICE MODE
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5804
5804 168 Pick-up SOL PSU
5804 170
5804 171
5804 172
5804 173
5804 174
5804 176
5804 177
5804 178
5804 179
5804 180
5804 181
5804 182
5804 187
5804 188
5804 189
5804 190
5804 191
5804 192
5804 193
5804 194
5804 195
5804 200
5804 201
5804 202
5804 203
5804 204
5804 205
5804 206
5804 207
5804 208
5804 213
5804 214
5804 215
5804 216
5804 217
5804 218
5804 219
5804 220
5804 221
5804 222
5804 223
5804 224
5804 225
MB M
MB SOL1
MB SOL2
MB SOL3
MB Gate SOL
Duplex SOL
DI M1 81CCW
DI M1 125CCW
DI M1 162CCW
DI M1 222CCW
DI M1 370CCW
DI M1 450CCW
DI M1 370CW
DI M1 450CW
DI M1 560CW
DI M2 81CCW
DI M2 125CCW
DI M2 162CCW
DI M2 222CCW
DI M2 370CCW
DI M2 450CCW
DI M2 370CW
DI M2 450CW
DI M2 560CW
DI M12 81CCW
DI M12 125CCW
DI M12 162CCW
DI M12 222CCW
DI M12 370CCW
DI M12 450CCW
DI M12 370CW
DI M12 450CW
DI M12 560CW
PF M 81
PF M 125
PF M 162
PF M 222
PF M 230
PF M 275
PF M 370
PF M 450
DI M2 OFF
ALL OFF
B202/B178/B180
Description
Pick-up Solenoid / Optional Paper Feed Unit (PSU:
Paper Supply Unit)
4-bin Mailbox Main Motor
4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 1
4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid
Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid
Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 81 / Counterclockwise
Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 370 / Clockwise
Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 81 / Counterclockwise
Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 370 / Clockwise
Paper Feed Motor 81
Paper Feed Motor 125
Duplex Inverter Motor 2 Off
All Off
5-142
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COPY SERVICE MODE
5.2.4 TEST PATTERN (SP5-997)
Test Pattern Printting
SP5-997-001
Selects the tray in which

desired paper size is
loaded.
SP5-997-002
Selects a pattern.
SP5-997-003
Selects a color if printing

the test pattern in the
Single Color mode.
SP5-997-004
Selects the Single Color

or Full Color mode.
SP5-997-005
Selects the resolution.
Tray or by-pass
By-pass
Selects the desired

paper size.
SP5-997-006
Tray
SP5-997-007
Prints the test pattern.
B178S913.WMF
SM
5-143
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
Test Pattern Selection (SP5-997-002)

0: None
11. 1-dot pattern
12. 2-dot pattern
13. 4-dot pattern
16. Cross stitch: sub-scan
17. Cross stitch: main-scan
18. Belt pattern (Horizontal)
19. Belt pattern (Vertical)
20. Checkered Flag
21. Grey scale (Vertical)
22. Grey scale (Horizontal)
23. Solid
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER SERVICE MODE
5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE

SP1-XXX (Service Mode)
1001
1001 1
1001 2
1001 3
1001 4
1001 5
1001 6
1001 7
1001 8
[Bit Switch]
Bit Switch 1 Settings
*CTL Adjusts the bit switch settings. DFU
[Clear Setting]
1003
1003 1 Initialize Printer System
Initializes settings in the System menu of the user mode.
1003 3 Delete Program
[Print Summary]
1004
1004 1 Print Summary
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
[Display Version]
1005
1005 1 Disp. Version
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
[Sample/Locked Print]
*CTL 0: Linked, 1: On
1006
1006 1 Enables and disables the document server. When you select 0, the document
server is enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5-967. When
you select 1, the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service Mode
SP5-967.
1101
1101 1
1101 2
1101 3
1101 4
[Data Recall]
Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b) the
previous setting, or c) the current setting.
*CTL
Factory
Previous
Current
ACC
[Resolution Setting]
Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.
1102 1 1200x1200 Photo, 1800x600 Photo, 600 x 600 Photo, 1200x1200 Text, 1800x600,
Text, 600x600 Text
1102
B202/B178/B180
5-144
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER SERVICE MODE
[Test Page]
Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma
adjustment.
1103 1 Color Gray Scale
1103 2 Color Pattern
1103
1104
1104 1
1104 2
1104 3
1104 4
1104 21
1104 22
1104 23
1104 24
1104 41
1104 42
1104 43
1104 44
1104 61
1104 62
1104 63
1104 64
[Gamma Adjustment]
Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the Mode Selection menu.
Black: Highlight
*
[0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step]
CTL
Black: Shadow
Black: Middle
Black: IDmax
Cyan: Highlight
Cyan: Shadow
Cyan: Middle
Cyan: IDmax
Magenta: Highlight
Magenta: Shadow
Magenta: Middle
Magenta: IDmax
Yellow: Highlight
Yellow: Shadow
Yellow: Middle
Yellow: IDmax
[Save Tone Control Value]

Stores the print gamma adjusted with the Gamma Adj. menu item as the current
setting. Before the machine stores the new current setting", it moves the data
currently stored as the current setting to the previous setting memory storage
location.
1105 1 Save Tone Control Value
[Toner Limit]
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
*CTL [100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step]
1106 1 Toner Limit: Photo
1106 2 Toner Limit: Text
[100 to 400 / 190 / 1 %/step]
1106
SM
5-145
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
1105
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNER SP MODE
5.4 SCANNER SP MODE

SP1-xxx (System and Others)
1004
1004 1
1005
1005 1
1009
1009 1
[Compression Type]
Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.
Compression Type
*CTL [1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step]
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
[Erase margin]
Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin.
Range from 0 to 5 mm
*CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[Remote scan disable]
*CTL
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: enable, 1: disable
Enable or disable remote scan.
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)

2021
2021 1
2021 2
2021 3
2021 4
2021 5
[Compression ratio of gray-scale]

Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the three
settings that can be selected at the operation panel.
*
Compression ratio (Normal image)
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
CTL
Compression ratio (High comp image)
[5 to 95 / 60 / 1 /step]
Compression ratio (Low-comp image)
[5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step]
High Lv 2-comp image
[5 to 95 / 70 / 1 /step]
Low Lv 2-comp image
[5 to 95 / 30 / 1 /step]
B202/B178/B180
5-146
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET
5.5 REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET

5.5.1 SOFTWARE RESET
You can reboot the software with one of the following two procedures:
1) Turn the main power switch off and on.
2) Press and hold down together for over 10 seconds. When the
machine beeps once, release both buttons. After Now loading. Please wait
shows for a few seconds, the copy window will open. The machine is ready
for normal operation.
5.5.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET

System Setting Reset
The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the
following procedure.
1. Press User Tools/Counter .
B178S914.JPG
3. Press yes when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the
system settings.
4. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.
SM
5-147
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
2. Hold down and then press System Settings.

NOTE: You must press first.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET
Copier Setting Reset

Use the following procedure to reset the copy settings in the UP mode to their
defaults.
1. Press User Tools/Counter .
2. Hold down and then press Copier/Document Server Settings.
NOTE: You must press first.
B178S914.JPG
3. Press Yes when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset
the Copier Document Server settings.
4. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.
B202/B178/B180
5-148
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE

To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the
firmware downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted
into SD Card Slot 3 on the right side of the controller box.
5.6.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE

There are 16 types of firmware as shown below.
Engine - Main
Engine - Music
System
Netfile Application
Printer Application
Scanner Application
Fax Application
NIB
Scanner IPU
Operation Panel
Fax FCU
Language
(16 languages)
WebDocBox
WebSys
PS3
SG3-PRE1
SM
Function
Printer engine control
Line position adjustment
Operating system
Feature application
Feature application
Feature application
Feature application
Network Interface
Scanner control
Panel control
Fax control
Language firmware
Two languages can be
selected from 16
languages.
Document server
application
Web Service application
Page description language
(PostScript3)
Optional G3 fax control
Location of
firmware
BCU Flash ROM
BCU MUSIC CPU
Flash ROM on the
controller board
Printer/scanner
SD card
Printer/scanner
SD card
Printer/scanner
SD card
Flash ROM on the
controller board
Printer/scanner
SD card
IPU Flash ROM
Operation Panel
FCU
Operation Panel
Message shown
Engine
Music
Onboard System
Network DocBox
Onboard Printer
Onboard Scn
Opt DIMM Fax
Network Support
Scanner IPU
Op Panel. XX
Jupi FCU (XXX)-1
LANG.1
LANG.2
Printer/scanner
SD card
Printer/scanner
SD card
PS3 SD card
Web Document Box
FCU
SG3DREI-1
5-149
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Web Support
Option PS3
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
Type of firmware
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN

An SD card is a precision device. Always observe the following precautions when
you handle SD cards:
Always switch the machine off before you insert an SD card. Never insert the SD
card into the slot with the power on.
Do not remove the SD card from the service slot after the power has been
switched on.
Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD
card.
Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high
temperature, high humidity, or exposure to direct sunlight.
Always handle SD cards with care. Do not bend or scratch them. Do not let the
SD card get exposed to shock or vibration.
Keep the following points in mind when you use the firmware update software:
Upload means to send data from the machine to the SD card. Download
means to send data from the SD card to the machine.
To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touchscreen of the LCD, or, press the appropriate number key on the 10-key pad of
the operation panel. For example, when Exit (0) shows on the screen you can
touch the Exit button on the screen, or, press the button on the operation
panel of the copier.
Make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print
job for arriving while the firmware update is in progress before you start the
firmware update procedure.
B202/B178/B180
5-150
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE

Preparation
1. If the SD card is blank, copy the entire romdata folder onto the SD card.
2. If the card already contains the romdata folder, copy the B178 folder onto the
card.
If the card already contains folders up to B178, copy the necessary firmware files
(e.g. B178xxxx.fwu) into this folder.
NOTE: Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card.
Copy the only model firmware you want.
1. Turn the main power switch off.
2. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 1).
[C]
3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3

[C]. Make sure the label on the SD card
[B] faces the rear side of the machine.
5. Disconnect the network cable from the

copier if the machine is connected to a
network.
[A]
[B]
B178S501.WMF
6. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial version
update screen appears on the LCD in English.
7. On the screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key on the
operation panel to select the item in the menu that you want to update.
ROM/NEW
ROM:
NEW:
SM
WHAT IT MEANS
Tells you the number of the module and name of the version currently installed.
The first line is the module number, the second line the version name.
Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD card. The first
line is the module number, the second line the version name.
5-151
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
4. Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it

locks in place. You will here it click. Make
sure the SD card locks in place.
NOTE: To remove the SD, push it in to
unlock the spring lock. Then
release it so it pops out of the
slot.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
8. Touch UpDate (#) (or ) to start the update.

NOTE: The progress bar does not show for the operation panel firmware after you
touch OpPanel. The power on key flashes on and off at 0.5 s intervals
when the LCDC firmware is updating. The power key flashes on and off at
3 s intervals when the update is finished.
9. The "Update Done" message appears on the operation panel after completing
the updating. The message differs depending on the firmware that has been
updated.
10. Switch the copier main power switch off when you see the Update Done
message or follow the procedure that is displayed on the operation panel.
11. Press in the SD card to release it. Then remove it from the slot.
12. Switch the copier on for normal operation.
Error Messages
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during the download.
The error code consists of the letter E and a number. The example above
shows error E24 displayed. For details, refer to the Error Message Table.
( 5.6.7)
B202/B178/B180
5-152
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
Firmware Update Error

If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during
the update because the module selected for update was not on the SD card.
PCcard -> ROM
Reboot after card insert.
E82
BLC2 eplot Card No.:1/1
B178S922.WMF
Recovery After Power Loss
In this case, insert the card again and switch on the machine to continue the
firmware download automatically from the card without the menu display.
SM
5-153
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the
firmware is updating, then the correct operation of the machine cannot be
guaranteed after the machine is switched on again. If the ROM update does not
complete successfully for any reason, then in order to ensure the correct operation
of the machine, the ROM update error will continue to show until the ROM is
updated successfully.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.3 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL

Do the following procedure to update the LCDC (LCD Control Board).
1. Turn the copier main switch off.
2. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3.
3. Switch the copier main switch on.
4. The initial screen opens in English after about 45 seconds.
5. Touch Op Panel.xx.
NOTE: "xx" differs depending on the destination.
6. Touch UpDate(#) or () to start the update.
Downloading starts after about 9 seconds.
The operation panel goes off and the main power on key flashes in red at 0.5 s
intervals when the data is downloading. The same key starts flashing in green
at 1 s intervals when the update is finished.
7. Switch the copier main power switch off and remove the SD card. Then switch
the copier on.
B202/B178/B180
5-154
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.4 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA

The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the hard
disks at the following times:
When the machine is installed.
After the hard disks have been replaced.
The print data contains the controller software. Execute SP 5853 to download the
fixed stamp data required by the hard disks.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Select SP5853 and then press EXECUTE. The following screen opens while
the stamp data is downloading.
B178S502.JPG
Service
Tables
The download is finished when the message prompts you to close.
B178S503.JPG
3. Press the Exit button. Then turn the copier off and on again.
SM
5-155
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.6.5 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD

Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card
Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
NOTE: This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is
replaced.
1. Do SP5990 001 (SMC Print) before you switch the machine off. You will need a
record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
2. Switch the copier main power switch off.
3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3. Then switch the copier on.
4. Execute SP5824 001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and then press the Execute key
The following files are coped to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the
upload procedure is finished. The file is saved to the path and the following
filename:
NVRAM\<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number K5000017114:
NVRAM\K5000017114.NV
5. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card
that holds the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the
data was uploaded.
NOTE: You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same
SD card.
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM

Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in
the machine.
The NVRAM data down load may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is
damaged, or if the connection between the controller and BCU is defective.
Do the download procedure again if the download fails.
Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:
Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before
uploading the NVRAM data ( 5.6.5)
2. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 3.
3. Switch the copier main power switch on.
4. Do SP5825 001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the Execute key.
NOTE: The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial
number of the machine for the NVRAM data to download successfully.
The download fails if the serial numbers do not match.
B202/B178/B180
5-156
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
Total Count
C/O, P/O Count
5.6.6 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE

Many languages are available. But you can only switch between two languages at
a time. Do the following procedure to select the two languages you want. You can
select both of the languages you want from the user interface on the operation
panel.
2. Insert the SD card with the language data into SD Card Slot 3.
3. Switch the copier main power switch on. The initial screen opens after about 45
seconds.
4. Touch Language Data (2) on the screen (or press ).
Download Language
LANG. 1(1)
N ow Lang.
Japanese
B 0705370
Lang.C ard
------
S elect Lang.
2.87
-----English - U K 2.87
------
-> ------------> ------------
---------------------------------------------------------
Service
Tables
LANG. 2(2)
LC D C R O M
Exit(0)
B178S930.WMF
5. Touch LANG. 1(1) or LANG. 2(2)"

Key
LANG. 1(1)
LANG. 1(2)
Exit(0)
SM
What it does
Touch this button on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to open the next
screen so you can select the 1st language.
Touch this button on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to open the next
screen so you can select the 2nd language.
Touch this key on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to quit the update
procedure and return to normal screen.
5-157
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
6. Touch LANG 1(1) to select the 1st Language. Touch LANG (2) to select the
2nd Language.
PCcard -> ROM Page02
(7)
Italian
(1)
S panish
(2)
D utch
(3)
N orw egian
(4)
D anish
(6)
(9)
Exit(0)
B178S931.WMF
7. Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10keypad) to select a language as the 1st (or 2nd) language.
If a language is already selected, it will show in reverse.
Touching Exit (0) returns you to the previous screen.
8. If you do not see the language that you want to select, touch (7) or (9) on
the screen (or press or ) to show more choices.
B202/B178/B180
5-158
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
The Download Screen opens after you select a language.

The 1st or 2nd language selected for updating shows.
The following show to right of the selection:
1) The first column shows the language currently selected
2) The 2nd column shows the language selected to replace that language.
The example below shows that the download will replace Japanese with
Italian as the 1st language.
Download Language
LANG. 1(1)
LANG. 2(2)
LC D C R O M
N ow Lang.
Japanese
B 0705370
Lang.C ard
------
S elect Lang.
2.87
-----English - U K 2.87
------
-> Italian
-> ------------
Exit(0)
2.88
-------------------------------------------
UpDate(#)
9. Touch Update(#) on the screen (or press ) to start the download.

Another screen with a progress bar does not show when the language is
downloading.
The following occur at the time the language is downloading:
The operation panel switches off.
The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly.
10. After the Start LED begins to flash slowly, switch the copier main power switch
off. Then remove the SD card from the slot.
11. Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation.
SM
5-159
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
B178S932.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FIRMWARE UPDATE
Rev. 12/2005
5.6.7 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS

An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download. The
error code consists of the letter E and a number (E20, for example).
Error Message Table
Code
20
21
22
23
24
30
31
32
33
No HDD available for stamp

data download
Data incorrect for continuous
download
Data incorrect after download
interrupted
Incorrect SD card version
34
Module mismatch - Correct

module is not on the SD card)
35
Module mismatch Module on

SD card is not for this machine
36
Cannot write module Cause

other than E34, E35
40
42
43
Meaning
Cannot map logical address
Cannot access memory
Cannot decompress
compressed data
Error occurred when ROM
update program started
SD card access error
44
50
Engine module download

failed
Operation panel module
download failed
Stamp data module download
failed
Controller module download
failed
Electronic confirmation check
failed
B202/B178/B180
Solution
Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly.
HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is
corrupted.
Controller program abnormal. If the second attempt
fails, replace controller board.
Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use
another SD card.
HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
Insert the SD card with the remaining data required
for the download, the re-start the procedure.
Execute the recovery procedure for the intended
module download, then repeat the installation
procedure.
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is
corrupted.
SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct
data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install
again.
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD
card is for another machine. Acquire correct update
data then install again.
Replace the update data for the module on the SD
card and try again, or replace the BCU board.
card and try again, or replace the LCDC.
card and try again, or replace the hard disks.
card and tray again, or replace controller board.
Write Protect switch on SD Card is set ON.
5-160
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SD CARD APPLI MOVE
5.7 SD CARD APPLI MOVE

5.7.1 OVERVIEW
The service program SD Card Appli Move (SP5-873) lets you to copy application
programs from one SD card to another SD card.
Slot 1 and Slot 2 are used to store application programs. Slot 3 is for maintenance
work only. You cannot run application programs from Slot 3. However you can
move application programs from Slot 3 to either Slot 1 or Slot 2. Do the following
procedure it you want to move an application procedure from Slot 3:
1) Choose a SD card with enough space.
2) Enter SP5873 SD Card Appli Move. Then move the application from the
SD Card in Slot 3 to the Slot you want.
NOTE: Do steps 1-2 again if you want to move another application program.
3) Exit the SP mode
Use high caution when you do the AD Card Appli Move procedure:
1. The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application
program from an SD card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to
use the SD card after you copy the application program from one card to
another card.
3. Keep the SD card in a safe place after you copy the application program from
one card to another card. This is done for the following reasons:
1) The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the
application program.
2) You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the
future.
4. You cannot copy PostScript data to another SD card. You have to copy other
data to the same SD card that stores PostScript data.
SM
5-161
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
2. Do not use the SD card if it has been used by the user on the computer.
Normal operation is not guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SD CARD APPLI MOVE
5.7.2 MOVE EXEC

The menu Move Exec (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from the
original SD card to another SD card.
2. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1. The application program is
copied into this SD card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 3.
The application program is copied from this SD card.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-001 Move Exec.
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
B202/B178/B180
5-162
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SD CARD APPLI MOVE
Rev. 11/2005
5.7.3 UNDO EXEC
Do this procedure if you moved an option from the original SD card to another card
by mistake, and you want to restore it to the original SD card.
1. Turn the main switch OFF.
2. Put the original source SD card into Slot 3.
3. Put the SD card that contains the application(s) into Slot 1.
4. Turn the main switch ON.
5. Execute SP5873-002 (Undo Exec).
6. Follow the instructions on the LCD.
7. Turn the main switch OFF.
8. Remove the original source SD card from Slot 3.
9. Turn the main switch ON.
Service
Tables
10. Make sure that the application(s) in the SD card work correctly.
SM
5-163
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
5.8 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

5.8.1 OVERVIEW
There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller.
1) Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the selfdiagnostics just after the power has been turned on.
2) Detailed self-diagnostics: The machine does the detailed self-diagnostics by
using a loop-back connector (P/N G0219350)
3) SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on
or during operation.
The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.
Power ON
Diagnostic RAM Check
NG
Not initialized
Power-on or
Detailed
CPU Check
NG
SC820
Detailed
ASIC Check
NG
SC821
Standard RAM
Conection Check
NG
SC827
Optional RAM
Connection Check
NG
SC829
Clock Generator Check
SC838
NG
ROM Sum Check
NG
SC828
Standard RAM Detailed

Check
NG
SC829
Optional RAM Detailed

Check
NG
Not use optional RAM
Error Logged
Standard NVRAM
Detailed Check
NG
Error Logged
Power-on
Optional NVRAM
Detailed Check
Standard NVRAM
Check
NG
Error Logged
Optinoal HDD Check

Optional NVRAM Check
SC824
NG
Font Header Check
NG
Error Logged
Error Logged
Real Time Clock Check
Error Logged
IEEE1284 Loop-back
Check
NG
SC826
NG
NG
Real Time Clock

Detailed Check
Font ROM Sum Check

Network Check
NG
NG
Error Logged
Error Logged
Engine I/F Check
SC826
NG
END
NG
Error Logged
Interrupt Check
NG
Error Logged
Memory Chip Check
NG
Error Logged
A
B178S933.WMF
B202/B178/B180
5-164
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
5.8.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

In addition to the self-diagnostic test initiated every time the main machine is
powered on, you can set the machine in a more detailed diagnostic mode manually.
This lets you test other components or conditions that are not tested during selfdiagnosis after power on. The following device is required in order to put the
machine in the detailed self-diagnosis mode:
No.
G0219350
Name
Parallel Loopback Connector
Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis

Do the following procedure to execute detailed self-diagnosis.
1. Switch off the machine, and connect the parallel loopback device to the
Centronics I/F port.
2. Hold down , press and hold down . Then switch on the machine while
pressing both keys at the same time.
Service
Tables
You will see Now Loading on the touch-panel. Then you will see the results of
the test.
The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics and prints the diagnostic
report after completing the test.
Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. You can check the
errors detected during self-diagnostics with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result).
Refer to section 4.3 for details about the error codes.
SM
5-165
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.9 USING THE DEBUG LOG

This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer
Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory. But
this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main
features:
Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD
for later retrieval.
Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
Do the following procedure below to set up the machine so the error information is
saved automatically to the HDD when a user has problems with the machine. Then
ask the user to reproduce the problem.
5.9.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG

The debug information cannot be saved until the Save Debug Log function has
been switched on and a target has been selected.
1. Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on.
Press then use the 10-key pad to enter .
Press and hold down for more than 3 seconds.
Touch Copy SP.
On the LCD panel, open SP5857.
2. Under 5857 Save Debug Log, touch 1 On/Off.
B178S001.JPG
3. On the control panel keypad, press 1. Then press . This switches the Save
Debug Log feature on.
NOTE: The default setting is 0 (OFF). This feature must be switched on in
order for the debug information to be saved.
B202/B178/B180
5-166
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
4. Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under
5857 Save Debug Log, touch 2 Target, enter 2 with the operation panel
key to select the hard disk as the target destination. Then press .
B178S002.JPG
NOTE: Select 3 SD Card to save the debug information directly to the SD

card if it is inserted in the service slot.
5. Now touch 5858 and specify the events that you want to record in the debug
log. SP5858 (Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
1
Engine SC Error
Controller SC Error
Any SC Error
Jam
Saves data when an engine-related

SC code is generated.
Saves debug data when a controllerrelated SC Code is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that
you specify by entering code number.
Saves data for jams.
Touch the appropriate items(s). Press ON for each selection. This example
shows Engine SC Error selected.
B178S003.JPG
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code

Touch 3 Any SC Error, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control
panel number keys. Then press . This example shows an entry for SC670.
B178S004.JPG
NOTE: For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in
Section 4. Troubleshooting.
SM
5-167
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
NOTE: More than one event can be selected.

Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
6. Select one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug
information. Touch 5859.
Under 5859 press the necessary key item for the module that you want to
record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number. Then press .
NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each
key.
The example below shows Key 1 with 2222 entered.
B178S005.JPG
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in
parentheses indicate the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
KEY NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
COPY
4848 (COPY)
2224 (BCU)
PRINTER
2222 (SCS)
2223 (SRM)
256 (IMH)
1000 (ECS)
1025 (MCS)
4400 (GPS)
4500 (PDL)
4600 (GPS-PM)
2000 (NCS)
2224 (BCU)
SCANNER
WEB
5375 (Scan)
5682 (NFA)
3000 (NCS)
2000 (NCS)
5682 (NFA)
6600 (WebDB)
3300 (PTS)
6666 (WebSys)
2000 (NCS)
NOTE: The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (0).
Key to Acronyms
Acronym
ECS
GPS
GSP-PM
IMH
MCS
Meaning
Engine Control Service
GW Print Service
GW Print Service Print Module
Image Memory Handler
Memory Control Service
Acronym
NFA
PDL
PTS
SCS
SRM
NCS
Network Control Service
WebDB
Meaning
Net File Application
Printer Design Language
Print Server
System Control Service
System Resource
Management
Web Document Box
(Document Server)
The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on

the HDD (the target selected with SP5857-002) for the events that you selected
with SP5858 and the memory modules selected with SP5859.
B202/B178/B180
5-168
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
Please keep the following important points in mind when you do this setting:
Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer,
Scanner, and Web memory modules.
The initial settings are all zero.
These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the
settings, especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting,
enter a zero for that key.
You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the
corresponding 4-digit numbers from the table.
You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006~010. For
example, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the
settings from the 9 available selections for the PRINTER column only.
One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is
limited to 4 MB.
5.9.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD

Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard disk to an SD card.
1. Insert the SD card into the service slot of the copier.
3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh
representative by email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you
want.
SM
5-169
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4
MB)) to write the debugging data to the SD card.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.9.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY

SC errors and jams only are recorded to the debug log automatically. Please
instruct the user to do the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug
data for any other errors that occur while the customer engineer is not on site.
Such problems also include a controller or panel freeze.
NOTE: You must previously switch on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and
select the hard disk as the save destination (SP5857-002) if you want to
use this feature.
1. Press (Clear Modes). on the operation panel when the error occurs.
2. On the control panel, enter 01. Then hold down for at least 3 seconds
until the machine beeps and then release it. This saves the debug log to the
hard disk for later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives.
3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.
The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk. This lets the
service representative retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD
to an SD card.
B202/B178/B180
5-170
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.9.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES

SP5857-015
Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written
directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation
is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This
function does not copy from one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4
MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the data during the copy
operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log data
from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card. This
command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the
specified key.
Create a File on HDD to Store a Log
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the HDD when the first log is stored on the HDD (it takes some time to
complete this operation). This creates the possibility that the machine may be
switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this
SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time
required to acquire the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file already
created on the HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded. A new log
file does not need to be created. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-011 to
delete the debug log data from the HDD. Then do SP5857-016.
SP5857-017
Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not a

completely empty file. The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the SD card when the first log is stored on the SD card (it takes some
time to complete this operation). This creates the possibility that the machine may
be switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute
this SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time
required to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card. With the file
already created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded;
a new log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857012 to delete the debug log data from the SD card. Then do SP5857-017.
SM
5-171
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Service
Tables
SP5857-016
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIP SWITCHES
Rev. 10/2005
5.10 DIP SWITCHES

Controller Board
DIP SW No.
1
2 to 4
OFF
ON
Boot-up from Flash ROM Boot-up from SD card
Factory Use Only: Keep these switches OFF.
BCU Board
Set the DIP switch on the BCU and connect the connector as listed in the table.
Model
North America
B178
North America
B180
North America
B202
Europe B178
Europe B180
Europe B202
Asia B178
Asia B180
Asia B202
Korea B178
Korea B180
Korea B202
Taiwan B178
Taiwan B180
Taiwan B202
1
ON
DIP Switch
2
3
OFF
OFF
4
OFF
Not connected
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Not connected
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Connected
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Not connected
Not connected
Connected
Not connected
Not connected
Connected
Not connected
Not connected
Connected
Not connected
Not connected
Connected
Connector
One of the following errors occur when the DIP switch is incorrectly set:
SC195
SC902
SC995
Fusing Unit Setting Error
Toner Cartridge Setting Error
B202/B178/B180
5-172
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
1
26
25
10
24
11
23
12
22
K
13
21
20
14
15
19
16
17
B178D501.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
SM
Scanner HP sensor
ADF exposure glass
2nd scanner (2nd carriage)
Scanner lamp
1st scanner (1st carriage)
Original width sensor
Original length sensor
Scanner motor
Exposure glass
Sensor board unit (SBU)
Toner cartridge
Laser optics housing unit
Polygon mirror motor
By-pass feed table
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
Transfer unit
Rotation encoder
Tray 2
Tray 1
Waste toner bottle
Waste toner vibrator
Duplex feed unit

Transfer belt cleaning unit
ID sensor
Development unit (each color)
PCU (each color)
Fusing unit
6-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
6.1.2 PAPER PATH

1
12
11
10
9
K
Y
C
3
M
4
5
6
B178D502.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Original tray
Original exit tray
By-pass tray
Tray 1
Tray 2
Optional paper feed unit/LCT
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Duplex inverter unit

Duplex feed unit
To optional finisher
To optional finisher
External Tray
Standard tray
The two-tray finisher requires an optional paper feed unit or the LCT. The duplex
inverter unit has two exits for the two-tray finisher. When the one-tray paper feed
unit is installed, paper feeds out to the two-tray finisher from the upper exit. When
the two-tray paper feed unit or LCT is installed, paper feeds out to the two-tray
finisher from the lower exit.
B202/B178/B180
6-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
8
9
4
5
6
1. Scanner motor:
Drives the scanner unit.
2. Development drive
motor-K:
Drives the development unit for black, the fusing unit, and the paper
exit section.
3. Development drive
motor-CMY:
Drives the color development units (magenta/cyan/yellow), the

registration roller, and the waste toner collection coils from the PCUs.
4. Drum drive motor-CMY:
Drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.
5. Transfer belt contact

motor:
Moves the transfer belt into contact and away from the color PCUs.
6. Paper feed motor:
Drives the paper feed mechanisms (tray 1/tray 2/by-pass tray).
7. Drum drive motor-K:
Drives the black PCU and the collection coil in the waste toner bottle.
8. Transfer unit drive

motor:
Drives the transfer unit.
9. Waste toner vibration

motor:
Makes vibrations to not let waste toner clog the waste toner path.
SM
6-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
B178D503.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE

Overview
Laser Optics Unit
Polygon
Motor
LD
ADF
LDB
LD
LD
LDB
LD
LDB
LD
LDB
Original Size
Detection
I2C
Drive
Motors
CN
PCB:
SIO
Scanner Unit
PCB
DRB
Xenon Lamp
Transfer Roller
Voltage
Operation
Panel
LCDC
Scanner Motor
Paper Attractio
Voltage
HPS
APS
Transfer Voltage
Charge Voltage
Development Voltage
Base
Engine
Control
Unit
Main
SW
Voltage
transpare
PCBSBU
CCD
24V
HDD
ID sensor
Motors
Sensors
Duplex
Feed Unit
CN
Paper
Feed Unit
CN
5V(Energy
Saver Mode)
Controller
PCI
PCI
IPU Board
Fax Unit
PCI
PCI
24V
5V
5V generated
from 24V
24V
CN
Motherboard
Finisher
Sub Power Supply Unit
Fusing
Unit
CN
Duplex
Inverter Unit
CN
24V
Safety
SW
Fusing Relay
Main SW
Main Power
Supply Unit
Breaker SW
B178D504A.WMF
B202/B178/B180
6-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
Descriptions
BCU (Base Engine Control Unit):
The BCU controls all the mechanical components. The BCU has three CPUs (Main,
MUSIC, and DSP). The CPUs control the following functions:
Main CPU
Engine sequence
Engine operation
Timing for peripherals
High voltage supply, laser, and fusing
Sensors, drive board, and solenoids
Motors
MUSIC (Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction) CPU
TD sensor
Memory chip on the toner cartridge
DSP (Digital Signal Processor)
DRB:
The DRB (driver board) controls the paper feed motor, development motors
(color/black), drum drive motors (color/black), and transfer unit drive motor.
IPU:
The Image Processing Unit is a large-scale integrated circuit. This unit processes
digital signals.
SBU:
The Sensor Board Unit has a CCD (charge-coupled device) and an analog-todigital conversion circuit.
Operation Panel Board:
Controls the display panel, the LED and the keypad.
Motherboard:
The motherboard is the main circuit board connecting with the BCU, FCU,
controller and IPU.
SM
6-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
Controller:
The controller connects to the BCU through a PCI bus. The controller handles the
following functions:
Machine-to-host interface
Operation panel interface
Network interface
Interfacing and control of the optional IEEE1284, Bluetooth, IEEE1394,
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN), HDD, and DRAM DIMM
LD Drive Board:
This is the laser diode drive circuit board.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
FCU:
The FCU (fax controller unit) controls the fax programs and communicates with the
controller to share copier resources.
Scanner I/O Board:
The scanner I/O board is a circuit board that transmits control signals, image data,
and electricity.
6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS

2, 6
1
5
3
8
10
4
Y
9
C
M
7
B178D505.WMF
This machine uses four PCUs, four development units, and four laser beams for
color printing. Each PCU has a drum, charge roller, cleaning brush, and blade.
From the left, the PCU stations are black, yellow, cyan, and magenta.
A transfer belt feeds paper past the PCUs. Then the toner image on each drum is
transferred to the paper.
The paper path is inclined at about 38 degrees. This helps to keep the machine as
compact as possible.
B202/B178/B180
6-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
1. Drum charge:
The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge
2. Laser exposure:
The laser beam from the laser diode (LD) goes through the lens and mirrors
and reaches the drum. The machine turns the laser beam on and off to make a
latent image on the drum.
3. Development:
The development roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on
the drum surface. This machine uses four independent development units (one
for each color).
4. Image transfer:
The charge given to the transfer roller attracts the toner from the drum to the
paper. Four toner images are super-imposed onto the paper.
5. Cleaning for OPC drum:
The cleaning brush and blade remove remaining toner on the drum surface
after image transfer to the paper.
6. Quenching for OPC drum:
Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at
the end of every job.
7. Paper attraction:
Paper is attracted to the transfer belt by the charge given to the paper attraction
roller.
8. Separation:
Paper separates from the transfer belt when the belt curves away from it.
10. ID sensor:
The ID sensor board contains three ID sensors (front, center, and rear). The ID
sensor detects the density of the ID sensor pattern on the transfer belt. The ID
sensor output is used for the following:
Process control and for automatic line position
Skew
Color registration adjustments for the latent image.
SM
6-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
9. Cleaning and quenching for transfer belt:

The cleaning brush and blade clean the belt surface. The grounding roller
inside the transfer belt unit removes the remaining charge on the belt.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2 PROCESS CONTROL

6.2.1 OVERVIEW
This machine provides the following two forms of process control:
Potential control
Toner supply control
The process control facilities of this machine have the following features:
Three ID (image density) sensors (front, center, and rear). Only the center ID
sensor is used for process control. All ID sensors are used for line positioning
and other adjustments.
TD sensor.
6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL

Overview
Potential control controls development to maintain the density of the toner images
on the drums. It does this by compensating for variations in drum chargeability and
toner density.
The machine uses the center ID sensor to measure the reflectivity of the transfer
belt and the density of a standard sensor pattern. This is done during the process
control self check.
The machine determines the following depending on the ID sensor output and a
reference table in memory.
VD: Drum potential without exposure. The machine adjusts the charge roller
voltage to adjust this.
VB: Development bias
VL: Drum potential at the strongest exposure. The machine adjusts the laser
power to adjust this.
(In addition, VREF is corrected. This is used for toner supply control.)
This process controls the development potential so that the maximum amount of
toner given to the drum is constant. However, the laser power control method can
be changed to control the development potential to improve reproduction of
highlight parts of images. This depends on the setting of SP3-125-2. The default
setting is "Process Control". Set this SP mode to "LD Power" if you want to change
the highlight range control method.
If SP3-125-1 is set to "Off", the machine does not do the potential control. Instead,
the machine uses the following:
Development bias adjusted with SP2-201-1 to 9
Charge roller voltage adjusted with SP2-001-1 to -13
Laser power selected with SP2-103-1 to -27.
You should not adjust these SP modes in the field.
B202/B178/B180
6-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
Process Control Self Check

This machine uses the process control self check method to do the potential
control. The machine uses seven types of process control self check. These are
categorized according to their execution timing:
1. Forced
This is done when SP3-126-1 is used.
2. Initial
This starts automatically when the power is turned on, or, when the machine
recovers from energy saver mode. This occurs only if the fusing unit pressure
roller temperature is 60C or less.
3. Interval: Job End
This starts automatically at the end of a print job when the total print counter for
this feature exceeds 200 (you can change this with SP3-906-1). The counters
are reset to 0 after all process control is done (except for forced process
control).
4. Interval: Interrupt (default: not done)
This interrupts printing and then starts automatically at the following times:
1) When the machine makes a certain number (A) of continuous color prints in
the same job
2) The main scan length detection is executed.
After the above are completed, the machine continues to make prints.
You can adjust value A with SP3-906-2 (default: off). At this time, only VREF is
corrected. Potential control (VD, VB, VL correction) is not done.
You can adjust M with SP3-906-4. You can adjust N with SP3-906-3.
6. After Toner End Recovery
This starts after recovery from a toner end condition.
7. After Developer Initialization
The machine executes the Auto Toner Density Adjustment (SP3-125-003). This
starts after a developer initialization is done. Developer initialization occurs
automatically after a new development unit has been installed.
SM
6-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
5. Non-use Time (default: not done)

This starts before the next print job if the machine has no job for a certain time
(M) after it makes more than a certain number (N) of prints.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE
Start
VSG adjustment
Step 1
ID sensor solid pattern generation
Step 2
Sensor pattern density detection
Step 3
Toner amount calculation
Step 4
VD, VB, VL selection and VREF adjustment
Step 5
ID sensor highlight pattern generation
Step 6
Sensor pattern density detection
Step 7
VL (LD power) selection
Step 8
Default: off
End
B178D608.WMF
Step 1: VSG Adjustment

This machine uses three ID sensors (direct reflection type). They are located at the
front, center, and rear of the transfer unit. Only the center ID sensor is used for
process control. The ID sensor checks the bare transfer belts reflectivity. Then the
machine calibrates the ID sensor until its output (known as VSG) is as follows.
VSG = 4.0 0.5 Volts
This calibration compensates for the transfer belts condition and the ID sensor
condition. For example, if dirt gets on the surface of the belt or ID sensor.
B202/B178/B180
6-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation

12 mm
15 mm
Left
Transfer belt
B178D506.WMF
First, the machine agitates the developer for between 15 and 30 seconds until the
fluctuation in TD sensor output becomes less than 0.3V.
Finally, the machine makes the second series of grade patterns in the same order
as the first series. The development bias and charge roller voltage are not the
same as those of the first series.
Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection

The ID sensor detects the densities of the 10 solid-color squares for each color (5
squares in the first series and another 5 squares in the second series). This data
goes to memory.
Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation

The amount of toner on the transfer belt (M/A, mass per unit area, mg/cm2) is
calculated for each of the 10 grades of the sensor pattern from the ID sensor
output value from each grade of the pattern.
SM
6-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
Second, the machine makes the first series of grade patterns (see the diagram).
This 5-grade pattern is made in black, yellow, cyan, and magenta (20 squares in
total). They are made by changing the development bias and charge roller voltage.
The difference between development bias and charge roller voltage is always the
same.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment

M/A
Development Bias
B0
B1
Bn-1
Bn
Target
M/A
Charge Bias
C0
C1
Cn-1
Cn
LD Power
L0
L1
Ln-1
Ln
Development Bias
B178D507.WMF
The machine determines the relationship between the amount of toner on the
transfer belt and the development bias for each of the 10 grades. Then the
machine selects the development bias and charge roller voltages for the target M/A
for each color by referring to a table in memory.
Laser power (VL) selected depends on the setting of SP3-125-2.
If it is set to "Fixed", the LD power is fixed at the value of SP2-103-1, to -27.
If it is set to "Process Control", LD power is selected using the same memory
table as mentioned above.
If it is set to "LD power", LD power is determined by ID sensor highlight pattern
generation (steps 6 to 8 later in this procedure).
The machine also adjusts VREF (toner density target) at the same time so that the
development gamma detected by process control will be the value stored in SP3120-1 to -4 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).
NOTE: The patterns on the transfer belt are cleaned by the transfer belt-cleaning
unit.
Allowable changes to VD, VB, and VL (as a result of process control):
This depends on the process control type as follows.
Forced: No limit
Initial: After Developer Initialization: 80 volts
Interval: (Job End/ Non-use Time/ During Toner End Recovery): 40 volts
Interval: (Interrupt): Constant (The memory table is not used.)
Steps 6 to 8 are done only if SP3-125-2 is set to "LD Power". (Default: Steps 6
to 8 are not used)
B202/B178/B180
6-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
Step 6: ID Sensor Highlight Pattern Generation

12 mm
15 mm
Left
Transfer belt
B178D508.WMF
The machine makes a 10-grade pattern on the transfer belt for each toner color.
The pattern has 10 squares. Each of the squares is 12 mm x 15 mm, and is a dotpattern squares (not solid-color squares like in the process of step 2). They are
made using constant bias and charge roller voltages selected from one of the types
mentioned above. The various grades are made by changing the LD power.
Step 7: Sensor Pattern Density Detection
Detailed
Descriptions
The ID sensor detects the densities of the 10 grade-pattern squares for each color.
This data goes to memory.
Step 8: VL (LD Power) Selection

The machine determines the relationship
between the amount of toner on the transfer
belt and the laser power for each of the 10
grades. Then the machine selects the laser
power to get the target M/A.
M/A
Target
M/A
LD Power
B178D509.WMF
SM
6-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2.4 VREF COMPENSATION DURING A PRINT JOB

[A]
[B]
Left
Transfer belt
B178D510.WMF
Highlight Pattern
The M/A target (mass-per-area target) is the target toner amount in a given area.
To adjust the toner amount, a highlight pattern [B] is created on the transfer belt at
the following times during each print job.
Job
Black-and-white printing
Color printing
Interval
After every four pages
After every one page
Color of highlight pattern

Black
One of four colors
For color jobs, the order of pattern generation is K Y M C K Y M

C. The highlight pattern is made about 2 cm after the trailing edge of the paper
[A].
Adjustment Process
The machine generates a highlight pattern (one grade) of a specified density. The
center ID sensor checks the density. Then the machine adjusts VREF by comparing
the reading with the target of each color (SP3-905-1 to 4). The machine adjusts
VCNT when this adjustment is not sufficient.
B202/B178/B180
6-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2.5 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL

Overview
Toner supply control uses the following to determine the amount of toner to be
supplied. This is done before every development for each color.
Density of the toner in the developer (detected by the TD sensor) - VREF, VT
Pixel count
The image density is kept constant by adjusting the density of toner in the
development unit. At the same time, it accommodates changes in the development
conditions through the potential control mechanism. Environmental changes and
the number of prints made are also used in the calculation.
The amount of toner supplied is determined by the on time of the toner supply
clutch. The total on time for each toner supply clutch is stored in the memory chip
for the relevant toner cartridge. The amount of toner supplied also depends on the
process line speed for the current job. The machine supplies the calculated amount
of toner for each color.
Toner Supply Control Modes

This machine has three toner supply control modes. You can select them with SP2208-1 to -4.
2. Proportional control mode

This mode is used when the ID sensor at the center becomes faulty. Only the
TD sensor is used to control toner supply. The machine uses the VREF that is
stored in SP2-224-5 to -8.
3. Fixed supply mode
This mode is used when the TD sensor becomes faulty. You can adjust the
amount of toner supply with SP2-208-5 to -8 if the image density is incorrect
(the default setting is 5%).
SM
6-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
1. Fuzzy control mode

This is the default toner supply control mode. The TD sensor, ID sensor, and
pixel count are used in this mode.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2.6 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
B178D511.WMF
Introduction
Toner Near End
The controller considers the following information to determine the toner near end
status:
TD sensor [A] in the development unit
Operation time counter of the toner attraction pump [B]
Memory chip [C] on the toner cartridge
Toner end sensor [D]
There are two different toner near-end detection procedures (referred to as Toner
Near End Detection 1 and Toner Near End Detection 2). The machine enters the
near-end condition if either of these is detected.
Toner End
To determine the toner end status, the controller considers the following
information:
TD sensor [A] in the development unit
Pixel counter
B202/B178/B180
6-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
Toner Near End Detection 1

The controller considers the following information from the TD sensor:
1) The controller checks that the following condition is satisfied ten times
consecutively:
VREF + 0.4 V < VT
NOTE: You can adjust the condition with SP2-212.
2) If the above condition is satisfied, toner is supplied to the development unit.
The messages, Loading Toner and Please wait, show.
3) The controller checks the above condition again.
a) If the condition is satisfied, the controller decides that the machine is in
the toner near end status. The messages, Toner is almost empty,
Replace Toner Cartridge(s), and Xxxxx, shows. Xxxxx indicates the
color, such as cyan.
b) If the condition is not satisfied, the controller decides that the machine is
not in the toner near end status. The machine resumes its normal
operation.
Toner Near End Detection 2
2) If the amount reaches the predefined weight (default: 100 g), the controller
checks the signals from the toner end sensor.
NOTE: You can adjust the weight with SP2-212-1 and -2.
a) If the signals indicate the toner amount has fallen to a certain level
(determined by SP 2-212-12 to -15), the controller decides that the
machine is in the toner near end status. The messages, Toner is almost
empty, Replace Toner Cartridge(s), and Xxxxx, show. Xxxxx
indicates the color, such as cyan.
b) If the signals indicate the toner amount is not less than a certain level,
the controller decides that the machine is not in the toner near end status.
The machine resumes its normal operation.
SM
6-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
The controller considers the information from the operation time counter of the
following:
Toner attraction pump
Memory chip on the toner bottle
Toner end sensor.
1) To calculate the toner amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the controller
considers the operation time counter of the toner attraction pump and the
initial amount of the toner (recorded in the memory chip).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
Toner End Detection

The machine flags the toner end status when one of the conditions below is
detected for a toner color. The messages, No Toner, Replace Toner Cartridge,
and Xxxxx, show. Xxxxx indicates the color, such as cyan.
VREF + 0.5 V < VT (ten times consecutively)
The pixel counter counts up to the equivalent of 50 A4 sheets of pixels (100%
coverage) since near-end was detected.
However, printing continues if fewer pages have been made since near-end than
the number set with SP 2-212-11 (default: 10 pages).
NOTE: If one of the following conditions is detected 10 consecutive times, the
machine flags a toner end condition. This condition does not depend on
the number of pages printed since near-end.
VREF + 1.2 V < VT
VT > 4.8 V
The machine cannot print until the toner cartridge is replaced after it detects toner
end for black. The machine can print in black and white only if cyan, magenta, or
yellow are in a toner end condition during standby mode. At this time the machine
cannot do color print jobs.
NOTE: If the yellow, cyan, or magenta toner ends during a color-printing job, the
job is suspended until toner is supplied. If new color toner is not installed,
the user can print black-and-white jobs only.
Toner End Recovery

The machine assumes that the toner cartridge has been replaced if either of the
following occurs when the near-end or end status exists:
The upper right cover is opened and closed.
The main switch is turned off and on.
Then the machine starts to supply toner to the development unit. After supplying
toner, the machine clears the toner near-end or end status if the following
conditions are detected:
Vt [0] Vt [3] > 0.5V
Vt Vref > 0.3V
B202/B178/B180
6-18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCESS CONTROL
6.2.7 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION

You must set Enable in SP5-999-005 (black), 006 (yellow), 007 (magenta), or 008
(cyan) for the machine to detect the new unit after you install a new development
unit. These settings depend on the development unit you install. The machine
initializes the developer when it detects a new unit.
First, the machine agitates the developer for about 60 seconds. Second, it adjusts
VCNT (control voltage for TD sensor) so that VT (TD sensor output) becomes 3.0
0.2 volts. Finally, the machine keeps this VT as VREF.
VCNT is corrected for the current humidity every print job. VCNT is also corrected for
the total number of prints. This does not let the developer Q/M vary.
If the humidity correction is giving poor
results (for example, if the humidity sensor
[A] is broken), it can be disabled with SP2223-2. Then a value for VCNT must be input
manually using SP2-224-1 to -4 (adjust by
trial and error).
During developer initialization, the machine
forcibly supplies toner because there is no
toner inside the toner transport tube at
installation. Then the machine does the
process control self check.
[A]
Detailed
Descriptions
B178D512.WMF
SM
6-19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
6.3 SCANNING
6.3.1 OVERVIEW
8
10
9
B178D513.WMF
1. Scanner HP sensor
6. Scanner motor
2. ADF exposure glass
7. Exposure glass
3. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage)
8. Sensor board unit (SBU)
4. Scanner lamp
9. Original length sensor
5. 1st scanner (1st carriage)
10. Original width sensor
The original on the exposure glass or ARDF exposure glass reflects the light
emitted from the scanner lamp. The reflected light goes to the CCD on the sensor
board by way of the 1st and 2nd scanners. The sensor board converts the CCD
analog signals into digital signals.
When the original is manually placed on the exposure glass, the scanner motor
pulls the 1st and 2nd scanners via mechanical linkage. The original is scanned
from left to right as shown above.
When the original is fed from the optional ARDF, it is automatically transported
onto the ARDF exposure glass, and to the original exit. The original does not stay
on the glass; but goes to the exit. The 1st and 2nd scanners stay at their home
positions.
B202/B178/B180
6-20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
6.3.2 SCANNER DRIVE
[E]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B178D514.WMF
The scanner motor [B] drives the 1st scanner [A] and the 2nd scanner [E] through
the scanner drive pulley, scanner drive shaft [C], and two scanner wires [D].
Book mode -
In reduction or enlargement mode, the scanning speed depends on the

magnification ratio. The returning speed is always the same, whether in full size or
magnification mode. The image length change in the sub scan direction is done by
changing the scanner motor speed. In the main scan direction it is done by image
processing on the IPU board.
You can adjust the magnification in the sub-scan direction by changing the scanner
motor speed with SP4-008.
ARDF mode The scanners always stay in their home position (the scanner HP sensor detects
the 1st scanner) to scan the original. The ARDF motor feeds the original through
the ARDF. In reduction/enlargement mode, the image length change in the subscan direction is done by changing the ARDF motor speed. Magnification in the
main scan direction is done in the IPU board. This is the same as for book mode.
You can adjust magnification in the sub-scan direction by changing the ARDF
motor speed with SP6-017.
SM
6-21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
The SBU board controls the scanner drive motor. The 2nd scanner speed is half
that of the 1st scanner.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
6.3.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
[A]
[B]
B178D515.WMF
The original width sensors [A] detect the original width. The original length
sensors [B] detect the original length.
The SBU controller on the SBU board checks each sensor status when the
platen cover sensor is activated as it is closed. It detects the original size by the
on/off signals it gets from each sensor.
If the copy is made with the platen cover fully open, the SBU controller on the
SBU determines the original size from the sensor outputs after the Start key is
pressed.
L1 L2
L3
W1
W2
B178D516.WMF
B202/B178/B180
6-22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SCANNING
Original Size
Metric
version
A3
B4
F4
A4-L
B5-L
A4-S
B5-S
A5-L, A5-S
Length Sensor
Width
Sensor
Inch version
L3
L2
L1
W2
W1
11" x 17"
10" x 14"
8.5" x 14" (8" x 13")
8.5" x 11"
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
O
O
X
11" x 8.5"
5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5"
SP4-301
display
132
141
165
133
142
5
14
128
NOTE: L: Lengthwise, S: Sideways, O: Paper present, X: Paper not present

For other combinations, Cannot detect original size. shows on the operation
panel.
The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size. This
original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan and
increases the machines productivity.
However, if the by-pass tray is used, the machine assumes that the copy paper is
lengthwise (L). For example, if A4 sideways paper is placed on the by-pass tray,
the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans a full A3 area. Information from the
original size sensors is disregarded.

The anti-condensation heater is available as an optional unit. The anticondensation heater prevents condensation on the mirrors. Condensation can
occur when the scanner unit is moved from a cold room to a warm room, for
example. Condensation can cause abnormal images.
SM
6-23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
Refer to the ARDF manual for more information on original size detection with the
ARDF.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING

6.4.1 OVERVIEW
CCD
SBU
IPU
FCU
Option
Mother Board
LD Board
HDD
Controller
BCU
M
C
Y
Memory
K
B178D517.WMF
Memory
The CCD (Charged Coupled Device) generates three analog video signals. K
The SBU (Sensor Board Unit) converts the three analog signals to 10-bit digital
signals. It sends these signals to the IPU (Image Processing Unit).
The IPU processes the image. Then the image data goes to the controller.
B202/B178/B180
6-24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.4.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM
O R(B)
E
CCD
O
E
O B(R)
E
Analog Amplifier
A/D Converter
10 bit
Analog Amplifier
A/D Converter
10 bit
Analog Amplifier
A/D Converter
10 bit
SBU
Controller
R 10 bit
Field
Memory
G 10 bit
Field
Memory
B 10 bit
8 bit
ASIC
8 bit
8 bit
IPU
SBU
B178D518.WMF
Signal Processing
1. Signal Amplification
Operational amplifiers amplify odd-pixel and even-pixel RGB analog signals
from the CCD.
2. Signal Composition
The amplified signals (even-pixel and odd-pixel for each RGB color) are
combined by the MPX circuit after A/D conversion.
White Level Correction

A white plate is on the back of the left scale. The scanner scans this plate to see
the actual white level when you turn the switch on. To compensate the difference
between the actual white level and the ideal white level (target white level), the
CCD-gain control is conducted.
Others
The SBU controller exchanges the R and B signals if the original is scanned with
the ARDF.
SM
6-25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
A/D Conversion
The analog signals (CCD output) are converted to 10-bit (1024 gradations) digital
signals.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Black Level Correction

Improves image reproduction for high-density areas.
Reads the black video level at black elements on the CCD. These pixels are
masked off, and should produce a pure black signal.
This is subtracted from the value of each pixel.
Calculated for each scan line.
Corrects the image data for any changes in black level with time, as the machine
scans down the page.
Adjustments
The properties of the scanner unit, (necessary for controlling the scanner VPU
(video processing unit)), are stored in the NVRAM on the controller.
Adjust the following after you replace the SBU:
SP4008
SP4010
SP4011
Scanner sub-scan magnification

Scanner leading edge registration
Scanner side-to-side registration
VPU Test Mode

Output the VPU test pattern with SP4-907 to make sure the scanner VPU control
functions correctly. ( 4. Troubleshooting for details)
B202/B178/B180
6-26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.4.3 IPU BLOCK DIAGRAM
SBU
SBU I/F
ASIC0
Shading Correction
Picture Elemnet Correction
Scanner Correction
Filter
ASIC1
ADS
Color Correction
Main Scan Magnification
I/F
Printer Correction
ASIC3
BCU
PCI BUS
ACS
Image Separation
Controller
ASIC2
Gradation Processing
ASIC4
IPU
Controller
Option
FCU
B178D519.WMF
Auto shading compensates for the possible differences in the amount of light at the
edge and center of a scanned image caused by the scanner lens, or, variations
among pixels of the CCD.
SM
6-27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
Shading Correction
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction

Picture element correction does the following two things:
1. Completion of the scan line correction process.
2. Correction if the CCD is not perpendicular to the light.
The green CCD line is taken as a standard.
Both ends of the red and blue lines are adjusted to match.
Use SP 4-932-1 to 4-932-4 to change the vertical line correction level
( 3. Replacement and Adjustment Image Adjustments).
Scan Line Correction

R, G, and B CCD lines are spaced 4 lines apart (8 lines total) when full size
magnification is used.
Scan line correction synchronizes these signals by storing each line in memory.
The difference between the R, G and B signals depends on the magnification
ratio.
If this calculation does not result in an integer, the corrected data is set to the
closest integer. At this time, further correction is needed ( Picture Element
Correction).
Image Separation
The machine separates the original image into text and photo (dot screen) areas.
Edge Separation
Used to locate text and line diagrams
Locates areas of strong contrast.
Looks for continuity of black or colored pixels.
Looks for continuity of white pixels around black or colored pixels.
Only uses data from the green CCD.
Dot Screen Separation
If white pixels are not detected around non-white pixels, it is a dot screen area.
Colored Text Separation
Identifies whether the text areas pixels are black or color.
This is based on the following:
1) Differences among the RGB maximum signal levels.
2) Output levels of the RGB video signals.
B202/B178/B180
6-28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
ACS (Auto Color Select)
Black and white first
Signal Level
255
204 (50% UCR rate)
153 (50% UCR rate)
Color first
RGB signal after scanner correction
102 128
(40% UCR rate)
255
RGB common data
(50% UCR rate)
B178D520.WMF
B178D609.WMF
The Auto Color Select determines if an original is black/white or color. Black copy
mode or full color mode is automatically selected.
Detailed
Descriptions
Selection is made based on the difference between the RGB signal levels. RGB
video signals are compared. If the maximum difference among RGB signals is
within a certain range, the original is considered black and white.
SM
6-29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction)
255
255
0
Dark
1023
Light
Dark
255
Light
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
B178D610.WMF
B178D521.WMF
The RGB video signals from the CCD go to the IPU section. This signal is
proportional to the intensity of light reflected from the original image (Fig. 1).
Scanner gamma correction inverts the video signals. The shading circuit converts
the signal from 10-bit to 8-bit.
The IPU section converts the signal levels as shown in Fig. 2.
This improves the accuracy of RGB to CMY color conversion (conversion is done
later in the image process).
The same table is used for R, G, and B signals.
B202/B178/B180
6-30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Filtering
Necessary software filters are applied to the RGB video signals.
Varies depending on the results of auto text/photo separation (or on the selected
original mode).
RGB smoothing is applied to photo areas
Edge emphasis applied to text areas.
Background Density Control

Removes low ID image signals (background) that are less than a certain
threshold.
The threshold depends on the color mode (single color or full color).
Users can select a different threshold for each mode.
Detailed
Descriptions
ADS (Auto Image Density Selection)

Full color mode
1) Refers to the RGB data taken from the entire original.
2) Calculates a threshold for removing the background based on this data.
Black and white mode
1) Determines the peak white level.
2) Peak level data is taken for each scan line.
3) Removes the peak white level from the image. This produces a white
background.
4) Also uses the peak white level to determine the white reference value for
A/D conversion.
5) Background density is adjusted before data is input to the A/D converter.
SM
6-31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Color Conversion
Transparency for each color toner is not ideal. Color conversion compensates for
the differences between the ideal and actual characteristics. A matrix converts the
RGB video signals into CMYK video signals while the original is scanned once.
Conversion Matrix
The following color conversion table is an example of the results from the matrix
operation.
Simple color copying.
No special modes applied.
To represent green, the yellow and cyan toners are used in a 1:1 ratio.
Color Conversion Table
Original Color
Toner
Y
M
C
K
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
User Program Mode

When the user selects one of the following special modes, the values in this table
may fall between 0 and 1.
Photo mode
Glossy Photo
Printed Photo
Copied Photo
Others
Generation Mode
Pale Mode
Map Mode
Two-color mode
Separates black areas and colored areas.
Converts black areas to a color selected by the user.
All other areas are converted to a second color selected by the user.
( Operators manual for details)
B202/B178/B180
6-32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Main Scan Magnification

The ASIC2 chip on the IPU board handles reduction and enlargement in the main
scan direction while the machine changes the scanner speed to reduce or enlarge
the original in the sub-scan direction.
Scanning and laser writing are done at a fixed pitch (CCD elements cannot be
squeezed or expanded).
Imaginary points are calculated. These correspond to a physical enlargement or
reduction.
Image density is then calculated for each of the imaginary points based on the
image data for the nearest two true points.
The calculated data then becomes the new (reduced or enlarged) image data.
Detailed
Descriptions
NOTE: The actual calculations for main scan magnification use the polynomial
convolution method. This mathematical process is beyond the scope of this
service manual and will not be covered here.
SM
6-33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Printer Gamma Correction

Example: Y
High
Output ID
Low
Low
Input Signal
High
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
B178D611.WMF
B178D522.WMF
The gamma curves for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black should be identical, as
shown in figure 1. However, slight variations in the electrical components can result
in varying gamma curves, as shown in figure 2.
Printer characteristics are much more variable than scanner ones. Printer
gamma needs recalibration and adjustment from time to time.
The Auto Color Calibration (ACC) procedure compensates for any discrepancies
in color reproduction.
ACC makes new gamma curves for each color in each mode (text, photo, and
black text).
After ACC, you can adjust the gamma curve for each color with service program
(SP4-918).
4 different modes:
1) ID max.
2) Shadow (High ID)
3) Middle (Middle ID)
4) Highlight (Low ID)
You can get back the previous gamma curve if it was better.
You can load factory settings with SP 5-610-4.
NOTE: If the factory settings have been overwritten, this will return the new
values, not the actual settings made in the factory. This is deliberate,
since some drift is expected. After a time, the original factory settings
may no longer be suitable.
Factory settings can be overwritten by the current gamma settings with SP5-6105.
B202/B178/B180
6-34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
ID Max.
This mode adjusts the total image density
as shown in figure 3.
High
ID MAX
OFFSET
Output ID
0
Low
Low
Input Signal
Fig. 3
Shadow (High ID)

The High ID mode adjusts the image
density between Level 6 and Level 9 of the
color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart
(figure 4).
High
B178D523.WMF
High
Shadow
OFFSET
Output ID
0
Low
Low
Input Signal
Fig. 4
B178D524.WMF
High
Middle
OFFSET
Output ID
0
Low
Low
Input Signal
Fig. 5
Highlight (Low ID)

The Low ID mode adjusts the image density
between Level 2 and Level 5 of the color
gradation scale on the C-4 test chart (figure
6).
High
B178D525.WMF
High
Highlight
OFFSET
Output ID
0
Low
Low
Input Signal
Fig. 6
SM
6-35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
High
B178D526.WMF
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
Middle (Middle ID)

The Middle ID mode adjusts the image
density between Level 3 and Level 7 of the
color gradation scale on the C-4 test chart
(figure 5).
High
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE PROCESSING
Auto Color Calibration Test Pattern

The test pattern has eight, 17-step
gradation scales for each color (CMYK).
This includes background white for Text
and Photo modes.
Dark
ACC automatically calibrates the printer

gamma curve. The user starts the ACC
process.
Light
K
C
1. The user prints an ACC Test

Pattern.
M
Y
2. The user places the test pattern on

the exposure glass.
3. The copier makes 8 scans to read

each color scale.
C
M
4. The copier corrects the printer

gamma by comparing the ideal
settings with the current image
density.
5. The copier combines the corrected

gamma curve with the shadow,
middle, and highlight values in the
current memory.
B178D527.WMF
6. Then the copier calculates the ID

max (amplitude of the gamma curve) based on data from the ACC scan.
7. You can adjust the corrected printer gamma further with SP mode (SP4-918).
Error Diffusion
Error diffusion reduces the difference in contrast between light and dark areas of a
halftone image. Each pixel is corrected using the difference between it and the
surrounding pixels. The corrected pixels are then compared with an error diffusion
matrix.
IPU Board Test

You can check the IPU board with SP4-904-1 or 2.
( 4. Troubleshooting for details)
B202/B178/B180
6-36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE DATA PATH
6.5 IMAGE DATA PATH
CCD
SBU
IPU
FCU
Option
Mother Board
LD Board
HDD
Controller
BCU
M
C
Y
Memory
K
B178D517.WMF
SBU IPU Controller (HDD/Memory) IPU Controller (straight through)

BCU
Printer Application
Controller IPU (through) Controller BCU
Scanner Application (1 bit/8 bits)

SBU IPU Controller (HDD/Memory)
Fax Application (Transmission/Reception)

Transmission: SBU IPU FCU
Reception: FCU IPU Controller (straight through) BCU
SM
6-37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
Copier Application
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.1 OVERVIEW
17
18
2
3
16
4
5
15
6
7
14
8
13
12
11
10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Synchronizing detector board-Y, K-E

LD unit-Y
LD unit-K
LD Mirror-M
LD unit-M
LD unit-C
F-theta lens-M, C
Synchronizing detector board-M, C-S
Synchronizing detector board-M, C-E
B178D529.WMF
10. OPC drum-M

11. WTL
12. OPC drum-C
13. OPC drum-Y
14. OPC drum-K
15. Synchronizing detector board-Y, K-S
16. F-theta lens-Y, K
17. Polygon mirror motor
18. LD Mirror-K
This machine uses four LD units and one polygon mirror motor to produce latent
images on four OPC drums (one drum for each color toner).
There are two hexagonal mirrors. Each mirror reflects beams from two LD units.
The LD unit for black has two laser diodes to do dual beam writing (this is only
done for black-and-white printing; for full color printing, only one of the beams is
used).
Laser exposure for magenta and cyan starts from the rear side of the drum.
However, for yellow and black it starts from the front side of the drum. This is
because the units for magenta and cyan are on the other side of the polygon mirror
from the units for yellow and black.
B202/B178/B180
6-38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.2 OPTICAL PATH

[D]
[A]
[F]
[B]
[C]
[E]
B178D530.WMF
The laser beams for cyan [C] and yellow [A] are directed to the upper part of the
polygon mirror [B]. Laser beams for magenta [E] and black [D] are directed to the
lower part of the polygon mirror. The LD mirrors (see the previous page) deflect the
laser beams for magenta and black towards the lower polygon mirror.
The speed of the polygon mirror depends on the selected mode and model (see
below).
Mode
B/W
(except
OHP/Thick
paper)
Color
(except
OHP/Thick
paper)
OHP/Thick
SM
Resolution
(dpi)
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
Polygon motor
speed (rpm)
C2a: 38,268
C2b: 26,221
C2k: 38,268
C2a: 29,528
C2b: 38,268
C2k: 29,528
C2a: 29,528
C2b: 38,268
C2k: 29,528
38,268
Process line
speed (mm/s)
C2a: 162
C2b: 222
C2k: 162
C2a: 125
C2b: 162
C2k: 125
C2a: 125
C2b: 162
C2k: 125
81
Print speed
(ppm)
C2a: 35
C2b: 45
C2k: 28
C2a: 28
C2b: 35
C2k: 24
C2a: 28
C2b: 35
C2k: 24
17
38,268
81
17
6-39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Remarks
Dual beam
writing
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
The WTL [F] corrects the main scan line. Without this component, the line bends
out towards the middle of the main scan. The central bend of the WTL is adjusted
in the factory.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR
[B]
[B]
[A]
[A]
B178D531.WMF
Overview
The machine has four laser synchronizing detector boards (LSD). There is one at
each corner of the laser optics-housing unit.
Each pair of boards detects two colors. The machine recognizes each color from
the time that they are detected. The two LSDs at the right [A] are used for magenta
and cyan. The two LSDs at the left [B] are used for yellow and black.
Main Scan Start Detection

For magenta and cyan, the LSD at the rear detects the start of the main scan. For
yellow and black, the LSD at the front detects the start of the main scan.
Clock Frequency Adjustment

Each pair ensures that the number of laser clock pulses in the main scan is
constant. If the count for one particular beam varies from normal, the LD clock
frequency for that beam is adjusted.
If the board at the end position is defective, this cannot be detected. At this time,
you must disable the detection feature with SP2-919-1.
B202/B178/B180
6-40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.4 DUAL BEAM WRITING

Dual Beam Mechanism
The LD unit for black has two laser diodes. Each face of the polygon mirror writes
two main scan lines. This only happens for black and white printing.
Laser Beam Pitch Change Mechanism

[E]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
1
2
3
B178D532.WMF
There is a spring [A] at the front end of the black LD unit [E]. There is a positioning
motor [D] at the right end. The spring pushes the unit clockwise, while the motor
pushes it counterclockwise. These two components drive the unit to one of the
following three positions:
600-dpi position []
1,200-dpi position []
Home position
[]
Before it is driven to the 600-dpi position or the 1,200-dpi position, the black LD unit
is set to its home position. When driven from one position to another, the unit goes
as follows:
600-dpi position Home position 1,200-dpi position
1,200-dpi position Home position 600-dpi position
The home position is detected by the home position sensor [B]. When the unit is in
its home position, the actuator [C] is out of the sensor. The 600-dpi and 1,200-dpi
positions are determined by the distance from the home position. The distance is
calculated from the operation time of the LD positioning motor.
SM
6-41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
B178D612.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
Printing Mode and Black LD Unit Position

The machine changes the main scan resolution between 600 and 1,200 dpi for
black and white printing by rotating the LD unit. However, this does not occur for
OHP sheets and thick paper (remains at the 600 dpi position).
The table shows the printing modes and the positions of the black LD unit.
Mode
Monochrome
Color
Position
600-dpi position
1,200-dpi position
600-dpi position
600-dpi position
600 dpi
1,200 dpi
600 dpi
1,200 dpi
You must adjust the beam pitch for 600 dpi and 1,200 dpi with SP2-109-2 -3 after
you replace the laser optics-housing unit.
B202/B178/B180
6-42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH

24 Front C over
V and U pper
Left C over
SW
R ight C over
SW
5
V
LD 5
V
R ELA
Y
24V S
5V
5V
PSU
LD 5
V
1.8V
3.3V
R EG
1.8V
R EG
3.3V
24V
A relay on the PSU ensures

technician and user safety. It
also prevents the laser
beam from turning on during
servicing. This relay turns off
when the front cover, upper
left cover, or right door is
opened. At this time it cuts
the power (+5V) supplied to
the LD board for each color
through the BCU.
3.3V
1.8V
G AVD
3.3
V
5V
LD O F
F
PM AC A
LD
PD
3.3V
5V
24V
GND
LD 5V
L
D
P
D
LD B (M )
BCU
LD 5
V
3.3V
1.8V
G AVD
5V
LD O F
F
PM AC A
LD
PD
G APC I
L
D
P
D
LD B (C )
LD 5
V
C PU
(H 8)
3.3V
1.8V
G AVD
5V
LD O F
F
PM AC A
LD
PD
L
D
P
D
LD B (Y)
LD 5
V
P olygon
M otor
3.3V
1.8V
G AVD
24V
GN
D
5V
LD O F
F
PM AC A
LD
PD
L
D
P
D
LD B (K )
Two safety switches are used to turn the relay off. One switch is used for the front
cover and upper left cover. This safety switch is off when either of the two covers is
opened. The other safety switch is used for the right door.
PMAC: Precise Pulse Modulation ASIC on
C-MOS technology
LDB: LD Drive Board (included in the LD Unit)
Front and Upper Left Cover Switch

The micro switch [A] on the PSU is activated or
[A]
deactivated by the actuator [B] when the front
cover or the upper left cover is opened and closed.
[B]
B178D500.WMF
SM
6-43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
B178D533.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
Error Messages
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B178D534.WMF
Along with other switches, the LD safety switches help show error messages
related to external covers. When one or more covers are open, the messages,
Cover is open as shown and Close it, show with a diagram. The diagram shows
which cover is open. The table lists the diagram indications and the switch
conditions. Note that some diagram indications take precedence over others.
Diagram indication
Upper left cover
Duplex unit
Front cover
Right door
[A] Upper left

cover switch
Open
(any)
Closed
Closed
Condition
[B] Duplex unit
[C] Front door
switch
switch
(any)
(any)
Open
(any)
(any)
Open
(any)
Closed
[E] Right door

switch
(any)
(any)
(any)
Open
NOTE: 1) In the table, any indicates that the condition does not affect the
diagram indication.
2) The left door switch [D] stays closed when the upper left cover switch
[A] is closed.
B202/B178/B180
6-44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
6.6.6 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

Overview
YY, KK, CC, MM: Spaces between two lines of the same color
KY, KC, KM:
Spaces between a black line and a color line
Front
Center
Rear
Y
YY
KK
C
M
CC
MM
KY
YY
KC
KM
KY
KK
YY
KC
KM
CC
KY
KK
KC
KM
CC
MM
MM
Y
K
C
M
During automatic line position adjustment, the line patterns above are created eight
times on the transfer belt. The spaces between the lines (YY, KK, CC, MM, KY, KC,
KM) are measured by the front, center, and rear ID sensors. The controller takes
the average of the spaces. Then it adjusts the following positions and
magnification:
Sub scan line position for YCM
Main scan line position for YCM
Magnification ratio for KYCM
Skew for YCM
The transfer belt-cleaning unit cleans the transfer belt after the patterns are
measured. SC285 shows if an error is detected four times consecutively.
SM
6-45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
B178D535.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
Summary of Each Adjustment

Sub scan line position for YCM
The adjustment of the sub-scan line position for YCM is based on the line position
for K (color registration). The machine measures the gaps between the lines of
each color in the pattern on the transfer belt. If the gaps for a color are not correct,
the machine moves the image of the color up or down the sub scan axis. To do this,
it changes the laser write timing for that color.
Main scan line position for YCM

If the machine detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, it
changes the laser write start timing for each scan line.
Magnification adjustment for KYCM

If the machine detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the
LD clock frequency for the required color.
Skew for YCM

The adjustment of the skew for YCM is based on the line position for K.
B202/B178/B180
6-46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
Adjustment Conditions
Line position adjustment timing depends on several SP mode settings. However,
the mode selection, SP5-993-001, takes precedence over the others. The table
below shows the conditions and the processes you need to do. Note that the
adjustments of the sub-scan line position, main scan line position, and
magnification are done under the same conditions.
The numbers in the mode selection column show the setting of SP 5-993-001. For
details, refer to the description for SP 5-993-001 in the SP table.
Condition
Process
control
Temperature
difference
1 or 2
0, 1, or 2
Setting
Job End
Interrupt
Non-use Time 1, 2
Recovery (fusing
temperature 60C or
lower)
Standby
Job start
Interrupt
Main scan length detection
Initialization (fusing temperature over
60C)
Replacement of development unit or
PCU
Forced self check
S-pos. : Sub-scan line position

M-pos. : Main scan line position
Magni. : Magnification
SP3-906-001
SP3-906-002
SP3-906-003, 004
S-pos./
M-pos./
Magni.

Skew
None
SP5-993-003, 005
SP5-993-003, 006
SP5-993-003, 04, 022
SP2-919-001

*
SP5-993-026
None
SP5-993-002
: Executed
* : Executed one time when the
conditions are met twice
NOTE: 1) Recovery includes turning on the main switch.

2) Fusing temperature is measured by the thermistor in the fusing unit.
Other temperatures are measured by the sensors on the laser opticshousing unit.
3) You can use SP5-993-035 to select one of the six frequency levels of
the line position adjustment.
SM
6-47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
Mode
selectio
n
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LASER EXPOSURE
Main Scan Skew Adjustment

[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
B178D536.WMF
The 3rd mirror positioning motors for magenta [A], cyan [B], and yellow [C] adjust
the angle of the 3rd mirrors [D] respectively, based on the 3rd mirror position for
black. This mechanism corrects main scan skew.
6.6.7 DIFFERENCES IN THE COPY AND PRINTER MODES

To improve reproduction in the copy mode, the machine generates the print image
with 2 bits per pixel. Different parameters are used for the copy and print modes as
shown in the table below.
Function
Gradation for printing
LD control
Pointer table display
B202/B178/B180
Copy Mode
2 bits / pixel
SP2-103-101 to -110
SP3-902-5 to -8
6-48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Printer Mode
1 bit / pixel
SP2-103-1 to -66
SP3-902-1 to -4
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.7.1 OVERVIEW
1
7
3
B178D537.WMF
Cleaning brush roller

Charge roller (non-contact)
OPC drum
Cleaning brush
5. Waste toner collection auger

6. Lubricant bar
7. Cleaning blade
This machine has four independent PCUs, one for each color. Each PCU has the
following:
1) OPC drum
2) Non-contact charge roller
3) Cleaning brush
4) Cleaning blade.
The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.25 mm).
The photoconductor gap between a PCU and the corresponding development roller
is determined by the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft. You cannot adjust
this in the field.
SM
6-49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
1.
2.
3.
4.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.2 DRIVE
[A]
[B]
K
Y
C
M
B178D538.WMF
The drum drive motor-K [A] drives the PCU for black.
The drum drive motor-CMY [B] drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.
Using one motor to drive these three drums reduces CMY color misalignment.
Both motors are brush-less DC motors. This helps to reduce the drive noise. The
brush-less DC motors make sound that is not the same as other machines, but this
sound does not mean machine defective.
B202/B178/B180
6-50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.3 DRUM GEAR POSITION SENSORS

[E]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
B178D539.WMF
The machine uses these sensors to detect if the drum motors rotate. SC440 shows
when it detects that the drum motor is not moving. These sensors also help the
machine to initialize the relative positions of the gears when the main switch is
turned on, and during initializing. This prevents phase fluctuation between
printouts.
There is an interrupter [E] on each of the black [D] and yellow [C] drum gears. The
drum gear position sensors [F][G] detect the positions of these interrupters
respectively. The sensors check that the two interrupters are parallel. This
mechanism makes sure that output quality does not vary. The cyan [B] and
magenta [A] drum gears operate with the yellow drum gear because these three
drum gears are linked through other gears [H][I].
In the ready status, the two interrupters stay in a parallel position. If they are not in
a parallel position (shown in the illustration), the machine adjusts the position of the
black drum gear.
The relative positions of the gears are adjusted every 30 jobs.
SM
6-51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
Mechanism
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
Initialization Process and SC Codes

SC code 440-1 or 440-2 show when a drum gear position sensor detects an error.
The table shows the following:
Steps of the initialization process
Possible errors
Corresponding SC codes.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Initialization process
The four drums simultaneously
operated\ for seven seconds. The
two drum position sensors detect the
two drum gear interrupters several
times.
The time lags between detection of

the black drum gear interrupter and
detection of the yellow drum gear
interrupter are checked. The average
time lag is calculated.
The black drum is operated. The
position of the gear is adjusted
according to the average time lag.
Possible error
The black drum gear
interrupter is not detected.
The yellow drum gear
interrupter is not detected.
Both black and yellow drum
gear interrupters are not
detected.
The black drum gear

interrupter is not detected
( NOTE).
SC code
440-1
440-2
440-1
440-1
NOTE: No error occurs in step 1 and step 2 if the connector of the black drum
position sensor has been connected to the yellow drum position sensor
(and the connector of the yellow drum position sensor, to the black drum
position sensor).
B202/B178/B180
6-52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.4 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING
[B]
[A]
B178D540.WMF
This machine uses a non-contact charge roller [A] to reduce ozone. The noncontact charge roller gives the drum surface a negative charge. The high voltage
supply board C.B, which is located at the rear of the machine, applies a dc and
ac voltage (at a constant current) to the roller. The ac voltage helps to ensure that
the charge given to the drum is as uniform as possible.
The machine automatically controls the charge roller voltage if automatic process
control is enabled (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to "ON"). However, if process control is
switched off, (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to "OFF"), the dc voltage is the value stored
in SP2-001-1 to -4 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).
The cleaning brush roller [B], which always contacts the charge roller, cleans the
charge roller.
The charge roller can generate small amounts of nitrogen oxide gases (known as
NOx). These gases can stay on the surface of the drum. This can cause unfocused
copies. To avoid this, the film of NOx is removed at the following times:
Power on
At the end of a job (if more than 200 prints)
When a toner cartridge has been replaced
SP3-920-1 to -4 determines when this procedure (known as refresh mode) is
done. You can do this at any time with SP3-920-5 if the prints are smeared.
Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at the
end of every job.
SM
6-53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
The diameter of the roller is 11.14 mm (circumference about 35 mm). The gap
between a drum and the corresponding charge roller is about 50 m.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.5 DRUM CLEANING
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
B178D541.WMF
The cleaning brush [A] spreads out the waste toner that stays on the drum. Then
the cleaning blade [B] scrapes it off. The toner collection auger [C] transports the
toner towards the waste toner collection duct.
The lubricant bar [D] is on the cleaning brush. The cleaning brush rubs against the
lubricant bar and lubricates the drum surface. Excess lubricant is removed by the
cleaning blade. Then it goes to the waste toner collection duct.
B202/B178/B180
6-54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.6 WASTE TONER COLLECTION
[F]
[G]
[E]
[J]
[H]
[M]
[K]
[I]
[B]
[L]
[D]
[A]
[C]
B178D542.WMF
The waste toner from the collection augers in the four PCUs drops into the waste
toner collection duct from the four openings [F][G][H][I] at the rear of the PCUs. The
toner collection coils [J][K][L] in the duct transport this waste toner towards the
waste toner bottle [A]. The coils [J][K][L] are driven by development drive motorCMY. The openings and PCUs correspond as follows: black [F], yellow [G],
cyan [H], magenta [I].
The waste toner from the transfer belt-cleaning unit drops into the waste toner
collection duct from another opening [E].
The end of the waste toner collection duct is in the waste toner bottle [A]. There are
three openings [B][C] and one collection coil [D] in this part. The waste toner drops
into the bottle through the openings. The collection coil [D] is driven by drum drive
motor-K.
SM
6-55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
Waste Toner Path
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
Waste Toner Vibrator

The waste toner vibrator has one motor [M]. The motor operates for about one
second at a time. Its vibration does not let waste toner clog the waste toner path.
The table shows the conditions under which the motor operates.
Machine status
Motor operation
During machine start (machine

initialization)
Two times
At the beginning of the process

control
One time
Printing jobs that output five or less

papers
At the job end if 3 or more papers have been output

since the previous operation (of the motor) ()
Printing jobs that output 6 or more

papers
Every five papers and at the job end ()
Case 1: The copier does two jobs. The first job outputs one paper, and the second
job outputs two papers. In this case, the motor operates one time at the end of the
second job (see ).
Case 2: The copier does one job, and the job outputs 12 papers. In this case, the
motor operates at the following times:
One time during the fifth printing
One time during the tenth printing
One time at the job end (see ).
Case 3: The copier does two jobs. The first job outputs one paper, and the second
job outputs 12 papers. In this case, the motor operates at the following times:
One time during the fifth printing of the second job
One time during the tenth printing of the second job
One time at the end of the second job (see ; This case does not satisfy
condition ).
B202/B178/B180
6-56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT
6.7.7 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION

[A]
[B]
B178D543.WMF
The waste toner bottle set switch [A] detects the bottle when it is placed in the
machine.
When the bottle contains a certain amount of waste toner, the sensor is
deactivated. The machine detects that the waste toner bottle is almost full and
shows Waste Toner is Almost Full.
At this time, the machine can print about 2,500 more sheets. After printing 2,500
sheets, it shows Replace Waste Toner, at the end of the job. After this, you
cannot use the machine again until the bottle is replaced or emptied.
NOTE: The number of sheets is calculated on the assumption that the paper size
is A4 and that the coverage ratio of each color is 5%.
SM
6-57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
The waste toner sensor [B] detects the weight of the bottle and informs the
machine when it is almost full.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.8
DEVELOPMENT
6.8.1 OVERVIEW
3
6
4
B178D544.WMF
4. TD sensor
5. Mixing auger (left)
6. Development roller
1. Doctor blade
2. Developer hopper
3. Mixing auger (right)
This machine has four independent development units, one for each color. Each
contains 300 g of developer when new. The developer in each unit is supplied to
the development roller by the two mixing augers and attracted onto the surface of
the roller.
The photoconductor gap between PCU and development roller is determined by
the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft. You cannot adjust this in the field.
The TD sensor and center ID sensor control toner density. Each development unit
has a TD sensor.
The diameter of the development roller is 18.2 mm (circumference about 57.2 mm).
B202/B178/B180
6-58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.8.2 DRIVE
[A]
[C]
[B]
B178D545.WMF
[C]
The development drive motor-K [A] drives the development roller for black through
gears and a clutch. This motor also drives the fusing unit and paper exit rollers.
The gear trains are shown in the diagram by dotted lines.
The development drive motor-CMY [B] drives the development unit for magenta,
cyan, and yellow through gears and clutches. This motor also drives the
registration roller.
The drive gears [C] of the development units are flexible. This creates a smooth
connection between the development motor gear and the drive gear of the
development unit.
SM
6-59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
B178D546.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.8.3 DEVELOPER AGITATION
[C]
[A]
B178D547.WMF
[B]
Two mixing augers [A and B] circulate the developer forward and backward to
agitate the developer.
This happens at the following times:
During process control self check
During toner supply
During development.
Ducts on the top of the developer hopper [C] make sure that the internal pressure
does not become too high. These ducts are sealed to not let the toner solidify.
This development unit does not operate very well at high temperatures (over 50
C). The toner inside the development unit can become solid at temperatures higher
that this value. A developer initialization error shows if the toner does become solid.
At this time, you must do the following procedure:
NOTE: You should also do this procedure when you install a new development
unit.
1. Remove the (old) development unit.
2. Keep the (new) development unit level and shake it several times from side to
side.
3. Install it to the machine.
B202/B178/B180
6-60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.8.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS
[B]
[A]
B178D548.WMF
The sub PSU [A] supplies development bias to the development roller via the
receptacle [B] at the rear of each development unit.
The machine automatically controls the dc bias, if automatic process control is
enabled (i.e., if SP3-125-001 is set to "ON"). However, if process control is
switched off, (i.e., if SP3-125-001 is set to "OFF"), the dc bias is the value stored in
SP2-201-001 to 009 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).
SM
6-61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
There is a dc bias voltage.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
6.8.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM

[D]
[E]
[C]
[F]
[B]
[A]
[G]
[H]
B178D549.WMF
[I]
Overview
The air transport system agitates the toner [H] in the toner cartridges [G]. Toner is
transported to the development unit [A] by the toner attraction pump [B] (each
cartridge has a separate pump). This provides a more stable way to transport fine
powder than previous methods.
Toner Agitation and Attraction

The rear air pump [D] supplies air to the yellow and magenta toner cartridges. The
front air pump [E] supplies air to the black and cyan toner cartridges. Air agitates all
the toner in each cartridge. The pumps and four valves [C] control the airflow.
Mixed with air, the toner passes part of the way along the transport tube [I] towards
the toner attraction pump. This pump draws the toner the rest of the way ( Toner
Transport).
The air pump turns on to supply air to the toner cartridges for one second under the
following conditions:
During normal operation (when the on time for a toner supply clutch
reaches a certain value).
When forced toner supply (SP2-207) is done
When forced toner density adjustment (SP3-126-002) is done
At toner end recovery
Developer initialization
The filter [F] on the inner package of the toner cartridge ensures that the internal
pressure does not become too high.
B202/B178/B180
6-62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
Air Flow and Toner Flow

[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
B178D550.WMF
The toner goes through the inner pipe [A], and reaches the toner tube [E] at the
bottom end of the pipe. The toner passes the sensor windows [G] on its way to the
toner tube. The windows are transparent and are at the front side and the rear side
of the pipe. The light emitted from the toner end sensor [D] goes through this area
if there is no toner in the pipe.
The airflow generated by the air pump goes through the outer pipe [B], and comes
out of the four openings at the top end.
Toner Near End Detection

Toner end sensors [D] detect toner near end conditions ( 6.2.6).
SM
6-63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
The air tube [F] and the toner tube [E] are connected to the joint [C] at the bottom
of the toner cartridge holder. This joint contains an inner pipe [A] and an outer pipe
[B]. These two pipes are L-shaped. The inner pipe goes through the outer pipe.
The inner pipe is longer than the outer pipe.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
Toner Transport
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[A]
B178D551.WMF
Each toner attraction pump has the same mechanism. The pump (toner attraction
pump) [A], has the following components:
Toner supply clutch [B]
Rubber tube [C]
Rotor [D]
The above components attract the toner in the toner transport tube [E] toward the
development unit.
The toner supply clutch drives the rotor, which draws the toner in from the cartridge
and passes it to the development unit. When supplying toner, the clutch turns on
and off as many times as necessary to supply the necessary amount of toner. The
amount of toner depends on the results of toner supply control.
Motor drive comes from the development drive motors.
B202/B178/B180
6-64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DEVELOPMENT
Shutter Mechanism
[C]
[D]
[F]
[E]
[B]
[A]
B178D552.WMF
The development unit and toner attraction pump each have a shutter mechanism.
The protrusion [A] on the development unit opens the shutter [B] in the pump when
the development unit is placed in the machine. At the same time, the protrusion [C]
on the pump opens the shutter [D] in the development unit. When both shutters are
open, toner can enter the development unit from the toner attraction pump.
The shutter spring [E and F] pulls and closes the shutter when the development
unit is removed.
6.8.6 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION

[A]
Detailed
Descriptions
The memory chip [A] on each toner cartridge

stores the total on time of the toner supply
clutch. This is used to calculate the amount of
toner remaining in the toner cartridge. The chip
is also used to detect whether the cartridge is
installed (if the cartridge is not installed, the
machine does not detect a signal from the
memory chip).
B178D553.WMF
SM
6-65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.9
PAPER FEED
6.9.1 OVERVIEW
1
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
16
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
15
14
13
B178D554.WMF
9. Separation roller - By-pass feed

10. Transport roller
11. Vertical transport roller
12. Feed roller - tray 2
13. Separation roller - tray 2
14. Pick-up roller - tray 2
15. Paper tray 2
16. Paper tray 1
Pick-up roller - tray 1

Feed roller - tray 1
Separation roller - tray 1
Relay roller
Registration roller
Feed roller - By-pass feed
Pick-up roller - By-pass feed
By-pass feed table
There are two paper trays (500 sheets each), and a by-pass feed table (100
sheets).
The paper feed mechanism uses an FRR system.
Tray 1 can hold A4 or letter paper only. Tray 2 can hold a range of sizes.
B202/B178/B180
6-66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.9.2 DRIVE TRAY 1, TRAY 2, AND BY-PASS TRAY
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[H]
[I]
[F]
[Q]
[J]
[K]
[L]
[M]
[G]
[N]
[O]
[P]
B178D613.WMF
B178D555.WMF
When tray 1 and tray 2 are inside the machine, their pick-up rollers [H][K] are
always in contact with each top sheet of the paper stack. However, the pick-up
roller [P] of the by-pass tray stays away until the by-pass pick-up solenoid [Q] turns
on. When the paper feed clutch [B][C][D] turns on, the pick-up, feed [I][L][N], and
separation [J][M][O] rollers start rotating to feed the paper. The paper feed clutch
stays on until shortly after the registration sensor activates.
SM
6-67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
The paper feed motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanisms in tray 1 [E], tray
2 [F], and the by-pass tray [G]. It uses clutches and complex trains of gears (the
locations of the gear trains are indicated by dotted lines in the above diagram) to
do this.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.9.3 PAPER LIFT TRAYS 1 & 2
[G]
[F]
[E]
[H]
[A]
[B]
[I]
[D]
[C]
B178D556.WMF
The tray 1 set switch [A] and tray 2-paper size switches [B] detect when the paper
trays [C] are placed in the machine. When the machine detects that a tray has
been placed in the machine, the tray lift motor [D] rotates and the coupling gear [E]
on the tray lift motor engages the pin [F] on the lift arm shaft [G]. Then the tray lift
arm [I] lifts the tray bottom plate [H] until the paper lift sensor for the tray detects
that the top of the stack is at the paper feed position.
B202/B178/B180
6-68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.9.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION TRAYS 1 & 2

[D]
[A]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[C]
[B]
B178D557.WMF
There is no size switch for tray 1. The paper size is fixed at either A4 or LT. You
can change this with SP1-902-1.
For tray 2, four paper size switches, working in combination, detect the paper size
as shown in the table below. The actuators are on the side plate [A]. The side plate
is moved by the end plate [B] through a cam [C].
Models
North America
Europe/Asia
11" x 17" SEF
11" x 17" SEF
A3 SEF
A3 SEF
*1
81/2" x 14" SEF
B4 SEF *1
81/2" x 11" SEF *2
A4 SEF *2
11" x 81/2" LEF *3
11" x 81/2" LEF *3
A4 LEF
A4 LEF
B5 LEF
B5 LEF
A5 LEF
A5 LEF
1 [D]
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
Switch Location
2 [E]
3 [F]
4 [G]
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
NOTE:
*1
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-2
*2
: The machine detects either 81/2" x 11" SEF or A4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-3
*3
: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4
The machine disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected
(if the paper size actuator is broken or no tray is installed).
SM
6-69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
1: Pushed
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.9.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION TRAYS 1 & 2

[A]
[C]
[B]
B178D558.WMF
Two paper height sensors, working in combination, detect the amount of paper in
the tray.
When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever moves up
and the actuator [A] (on the pressure lever drive shaft) rotates.
Remaining paper
Full
Nearly full
Near end
Almost empty
Paper height sensor 2 [B]

OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Paper height sensor 1 [C]

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF: No actuator
6.9.6 PAPER END DETECTION TRAYS 1 & 2

The paper stack raises the paper end feeler and the paper end sensor deactivates
if there is some paper in the paper tray.
When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout in
the tray bottom plate. At this time the paper end sensor activates.
B202/B178/B180
6-70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.9.7 REGISTRATION
[A]
[B]
B178D559.WMF
The machine makes a paper buckle at the registration roller to correct paper skew.
You can adjust the paper buckle with SP1-003-1 to -8.
SM
6-71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
The development drive motor - CMY [A] drives the registration roller [B] with a
clutch and a complex train of gears (the location of the gear train is indicated by
dotted lines in the above diagram).
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.9.8 PAPER FEED LINE SPEED

This machine has three process line speeds (for feed from registration roller to
fusing unit). The line speeds depend on the mode, selected resolution, and model.
Mode
Resolution
(dpi)
Line speed
(mm/s)
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
C2a/k: 162
C2b: 222
1,200 x 1,200
C2a/k:125
C2b:162
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
C2a/k: 125
C2b: 162
1,200 x 1,200
600 x 600
1,800 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
81
Print speed
(ppm)
C2a: 35
C2b: 45
C2k: 28
C2a: 28
C2b: 35
C2k: 24
C2a: 28
C2b: 35
C2k: 24
17
81
17
B/W
Color
OHP/Thick
The machine changes the line speed if there is a page with color in the middle of
the job during a monochrome print job. However, it will not change the line speed if
there is a monochrome page in the middle of a color print job.
Paper feed from tray to registration roller
Fusing, paper exit to standard tray, and mailbox
Duplex invert and feed
Finisher
B202/B178/B180
Line speed (mm/s)

230
A bit slower than Process line speed
370
450
6-72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
6.9.9 GRIP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM

[C]
[D]
[E]
[B]
[F]
[A]
[G]
B178D560.WMF
The grip roller release mechanism reduces the pressure of the grip roller [E].
To solve this possible problem, the grip roller release mechanism is activated
under the following conditions:
1) B4 paper or longer is being fed.
2) The machine is operating in the full-color mode.
3) The leading edge of the paper has been fed in the transfer unit.
The spring [A] always presses the grip roller against the transport roller [B]. When
the above conditions are met, the solenoid [F] turns on. Then the lever [C] pushes
the grip roller shaft [D], and the grip roller moves away from the paper.
SM
6-73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
The grip roller transports a sheet of paper to the transfer unit. When the transfer
unit starts to feed the leading edge of the paper [G], the trailing edge has still not
reached the grip roller. Paper is handled by the transfer unit and the grip roller at
the same time. If the handling speeds are not the same, this may skew the paper.
Longer paper sizes are more affected by the speed difference than shorter sizes.
From the viewpoint of image crispness, multi-color images are more easily affected
than mono-color images.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10 DUPLEX UNIT

6.10.1 OVERVIEW
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
B178D561.WMF
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Exit sensor 1
Junction gate
Duplex feed sensor
Duplex inverter sensor
Junction mylar 3
Junction mylar 2
Exit sensor 3
Junction mylar 1
Exit sensor 2
The second page (rear side) is printed first for duplex print jobs.
To print on the second side, the duplex inverter unit (on the side of the machine)
inverts the paper from the fusing unit and feeds it to the duplex feed unit (inside
the machine).
The duplex feed unit feeds the inverted paper back to the paper feed section.
When both sides have been printed, the duplex inverter unit feeds the paper out
to the finisher.
If the mailbox or standard exit tray (on top of the machine) was selected to
receive the duplex copies, the print will not enter the duplex unit after the second
side has been printed. The junction gate inside the machine directs it upwards to
the selected tray.
Duplex copies are not fed out to the external tray (on the left of the machine).
B202/B178/B180
6-74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.2 DUPLEX OPERATION

Up to A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF
There are three sheets of paper in the paper feed path at the same time. The
interleave method is used.
Example: 8 pages. The callout [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The
callout [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of paper (shaded
indicates the second side).
[A]
7
4
[B]
B178D562.WMF
Larger than A4/LT (81/2" x 11") LEF

There are two sheets of paper in the paper feed path at the same time. The
interleave method is used.
Example: 8 pages. The callout [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. The
callout [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of paper (shaded
indicates the second side).
[A]
1
1
[B]
SM
8
4
7
4
B178D563.WMF
6-75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT

[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
B178D564.WMF
The duplex inverter motor 1 [A] drives the following:

Paper exit roller 1 [B]
Paper transport roller [C]
Paper exit roller 2 [D]
Upper inverter roller [E].
The duplex inverter motor 2 [F] drives the following:
Exit roller 3 [G]
Paper exit roller 4 [H]
Lower inverter roller [I].
B202/B178/B180
6-76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.4 FEED TO EXTERNAL EXIT TRAY (NON-DUPLEX MODE)
[B]
[A]
This shows how the machine feeds paper through the duplex unit to the external
tray [A], when duplex mode is not selected.
NOTE: The paper cannot be fed out to the external tray if duplex printing is
selected.
The junction gate [B] directs the paper from the fusing unit out to the external tray
at one of the following times:
If thick paper or OHP mode is selected
If the external tray is selected as the output tray with the operation panel or the
printer driver
SM
6-77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
B178D565.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.5 FEED TO DUPLEX FEED UNIT
[A]
[C]
[B]
B178D566.WMF
B178D567.WMF
This shows how the machine feeds paper back into the machine after side 1 is
printed.
The junction gate [A] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of the
inverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [B] is activated, the machine waits
until the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 3 [C]. Then the paper is switched
back and junction mylar 3 directs the paper back into the machine for the second
side.
The next page shows how the paper is fed out to the finisher after both sides are
printed.
B202/B178/B180
6-78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.6 FEED TO TWO-TRAY FINISHER AND BOOKLET FINISHER

With Optional One-Tray Paper Feed Unit
[B]
[D]
[A]
[D]
[C]
B178D568.WMF
B178D569.WMF
The paper is fed out to the finisher from the upper exit [A].
The junction gate [B] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of the
inverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [C] is activated, the machine waits
until the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 1 [D]. Then the paper is switched
back and junction mylar 1 directs the paper out to the finisher.
With Optional LCT or Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit
[A]
[D]
[D]
[E]
[C]
B178D570.WMF
B178D571.WMF
The paper is fed out to the finisher from the lower exit [A].
The junction gate [B] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of the
inverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [C] is activated, the machine waits
until the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 2 [D], but before it passes junction
mylar 3 [E]. Then the paper is switched back and junction mylar 2 directs the paper
out to the finisher.
SM
6-79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DUPLEX UNIT
6.10.7 DUPLEX FEED UNIT

Drive
[A]
B178D572.WMF
The duplex feed motor [A] drives all paper transport rollers.
Feed-in and feed-out
[A]
B178D573.WMF
The duplex feed unit feeds the paper from the duplex inverter unit to the relay roller
[A].
B202/B178/B180
6-80
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
6.11 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6.11.1 OVERVIEW
12
1
2
11
3
10
4
9
8
5
7
6
B178D574.WMF
7. Back-up roller
8. Cleaning blade
9. Toner collection auger
10. Cleaning brush
11. Cleaning unit
12. ID sensor
Transfer unit drive motor

Transfer belt
Transfer belt mark sensor
Rotation encoder
Paper attraction roller
Transfer roller
Paper is fed to the transfer belt before image transfer begins. The paper attraction
roller charges the paper to ensure that the paper is attracted to the belt.
The magenta, cyan, yellow, and black color images transfer to the paper while the
transfer belt feeds the paper past the drums towards the fusing unit. A positive
charge is applied to the paper under the transfer belt, opposite each drum, to
transfer the toner from the drums onto the paper. The back-up roller makes sure
that the contact area between the drum and belt is sufficient.
The cleaning unit in the transfer unit cleans the belt surface with the cleaning blade
and brush. The waste toner collected from the belt is transported to the waste toner
bottle.
There are three ID sensors (front, center, and rear). Only the center ID sensor
detects the image density of the patterns generated on the transfer belt for process
control. The other function of the ID sensors is for automatic line position
adjustment. All ID sensors are used for this.
SM
6-81
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.11.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE

Drive Motor
[B]
[A]
B178D575.WMF
The transfer unit drive motor [A] drives the transfer belt [B] and the cleaning unit via
the timing belt and gears. The speed of transfer belt drive depends on the process
line speed.
B202/B178/B180
6-82
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Transfer belt speed control

This machine uses two devices (Rotation encoder and transfer belt mark sensor) to
control the transfer belt speed.
Rotation Encoder
[A]
[C]
[B]
B178D576.WMF
An encoder [C] is on one of the rollers. This encoder checks the rotation speed of
the transfer belt. The controller analyzes the signals from the encoder. Then it
adjusts the rotation speed of the transfer belt.
Detailed
Descriptions
The encoder contains a disk that has 300 notches on its surface [B]. These
notches are read by the sensor [A]. The controller counts the number of notches
that the sensor has read in the unit of time. If the sensor has read an unusually
large number of notches or an unusually small number of notches, the controller
ignores such unusual signals. Therefore, incorrect reading does not affect the
rotation speed.
Ignored
Number of notches
(read by the sensor)
Filter H
Filter L
Ignored
Time
B178D577.WMF
Filter H: The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt is
at its highest possible value.
Filter L: The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt is
at its lowest possible value.
SM
6-83
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Transfer belt mark sensor
[A]
B178D575A.WMF
There is the transfer belt mark sensor [A].

Transfer belt mark sensor monitors the belt speed. The machine uses this
information to adjust the speed of the belt to account for the belt regularity.
This control method is called "Dancing Control" in the SP5-995. You must execute
SP5-995-025 and -027 after replacing the transfer belt unit or transfer belt.
B202/B178/B180
6-84
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.11.3 TRANSFER CURRENT
[A]
[F]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
B178D578.WMF
These currents are automatically corrected for paper size, temperature (measured
by the thermistor on the right side of the laser optics housing unit), and humidity
(measured by the humidity sensor).
The following adjustments are shown below:
You can adjust the transfer roller current for each printing mode (color or B/W,
resolution, paper type) with SP2-301-1 to -99. The by-pass tray settings are used
when the duplex unit has not been installed and the user is making duplex prints
manually from the by-pass tray. There is a correction for narrow-width paper with
SP2-309-5 to -11.
You can adjust the current for paper attraction with SP2-801-1 to -37.
The back-up roller [E] makes a wider contact area between the drum [B] and the
belt. The transfer exit roller [F] is charged to 2 kV. The roller prevents the toner
from being scattered while the paper is leaving the transfer unit.
The other rollers are grounded to neutralize the belt surface.
SM
6-85
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
The transfer roller [D] applies a current to transfer the toner to the paper on the
transfer belt [A]. The high voltage supply board supplies current to the transfer
roller and the paper attraction roller [C].
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.11.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING
[F]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
B178D579.WMF
The transfer belt-cleaning unit removes toner (during printing) and the ID sensor
patterns (during process control or automatic line position adjustment) on the belt.
Belt cleaning is completed while the transfer belt makes one rotation. The transfer
unit drive motor [A] drives the unit.
The cleaning brush [B] always contacts the transfer belt [C], and removes waste
toner from the belt. The cleaning blade [D] in the cleaning unit scrapes the toner off
the transfer belt. Then the toner collection auger [E] transports the toner towards
the waste toner collection duct.
The scraper [F] does not let the waste toner stick to the cleaning brush.
B202/B178/B180
6-86
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6.11.5 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B178D580.WMF
Mechanism
The transfer belt contact and release mechanism increases the lifetime of the
transfer belt and drums.
In the standby mode, the transfer belt contacts only the black drum. The transfer
belt moves away from the black drum when you turn the release lever
counterclockwise.
When the machine prints a color page, the machine waits until the previous page
has gone through the transfer unit. Then the transfer belt contact motor [C] turns on
and a cam [D] moves the lower end [E] of the transfer belt upward, so that it
contacts the other three drums.
The machine does not release the transfer belt from the color drums during the job,
even if a monochrome page comes again. This is because the total printing speed
reduces if the transfer belt changes position.
The belt moves away from the color drums if the job is interrupted by any error
except a power failure.
NOTE: If a power failure occurs when the transfer belt is in contact with the drum,
the belt stays in this position. To release the belt, swing out the controller
box. Then turn the drive gear [B] manually.
SM
6-87
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
The drum for black always contacts the belt. However, the transfer belt moves
away from the other drums during monochrome printing.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Transfer Belt Sensor

The transfer belt sensor [A] operates as a detection sensor during machine
initialization, and also as a position sensor during machine operations.
Before machine initialization, the lower end of the transfer belt is in the home
position. When initialization starts, the transfer belt contact motor lifts the lower end
until the actuator has passed the sensor. Then it lowers it to its home position. This
action actuates the sensor in a certain pattern.
The table lists the sensor actuation patterns.
Machine status
Sensor pattern
Initialization
On Off On Off On
Standby (Default)
On
Operation
B/W printing
On
Color Printing
Off
On: The actuator is out of the sensor.
Off: The actuator is interrupting the sensor.
Copier ACS
The Auto Color Select manages the transfer belt and PCUs. To print color pages,
the ACS lifts the transfer belt and operates the four PCUs. To print black and white
pages, the ACS manages the transfer belt and the PCUs as follows:
1. The ACS keeps the transfer belt in the lower position and operates the black
PCU (does not operate the other PCUs) if the first print of a job is a black and
white page.
2. The ACS lifts the transfer belt to the upper position and operates the four PCUs
if a color page occurs in the job.
3. The ACS keeps the transfer belt in
the upper position and keeps
Color
Color
Color
K
K
K
K
operating the four PCUs after the first
color page. Note that all PCUs are in
K PCU
Four PCUs
operation even when black and white
pages are processed.
B178D614.WMF
The ACS works when the user pushes
the Auto Color Select key from the operation panel. The table lists which PCUs are
in operation.
Auto Color Select
B/W Only
Black PCU
Original
Color Only
Four PCUs
Full Color
Black and White
Four PCUs
Black PCU
Four PCUs
Black PCU
Key
B202/B178/B180
6-88
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B/W and Color

Black PCU or four
PCUs
Four PCUs
Black PCU
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Printer ACS
The user can validate or invalidate the ACS from the following menu: > Printer
Features > System > B&W Page Detect. The ACS works when B&W Detect is on.
The ACS does not work when B&W detect is off. The tables list which PCUs are in
operation.
B&W Page Detect: On
Printer Driver
Black and White
Color
B/W Only
Black PCU
Black PCU
Print
Color Only
Black PCU
Four PCUs
B/W and Color

Black PCU
Black PCU or four
PCUs
B&W Page Detect: Off

Printer Driver
Print
Color Only
Black PCU
Four PCUs
B/W and Color

Black PCU
Four PCUs
Detailed
Descriptions
Black and White

Color
B/W Only
Black PCU
Four PCUs
SM
6-89
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
6.12 FUSING
6.12.1 OVERVIEW
1
2
13
12
4
5
6
11
7
10
9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Heating roller thermistor

Heating roller thermostat
Heating roller
Heating roller fusing lamp
Fusing belt
Pressure roller thermo fuse
Pressure roller thermistor
B178D003.WMF
8. Pressure roller fusing lamp

9. Oil supply roller
10. Cleaning roller
11. Pressure roller
12. Hot roller
13. Tension roller
A belt fusing system is used. This has a faster warm-up time than a conventional
hot and pressure roller system.
The heating roller is made of aluminum to increase the temperature of the fusing
belt quickly.
The hot roller is made of sponge, which flattens slightly, also increasing the
fusing nip. This roller does not contain a fusing lamp.
Each of the heating and pressure rollers has a fusing lamp.
NA: 770W for the heating roller. 350W for the pressure roller
EU: 700W for the heating roller. 325W for the pressure roller
The heating roller thermistor and pressure roller thermistor control the
temperature of these lamps.
Temperature is normally controlled by turning the fusing lamps on and off. SP1104-1 is used to change between on/off control and phase control
The oil supply roller supplies a small amount of oil to the pressure roller through
the cleaning roller. Oil does not need to be supplied to the oil supply roller
because it contains oil and the amount of oil supplied to the pressure roller is
small.
B202/B178/B180
6-90
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
6.12.2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[G]
[F]
B178D002.WMF
[E]
Development drive motor-K drives the pressure roller [E] and the hot roller [D]
through the gear train. The heating roller [C] is driven by the pressure with the
fusing belt [B]. The cleaning roller [G] and oil supply roller [F] are driven by the
friction with the pressure roller.
Fusing Clutch
The fusing clutch [A] turns off and cuts the drive power when the fusing unit does
not operate. This mechanism prevents wear on the belt and rollers.
NOTE: The fusing clutch turns off when images and patterns are created on the
transfer belt during process control and line position adjustment.
SM
6-91
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
Belt and Rollers
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
6.12.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Fusing Temperatures
When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays
on until the thermistor detects the standby temperature. Then the CPU raises the
temperature to the printing temperature.
The fusing temperature for each mode is as follows.
Temperature of
Heating Roller
Temperature of
Pressure Roller
Energy saver
level 1
100C
130C
Standby mode
C2a/k: 165C
C2b: 170C
Mode
Color
(simplex/duplex)
Black and white
(simplex/duplex)
Middle thick color
(simplex/duplex)
Middle thick black
and white
(simplex/duplex)
OHP
Thick
Resolution
(dpi)
1,200 x 1,200
1,800 x 600
600 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
1,800 x 600
600 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
1,800 x 600
600 x 600
1,200 x 1,200
1,800 x 600
600 x 600
All
All
135C
C2a/k: 140C
C2b: 160C
C2a/k: 140C
C2b: 160C
C2a/k: 160C
C2b: 175C
140C
C2a/k: 155C
C2b: 175C
C2a/k: 155C
C2b: 175C
C2a/k: 175C
C2b: 180C
145C
155C
120C
Note
If SP1-104025 is set to
"B/W:
H Normal".
130C
C2a/k: 130C
C2b: 145C
C2a/k: 130C
C2b: 145C
C2a/k: 145C
C2b: 150C
135C
C2a/k: 130C
C2b: 150C
C2a/k: 140C
C2b: 150C
150C
130C
135C
The heating and pressure roller temperatures for fusing are stored in SP1-105-4 to
-70.
When the machine is switched on, the fusing lamp temperatures increase to those
specified by SP1-104-25.
The print ready temperature is slightly less than the fusing temperature. The
difference is specified by SP1-105-1 and -2.
B202/B178/B180
6-92
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
Temperature Corrections
The following SP modes are available to prevent excessive glossiness caused by
fusing temperature overshoot:
1-913: Fusing temperature is reduced after this number of pages during the
job.
1-914: This shows how much the temperature is reduced
If a job using OHP or thick paper starts while the fusing unit is still warm, the fusing
temperature could be higher than the target for this type of paper. This can cause
marks to show on the output. The following SP modes prevents this problem:
1-996-4, 5: These SPs specify a limit, above which printing will not start.
Overheat Protection
The following components are used if the thermistor overheat protection system
fails.
Two thermostats for the heating roller and two thermofuses for the pressure roller
in series with the common ground line of the fusing lamp.
If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 234C, it opens
and cuts power from the fusing lamp.
If the other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 235C, it also
opens and cuts power from the fusing lamp.
If either of the two thermofuses temperature becomes higher than 154C, the
thermofuse opens and cuts power from the fusing lamp.
NOTE: These thermofuses make a series circuit.
In either case, the machine stops operation.
SM
6-93
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp at the following times:
The heating roller temperature becomes higher than 250C for two seconds
or more
The pressure roller temperature becomes higher than 210C for five seconds
or more.
SC543 for the heating roller or SC553 for the pressure roller are displayed for
these conditions.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
6.12.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES

Overview
Operation Sw. Off

-orAuto Off Timer
(1 mni. to 240 min. / Default: 60 min.)
Stand-by Mode
Energy Saver Key ON

-orPanel Off Timer (10 s to 999 s / Default: 10 s)
Key Operation
Operation Sw. Off

-orAuto Off Timer
Panel-Off Mode (1&2)
Return Time Less Than 3s Panel-Off Level 1

Return Time Less Than 10s Panel-Off Level 2
Energy Saver Timer

(1min. to 240 min. / Default: 15 min.)
Key Operation
Operation Sw. Off
-orAuto Off Timer
Low Power Mode
Return Time Less Than 30 s
Auto Off Mode

Off Mode
FAX: RX, etc.
Printer Data in
Operation Sw. On
Platen Cover Open / Close
Original Set ADF
Return Time Less Than 101 s
After Printing
Off Stand-by Mode
B178D583.WMF
When the machine is not being used, the energy saver function reduces power
consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.
This machine has the following two types of energy saver modes:
1) Panel-off mode
2) Auto Off mode
These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes:
Panel off timer: User Tools System Settings Timer Setting Panel Off
Timer
Auto off timer: User Tools System Settings Timer Setting Auto Off
Timer
B202/B178/B180
6-94
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
Panel Off Mode

Entering the panel off mode
The machine enters the panel off mode when one of the following is done:
The panel off timer runs out.
The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Key is held down for one second.
If the value specified in the panel off timer is larger than the value specified in the
energy saver timer, the machine goes into the low power mode. At this time, it does
not go into the panel off mode. A similar thing happens when the value in the panel
off timer is larger than that in the auto off timer. To make the panel off mode
effective, specify a value smaller than the values in the energy saver timer and
auto off timer.
What happens in panel off mode

When the machine is in the panel off mode, each of the fusing lamps are kept at
the temperatures indicated in the table at the bottom of the page. The operation
panel indicators are turned off except for the Energy Saver LED and the Power
LED.
If the controller receives an image print out command from an application program
(e.g. to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the temperature of each
fusing lamp rises to print the data.
The machine returns to stand-by mode if one of the following is done:

The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed
Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed
An original is placed in the ADF
The ADF is lifted
A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table
The return time from the panel off mode is less than 30 seconds.
Mode
Panel off
SM
Operation
Switch
Energy
Saver LED
On
On
Fusing Temperature
+24V
System +5V
Heating roller: 100oC

Pressure roller: 130oC
On
On
6-95
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
Return to stand-by mode
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FUSING
Auto Off Mode

There are two Auto Off modes: Off Stand-by mode and Off mode. The difference
between Off Stand-by mode and Off mode is the machines condition when it
enters the Auto Off mode.
Entering off stand-by and off modes

The machine enters the Off Stand-by mode or Off Mode when one of the following
is done.
The auto off timer runs out.
The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off.
If one or more of the following conditions exists, the machine enters Off Stand-by
mode. If none of these conditions exist, the machine enters the Off Mode.
Error or SC condition
Image data is stored in the memory
During memory TX or polling RX
The handset is off hook
An original is in the ARDF
The ARDF is open
Off Stand-by mode

The system +5V is still supplied to all components. When the machine detects a
ringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job, the +24V supply is
activated. At this time, the machine automatically prints the incoming message or
executes the print job.
Off Mode
The system +5V supply also turns off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy saver
mode) is still activated. When the machine detects a ringing signal, off-hook signal,
or receives a print job, the machine returns to the Off Stand-by mode and the
system +5V and +24V supplies are activated.
Returning to stand-by mode

The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The
return time is less than 99 seconds.
Mode
Operation
Switch
Energy
Saver LED
Fusing Lamp
+24V
System +5V
Off
Stand-by
Off
Off
Off
(On when printing)
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
B202/B178/B180
6-96
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Note
+5VE is
supplied
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER EXIT
6.13 PAPER EXIT

6.13.1 OVERVIEW
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
B178D584.WMF
To standard paper tray

To external paper tray
Junction gate
Junction gate solenoid
After fusing, the junction gate feeds paper to the standard paper tray or the
external paper tray. The junction gate solenoid [D] controls the junction gate as
follows:
To the standard paper tray: The junction gate solenoid is off (default)
To the external paper tray: The junction gate solenoid is on.
Development drive motor-K drives the exit rollers.
SM
6-97
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
B178D585.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER EXIT
6.13.2 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION

[A]
B178D586.WMF
When the paper overflow sensor [A] is activated, the machine detects that the
paper stack height has exceeded a certain limit. At this time, printing stops.
B202/B178/B180
6-98
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
6.14 PRINTER FUNCTIONS

6.14.1 OVERVIEW
Option
PS3/
Printer/
Scanner
Data
Overwrite
Security Unit
SD Card
RAM
(512 MB)
RAM
(512 MB)
2.5" HDD
2.5" HDD
SD Slot 1
SD Slot 2
SD Slot 3
SDRAM
DIMM
SDRAM
DIMM
IDE
IDE
Local BUS
System
Flash ROM
(16 MB)
ASIC
NVRAM
(128 kB)
CPU
PCI BUS
CONTROLLER
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
PCI
BCU
USB\NIB
File Format
Converter
IEEE1394/
Wireless LAN/
Bluetooth/
IEEE1284
FCU
G3
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option: Optional component for all models
The controller is based on the GW (Grand Work) architecture.

CPU: RM7065C-600 MHz
ASIC:
This is one of the GW-architecture ASICs. It uses a 133 MHz bus to interface with
the CPU and memory. ASIC controls the interface, memory, local bus, interruption
processing, PCI bus, video data, HDD, network, operation panel, IEEE1284, and
image processing.
Flash ROM: The 16-MB flash ROM is for the system program.
SDRAM DIMM (2 slots):
The controller has 1024-MB resident SDRAM. (512 MB x 2).
NVRAM:
The 128-KB NVRAM stores the engine/controller settings and logs.
SM
6-99
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
B178D999.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Interface Option:
You can install one of the four network components (IEEE1284, IEEE1394,
Wireless LAN, Bluetooth).
HDD:
Two 40-GB HDDs are standard components. Each hard disk is partitioned as
shown below. You cannot change the partition sizes.
B202/B178/B180
6-100
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
6.14.2 HARD DISK

Overview
The capacity of the hard disk is 80 GB. The controller partitions it into several
drives and allocates them for different functions. You can initialize these partitions
as necessary ( SP5-832). The table lists the contents of the hard disk.
Contents
Images
Thumbnails
Job Logs
Printer fonts
User information
Mail RX data
Mail TX data
Designer data
Logs
Ricoh interfaces
Volatile/
Nonvolatile
Nonvolatile
Volatile
Nonvolatile
Nonvolatile
Nonvolatile
Nonvolatile
Nonvolatile
Nonvolatile
Nonvolatile
Volatile
Nonvolatile
Nonvolatile
Capacity (MB)
37,500
25,000
2,400
10
500
300
200
1,000
1,256
1,000
150
500
Initialization
(SP5-832)
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
Volatile: The data is lost when you turn the main switch off.
Nonvolatile: The data is not lost when you turn the main switch off.
Data Transfer
The controller has two identical hard disk drives.

One HDD interface connects these drives with the
memory. There is a 32-bit data bus between the
memory and the HDD interface. There is also a
16-bit data bus between the HDD interface and
each hard disk drive (two 16-bit data busses in
total).
Memory
HDD Interface
When receiving 32-bit data from the memory, the

HDD interface divides them into two 16-bit data
and transfers them to each hard disk drive. Hard
disk drive 1 and 2 store data in an address. These
two addresses correspond with each other. When
HDD 1
receiving two 16-bit data from two corresponding
addresses of the hard disk drives, the HDD
interface combines them and transfers 32-bit data to the memory.
Detailed
Descriptions
The machine executes the direct memory access

(DMA) two times faster than the conventional DMA.
HDD 2
B178D588.WMF
If an incorrect sector is found in an address of one hard disk drive, the sector in the
corresponding address of the other hard disk drive is also treated as an incorrect
sector.
SM
6-101
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
6.14.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING

RPCS Driver
Host
ICM Engine/
ICMprofile
Profile
ICM
RGB
RPCS Driver
Matching
RCM profile
RGB
Corrected
RGB
Printer
Engine
Controller
CMYK
Gray
Correction
OR
UCR/BG
Correction
CMYK
Toner Limitation
CMYK
8 bits
Dithering & ROP
CMYK
1 bit or 2 bits
B178D589.WMF
PCL5e/PCL6c Driver
Host
Printer
Engine
Controller
(Matching by Host)
RGB
RGB 8 bits
PCL Driver
ICM Engine/
ICM profile
RGB
Decode
&
Scale
8 bits
RGB
8 bits
Color
Matching
CMY
8 bits
BG/UCR,
CMY
8 bits
Negative Correction
Correction
Toner Limitation
CMY
1 bit
Dithering
&
ROP
CMYK
1 bit
B178D590.WMF
B202/B178/B180
6-102
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
PS3 Driver
Host
ICM Engine/
ICMprofile
Profile
ICM
ColorSvn
CMYK
UCR/BG
RGB
RPCS Driver
Printer
Engine
Controller
RGB
Corrected RGB
ColorSync profile
CIE XYZ
PS3 Matching
Correction
CMYK
Toner Limitation
CMYK
8 bits
Dithering & ROP
CMYK
1 bit or 2 bits
B178D591.WMF
CMS (Color Management System)

CMS optimizes the color print quality using a color profile that is based on the
characteristics of the printer. With RPCS, the color profile is applied by the driver.
With PS3 and PCL5e, the color profile is applied in the matching/CRD module on
the controller except when using CMM/ICC/ICM profiles.
Gray Correction
Gray correction processes gray with the K or CMYK toner depending on the driver
settings.
BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)

The RGB data is converted to CMYK data with BG/UCR. During CMYK conversion,
some CMY data is replaced with K data by the BG/UCR algorithm.
Gamma Correction
The printer gamma can be adjusted with controller SP mode (Gamma Adj.). For
CMYK, there are15 points between 0 and 100%. The corrected gamma data is
stored in NVRAM.
SM
6-103
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
CMS is not used when the color profile setting in the printer driver is set to Off.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Toner Limitation
Toner limitation prevents toner from being scattered around text or printed lines.
Maximum values have been prepared independently for text and photo. They can
be adjusted with controller SP mode (Toner Limit).
Default: 190% for text, 260% for photo
Adjustable range: 100% to 400%
Dither Processing and ROP/RIP

Dither patterns have been prepared for photo and text independently. Dithering
converts 8-bit data to 1-bit or 2-bit data. However, these dither patterns create the
illusion of 256 gradations for high quality prints. The optimum dither pattern is
selected depending on the selected resolution.
RIP: Raster Image Processing
ROP: Raster Operation
B202/B178/B180
6-104
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
6.14.4 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS

Sample Print
This feature was formerly known as Proof Print. This function gives users a
chance to check the print results before starting a multiple-set print run.
The size of the hard disk partition for the sample print feature is 6.3 GB. This
partition is also used by the collation and locked print features.
The partition can hold up to 30 files, including files stored using locked print.
The partition can hold a log containing up to 20 errors, excluding jobs stored
using locked print.
The maximum number of pages is 1,100, including jobs using locked print
and collation.
Locked Print
Detailed
Descriptions
Using this feature, the print job is stored in the machine but will not be printed until
the user inputs an ID at the machines operation panel. This ID must match the ID
that has been input with the printer driver.
Stored data is automatically deleted after it is printed.
Stored data can be manually deleted at the operation panel.
The partition can hold up to 30 files, including files stored using sample print.
The partition can hold a log containing up to 20 errors, excluding logs stored
using locked print.
The maximum number of pages is 1,100, including jobs using sample print
and collation.
Locked print uses the same hard disk partition (6.3 GB) as sample print and
collation.
SM
6-105
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
6.14.5 JOB SPOOLING

Print data can be spooled (stored) in the machines HDD, and the machine starts to
print when data transfer is complete. Since the machine stores all data first before
printing, the host computer is freed up more quickly.
NOTE: 1) The supported print protocols are IPP and LPR.
2) The default setting for this feature is off. The user must switch it on
using UP mode to enable this feature.
The size of the HDD partition for job spooling is 1 GB.
The partition can hold up to 150 jobs.
Related SP Modes
Job spooling can be turned on and off using the SP mode (SP5-828-069) for each
protocol.
The machine does not spool jobs when job spooling is switched off with the SP
mode, even when the customer switches it on with the user mode.
B202/B178/B180
6-106
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Paper Source Selection

Tray Priority (Auto Tray Select)
The Tray Priority setting
determines the start of the tray
search when the user selects Auto
Tray Select with the driver. The
machine searches paper trays for
the specified paper size and type.
When no tray contains paper that
matches the paper size and type
specified by the driver, the controller
stops printing until the user loads the
correct paper.
Priority Tray
Start of
Tray Search
Tray 1
Tray 2
LCT (Optional)
The Tray Priority setting can be

specified in the following menu:
> System Settings > Tray Paper
Settings > Paper Tray Priority:
Printer.
NOTE: The by-pass feed table is not part of the tray search.
Tray 3 (Optional)
Tray 4 (Optional)
B178D592.WMF
Tray Locking
The Tray Locking setting can be specified in the following menu: > System
Settings > Tray Paper Settings > Paper Type: Tray # > Apply Auto Paper Select
(where the # indicates the tray number).
NOTE: The by-pass feed table cannot be unlocked (Tray Locking is always
enabled).
Manual Tray Select

If the selected tray does not have the paper size and type specified by the driver,
the controller stops printing until the user loads the correct paper.
SM
6-107
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
If Tray Locking is enabled for a tray, the controller skips the locked tray in the
tray search process.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Auto Continue
Overview
When this function is enabled, the machine waits for a specified period (0, 1, 5, 10,
15 minutes) for the correct paper size and type to be set in the tray. If the timer
runs out, the machine starts printing, even if there is no paper tray which matches
the paper size and paper type specified by the driver.
The machine searches for a paper tray in the following way:
The interval can be set with the following menu: > Printer Features > System
> Auto Continue.
NOTE: The default setting for this feature is Off.
Auto Tray Select

When there is no paper tray that
matches the paper size and type
specified by the driver, the machine
searches for any tray that has paper,
and prints from the first tray it finds.
The start of the tray search is the
tray selected as the priority tray.
Priority Tray
Start of
Tray Search
Tray 1
Tray 2
LCT (Optional)
Tray 3 (Optional)
Tray 4 (Optional)
B178D593.WMF
Manual Tray Select

The machine prints from the selected tray even if the paper size and type do not
match the setting specified from the driver.
If Auto Continue is disabled, the machine waits until the user loads the correct
paper in the tray.
B202/B178/B180
6-108
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Paper Output Tray

You can select output trays as follows: User Tools > System Settings > Tray Paper
Settings. If a print job does not specify an output tray or if the driver specifies the
default tray, the output tray selected with this user tool will be used.
Output Tray Selected

If the machine cannot print to the selected output tray, it prints to the default
paper output tray.
If paper overflow is detected at the selected output tray, the controller suspends
printing.
Stapling
The optional two-tray finisher and booklet finisher can staple papers. Both finishers
support the following stapling positions:
[A]
[A]: One staple (vertical) is at the rear right
corner.
[B]: Two staples (vertical) are at the right
[B]
Paper exit
middle edge.
[C]: One staple (vertical) is at the front right
[C]
corner.
The two-tray finisher supports the following
stapling position (the booklet finisher does
not):
[D]: One staple (slant) is at the front right
corner.
[D]
The booklet finisher supports the following

stapling position (the two-tray finisher does
not):
[E]: Two staples (vertical) are at the center.
B178D594.WMF
The table lists the number of papers that the finishers can staple.
Position
Two-tray finisher
Booklet finisher
A4, B5, LT
50 sheets
50 sheets
[A][B][C][D]
[A][B][C]
[E]
Paper size
A3, Ledger, Legal
30 sheets
25 sheets
10 sheets
NOTE: For more paper sizes, see the specifications.
SM
6-109
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Detailed
Descriptions
[E]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Punching
To enable a finisher to punch out holes, you must install the optional punch unit to
it. Each punch unit needs the dedicated punch unit. Note that these punch units
are not interchangeable with each other. To make two holes on a sheet of paper,
you must install the two-hole type; to make three, the three-hole type; and to make
four, the four-hole type. The table shows which type you can install to your finisher.
Finisher model
Two holes
Three holes
Four holes
North America
N/A
Europe (excluding
North Europe)
N/A
North Europe
N/A
N/A
: Available
N/A: Not available
B202/B178/B180
6-110
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)
6.15 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)

In previous models (such as A-C2, R-C2), DeskTopBinder V2 could retrieve copy
and print jobs from the document server and convert them to TIFF. However, this
software-based conversion was slow for many users.
In this machine, this conversion is hardware-based, using the optional File Format
Converter. Without the File Format Converter, copy and print jobs cannot be
downloaded to a PC (or e-Cabinet) from the document server.
Two common target formats are provided for conversion to files that can be
selected by the SP modes: These are JPEG and TIFF.
Detailed
Descriptions
In scanner mode, users can select file format from TIFF, JPEG, or PDF. The time
to create TIFF and JPEG files is shortened with the File Format Converter,
especially for high scanning resolution and large image size. When the customer
selects PDF, the machine creates a TIFF or JPEG file from the scanned image
first. Then it converts it to PDF. Therefore, the total time to create a PDF is also
shortened with the File Format Converter.
SM
6-111
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)
6.16 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)

6.16.1 AUTO ERASE MEMORY
A document scanned in the copier or scanner mode, or data sent from a printer
driver for printing, is stored temporarily on the hard disk of the machine. The
document stays in the hard disk as temporary data even after the copy or print job
is completed. Auto Erase Memory erases the temporary data on the hard disk by
writing over it.
Types of Data Overwritten and Not Overwritten

The following table shows the types of data that can or cannot be overwritten by
Auto Erase Memory.
Data overwritten by
Auto Erase Memory
Data not overwritten by

Auto Erase Memory
Copier
Printer
Copy jobs
1) Print jobs
2) Sample Print/Locked Print jobs(*1)
3) Spool Printing jobs
Scanner(*2)
1) Scanned files sent by e-mail
2) Files sent by Scan to Folder
3) Documents sent or retrieved by using Web
Image Monitor, Desk Top Binder, or Scan
Router
Fax
PC fax print jobs, Internet fax transmission jobs
Document
Temporary data that still remains in the Document
Server
Server even after user erases the data in the
Document Server.
1) Documents stored by the user in the Document Server using the
Copier, Printer or Scanner functions
2) Information registered in the Address Book (*3)
3) Counters stored under each user code
4) Network setting
NOTE: *1: A Sample Print or Locked Print job can only be overwritten after it has
been executed.
*2: Temporary data via TWAIN scanner function are not originally stored in
HDD. You can use TWAIN scanner functions together with the DOS
unit.
*3: Data stored in the Address Book can be encrypted for security.
Overwrite timing
Overwriting starts automatically once a copy, print or scanner job is completed.
Copier, printer and scanner functions take priority over the Data Overwrite function.
If a copier, printer or scanner job comes while a previous job is being overwritten,
the overwrite process is automatically interrupted until the next job is completed.
B202/B178/B180
6-112
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 BASIC
Configuration:
Desktop
Print Process:
Dry electrostatic transfer system
Number of scans:
Resolution:
Scan: 600 dpi

Print: 600 dpi
Gradation:
Scan: 8 bits/pixel
Original type:
Sheets, book, objects
Maximum original
size:
A3/11" x 17"
Original reference
position:
Left rear corner
Copy speed:
Normal (ADF 1 to 1, LT/ A4 LEF)

C2k:
24 cpm (color) or 28 cpm (black & white)
C2a:
C2b:
OHP/Thick
C2k:
17 cpm (color/black & white)
C2a:
C2b:
First copy (normal

mode):
C2a/k:
Color: 10 seconds or less

Black & white: 8 seconds or less
C2b:
Color: 8 seconds or less

Black & white: 6 seconds or less
Warm-up time:
99 seconds or less (23C, 50%)
Print Paper Capacity:

(80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Standard tray: 500 sheets x 2

By-pass tray: 100 sheets
Optional paper feed tray: 500 sheets x 1, 500 sheets x 2, Optional
LCT: 2000 sheets
Print Paper Size:
(Refer to Supported Paper Sizes.)

Tray 1
Tray 2
By-pass
Optional Tray
LCT
Printing Paper
Weight:
SM
Minimum
Maximum
A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)
A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"
A3/11" x 17"
90 x 148 mm
305 x 458 mm/12" x 18"
A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"
A3/11" x 17"
A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Standard tray:
Optional paper tray:
7-1
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Specifications
Print: 2 bits/pixel
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb.)
Weight:
By-pass tray:
Output Paper
Capacity:
Standard exit tray: 500 sheets (face down)

External exit tray: 100 sheets (face up)
Continuous copy:
Up to 999 sheets
Zoom:
Arbitrary: From 25 to 400% (1% step)

Fixed:
North America
25%
50%
65%
73%
78%
85%
93%
100%
121%
129%
155%
200%
400%
Europe
25%
50%
65%
71%
75%
82%
93%
100%
115%
122%
141%
200%
400%
Memory:
Standard: 1024MB
Power Source:
120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12A (for North America)

220 V 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 8A (for Europe)
Power Consumption:
120V
1440 W or less
18 W or less
Maximum
Energy Saver
B202/B178/B180
7-2
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
230V
1680 W or less
20 W or less
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Noise Emission:
(Sound Power Level)
Complete
system(*1)
Standby
40db(A) or Less
40db(A) or Less
J-C2k
Operating
65db(A) or Less
71db(A) or Less
Standby
40db(A) or Less
40db(A) or Less
J-C2a
Operating
65db(A) or Less
71db(A) or Less
Standby
40db(A) or Less
40db(A) or Less
J-C2b
Operating
67db(A) or Less
73db(A) or Less
(*1) The complete system consists of mainframe, ARDF, finisher, and LCT.
Model
State
Mainframe
NOTE: The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricoh

standard methodology.
Dimensions (W x D x H):
Copier: 670 x 698 x 859 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 33.8")
Copier + 1-Tray PFU: 670x 698 x 1,020 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 40.2")
Copier + 2-Tray PFU or LCT: 670 x 698 x 1,118 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 44.0")
Less than 120 kg (265 lb.) [excluding toner]
Specifications
Weight:
SM
7-3
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
1.2 PRINTER
Printer Languages:
PCL5e/ PCL6c
Adobe PostScript 3 (optional)
RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)
Resolution and
Gradation:
PCL5e/ PCL6c:
600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 300 x 300 dpi (1 bit/pixel)
Adobe PostScript 3:
1,200 x 1,200 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel),
600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel)
RPCS:
1,200 x 1,200 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel),
600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel)
NOTE: 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel) = 600 x 600 dpi (2 bits/pixel)
Printing speed:
Monochrome
C2a
Color
Monochrome
C2b
Color
Monochrome
C2k
Color
Resolution
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
1,800 x 600 dpi
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
Plain paper
35 ppm
35 ppm
28 ppm
28 ppm
28 ppm
17 ppm
45 ppm
45 ppm
35 ppm
35 ppm
35 ppm
17 ppm
28 ppm
28 ppm
24 ppm
24 ppm
24 ppm
17 ppm
Thick/OHP
17 ppm
17 ppm
17 ppm
17 ppm
17 ppm
17 ppm
17 ppm
17 ppm
17 ppm
17 ppm
17 ppm
17 ppm
17 ppm
17 ppm
17 ppm
17 ppm
17 ppm
17 ppm
Resident Fonts:
PCL5e/ PCL6c:
35 Intelli fonts
10 TrueType fonts
Adobe PostScript 3:
136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)
Host Interfaces:
USB 2.0 ............................................................... Standard

Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T)...................... Standard
IEEE1284 parallel x 1 .......................................... Optional
IEEE1394............................................................. Optional
IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN)............................... Optional
Bluetooth (Wireless)............................................. Optional
B202/B178/B180
7-4
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Network Protocols:
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching),

SMB (NetBEUI, NetBIOS over TCP/IP)
First Print Speed:
Color: 9 seconds or less (from tray 1)

Monochrome: 7 seconds or less (from tray 1)
1.3 SCANNER
Standard Scanner
Resolution:
Main scan/Sub scan

600 dpi
Available scanning
Resolution Range:
Twain Mode:
100 ~ 1200 dpi
Delivery Mode:
100/200/300/400/600 dpi
Grayscales:
1 bit or 8 bits/pixel each for RGB
Scanning
Throughput
(ARDF mode):
Scan to E-mail / Folder:

BW: 50 ppm (A4LEF / BW Text (Print) / 200dpi /
Compression: On (MH))
FC: 35 ppm (A4LEF / FC Text / Photo / 200dpi /
Compression: Standard)
Network TWAIN Scan:
BW: 36 ppm (A4LEF / Quality: Colors / Binary / 200dpi /
Compression: Data compression (MMR))
FC: 20 ppm (A4LEF / Quality: Colors / 16770K colors
/ 200dpi / Compression: Standard quality)
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T for TCP/IP), IEEE 1394,
Wireless LAN
Compression
Method:
B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)

Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG
Specifications
Interface:
SM
7-5
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
2. SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES

2.1 PAPER FEED
North America
LCT
Tray
2/3/4
LCT
Bypass
Tray
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y
Y
Y#
Y#
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y#/Y*
Y
N
Y
Y#/Y*
Y
Y#/Y*
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y#
Y
Y
Y#
Y
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
N
N
Y*
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
8" x 13"
8.5" x 13"
N
N
Y#
Y#
N
N
Y#
Y#
N
N
Y#
Y#
N
N
Y
Y#
8.25" x 13"
267 x 390 mm
195 x 267 mm
267 x 195 mm
Minimum:
90 x 148 mm
Maximum:
305 x 458 mm
4.125" x 9.5"
N
N
N
N
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
N
N
N
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
N
N
N
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
N
N
N
N
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
Y#
3.875" x 7.5"
Y#
114 x 162 mm
162 x 229 mm
110 x 220 mm
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y#
Y#
Y#
Size (W x L)
A3 W
A3 SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
A6 SEF
B4 SEF
B5 SEF
B5 LEF
B6 SEF
Ledger
Letter SEF
Letter LEF
Legal SEF
Half Letter
SEF
Executive
SEF
Executive
LEF
F SEF
Foolscap
SEF
Folio SEF
12" x 18"
297 x 420 mm
210 x 297 mm
297 x 210 mm
148 x 210 mm
210 x 148 mm
105 x 148 mm
257 x 364 mm
182 x 257 mm
257 x 182 mm
128 x 182 mm
11" x 17"
8.5" x 11"
11" x 8.5"
8.5" x 14"
8K
16K SEF
16K LEF
Custom
Com10
Env.
Monarch
Env.
C6 Env.
C5 Env.
DL Env.
Europe/Asia
Bypass
Tray
Paper
Tray 1
Tray
2/3/4
5.5" x 8.5"
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y*
N
N
N
Y
Y#/Y*
Y
N
Y
N
Y#/Y*
Y#/Y*
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
7.25" x 10.5"
10.5" x 7.25"
Tray 1
Remarks:
Y
Y#
Y*
N
Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.

Supported: the user specifies the paper size.
Supported: depends on a technician adjustment
Not supported
B202/B178/B180
7-6
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
2.2 PAPER EXIT

Paper
Size (W x L)
A3 W
A3 SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
A6 SEF
B4 SEF
B5 SEF
B5 LEF
B6 SEF
Ledger
Letter SEF
Letter LEF
Legal SEF
Half Letter SEF
Executive SEF
Executive LEF
F SEF
Foolscap SEF
Folio SEF
12" x 18"
297 x 420 mm
210 x 297 mm
297 x 210 mm
148 x 210 mm
210 x 148 mm
105 x 148 mm
257 x 364 mm
182 x 257 mm
257 x 182 mm
128 x 182 mm
11" x 17"
8.5" x 11"
11" x 8.5"
8.5" x 14"
8K
16K SEF
16K LEF
Custom
Com10 Env.
Monarch Env.
C6 Env.
C5 Env.
DL Env.
5.5" x 8.5"
7.25" x 10.5"
10.5" x 7.25"
8" x 13"
8.5" x 13"
8.25" x 13"
267 x 390 mm
195 x 267 mm
267 x 195 mm
Minimum:
90 x 148 mm
Maximum:
305 x 458 mm
4.125" x 9.5"
3.875" x 7.5"
114 x 162 mm
162 x 229 mm
110 x 220 mm
Internal Tray
(Face Down)
External Tray
(Face Up)
2-tray
Finisher
Booklet
Finisher
Duplex
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y*
N
N
N
Y
Y*
Y*
N
Y
Y
Y*
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Remarks:
SM
Supported
Not supported
Stack only (Booklet not supported)
7-7
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Specifications
Y
N
Y*
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

Size (width x length)
[mm]
A3 (297 x 420) L
B4 (257 x 364) L
A4 (210 x 297) L
A4 (297 x 210) S
B5 (182 x 257) L
B5 (257 x 182) S
A5 (148 x 210) L
A5 (210 x 148) S
B6 (128 x 182) L
B6 (182 x 128) S
11" x 17" (DLT)
11" x 15"
10" x 14"
8.5" x 14" (LG)
8.5" x 13" (F4)
8.25" x 13"
8" x 13"(F)
8.5" x 11" (LT)
11" x 8.5" (LT)
8" x 10.5"
8" x 10"
5.5" x 8.5" (HLT)
8.5" x 5.5" (HLT)
8K (267 x 390)
16K L (195 x 267)
16K S (267 x 195)
7.25" x 10.5"
(Executive)
10.5" x 7.25"
(Executive)
Platen
ARDF
Inches
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No*
No
No
No
No
Metric
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No*
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Inches
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes**
Yes**
Yes
Yes**
Yes**
No
No
Yes**
Yes**
No
Yes**
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Metric
Yes
Yes
Yes**
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes**
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes**
Yes**
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes**
No
*: Use SP4-303 to detect original sizes as A5 lengthwise/HLT when the message

Cannot detect original size shows.
**: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP6-016-1.
B202/B178/B180
7-8
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
3. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run
installer lets you to select the components you want to install.
3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS

Printer
Language
PCL 5e
/ PCL6c
PS3
RPCS
Windows
95/98/ME
Yes
Windows
NT4.0
Yes
Windows
2000
Yes
Windows
XP
Yes
Windows
2003
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Macintosh
No
Yes
No
Specifications
NOTE: 1) The printer drivers for Windows NT 4.0 are only for the Intel x86
platform. There is no Windows NT 4.0 printer driver for the PowerPC,
Alpha, or MIPS platforms.
2) The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows
2000/XP/2003. Windows 2000 uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each
operating system is provided with the driver.
3) The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS 8.6 or later versions.
SM
7-9
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE

Software
Agfa Font Manager 2000
(Win95/98/ME,
2000/XP/2003, NT4)
SmartNetMonitor for Admin
(Win95/98/ME,
2000/XP/2003, NT4)
SmartNetMonitor for Client
(Win95/98/ME,
2000/XP/2003, NT4)
Printer Utility for Mac

(Mac)
IEEE1394 Utility
(Win2000/XP)
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
(Win95/98/ME,
2000/XP/2003, NT4)
LAN-Fax Driver
USB Print Support
Graphic Update Module
Description
A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer.
A printer management utility for network administrators. NIB

setup utilities are also available.
A printer management utility for client users.
A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP/IP
network.
A peer-to-peer print utility over a TCP/IP network. This
provides the parallel printing and recovery printing features.
This software provides several convenient functions for printing
from Macintosh clients.
This utility deletes a print port for IEEE1394 in Win2000.
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite itself can be used as personal document
management software and can manage both image data
converted from paper documents and application files saved in
each clients PC.
This software lets you fax documents directly form your PC.
Address Book Editor and Cover Sheet Editor are to be installed
as well. (These require the optional fax unit.)
This utility deletes a print port for USB in Win98SE/ME.
This provides bitmap images used to represent the various
statuses of devices graphically within Smart Device Monitor or
Web Smart Device Monitor.
SCANNER
The scanner driver and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM.
Scanner Drivers
Network Twain Driver for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP/2003
Scanner Utilities
Scan Router V2 Lite (Cherry-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP
Desk Top Binder V2 Lite (Plumeria-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP/2003
B202/B178/B180
7-10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
[A]
[J]
[I]
[B]
[C]
[H]
[G]
[D]
[E]
B178V501.WMF
[F]
Machine
Code
Remarks
Copier
B178
Platen cover
G329
ARDF
B714
Booklet finisher
B602
Punch unit (for B602)
B647
Two-tray finisher
B599
Punch unit (for B599)
B377
Multi-Bin output tray
G306
One-tray paper feed unit
B601
Two-tray paper feed unit
B598
LCT
B600
Scanner accessibility
option
G570
SM
One from the two

One from [G], [H], and [I]; Requires one
from [D], [E], and [F]
Requires [I]
One from [G], [H], and [I]; Requires one

from [D], [E], and [F]
Requires [G]
Specifications
Item
One from [G], [H], and [I]

One from the three
7-11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
[F]
[E]
I/F Card Slot

A Ethernet&USB(ver2.0)
B File Format Converter
C Option
SD Card Slot
1 Option
2 Option
3 Service
[A]
[B]
[C]
[G]
[D]
B178V563.WMF
Machine
Code
Item
Remarks
USB 2.0: [F]
Standard
Ethernet: [F]
Standard
Wireless LAN: [A]
G813
Bluetooth: [B]
B736
IEEE 1394: [C]
B581
IEEE 1284: [D]
B679
File Format Converter: [E]
B609
Hard Disk Drive
PostScript 3: [G]
B763
Data overwrite security unit: [G]
B735
B202/B178/B180
You can only install one of these at

a time.
Standard
7-12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
5. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
5.1 ARDF
Paper Size/Weight:
Simplex
Duplex
Size
Weight
Size
Weight
A3 to B6, DLT to HLT

40 to 128 g/m2 (11 to 34 lb.)
A3 to B5, DLT to HLT
50 to 105 g/m2 (14 to 28 lb.)
Table Capacity:
80 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Original Standard
Position:
Rear left corner
Separation:
Feed belt and separation roller
Original Transport:
Roller transport
Original Feed Order:
From the top original
Supported Magnification
Ratios:
Copy
Fax
Color
Black & white
50 to 200 %
32.6 to 200 %
48.9 to 200 %
DC 24V, 5V from the scanner unit
Power Consumption:
60 W or less
Dimensions (W D H):
570 mm x 518 mm x 150 mm (22.4" x 20.4" x 5.9")
Weight:
12 kg
Specifications
Power Source:
SM
7-13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
5.2 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

Paper Size:
Paper Weight:
Tray Capacity:
Paper Feed System:
Paper Height Detection:
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
Weight
Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)

Minimum: A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
FRR system
3 steps (100%, 50%, Near End)
DC 24V, 5V (from the main unit)
50 W
540 x 600 x 172 mm (21.3" x 23.7" x 6.8")
18 kg (39.7 lb.)
5.3 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

Paper Size:
Paper Weight:
Tray Capacity:
Paper Feed System:
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
Weight

60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
500 sheets x 2 (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
FRR system
3 steps (100%, 50%, Near End)
50 W
540 x 600 x 270 mm (21.3" x 23.7" x 10.7")
25 kg (55.2 lb.)
5.4 2000-SHEET LARGE CAPACITY TRAY

Paper Size:
Paper Weight:
Tray Capacity:
Paper Feed System:
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
Weight
B202/B178/B180
A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)

60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
2000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
FRR system
5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near End)
50 W
540 x 600 x 270 mm (21.3" x 23.7" x 10.7")
25 kg (55.2 lb.)
7-14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Print Paper Size:
No punch mode:
A3/11" x 17" to A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"
Punch mode:
2 holes: A3/11" x 17" to A4/81/2" x 11" (SEF)
A4/81/2" x 11" to A5 (LEF)
3 holes: A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF)
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
4 holes (Europe): A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF)
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
4 holes (North Europe): A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF)
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
Staple mode:
A3/11" x 17" to B5/81/2" x 11"
Paper Weight:
No punch mode:
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Punch mode:
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Staple mode:
64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 23 lb.)
Label/Thick paper/OHP cannot be stapled
Tray Capacity:
Upper tray:
500 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" , B5, A5 (LEF)
250 sheets: 11" x 17", A3, 81/2" x 14", B4
Lower tray (default mode stapled output only goes to
tray 2):
2000 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
750 sheets: A3, B4, A4, B5, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17",
81/2" x 11" (SEF)
500 sheets: A5 (LEF)
Lower tray (multi-tray staple mode stapled output can
go to either tray):
1500 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)
750 sheets: A3, B4, A4, B5, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17",
81/2" x 11" (SEF)
500 sheets: A5 (LEF)
Staple capacity:
Single size:
50 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" , B5
30 sheets: A3, B4, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17"
Mixed size:
30 sheets: A4 (LEF) & A3, B5 (LEF) & B4,
81/2" x 11" (LEF) & 11" x 17"
Staple position:
7 positions
1-staple: 4 positions (Top Left, Top Right,
Top Left-Oblique, Top Right-Oblique)
2-staples: 3 positions (Left, Top, Right)
SM
7-15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
Specifications
5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER & PUNCH UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Staple replenishment:
Cartridge (5000 staples)
Power consumption:
48 W
680 x 620 x 1030 mm (26.8" x 24.4" x 40.6")
Weight
Without punch unit:
53 kg (116.9 lb.)
With punch unit:
55 Kg (121.3 lb.)
5.6 BOOKLET FINISHER

Paper Size:
A3, A4, B4, B5, DLT, LG, LT
Booklet Paper Size:
A3, B4, A4 SEF, DLT, LG, LT SEF
Paper Weight:
Stack/Sort mode:
60 to 128 g/m2 (16 to 34 lb.)
Staple mode:
64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb.)
Booklet mode:
64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 21 lb.)
Tray Capacity:
1,000 sheets:
500 sheets:
Booklet Tray Capacity:
2 to 5 sheets/booklet: 20
6 to 10 sheets/booklet: 10
Staple capacity:
30 sheets
Booklet capacity:
10 sheets
Staple position:
3 positions (excluding booklet mode)

1-staple: 2 positions (Top right, Top left)
2-staples: 1 positions (Left)
Staple replenishment:
Cartridge (5000 staples)
A4, LT, B5
A3, B4, DLT, LG
5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY

Number of Bins
Paper Size

Paper Weight
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)
Stack Capacity
(80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Tray 1:
100 sheets
Tray 2:
100 sheets (A4/smaller than 81/2" x 11")

250 sheets (B4/81/2" x 14")
B202/B178/B180
7-16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
5.8 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION

Place
Right side of the mainframe
Length of connector
cable:
1m
Power consumption:
Power is supplied from the mainframe.
570 x 757 x 100 mm
Weight:
Less than 20 kg
Specifications
NOTE: 1) This scanner option also has an operation panel. You cannot operate
the operation panel of the mainframe and the operation panel for the
scanner option at the same time.
2) You need to cover the contact glass of the mainframe with the platen
cover option.
SM
7-17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B202/B178/B180
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B377
PUNCH UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PUNCH UNIT B377

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................1
1.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT.............................................................. 1
2. DETAILS .........................................................................................2
2.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM ...................................................................... 2
2.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ................................................................... 4
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B377
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT

1.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT
To adjust the position of the punch holes in the paper feed direction, use SP6113
(Punch Hole Adjustment).
[B]
[A]
Punch Unit
B377
The punch position can be adjusted by up to 4 mm using combinations of the 3

spacers provided with the finisher. To adjust the horizontal position of the holes,
use the spacers provided with the punch unit.
B377R119.WMF
1. Rear cover ( x 4)
2. Punch unit [A] ( x 3, x 5)
3. Spacers [B]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B377
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM
2. DETAILS
The punch unit punches holes in printed sheets, one by one. The punch unit is
provided with a new punch mechanism to improve the accuracy of punching.
NOTE: The illustrations below show the unit for Europe for 2/4 hole punching. The
North American unit has five holes for 2/3 hole punching.
2.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM

[A]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[B]
B377D505.WMF
The punch motor [A] drives the punch mechanism. At the correct time after the
trailing edge of the paper passes the finisher entrance sensor [B], the punch motor
turns on and the paper stops. The punch clutch [C] turns and drives the punch
heads [D].
The punch HP sensor [E] detects the home position for the actuator. The punch
unit switches off when the cut-out in the punch shaft disk [F] enters the punch HP
sensor.
NOTE: SP6113 (Punch Hole Adjustment) adjusts the punch hole position in the
sub scan direction for two holes (001 2-Hole) or for three holes (002 3Hole). Use the spacers provided with the punch unit to adjust the position
of the punch in the main scan direction. For details, refer to the installation
of the punch unit in section 1. Installation).
B377
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM
[C]
[A]
B377D504.WMF
When the finisher has received the command that changes the number of punch
holes for the job, the punch hole motor [A] turns on until the actuator disk changes
the status of the punch hole switch [B] (until it switches on or off). This indicates
that the cover [C] and the punch cam [D] have moved to one side or the other to
determine which punchers are used.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B377
Punch Unit
B377
[B]
[D]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION
2.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION
[A]
[B]
[C]
B377D506.WMF
Waste punchouts are collected in the punch waste hopper [A] below the punch unit
inside the finisher.
When the top of the punchout waste in the hopper reaches and actuates the
hopper sensor [B], a message will be displayed on the operation panel after the
current job is completed.
This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed. When the
waste hopper is taken out, the arm [C] moves down and this will actuate the sensor
and display a message in the operation panel. This message is the same as for the
hopper full condition.
B377
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

B598
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B598

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1
1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT ............................................................................. 1
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ........................................................................... 2
1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS .................. 2
1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ................................................ 3
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTORS................................................................................... 4
1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES........................................................................... 4
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................................................... 5
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................6

2.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 6
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.............................................. 6
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................... 7
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................. 8
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B598
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COVER REPLACEMENT
Two-Tray
Paper Feed
Unit B598
1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT
[A]
B598R102.WMF
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B598
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ROLLER REPLACEMENT
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS
[B]
[A]
[C]
B598R101.WMF
1. Paper tray
2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook)
3. Paper Feed Roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Separation Roller [C] ( x 1)
B598
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD
Two-Tray
Paper Feed
Unit B598
1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD
[B]
[A]
B598R103.WMF
1. Rear cover (! 1.1)

3. Main board [B] ( x 2)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B598
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY LIFT MOTORS
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTORS

[A]
2. Tray lift motor [A] ( x 1, x 2)
B598R104.WMF
1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES

[A]

2. Paper feed clutches [A] ( x 1, 1
bracket, 1 bushing)
B598R105.WMF
B598
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
Two-Tray
Paper Feed
Unit B598
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
[A]
B598R107.WMF
[B]
B598R108.WMF
1. Vertical transport cover [A] (1 hook)

2. Paper feed unit [B] ( x 2, x 1)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B598
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1
10
3
4
9
5
6
7
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B598
B598D001.WMF
6. Lower Paper Feed Roller

7. Lower Separation Roller
8. Lower Pick-up Roller
9. Lower Tray
10. Upper Tray
Upper Pick-up Roller

Upper Paper Feed Roller
Upper Relay Roller
Upper Separation Roller
Lower Relay Roller
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
Two-Tray
Paper Feed
Unit B598
9
10
11
25
12
13
24
14
23
15
22
16
21
17
20
19
18
B598D101.WMF
14. Vertical Guide Switch

15. Lower Lift Sensor
16. Lower Tray Lift Motor
17. Lower Paper End Sensor
18. Lower Relay Sensor
19. Lower Paper Height 2 Sensor
20. Lower Paper Height 1 Sensor
21. Upper Relay Sensor
22. Paper Size Switch 4

5. Main Board
6. Upper Paper Height 1 Sensor
7. Paper Feed Motor
8. Upper Paper Height 2 Sensor
9. Upper Lift Sensor
10. Upper Paper Feed Clutch
11. Upper Paper End Sensor
12. Upper Tray Lift Motor
13. Lower Paper Feed Clutch
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B598
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1
11
2
10
9
8
3
7
4
5
B598D102.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B598
7. Lower Pick-up Roller

8. Upper Separation Roller
9. Upper Relay Roller
10. Upper Paper Feed Roller
11. Upper Pick-up Roller
Tray Motor
Upper Paper Feed Clutch
Lower Paper Feed Clutch
Lower Relay Roller
Lower Separation Roller
Lower Paper Feed Roller
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TWO-TRAY FINISHER
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1
1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS.......................................................................... 1
1.1.2 INNER COVER.................................................................................... 1
1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER............................................................................... 2
1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR ................................................................................ 2
1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR ................. 3
1.5 STAPLER TRAY........................................................................................... 3
1.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH ....... 4
1.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR....................................................................... 5
1.8 LIFT MOTORS ............................................................................................. 5
1.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR ............................................................................... 7
1.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS......................................................... 8
1.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR........................................................ 8
1.12 STAPLER UNIT .......................................................................................... 8
1.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR.......................................................... 9
1.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR ..................................................................................... 9
1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS .............................................................................. 9
1.14.2 TRAY SHIFT SENSORS AND TRAY RELEASE SENSOR............. 10
1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR .................................................................. 10
1.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH........................................................ 10
1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD ......................................................................... 11
1.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ............................................... 11
2. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 12
2.1 JAM DETECTION....................................................................................... 12
3. SERVICE TABLES........................................................................ 13
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS............................................................................ 13
3.2 TEST POINTS ............................................................................................ 13
3.3 FUSES........................................................................................................ 13
. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................... 14

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 14

DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 15
JUNCTION GATES .................................................................................... 16
TRAY SHIFTING ........................................................................................ 17
4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS............................................................. 17
Tray 1 (Upper Tray) ............................................................................... 17
Tray 2 (Lower Tray) ............................................................................... 18
4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS .............................................................. 19
4.5.1 TRAY 1 .............................................................................................. 19
Introduction ............................................................................................ 19
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Normal and sort/stack modes ................................................................ 19
Staple Mode........................................................................................... 20
Tray 1 release mechanism..................................................................... 21
4.5.2 TRAY 2 .............................................................................................. 22
4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM ............................................................... 23
4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM............................... 24
Vertical Paper Alignment .......................................................................24
Horizontal Paper Alignment ...................................................................24
4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM ............................................................................ 25
4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT..................................................................... 25
Stapler Rotation ..................................................................................... 25
Side-to-Side Movement .........................................................................25
4.7.2 STAPLER .......................................................................................... 26
4.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT ......................................................... 27
4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................ 28
4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM ........................................................... 28
4.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ........................................................ 29
B599
ii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COVERS

1.1 COVERS
1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS
[A]
1. Top cover [A] ( x 4)

NOTE: If the shift tray below is
blocking the screw hole,
remove the shift tray.
2. Bracket [B] ( x 1)
[D]
[B]
[C]
3. Front door [C]

4. Rear cover [D] ( x 4)
[E]
B599R151.WMF
1.1.2 INNER COVER

1. Front cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL
COVERS)
2. Inner cover [A] ( x 3, tabs [B] x 3)
[A]
[B]
B599R102.WMF
[B]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
5. Right cover [E] ( x 2)
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
POSITIONING ROLLER
1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER

1. Open the front door.
2. Positioning roller [A] ( x 1)
3. Belt [B]
[B]
[A]
B599R103.WMF
1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR
[B]
1. Top cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS)
[C]
[A]
2. Open transport door [A]

3. Bracket [B] ( x 1, ( x 1)
4. Tray 1 exit sensor [C]
B599R104.WMF
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR
1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE

SENSOR
1. Entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
[B]
2. Entrance sensor [B] ( x 1)

3. Stapler tray entrance sensor bracket [C] ( x
1, x 1)
[A]
4. Stapler tray entrance sensor [D]

[C]
B599R105.WMF
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[D]
1.5 STAPLER TRAY
[A]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[B]
B599R106.WMF
B599R107.WMF
1. External covers, front door, inner cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS, 1.1.2
INNER COVER)
2. Two clamps [A]
3. Harnesses [B] ( x 8)
4. Stapler tray [C] ( x 2 [D], x 2 [E])
NOTE: At the front of the finisher, pull the stapler tray toward you and lift it out.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH
1.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER

LIMIT SWITCH
[B]
[D]
B599R201.WMF
[A]
[F]
[C]
[E]
[G]
B599R109.WMF
[H]
B599R110.WMF
1. External covers (! 1.1.1)

2. Place one hand under tray 2 (the lower tray), press in on the gear [A] to release
the tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends.
3. Place one hand under tray 1 (the upper tray), press in on the gear [B] to release
the tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends.
4. Tray 1 back fence [C] ( x 4)
5. Sensor stay [D] ( x 2, ( x 4)
6. Plastic bracket [E] ( x 1)
7. Stack height sensors [F]
8. Metal bracket [G] ( x 1)
9. Upper limit switch [H]
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR
1.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR

1. Tray 1 back fence (! 1.6)
2. Exit guide plate motor [A] ( x2,
x1)
NOTE: Disengage the shaft of the exit
guide plate motor from the
ring.
B599R111.WMF
1.8 LIFT MOTORS
[A]
1. Top cover and rear cover (! 1.1.1)

2. Tray 1 back fence [A] (! 1.6)
3. Sensor stay [B] ( x 4)
[B]
B599R203.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LIFT MOTORS
4. Motor bracket [C] ( x 3, x 2)
[C]
B599R204.WMF
5. Tray 1 lift motor [D] ( x 2, drive belt)

6. Tray 2 lift motor [E] ( x 2, drive belt)
[D]
[E]
B599R205.WMF
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LOWER EXIT SENSOR
1.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR

1. Front door, external and internal
covers. (! 1.1)
2. Exit guide plate motor (! 1.7)
3. Guide plate [A] ( x 1)
NOTE: Pull the shaft toward you
through the round hole.
[A]
B599R112.WMF
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
4. Guide plate exit assembly [B] ( x 1,

x 1)
[B]
5. Anti-static brush [C] ( x 2)
B599R113.WMF
[C]
6. Bracket guide exit [D] ( x 2)

7. Lower exit sensor [E] ( x 1, x 1)
[E]
[D]
B599R114.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS
1.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS

[B]
1. Stapler tray (! 1.5)
[C]
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2)
[A]
4. Feeler [C]
5. Lower stack height sensors [D]
[D]
B599R116.WMF
1.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR

1. Stapler tray (! 1.5)
3. Tray 2 shunt position sensor [B] ( x
1)
[B]
[A]
B599R202.WMF
1.12 STAPLER UNIT

1. Open the front door
[A]
2. Stapler unit [A] ( x 1, x 2)

NOTE: Hold the stapler holder [B] with
one hand as you remove the
stapler. Do not twist or rotate
the stapler bracket as you
remove it.
[B]
B599R117.WMF
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR
1.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR

1. Stapler unit (! 1.12)
[D]
2. Carefully rotate the stapler holder [A].
[C]
3. Stapler cover [B] ( x 1)

4. Sensor bracket [C] ( x 1, x 1)
5. Stapler rotation HP sensor [D]
[B]
[A]
1.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR
B599R118.WMF
1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS

[A]
1. Tray 1 [A] ( x 1)
3. Front tray cover [C] ( x 1)
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
2. Rear tray cover [B] ( x 1)

[B]
4. Bottom tray cover [D] ( x 2)

[C]
[D]
B599R207.WMF
5. Bottom bracket [E] ( x 3)
[E]
B599R208.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY 1 INTERIOR
1.14.2 TRAY SHIFT SENSORS AND TRAY RELEASE SENSOR

[B]
1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)

2. Gear disk [A] ( x 1)
3. Tray shift sensors [B] ( x 1 each).
4. Tray release sensor [C] ( x 1)
[B]
[C]
[A]
B599R210.WMF
1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR

1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)
2. Motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1)
3. Tray 1 shift motor [B] ( x 3, belt x 1)
[A]
[B]
B599R209.WMF
1.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH

1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)
2. Back fence lock clutch [A] ( x 1, x
1)
B599R211.WMF
[A]
B599
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FINISHER MAIN BOARD
1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD

1. Rear cover (! 1.1.1)
2. Main PCB [A] ( x 6, All )
B599R206.WMF
1.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

To adjust the position of the punch holes in the paper feed direction, use the
appropriate SP mode.
To adjust the horizontal position of the holes, use the spacers provided with the
punch unit.
1. Rear cover (! 1.1.1)
2. Punch unit [A] ( x 3, x 5)
3. Spacers [B]
The punch position can be adjusted
by up to 4 mm using combinations
of the 3 spacers provided with the
finisher.
[B]
[A]
B599R119.WMF
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JAM DETECTION
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 JAM DETECTION
Mode
Shift 1
Shift 2
Staple
Jam
Entrance sensor:
no detection
Entrance sensor:
no detection
Upper exit sensor:
no detection
Upper exit sensor:
jam
Lower exit sensor:
no detection
!
!
!
!
!
!
Lower exit sensor:

jam
Stapler tray
entrance sensor:
no detection
Stapler tray
entrance sensor:
jam
Lower tray exit
sensor: no
detection
Content
After the exit sensor in the main machine
went off, the entrance sensor did not switch
on for at least 2 s.
After the entrance sensor switched on, it did
not remain on for at least 150 ms.*1
After the entrance sensor switched on, the
upper exit sensor did not remain on for at
least 59 pulses. *2
After the upper exit sensor switched on, it
did not switch off within 150 ms. *1
After the entrance sensor switched on, the
lower exit sensor did not switch on within 59
pulses. *2
After the lower exit sensor switched on, it did
not switch off within 150 ms. *1
After the entrance sensor switched off, the
stapler tray entrance sensor did not switch
on within 102 pulses.*2
After the stapler tray entrance sensor
switched on, it did not switch off within 59
pulses.*1
After the transport motor switched on, the
lower tray exit sensor did not switch on
within 1260 ms.
*1
: Timing for A4 L (differs according to paper size).
*2
: Counted by entrance motor pulses because timing differs for feed out.
B599
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those described
in the table below.
1
0
1
0
DPS101
2 3
0 0
1 1
0 0
4
0
0
1
Mode
Description
Default.
Free run.
Transportation
No paper.
See the note below.
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
NOTE: The following procedure repositions the shift trays to the shipping position.
1) Make sure that the main switch is turned off.
2) Turn on DIP SW101-4 on the main board.
3) Turn on the main switch.
4) After the fisher completes the initialization, turn off DIP SW101-4.
Finisher automatically repositions the shift trays to the shipping position.
3.2 TEST POINTS

No.
TP101
TP102
TP103
TP104
Label
GND
5V
RXD
TXD
Monitored Signal
Ground
5V
Received command data
Transmitted command data
3.3 FUSES
No.
FU101
SM
Function
Protects 24 V.
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
GENERAL LAYOUT
4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1
8
2
3
7
4
6
5
B599D118.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
Upper junction gate

Punch unit (option)
Stapler junction gate
Pre-stack tray
5.
6.
7.
8.
Stapler
Stapler tray
Tray 2
Tray 1
Tray junction gate: Directs paper either to the upper or lower exit. In staple mode,
the stack always goes out to the lower exit.
Stapler junction gate: Directs paper either to the lower exit or to the stapler tray.
Pre-stack tray: When stapling multiple prints (A4 LEF, LT LEF, B5 LEF only) in the
staple mode, the first sheet of the second print waits here for the next sheet to feed
while the previous stack is stapled. After the second print is fed, the first and
second sheets are fed together to the pre-stack tray. This delay allows enough time
for the previous stack to be stapled without interrupting paper feed.
Shift trays: Tray 1 (upper) and tray 2 (lower) shift side to side in the sort mode,
and raise and lower to receive ejected prints.
Stapler tray jogger: Employs positioning rollers and jogger fences to align stacks
for stapling.
Punch unit: Punches holes in stacked prints.
B599
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE LAYOUT
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT

4
2
14
13
12
11
15
16
8
B599D104.WMF
17
18
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
SM
B599D103.WMF
10. Lower transport motor

11. Pre-stack motor
12. Upper transport motor
13. Punch motor
14. Entrance motor
15. Stack feed-out motor
16. Jogger motor
17. Stapler motor
18. Stapler rotation motor
Tray 1 lift motor

Entrance roller
Tray 2 lift motor
Upper exit roller
Tray 1 shift motor
Exit guide plate motor
Lower exit roller
Tray 2 shift motor
Exit motor
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JUNCTION GATES
4.3 JUNCTION GATES

The two junction gates can direct paper to three destinations.
In sort/stack mode for tray 1, the tray junction
solenoid [A] is on, and the prints go to the upper exit
(tray 1 is at the upper exit for sort/stack mode).
[A]
B599D205.WMF
In sort/stack mode for tray 2, both the tray junction gate

solenoid [A] and stapler junction gate solenoid [B] are
off, and prints go to the lower exit.
[A]
[B]
B599D206.WMF
[A]
In staple mode, the tray junction solenoid [A] is off and

the stapler junction gate solenoid [B] is on, and prints go
to the stapler tray.
[B]
B599
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599D207.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY SHIFTING
4.4 TRAY SHIFTING

4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS
[F]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[D]
B599D106.WMF
Tray 1 (Upper Tray)

In sort/stack mode, tray 1 [A] moves from side to side to separate the printed sets.
The tray 1 shift motor [B], inside the shift tray, controls the horizontal position of
tray 1 through the timing belt [C] and gear disk [D].
After one print set is delivered to tray 1, the shift motor turns on, driving the gear
disk and the arm [E], and the tray drive unit moves to one side.
Two shift sensors [F] detect when to stop this side-to-side movement. There is a
cut-out in the gear disk. The shift tray moves in one direction until one of the shift
sensors detects the cut-out. Then the shift tray stops.
The next set of prints is then delivered, and the gear disk is turned in the opposite
direction until the other shift sensor is activated.
SM
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY SHIFTING
Tray 2 (Lower Tray)
[C]
[A]
[E]
[D]
[B]
B599D105.WMF
In sort/stack mode, tray 2 [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of prints.
The shift mechanism for tray 2 is similar to that used for tray 1. However, when the
tray 2 shift motor [B] turns on, the arm [D] moves the entire end fence [C] from side
to side (not just the tray).
After the gear disk has turned 180 degrees, the cut-out in the gear disk enters the
tray half-turn sensor [E], and the motor stops. When the next set of prints is
delivered, the motor turns on again, and moves the tray back to its previous
position.
B599
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS

4.5.1 TRAY 1
[I]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[H]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[F]
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[G]
B599D204.WMF
Introduction
The tray 1 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 1 [B] through gears and
timing belts [C].
Normal and sort/stack modes

When the main switch is turned on, the tray is initialized at the upper position. To
do this, the tray is moved up until upper stack height sensor 1 [D] is de-actuated.
During printing, if upper stack height sensor 2 [E] is actuated, the tray 1 lift motor
lowers the tray for a specified time.
When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator [F] will pass through the tray 1
overflow 1 sensor [G]. When the actuator drops below the sensor (to deactivate the
sensor), the machine detects that the paper stack height has exceeded the
overflow limit.
The upper limit switch for tray 1 [H] prevents the drive gear from being damaged if
the upper stack height sensor 1 should fail. If the tray is raised to the tray
positioning roller [I], the switch will automatically cut the power to the tray 1 lift
motor.
SM
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Staple Mode
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[G]
[F]
[C]
B599D204.WMF
In staple mode, stapled stacks can be delivered to either tray, but they can only go
to the lower exit. So, if tray 1 is selected, tray 1 [A] moves down to the lower paper
exit.
Tray 1 lowers until the actuator [B] enters the tray 1 lower limit sensor [C]. Tray 1
then lifts up until lower stack height sensor 1 [D] is activated.
When tray 1 is moved down to the lower exit, tray 2 must be moved down out of
the way. So, tray 2 [E] is also lowered until the tray 2 shunt position sensor [F]
detects tray 2 (or the top of the paper stack in tray 2).
The method of paper height detection is the same as for the upper exit area.
When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator will enter the tray 1 overflow 2
sensor [G]. When this happens, the machine detects that the paper stack height
has exceeded the overflow limit.
B599
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Tray 1 release mechanism
[A]
When tray 1 is selected for staple mode, tray

1 must be moved down to the lower paper
exit. However, to move past the sensors at
the lower exit, the tray must be moved away
from the finisher.
Then, the tray 1 shift motor stops, then the

tray 1 lift motor lowers tray 1.
[D]
[B]
[C]
B599D201.WMF
When the tray 1 lower limit sensor is

activated (as described on the previous
page), the tray has moved past the sensors
at the lower exit. The tray 1 shift motor turns
on again until the gear disk activates the
tray shift sensor [E]. This moves the tray
back against the finisher.
[E]
Next, tray 1 lifts until the finisher detects that

the tray is at the correct height.
B599D202.WMF
When tray 1 is at the lower exit, the tray lock

solenoid [F] is on, and the lever [G] locks the
tray. This prevents the user from moving the
tray out of position (the first tray has some
play when it is at the lower position).
[F]
[I]
Before tray 1 goes back to the upper exit

area, the tray lock solenoid [F] turns off to
unlock the tray. In addition, the back fence
lock clutch [H] turns on to hold the back
fence [I]. This prevents the springs inside
the back fence from suddenly contracting
(these springs normally keep the tray steady
during side-to-side shift).
[G]
[H]
B599D203.WMF
Then, tray 1 is released and it moves up to

the upper exit area.
SM
21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
To do this, the tray 1 shift motor turns until

the cut-out in the gear disk enters the tray
release sensor [A]. At this time, the arm [B]
has reached position [C], and is pushing
against the plate [D], in towards the finisher.
However, the plate is fixed, so the tray
moves out away from the finisher.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.5.2 TRAY 2
[H]
[A]
[E]
[B]
[C]
Overflow condition
[D]
[E]
[F]
[D]
[F]
Multi Tray Staple Mode
[C]
Normal Mode
B599D500.WMF
[G]
B599D109.WMF
The tray 2 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 2 [B] through gears and
timing belts [C].
The paper height detection is the same as for tray 1.
When the tray lowers during printing, the tray is judged to be overflowing when the
tray 2 overflow sensor 1 [D] is off and the tray 2 overflow sensor-2 [F] is on (see
Normal Mode in the above diagram).
In the multi-tray staple mode (selected by the service technician), the machine
detects that the paper stack height has exceeded the overflow limit when the
actuator [E] enters the tray 2 overflow 1 sensor [D].
The lower limit sensor [G] for tray 2 detects when tray 2 is at its lowest limit and
stops the tray 2 lift motor.
The function of the tray 2 upper limit switch [H] is the same as for tray 1.
B599
22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
NOTE: This feature is available only when using A4 L, LT L, and B5 L.

During stapling, the main machine must wait. This mechanism reduces the wait by
holding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. It
only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set print job.
The pre-stack junction gate solenoid [A] switches on after the first sheet activates
the entrance sensor. This directs the sheet to the pre-stack tray [B].
The pre-stack feed roller [C] stops for a specified time after the trailing edge of the
paper has passed through the entrance sensor and stops the paper from leaving
the pre-stack tray.
At the same time, the pre-stack junction gate solenoid switches off, and the second
sheet is sent to the paper guide [D]. The pre-stack feed roller (controlled by the
pre-stack motor) starts to rotate again for a specified time after the trailing edge of
the second page has been passed through the entrance sensor, and then both
sheets are sent to the stapler tray together.
SM
23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
B599D200.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM

[C]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[F]
[D]
B599D110.WMF
In staple mode, each sheet of print paper is vertically and horizontally aligned when
it arrives in the stapler tray.
Vertical Paper Alignment

After the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor [A], the
positioning roller solenoid [B] is energized for a specified time to push the
positioning roller [C] into contact with the paper.
The positioning roller rotates to push the paper back and align the trailing edge of
the paper against the stack stopper [D].
Horizontal Paper Alignment

When the start key is pressed, the jogger motor [E] turns on and the jogger fences
[F] move to the waiting position, which is 8 mm wider on both sides than the
selected paper.
When the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor, the
jogger motor turns on to move the jogger fences 5 mm towards the paper. After a
short time, the jogger motor turns on again for the horizontal paper alignment then
returns to the waiting position.
B599
24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM

4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT
[D]
[B]
[A]
[E]
[B]
[C]
B599D113.WMF
The stapler can be moved from side to side or rotated according to the
requirements of the selected stapling mode.
Stapler Rotation
After the start key is pressed, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the staple unit
[B] until the stapler rotation HP sensor [C] is activated. Then, the stapler moves
from front to rear of the finisher.
When oblique stapling at one position has been selected, after the stapler moves to
the stapling position, the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler 45 degrees
(clockwise) at the stapling position before the stapler fires.
Side-to-Side Movement
The stapler motor [D] moves the stapler from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
The amount of movement required to reach the stapling position is determined by
the size of the selected paper. If the two-staple mode is selected, the stapler
moves to the front stapling position first, and then moves to the rear stapling
position. However, for the next print set, it staples in the reverse order.
After the stapling job is finished, the stapler returns to its home position,
determined by the stapler HP sensor [E].
SM
25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
B599D112.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.7.2 STAPLER
[D]
[B]
[C]
B599D208.WMF
[A]
The staple hammer is driven by the stapler hammer motor [A] inside the stapler.
As soon as the paper stack is aligned, the staple hammer motor starts. When
stapling is finished, the staple hammer HP sensor [B] is turned on, and the staple
hammer motor then stops.
The staple end sensor [C] detects the staple end condition and whether the staple
cartridge is installed or not. If a stapler cassette is not installed, or after the stapler
cassette runs out of staples, a message is displayed in the operation panel. If this
condition is detected during a print job, the indicator will appear, but the print job
will not stop.
The staple position sensor [D] detects if there is a staple sheet at the stapling
position. After a new staple cartridge is installed, the staple hammer motor turns on
to transfer the staple sheet until the staple position sensor is activated by the staple
sheet.
If a staple jam occurs and overloads the motor, this causes a staple jam message
to appear on the operation panel.
B599
26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT

[A]
[C]
[I]
[B]
[D]
[G]
[E]
[F]
[H]
B599D114.WMF
When stapling starts, the exit guide plate motor [A] switches on and opens the exit
guide plate [B], so that the stapled stack can exit to the tray. The exit guide plate
sensor [C] detects when to switch off the exit guide plate motor.
After the prints have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [D] starts. The pawl [E]
on the stack feed out belt [F] lifts the stapled set and feeds it to the tray [G].
The exit guide plate closes at a specified interval after the stapled prints have
started to feed out. Then the exit roller takes over the stack feed-out. The stack
feed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt home
position sensor [H].
When tray 1 is passing this area on its way back up to the upper exit, the exit guide
safety switch [I] cuts power to the tray lift motor if the guide is opened too far. This
prevents damage to the users fingers if they are inside the lower exit when the tray
is moving up.
SM
27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
B599D115.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)
4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

The punch unit punches holes in printed sheets, one by one. The punch unit is
provided with a new punch mechanism to improve the accuracy of punching.
[A]
[E]
[D]
[C]
B599D102.WMF
[B]
[H]
[I]
B599D101.WMF
[F]
[G]
4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM

The punch drive mechanism is driven by the punch motor [A]. Each sheet is
positioned and punched by pressure from above. A certain time after the trailing
edge of the paper passes through the finisher entrance sensor [B], the punch motor
turns on and the paper stops. Then the punch clutch [C] turns on to make the
punch holes.
The home position is detected by the punch HP sensor [D]. When the cut-out in the
punch shaft disk [E] enters the punch HP sensor, the punch clutch turns off.
When the finisher has received the command that changes the number of punch
holes, the punch hole motor [F] turns on until the disk changes the status of the
punch hole switch [G] (until it switches on or off). This indicates that the cover [H]
and the punch cam [I] have moved to one side or the other to change the number
of holes.
B599
28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION
[A]
[B]
Two-Tray
Finisher
B599
[C]
B599D153.WMF
Waste punchouts are collected in the punch waste hopper [A] below the punch unit
inside the finisher.
When the top of the punchout waste in the hopper reaches and actuates the
hopper sensor [B], a message will be displayed on the operation panel after the
current job is completed.
This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed. When the
waste hopper is taken out, the arm [C] moves down and this will actuate the sensor
and display a message in the operation panel. This message is the same as for the
hopper full condition.
SM
29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B599
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY

B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1
1.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME.................................... 1
1.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR ........................................................................ 1
1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE.......................................................... 2
1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR ............................................................ 3
1.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ..................................................................................... 4
1.6 TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH.................................. 5
1.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ............................................................................... 6
1.8 PAPER FEED UNIT...................................................................................... 7
1.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS ......... 8
1.10 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER ...................................... 9
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ........................................ 10

2.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................ 10
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................ 10
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................. 11
2.2 PAPER FEED............................................................................................. 12
2.3 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE .................... 13
2.4 TRAY LIFT.................................................................................................. 14
2.5 NEAR END/END DETECTION................................................................... 15
2.6 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM............................................. 16
2.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION................................................... 17
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME

1.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME
1. To draw the tray out, press the
stopper [A] on the guide rail.
[A]
B600R101.WMF
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
2. To install the tray, set the tray on the

guide rails, keep the tray level, and
push the tray in.
1.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR

1. Pull out the large capacity tray.
[C]
2. Left tray rear side fence [A] ( x 2)

3. Rear fence bracket [B] ( x 1)
4. Connector of the rear fence HP
sensor [C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
5. Rear fence HP sensor [D] ( x 1)
B600R102.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE
1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE

[A]
[B]
A4
A4
Lt
Lt
B600R103.WMF
1. Screws [A] [B]

2. Change the position of the side fences.
3. Change the position of the rear fence HP sensor (! 1.2).
4. Before securing the right tray side fence, load the paper in the right tray, and
adjust the fence.
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR
1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR

[B]
[A]
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
[C]
B600R104.WMF
1. Pull out the large capacity tray.

2. Left tray side fence [A] ( x 2)
3. Rear fence bracket [B] ( x1)
4. Left tray paper end sensor [C] ( x 1)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY LIFT MOTOR
1.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR
[A]
B600R105.WMF
[B]
B600R106.WMF

2. Tray lift motor [B] ( x 3, x 1)
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH
1.6 TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH
[C]
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
[A]
[B]
B600R107.WMF

2. Tray motor [A] ( x 6, x 1)
4. Stack transport clutch [C] ( x 2, 2 bushings, 1 gear)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED CLUTCH
1.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH
[B]
[A]
B600R108.WMF

2. Bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Bushing
4. Paper feed clutch [B]
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED UNIT
1.8 PAPER FEED UNIT
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
[A]
[C]
[B]
B600R109.WMF
1. Stack transport clutch (! 1.6)

2. Paper feed clutch (! 1.7)
3. Paper feed unit cable [A]
4. Open the vertical transport guide plate [B].
5. Paper feed unit [C] ( x 2)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS
1.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND

RELAY SENSORS
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B600R111.WMF
1.
Paper feed unit (! 1.8)
2. Sensors
Upper limit [A]
Relay [B] ( x 1, 1 bracket)
Right tray paper end [C]
NOTE: To remove the upper limit [A] or paper end sensor[C], press the lever [D]
and hold it down.
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER
1.10 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
[C]
[A]
[B]
B600R110.WMF
1. Paper tray unit

3. Separation roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Feed roller [C] ( x 1)
NOTE: If the rollers are incorrectly installed, the one-way clutch does not work.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW

2.1 OVERVIEW
10
11
B600D001.WMF
13
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B600
12
Paper Height Sensors 5

Pick-up Roller
Upper Limit Sensor
Paper Feed Roller
Relay Sensor
8. Relay Roller
9. Separation Roller
10. Paper Height Sensors 2
12. Lower Limit Sensor
13. Left Paper End Sensor
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
9
10
11
12
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
13
14
15
16
17
B600D101.WMF
20
19
1. End Fence Home Position Sensor

2. Left Tray Paper End Sensor
3. Paper Height Sensor 4
5. Paper Size Sensor
6. Main Board
7. Side Fence Open/Closed Sensor
8. Tray Sensor
9. Tray Motor
SM
18
11. Upper Limit Sensor

12. Paper Feed Clutch
14. Right Tray Paper End Sensor
17. Lower Limit Sensor
18. Tray Lift Motor
19. Relay Sensor
20. Stack Transport Clutch
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED
2.2 PAPER FEED
[A]
[B]
[C]
B600D102.WMF
This product uses an FRR type paper feed mechanism.

The paper feed unit consists of the pick-up roller [A], paper feed roller [B],
separation roller [C], and relay roller.
There is a torque limiter (ferrite powder type) in the back of the separation roller.
B600
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE
2.3 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER

RELEASE
[C]
[E]
B600D107.WMF
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
[A]
[B]
[E]
[A]
[D]
B600D108.WMF
To prevent the paper from being torn when pulling out the paper feed tray, the
separation and pickup rollers are set so that they release automatically.
When the paper tray [A] is not inside the machine, the separation roller [B] is away
from the paper feed roller [C] and the pick-up roller [D] stays in the upper position.
When the paper tray is set into the machine, it pushes the release lever [E]. This
causes the pick-up roller to go down into contact with the top sheet of paper and
the separation roller to move up and contact the paper feed roller.
SM
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY LIFT
2.4 TRAY LIFT

[F]
[E]
[G]
[A]
[C]
[D]
B600D103.WMF
[B]
When the paper feed tray is put in the machine, the tray sensor on the back face
turns on and the tray lift motor [A] starts. The base plate lift shaft [B] is coupled to
the lift motor at shaft [C], so the base plate of the tray is lifted. After a short while,
the top of the paper stack contacts the pick-up roller and lifts it up.
When this occurs, the actuator enters the upper limit sensor, the sensor turns off
and the lift motor stops. When paper in the tray is used up, the pick-up roller is
gradually lowered, and the actuator leaves the upper limit sensor (turning the
sensor on). When this happens, the lift motor begins turning again. The tray will
then be lifted until the actuator enters the upper limit sensor (turning the sensor off
again).
When the tray is removed from the printer, the coupling between the lift motor and
base plate lift shaft is broken and the base plate goes into a controlled free fall
(using a damper [D] to slow the fall and prevent damage).
B600
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NEAR END/END DETECTION
2.5 NEAR END/END DETECTION

This tray holds two stacks of paper, so the machine needs to monitor the status of
both these stacks. There are seven sensors to do this.
There are also two height sensors ([F] in the diagram on the previous page) and an
end sensor in the left tray (paper storage side) ([G] in the diagram on the previous
page). When there is no paper in both trays, paper end is detected.
The machine determines the amount of remaining paper based on the sensor
outputs, as shown in the following table.
Amount of paper
100%
Right Tray Paper End Sensor
Left Tray Paper End Sensor
"
"
"
$
"
"
"
75%
"
"
"
$
"
$
"
50%
"
"
$
$
"
"
"
"
"
"
$
$
$
"
"
"
"
$
$
$
$
"
$
$
"
"
"
$
"
"
"
"
"
$
$
"
$
"
"
$
$
"
$
"
Amount of paper
25%
Right Tray Paper End Sensor
Left Tray Paper End Sensor
$
"
$
"
"
"
$
$
$
$
"
"
$
$
$
$
"
Near-end
"
"
$
$
$
$
$
"
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
"
$
$
$
$
End
"
$
$
$
Right tray paper end sensor: " = Low (no paper), $ = High (paper present)
Other sensors: " = Low (paper present), $ = High (no paper)
The following diagram is the sensor layout, as viewed from the front.
Paper Storage Side
Paper Feed Side
Paper Height
Sensor 1
Paper Height
Sensor 5
Paper Height
Sensor 4
Paper End
Sensor 1
Paper Height
Sensor2
Paper Height
Sensor 3
Paper End
Sensor 2
B600D112.WMF
SM
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
In the right tray (paper feed side), three height sensors ([E] in the diagram on the
previous page) measure the height of the stack, and an end sensor detects when
all the paper is used up. As the amount of paper remaining in the tray decreases,
the base plate rises and the actuator activates the paper height sensors. When
paper runs out in the right tray, the stack in the left tray is moved across to the right
tray.
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM
2.6 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM

[E]
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
B600D104.WMF
When the paper in the right tray is used up, the tray motor [A] and stack transport
clutch [B] turn on. Then the rear fence [C] moves the stack of paper from the left
tray to the right tray.
While the stack is being moved, it pushes the side fence aside, and the side fence
open/closed sensor [D] detects that the fence is open.
After the stack has been moved across, a spring in the side fence moves the side
fence back, and the sensor detects that the fence is closed. Then, the tray motor
reverses until end fence home position sensor [E] is deactivated.
B600
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION
2.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION

[A]
Large
Capacity Tray
B600
[B]
[C]
B600D106.WMF
[E]
[D]
B600D111.WMF
The paper end sensor [A] detects when copy paper in the right tray runs out.
When there is paper in the tray, the paper pushes up the paper end feeler [B] and
causes the actuator to enter the sensor. When paper runs out, the feeler drops and
the actuator leaves the sensor, and the machine detects that there is no paper in
the tray.
When the tray is being pulled out, the lever [E] lifts the pick-up roller and this also
lifts up the feeler.
SM
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B600
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

B601
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1
1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT ............................................................................. 1
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ........................................................................... 2
1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS .................. 2
1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ................................................ 3
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ..................................................................................... 4
1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ............................................................................... 4
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................................................... 5
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................6

2.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 6
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.............................................. 6
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................... 7
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................. 8
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B601
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COVER REPLACEMENT

1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT
[A]
B601R102.WMF
One-Tray
Paper Feed
Unit
B601
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B601
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ROLLER REPLACEMENT
1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS
[B]
[A]
[C]
B601R101.WMF
1. Paper tray
3. Paper Feed Roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Separation Roller [C] ( x 1)
B601
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD
1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD
[B]
[A]
B601R103.WMF

One-Tray
Paper Feed
Unit
B601
3. Main board [B] ( x 2)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B601
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRAY LIFT MOTOR
1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

2. Tray lift motor [A] ( x 1, x 2)
[A]
B601R104.WMF
1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH

3. Bushing
[B]
4. Paper feed clutch [C]
[C]
B601
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B601R105.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
B601R106.WMF
1. Right cover [A]
One-Tray
Paper Feed
Unit
B601
2. Paper feed unit [B] ( x 2, x 1)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B601
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
2.1 OVERVIEW
3
4
B601D001.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B601
Pick-up Roller
Paper Feed Roller
Relay Roller
Separation Roller
Tray
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
5
6
7
8
9
10
7
11
14
12
13
B601D101.WMF
8. Lift Sensor
9. Paper Feed Clutch
11. Tray Lift Motor
12. Relay Sensor
13. Paper Height 2 Sensor
14. Paper Height 1 Sensor
Paper Size Switch 1

Paper Size Switch 2
Paper Size Switch 3
Paper Size Switch 4
Main Board
Paper Feed Motor
Paper End Sensor
One-Tray
Paper Feed
Unit
B601
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B601
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
2
5
3
4
B601D102.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B601
Paper Feed Motor

Paper Feed Clutch
Paper Feed Roller
Separation Roller
Pick-up Roller
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOOKLET FINISHER
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................ 1
1.1 REGULAR TRAY.......................................................................................... 1
1.2 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.2.1 FRONT COVER................................................................................... 1
1.2.2 REAR COVER ..................................................................................... 3
1.2.3 LEFT/RIGHT TOP AND TRAY UPPER COVER ................................. 3
1.2.4 UPPER RIGHT COVER ...................................................................... 5
1.3 SIDE GUIDE................................................................................................. 6
Removal................................................................................................... 6
Reassembly ............................................................................................. 6
1.4 STAPLER UNIT............................................................................................ 7
Removal................................................................................................... 7
Adjusting the Stapler Gear Phase.......................................................... 10
1.5 FOLDING UNIT .......................................................................................... 13
Removal................................................................................................. 13
Adjusting the Folding Unit Gear Phase .................................................. 15
1.6 STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE ....................................................... 16
1.6.1 STACK TRAY UNIT........................................................................... 16
1.6.2 JOGGER FENCE UNIT ..................................................................... 18
1.7 STAPLER MOTOR UNIT ........................................................................... 20
1.8 TRANSPORT ............................................................................................. 22
1.8.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR ...................................................................... 22
1.8.2 TRANSPORT ROLLER ..................................................................... 22
1.9 STACK TRAY ............................................................................................. 24
1.9.1 STACK TRAY UPPER ROLLER ....................................................... 24
1.9.2 STACK TRAY PADDLE..................................................................... 25
1.9.3 STACK TRAY LOWER ROLLER....................................................... 27
Removal................................................................................................. 27
Reassembly ........................................................................................... 29
1.10 CIRCUIT BOARD ..................................................................................... 30
1.10.1 CONTROLLER BOARD .................................................................. 30
1.10.2 STAPLER HOME POSITION SENSOR BOARD............................. 30
1.11 PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER....................................... 32
1.11.1 PUNCH UNIT AND PUNCH UNIT MOTOR..................................... 32
1.11.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR ............................................................... 34
1.11.3 CONTROLLER ................................................................................ 35
1.11.4 PHOTO SENSOR BOARD .............................................................. 35
1.11.5 LED BOARD .................................................................................... 36
1.11.6 CHAD BOX FULL SENSOR BOARD AND LED BOARD ................ 37
1.11.7 ADJUSTMENT AND INITIALIZATION............................................. 38
Sensor Voltage ...................................................................................... 38
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Punch Type............................................................................................ 39
EEPROM ............................................................................................... 39
2. SERVICE TABLES ........................................................................ 40

2.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ........................................................................... 40
Punch Controller Board.......................................................................... 40
3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS.......................................................... 41
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 41

DRIVE ........................................................................................................ 42
CONTROLLER ........................................................................................... 43
STACK TRAY ............................................................................................. 44
3.4.1 SIMPLE OUTPUT.............................................................................. 44
Mechanism ............................................................................................ 44
Stack-Tray Belt ...................................................................................... 44
3.4.2 SORT................................................................................................. 45
3.4.3 STACK............................................................................................... 46
Paddle.................................................................................................... 46
Stack-Tray Stopper ................................................................................ 46
Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism................................................................ 47
Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism................................................................ 48
Home Position ....................................................................................... 48
Stapler Switch........................................................................................ 48
Safety Feature ....................................................................................... 48
3.4.4 JOGGER FENCE .............................................................................. 49
Action..................................................................................................... 49
Drive ...................................................................................................... 49
Home Position ....................................................................................... 49
Paper Position ....................................................................................... 50
3.4.5 PAPER OUTPUT............................................................................... 51
Mechanism ............................................................................................ 51
Stack-Tray Belt Home Position .............................................................. 51
3.5 STAPLING.................................................................................................. 52
3.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 52
3.5.2 STAPLER .......................................................................................... 53
Mechanism ............................................................................................ 53
Stapler Switch........................................................................................ 53
Sensors.................................................................................................. 53
3.5.3 POSITIONING ................................................................................... 54
Action and Drive .................................................................................... 54
Home Position and Ready Position........................................................ 54
Staple Position ....................................................................................... 55
3.6 REGULAR TRAY........................................................................................ 57
Action and Drive .................................................................................... 57
Ready Position....................................................................................... 57
Paper Sensor......................................................................................... 58
B602
ii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Paper Full .............................................................................................. 58

Fail Safe Feature ................................................................................... 58
3.7 SADDLE STITCH ....................................................................................... 59
3.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 59
3.7.2 STACK TRAY .................................................................................... 60
3.7.3 STAPLER .......................................................................................... 60
3.7.4 PAPER TRANSPORT ....................................................................... 61
3.7.5 PAPER OUTPUT............................................................................... 62
Folding Plate Mechanism....................................................................... 62
Folding Plate Home Position.................................................................. 62
Folder Rollers Mechanism ..................................................................... 63
Folder Rollers Home Position ................................................................ 63
Shape of Folder Rollers ......................................................................... 64
3.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................ 65
3.8.1 REGISTRATION................................................................................ 65
Slide Unit ............................................................................................... 65
Home Position ....................................................................................... 65
Registration............................................................................................ 65
3.8.2 PUNCH.............................................................................................. 67
Types of Punch Unit............................................................................... 67
Drive ...................................................................................................... 67
Home Position ....................................................................................... 67
Two Holes and Four Holes .................................................................... 68
Two or Three Holes ............................................................................... 69
SM
iii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REGULAR TRAY

1.1 REGULAR TRAY
Regular tray [A] ( x 4)
[A]
Booklet Finisher
B602
B602R901.WMF
1.2 COVERS
1.2.1 FRONT COVER
[A]
[B]
B602R988.WMF
B602R987.WMF
1. Joint guard [A] ( x 2)

2. Front lower cover [B] ( x 2)
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COVERS
[A]
3. Open the front door [A].
4. Release the stopper and remove the knob
[B].
5. [C] x 2
[C]
[B]
B602R902.WMF
6. Front cover [D]
[D]
B602R903.WMF
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COVERS
1.2.2 REAR COVER
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B602R905.WMF
B602R904.WMF
Booklet Finisher
B602
Rear cover [A] ( [B] x 2, [C] x 1)

NOTE: One of the screws is under the mylar [D].
1.2.3 LEFT/RIGHT TOP AND TRAY UPPER COVER

1. Front cover (! 1.2.1)
2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
[B]
3. Screw (on the right top cover holder) [A]

NOTE: Remove the regular tray [B] if it is
in its upper position.
[A]
B602R907.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COVERS
[D]
[A]
[B]
B602R908.WMF
[C]
B602R906.WMF
4. Open the left top cover [A].

5. Fastener [B]
6. Strap [C]
7. Tray upper cover [D] ( x 1, x 1)
8. Right top cover (with the right top cover holder)
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
COVERS
1.2.4 UPPER RIGHT COVER

2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
3. Left top cover (! 1.2.3)
4. [A] x 1
[A]
Booklet Finisher
B602
B602R910.WMF
5. Upper right cover [B]

( [C] x 1, 4 hooks)
[B]
[C]
B602R911.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SIDE GUIDE
1.3 SIDE GUIDE

[C]
Removal
1. Regular tray (! 1.1)
3. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
4. Regular tray holders [A][B]
( x 1 for each)
5. [C] x 4
6. Side-guide fastener [D]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B602R912.WMF
7. Open the side guide [E] and release

the feeler link [F]. (The diagram shows [F]
the view seen from the top.)
8. Side guide
[E]
B602R913.WMF
Reassembly
Place the feeler link [A] between the feeler [B] and
the side guide. After installing the side guide, check
that the feeler link moves with the feeler.
[A]
B602R914.WMF
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[B]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
1.4 STAPLER UNIT

Removal
CAUTION: Do not remove the stapler [A] [B]
from the stapler unit. The stapler and the
staple holder [B] must be in their original
positions.
[A]
B602R915.WMF
1. Open the front door [C].
[C]
Booklet Finisher
B602
2. Release the lever [D] and pull out the

stapler unit.
[D]
B602R989.WMF
3. Stapler knob [E]

4. Jam-release knob [F] ( x 1)
5. Front cover [G] ( x 3)
[E]
[F]
[G]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602R990.WMF
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
6. Gear cover [A] (2 hooks)

7. Side cover [B] ( x 1)
[B]
[A]
B602R918.WMF
8. Gear [C] ( x 1), gear [D] ( x 1), and

timing belt [E]
[E]
9. Spacer (behind gear [C])

10. Gear (behind the spacer)
[C]
11. Belt guide [F]

( x 1, Spring [G] x 1, [H] x 1)
[D]
12. Tension bracket [I]
[G]
[H]
[I]
[F]
B602R919.WMF
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
13. Timing belt [A]

14. Gear [B] ( x 1)
[B]
B602R920.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet Finisher
B602
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
Adjusting the Stapler Gear Phase

If you remove the gears [A][C] and timing belt [B],
you must adjust the phase of the gears when you
reassemble the machine. These gears and the belt
decide when the staple holder sends a staple and
when the stapler bends the staple. The diagram
shows the view seen from the rear.
[A]
[B]
[C]
B602R917.WMF
1. By rotating the timing-belt gear [A],

align the hole in the staple-holder gear
[B] with the hole in the frame [C].
[A]
[C]
[B]
B602R921.WMF
B602
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
2. To fix the gear in position, place a thin

tool [A] such as an Allen key or
screwdriver through the holes.
[A]
B602R922.WMF
[B]
[D]
[C]
B602R923.WMF
4. To fix the gear in position, place a thin

tool [E] such as an Allen key or
screwdriver through the holes.
[E]
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602R924.WMF
B602
Booklet Finisher
B602
3. By rotating gear [B], align the hole in cam

[C] with the hole in the frame [D].
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER UNIT
5. Install the timing belt [A].
[A]
B602R925.WMF
6. Align the blue mark [B] on the gear with

the hole [C] in the frame, and install the
gear.
[C]
NOTE: The stapler is in the home

position when the blue mark and [B]
the hole are aligned.
B602R926.WMF
7. Remove the two thin tools that you

placed earlier to secure the gears in
position.
[D]
8. Install the spring [D], spacer [E], gears

[F][G], and timing belt [H].
[E]
9. Reassemble the whole stapler unit.
[H]
10. Check the operation.

[F]
[G]
B602R927.WMF
B602
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FOLDING UNIT
1.5 FOLDING UNIT

Removal
2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
3. Open the right cover [A].
4. Magnet bracket [B] ( x 2)
5. Inner cover [C] ( x 2)
6. Tension plate [D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
B602R991.WMF
7. Rotate the shaft [F] clockwise and lower

the folder plate [E].
[E]
NOTE: You may have to rotate the

shaft about 20 times (7,200).
[F]
B602R929.WMF
SM
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet Finisher
B602
[D]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FOLDING UNIT
8. Timing belt [A] ( x 1, 1 spacer)

9. Two connectors [B][C]
[A]
[B]
[C]
B602R930.WMF
10. Stapler unit [D] (! 1.4).

11. Folding unit [E] ( [F] x 3)
[D]
[F]
[E]
B602R931.WMF
B602
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FOLDING UNIT
Adjusting the Folding Unit Gear Phase

If you remove gears from the folding unit, you must adjust the phase of the gears
when you reassemble the folding unit.
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[E]
Booklet Finisher
B602
[F]
B602R932.WMF
B602R994.WMF
1. Arrange the folding rollers [A] and cam [B] as shown in the diagram.
2. Install the gears as follows:
Align either of the two " marks [C] on the cam gear with one of the "
marks [D] on the relay gear. The " marks on the relay gear must be at one
o'clock [D] and five o'clock [E] respectively.
Align the other " mark on the relay gear [E] with the protruding plastic tab
(#) on the roller gear [F].
NOTE: When you have correctly installed the gears, the shorter teeth on the relay
gear [D] are at the upper right, and the longer teeth are at the lower left.
SM
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE
1.6 STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE

1.6.1 STACK TRAY UNIT
[A]
[B]
[B]
B602R934.WMF
[A]
1. Left top cover, tray upper cover (! 1.2.3)
2. Side guide (! 1.3)
3. [A] x 2
4. [B] x 5, 2 standoffs
5. Release the front lock [D] and the rear
lock [C] on the mechanical link of the
stack-tray stopper.
[C]
[D]
B602R935.WMF
B602
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6. [A] x 3
7. Open the cable fasteners [B].
8. Release the cables [C].
[C]
[A]
B602R936.WMF
9. Timing belt [D] ( x 1, 1 spacer)

10. 2 standoffs [E]
[E]
[D]
[F]
SM
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602R937.WMF
B602
Booklet Finisher
B602
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
11. [A] x 2
12. Slide the stack tray [B] to the rear and
lift it.
[B]
[A]
B602R938.WMF
1.6.2 JOGGER FENCE UNIT

CAUTION: Do not damage the jogger fences.
1. Stack tray (!1.6.1)
2. Place the stack tray unit on a level
surface. Check that the fences [A] are in
safe positions.
[A]
B602R939.WMF
B602
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3. Timing belt [A]

4. [B] x 2
[A]
B602R940.WMF
5. Jogger fence unit [C]
[C]
B602R941.WMF
SM
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet Finisher
B602
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER MOTOR UNIT
1.7 STAPLER MOTOR UNIT

1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
2. Stapler unit (! 1.4).
3. Connector holder [A] ( x 1)
4. Release all the cables (on the stapler
motor unit) [B] from the clamps.
5. Release the cables [D] ( x 2 [from
the stapler motor unit or from the
controller])
[D]
[B]
[A]
B602R942.WMF
[E]
6. Cable fastener [E] ( x 2)
B602R944.WMF
7. Release the cables ( x 2)

[F]
B602R945.WMF
B602
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLER MOTOR UNIT
8. [A] x 3
B602R946.WMF
9. Stapler motor unit [B] ( [C] x 1)
[C]
B602R947.WMF
[B]
SM
21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet Finisher
B602
[A]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRANSPORT
1.8 TRANSPORT
1.8.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR
[B]
1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

2. Cable guide [A] ( x 1)
3. Transport motor (with the timing belt
behind) [B] ( x 1, x 3)
[A]
B602R948.WMF
1.8.2 TRANSPORT ROLLER

2. Upper cover (! 1.2.3)
3. Upper right cover (! 1.2.4)
4. Transport motor (!1.8.1)
5. [A] x 1
6. Bushing [B] ( x 1)
[A]
[B]
B602R949.WMF
B602
22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
TRANSPORT
[A]
7. [A] x 2
[D]
8. Gear [B]
[B]
9. Gear (with the pin behind) [C]

10. Bushing [D] ( x 1)
11. [E] x 1
12. Paper guide [F]
[F]
[E]
[C]
B602R951.WMF
13. Transport roller [G]
[G]
B602R952.WMF
SM
23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet Finisher
B602
B602R950.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
1.9 STACK TRAY

1.9.1 STACK TRAY UPPER ROLLER
[B]
1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2)

2. Rotate the gear [A] counterclockwise
and lift the stack tray upper roller unit
[B].
[A]
B602R953.WMF
3. Release the stack tray upper roller [C]

from the shaft [D].
[C]
B602R954.WMF
[D]
B602
24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
[B]
4. Lift up the stack tray upper roller [A],

and push it down.
[A]
5. In the same manner, remove the

other roller [B].
B602R955.WMF
Booklet Finisher
B602
1.9.2 STACK TRAY PADDLE

[B]
2. Rotate the gear [A] counterclockwise

and lift the stack tray upper roller unit
[B].
[A]
B602R953.WMF
SM
25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
3. Push the bottom of the guide [A] and

release the rear side of it.
[A]
B602R956.WMF
4. Push the bottom of the guide [B] and

release the front side of it.
[B]
B602R957.WMF
5. Paddle [C]
[C]
B602R958.WMF
B602
26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
1.9.3 STACK TRAY LOWER ROLLER

Removal
2. Slide the jogger fences (the front
fence [A] to the front, the rear fence
[B] to the rear) and remove them.
[B]
[A]
B602R959.WMF
3. Tray stopper [C] (2 clips)

Booklet Finisher
B602
[C]
B602R960.WMF
[D]
4. Paper guide [F] ( [D] x 1)
[F]
B602R961.WMF
SM
27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
5. Paper guide [A] ( [B] x 1)
[B]
[A]
B602R962.WMF
6. Slide the bushing [C] ( x 2).
[C]
B602R963.WMF
[F]
7. Stack tray lower roller unit [E] ( [F] x

4)
[E]
B602R964.WMF
B602
28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
[B]
8. Stack tray lower roller [A]

9. Belt [B]
[A]
B602R965.WMF
Reassembly
When reassembling, align the positions of
the belt pawls [A][B].
Booklet Finisher
B602
[A]
[B]
B602R966.WMF
SM
29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CIRCUIT BOARD
1.10 CIRCUIT BOARD

1.10.1 CONTROLLER BOARD
1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
2. Controller board [A]
(all 's, x 1, 3 hooks)
NOTE: After replacing the controller
board, remove the NVRAM on
the old board and install it on the
new board.
[A]
B602R967.WMF
1.10.2 STAPLER HOME POSITION SENSOR BOARD

1. Stapler unit (! 1.4)
2. Guide [A] ( x 2)
[A]
B602R969.WMF
B602
30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CIRCUIT BOARD
3. Turn the knob [B] until you see the

screw [C] (on the home position sensor
board) through the opening. The home
position board moves to the front when
you turn the knob clockwise.
[B]
4. [C] x 1
[C]
Booklet Finisher
B602
B602R970.WMF
5. Home position board [D]

( x 1, 1 flat cable)
[D]
SM
31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602R971.WMF
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER
1.11 PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER

1.11.1 PUNCH UNIT AND PUNCH UNIT MOTOR
1. Right top cover (! 1.2.3)
2. Chad box [A]
[A]
B602R993.WMF
3. Release the cables [B] ( x 1).
[B]
B602R973.WMF
B602
32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
B602R974.WMF
5. Remove the whole punch unit from the saddle

finisher.
Booklet Finisher
B602
6. Washer [B] ( x 1)
7. Base cover [C] ( x 2, [D] x 2) (The
diagram shows the view seen from the
bottom.)
[B]
[C]
B602R975.WMF
[D]
SM
33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
8. Sensor unit [A] ( x 2, x 3)
B602R976.WMF
9. Punch unit motor [B] ( x 2)
[B]
B602R978.WMF
1.11.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR

[A]
1. Remove the whole punch unit from

the saddle finisher.
2. Registration motor [A]
( x 1, x 2
B602R979.WMF
B602
34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.11.3 CONTROLLER
1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)
2. Punch unit controller [A] (all 's, x 2)
NOTE: After replacing the punch unit controller,
adjust the sensor voltage and specify the
punch type (! 1.11.7). After replacing
the EEPROM, make the controller
initialize the new EEPROM (! 1.11.7).
[A]
Booklet Finisher
B602
B602R980.WMF
1.11.4 PHOTO SENSOR BOARD

1. Base cover (! 1.11.1)
2. Release the cables [A]
[B]
3. Board cover [B] ( x 1)
[A]
B602R981.WMF
SM
35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[A]
4. Photo sensor board [A] ( x 1)

NOTE: After replacing the photo sensor
board, adjust the sensor voltage
(! 1.11.7).
B602R982.WMF
1.11.5 LED BOARD

[A]
1. Base cover (! 1.11.1)
2. LED board [A] ( x 1, x 1)
NOTE: After replacing the LED board,
adjust the sensor voltage (!
1.11.7).
B602R983.WMF
B602
36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.11.6 CHAD BOX FULL SENSOR BOARD AND LED BOARD

1. Punch unit controller (! 1.11.3)
2. Remove the whole punch unit from the
saddle finisher.
3. Protector [A] ( x 2)
[A]
B602R984.WMF
4. Sensor board [B] ( x 1)

Booklet Finisher
B602
NOTE: After replacing the sensor board,

1.11.7).
[B]
B602R985.WMF
5. LED board [C] ( x 1, x 1)

NOTE: After replacing the LED board,
1.11.7).
[C]
B602R986.WMF
SM
37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1.11.7 ADJUSTMENT AND INITIALIZATION
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
Sensor Voltage
You make the controller adjust the LED
voltage of the sensors after you have
replaced any of the following units and
components:
Punch unit controller (! 1.11.3)
Photo sensor board (! 1.11.4)
LED board (! 1.11.5)
Chad box full sensor board (! 1.11.6)
Chad box LED board (! 1.11.6)
B602R995.WMF
[H]
Perform as follows:
1. Set the DIP switch [B] on the punch-unit controller board as
follows: 1 = ON, 2 = OFF, 3 = ON, 4 = OFF [H].
2. Push SW1002 [C] or SW1003 [D]. The controller starts to adjust
the LED voltage of the sensors.
3. Wait until LED1001 [E], LED1002 [F], and LED1003 [G] light.
This indicates the controller ends the adjustment.
[I]
4. Set the DIP switch as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4 =
OFF.
B602R996.WMF
B602R997.WMF
B602
38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Punch Type
[J]
After you replace the punch-unit controller, specify the punch type
as follows:
1. Set the DIP switch [B] on the punch-unit controller board as
follows: 1 = ON, 2 = ON, 3 = OFF, 4 = ON [J].
2. Push SW1002 [C] to select a punch type. As you push SW1002,
the three LEDs [E][F][G] change as shown in the table. These
LEDs indicate which punch type you have selected.
Punch Type
2 holes
2 or 3 holes
4 holes*
4 holes**
LED1001
Lights
Lights
LED1002
Lights
Lights
B602R998.WMF
LED1003
Lights
** For the North Europe model

* Four the other models
3. Push SW1003 [D]. The LEDs blink.
Booklet Finisher
B602
[K]
4. Push SW1003 again. The controller stores the punch type in the
EEPROM.
5. Set the DIP switches as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4
= OFF [K].
B602R997.WMF
[L]
EEPROM
After you replace the EEPROM [A], make the controller initialize the
new EEPROM as follows:
1. Set the DIP switch on the punch-unit controller board as follows:
1 = ON, 2 = ON, 3 = OFF, 4 = OFF [L].
2. Push SW1002 and SW1003 at the same time. The controller
starts initializing the EEPROM.
B602R999.WMF
3. Wait until LED1001, LED1002, and LED1003 light. This

indicates that the initialization ends.
[M]
4. Adjust the sensor voltage (! Sensor Voltage).

5. Specify the punch type (! Punch Type)
6. Set the DIP switches as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4
= OFF [M].
B602R997.WMF
SM
39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
2. SERVICE TABLES
2.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
Punch Controller Board
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those described
in the table below.
SW1001
1
OFF
ON
ON
ON
B602
2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
3
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
4
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Mode
Default
Sensor voltage adjustment
Punch type setting
EEPROM initialization
40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Description
See 1.11.7.
See 1.11.7.
See 1.11.7.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
GENERAL LAYOUT
3.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1
6
7
8
9
20
10
19
18
11
17
Booklet
Finisher
B602
12
13
16
14
15
B602D901.WMF
11. Stack-tray transport roller

12. Folding plate
13. Folder rollers
14. Booklet exit roller
15. Booklet tray
16. Booklet stopper
17. Stapler
18. Stack-tray lower roller
19. Stack-tray belt
20. Stack-tray upper roller
1. Regular tray
2. Jogger fence
3. Exit roller
4. Paddle
5. Stack tray stopper
6. Transport roller
7. Cam*
8. Punch*
9. Punch base*
10. Chad box*
* Installed with the optional punch unit.
SM
41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
DRIVE
3.2 DRIVE
4
5
8
B602D902.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B602
Paddle motor
Transport motor
Stapler slide motor
Stack-tray exit motor
Stapler/folder motor
6.
7.
8.
9.
Rear fence motor

Front fence motor
Lift motor
Finisher controller
42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CONTROLLER
3.3 CONTROLLER
Finisher
Punch (optional)
Motor
Controller board
Controller
board
Sensor
CPU (IC13)
EEP-ROM (IC12)
Motors
Communication IC
(IC11)
Clutches
EP-ROM (IC6)
Booklet
Finisher
B602
Switches
Regulator IC (IC1)
Sensors
Main unit
Controller board
B602D903.WMF
The finisher controller board communicates with the controllers of the optional
punch unit and the copier or printer. Listed below are the functions of important
ICs:
CPU (IC13): Controls the sequence or the processing.
EEP-ROM (CS12): Stores adjustment settings.
Communication IC (IC11): Contains the program.
EP-ROM (IC6): Communicates with other controllers.
Regulator IC (IC1): Generates 5-volt power source.
SM
43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
3.4 STACK TRAY

3.4.1 SIMPLE OUTPUT
Mechanism
The exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray. The rollers and belts on the
stack tray transport the paper to the regular tray. The finisher operates like this
even when it handles one sheet of paper.
[A]
Phase 1: The transport motor drives the

exit roller [A] to transport the paper to the
stack tray.
Phase 2: The paddle motor operates in
reverse to lower the stack-tray upper
roller [B] onto the paper.
Phase 3: The stack-tray exit motor
drives the stack-tray upper roller [B], the
stack-tray lower roller [E], and the stacktray belts [C] to transport the paper to the
regular tray.
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B602D904.WMF
Stack-Tray Belt
The stack tray has two stack-tray belts. Each stack-tray belt has a paper support
[D] on its surface. As stack-tray exit motor rotates the stack-tray belts
counterclockwise (viewed from the machine front), the paper supports moves
counterclockwise. While moving, these paper supports transport the paper from the
stack tray to the regular tray.
For the home position of the stack-tray belt, see Stack-Tray Belt Home Position in
section 3.4.5.
B602
44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
3.4.2 SORT
The finisher can sort and stack the paper. To do this, it uses the stack tray and the
regular tray.
[B]
Phase 1: The exit roller transports the

paper on the stack tray [A]. The front
fence motor or the rear fence motor drives
the jogger fence [B] to push the paper to
the front or rear. The jogger fence handles
the next paper in the same way, and
pushes the paper in the same direction.
[A]
For the jogger fence mechanism, see

section 3.4.4.
[C]
Paper Size
300 mm and longer
Shorter than 300 mm
Booklet
Finisher
B602
Phase 2: When the number of papers on

the stack tray reaches one of the following
numbers, the stack-tray upper roller, the
stack-tray lower roller, and the stack-tray
belts (! 3.4.1) transport the paper stack
[C] to the regular tray.
Number of Sheets
10
30
[D]
Phase 3: The finisher repeats Phase 1
and Phase 2 until it finishers handling the
first set of paper.
Phase 4: For the next set, the finisher
conducts phases 1 through 3 again. This
time, the other jogger fence pushes the
paper in the opposite direction in phase 1.
[E]
B602D905.WMF
Every time phase 3 ends, the finisher stacks one set of paper on the regular tray.
The diagram shows the paper stack [D] on the regular tray after the finisher stacks
four sets of paper. The arrow [E] indicates the direction of paper travel.
SM
45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
3.4.3 STACK
Paddle
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
B602D906.WMF
B602D907.WMF
There are four paddles [C] above the stack tray. These paddles push down the
paper [B] to the stack-tray stopper [D]. This aligns the right edges of the paper
(viewed from the machine front). The paddle motor [A] drives these paddles.
Stack-Tray Stopper
The stack-tray stopper [E] remains standing (as shown in the diagram) while the
exit roller is transporting the paper to the stack tray.
Before the stack-tray upper and lower
rollers transport the paper to the stapler
(! 3.5 and 3.7), the stapler slide motor
starts to move the stapler to the machine
front. The stapler pushes the mechanical
link of the stack-tray stopper (! 1.6.1).
This link pulls down the stack-tray
stopper.
[E]
B602D908.WMF
B602
46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism
[A]
[B]
B602D906.WMF
B602D909.WMF
Booklet
Finisher
B602
[C]
B602D910.WMF
The paddle motor [A] drives the stack-tray guide. The stack-tray guide stays away
from the paper (the upper position [B]) under either of the following conditions:
When the exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray
When the jogger fences adjust the direction of the paper
The paddle motor drives the stack-tray guide onto the paper (the lower position [C])
under either of the following conditions:
When the stapler operates
When the stack-tray upper roller, stack-tray lower roller, and stack-tray belt
transport the paper
SM
47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism

The paddle motor [A] moves the timing
belts [B][G], which drive the cam [D]. The
cam pushes up the first lever [C], which
pushes down the second lever [H]. The
second lever lowers the stack-tray guide
[I].
[C]
[D]
[E]
[B]
[A]
[F]
Home Position
The actuator [F] moves with the cam [D].
The actuator interrupts the home position
sensor [E] while the cam does not push
the first lever [C] (in other words, while the
stack-tray guide is in its upper position).
[G]
[K]
[J]
[H]
Stapler Switch
The second lever [H] moves with the
stapler-switch actuator [J]. When the first
lever pushes the second lever (in other
words, when the stack tray guide is in its
lower position), the actuator pushes the
stapler switch [K], turning it on. The stapler
can operate only when this switch is on.
[I]
Safety Feature
The stapler switch, along with the stackB602D949.WMF
tray guide mechanism, works as a safety
feature. The stapler operates only when the stack-tray guide is in the lower position.
When the stack-tray guide is in this position, the user cannot access the stapler
through the opening between the stack-tray guide and the stack tray. Therefore,
staples do not injure the user.
B602
48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
[B]
3.4.4 JOGGER FENCE
[I]
[G]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[A]
[H]
B602D911.WMF
Action
There are two jogger fences: the front fence [A] and the rear fence [B]. These two
jogger fences adjust the position of the paper [C] on the stack tray.
Drive
The front-jogger-fence motor [D] and the rear-jogger-fence motor [E] drive the
jogger fences.
Home Position
There are two home position sensors: the front-fence home-position sensor [F] and
the rear-fence home-position sensor [G]. Each jogger fence is linked to an actuator
[H][I]. When the main switch is turned on, the front and rear fence motors drive the
jogger fences until each home position sensor detected its actuator.
SM
49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet
Finisher
B602
[F]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
Paper Position
To align the paper to the front of the
stack tray, the jogger fences operate as
follows:
The rear fence [A] pushes the
paper [B] to the front each time the
exit roller transports the paper to
the stack tray.
The front fence [C] stays at the
front side.
Rear
[A]
[B]
[C]
Regular tray
Front
B602D912.WMF
Rear
To align the paper to the rear side of the

stack tray, the jogger fences operate as
follows:
The rear fence [D] stays at the
rear side.
The front fence [E] pushes the
paper [F] to the rear each time the
exit roller transports the paper to
the stack tray.
[D]
[E]
[F]
Regular tray
Front
B602
50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602D913.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STACK TRAY
3.4.5 PAPER OUTPUT

[A]
[I]
[F]
[G]
[H]
B602D906.WMF
[B]
[C]
B602D915.WMF
[E]
[J]
Booklet
Finisher
B602
[K]
B602D914.WMF
[D]
B602D916.WMF
Mechanism
The paper in the stack tray is transported to the regular tray as follows:
1. The paddle motor [A] moves the stack-tray guide to its lower position [G].
2. The stack-tray exit motor [B] drives the stack-tray upper roller [F], the stack-tray
lower roller [H], and the stack-tray belt [I]. The stack-tray belt has a pair of
paper supports [K] that push the paper [C] (! 3.4.1).
3. When the paper supports have left the home position, the controller starts to
count the pulses of the stack-tray exit motor.
4. When the pulse count reaches the predefined number (not adjustable), the
paddle motor moves the stack-tray guide to its upper position [J].
5. The paper supports keep pushing the paper to the regular tray [D].
Stack-Tray Belt Home Position

When the stack-tray belt is at its home position, one of the paper supports [K]
pushes the actuator of the home position sensor [E].
SM
51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLING
3.5 STAPLING
3.5.1 OVERVIEW
[B]
The finisher staples the paper as

follows:
[A]
Phase 1: The exit roller transports the

paper to the stack tray [A] until the
number of papers reaches a specified
number.
Phase 2: The jogger fences [B] adjust
the position of the paper. For the jogger
fence mechanism, see section 3.4.4.
[D]
[C]
Phase 3: The stapler [C] staples the

paper.
Phase 4: The stapled paper [D] is
transported to the regular tray.
When the finisher has conducted
phases 1 through 4, it starts the same
processing from phase 1.
B602D917.WMF
B602
52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLING
3.5.2 STAPLER
Mechanism
[A]
B602D918.WMF
Booklet
Finisher
B602
B602D919.WMF
B602D920.WMF
The stapler/folder motor [A] drives the stapler (! Action and Drive in section
3.5.3).
Stapler Switch
See Stapler Switch in section 3.4.3.
Sensors
There are three sensors inside the stapler:
Staple Home Position Sensor: The staple home position sensor detects the
cam position.
Staple Sensor: The staple sensor detects the staples in the cartridge.
Staple Ready Sensor: The staple ready sensor detects the upper end of
the staple.
The staple home position sensor above is different from the home position sensor
on the bottom of the stapler (! 3.5.3).
SM
53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLING
3.5.3 POSITIONING
Front
[A]
[C]
[B]
[K]
[D]
[J]
[I]
[E]
[F]
[G]
Rear
[H]
B602D921.WMF
Action and Drive

There is one stapler [A] in the finisher. The stapler is on six rails [C][D][E][I]. The
rail [C], rail [D], rail [I], and rail [J] transmit the drive power:
The rail [C] and rail [I] transmit the drive power of the stapler/folder motor.
The stapler uses this power to staple the paper (! 3.5.2).
The rails [D] and [J] transmit the drive power of the staple slide motor [H].
This drive power moves the stapler to the front or rear.
In the diagram above, [B] is the paper stack on the stack tray.
Home Position and Ready Position

The home position sensor [G] is at the bottom of the stapler; the sensor blade [F] is
on the frame of the unit. The controller references the home position sensor to set
the stapler in its ready position. Note that the stapler is not in the home position
when it is ready. The controller sets the stapler in the ready position as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
You turn the main switch on (or you close the front door of the finisher).
The slide motor drives the stapler from the rear side to the front side.
The home position sensor detects the sensor blade. The slide motor stops.
The slide motor starts in reverse to drive the stapler to the rear side. The
controller starts to count the pulses of the motor.
5. When the pulse count reaches a predefined number (not adjustable), the
controller stops the slide motor. The stapler is in its ready position.
B602
54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLING
Staple Position
The controller counts the pulses of the stapler slide motor to calculates the
distance between the ready position (! Home Position and Ready Position) and
the staple position
Front-End One Staple
[A]
[C]
1. Before the stapler slide motor starts,

the stapler is in the ready position [C].
2. The stapler slide motor starts to slide
the stapler to the front. The controller
counts the pulses of the stapler slide
motor.
[B]
3. While moving to the front, the stapler

lowers the stack-tray stopper [B] (!
Stack-Tray Stopper in 3.4.3).
[D]
Booklet
Finisher
B602
4. When the pulse count reaches the

B602D922.WMF
predefined number (not adjustable),
the controller stops the stapler slide motor. The stapler is in the stapling
position [D].
5. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paler [A].
[F]
Rear-End One Staple

1. The stapler is in the ready position [F].
[E]
2. The stapler/folder motor drives the

stapler. The stapler staples the paper.
The stapler does not move to the front.
The stack-tray stopper [E] keeps
standing
B602D923.WMF
SM
55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
STAPLING
[G]
Two Staples
[H]
1. Before the stapler slide motor starts,

the stapler is in the ready position [G].
[J]
2. The stapler slide motor starts to slide

the stapler to the front. The controller
counts the pulses of the stapler slide
motor.
[I]
3. While moving to the front, the stapler

lowers the stack-tray stopper [J].
B602D924.WMF
4. When the pulse count reaches the

predefined number (not adjustable), the controller stops the stapler slide motor.
The stapler is in the first stapling position [H].
5. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paler.
6. The stapler slide motor starts to slide the stapler to the front. The controller
counts the pulses of he stapler slide motor.
7. When the pulse cont reaches the predefined number (not adjustable), the
controller stops the stapler slide motor. The stapler is in the second stapling
position [I].
8. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paper.
Saddle Stitch
1. The stack-tray upper and lower rollers
transport the paper to the stapler unit
until the center of the paper [K]
reaches the stapling positions (!
3.7.4).
2. The stapler operates as described in
the previous paragraph (! Two
Staples).
B602D925.WMF
B602
56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
[K]
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REGULAR TRAY
3.6 REGULAR TRAY
[A]
[E]
[B]
[F]
[C]
[G]
Booklet
Finisher
B602
[D]
[H]
[I]
B602D926.WMF
Action and Drive

The lift motor [I] drives the regular tray to adjust its height.
Ready Position
Before the stack-tray rollers and belts transport the paper to the regular tray, the lift
motor sets the regular tray in the ready position:
1. The lift motor lowers the regular tray. The controller references the lift motor
encoder sensor [D] to count how many turns the motor makes.
2. When the number of turns reaches a predefined number (not adjustable), the
controller stops the lift motor.
3. The lift motor operates in reverse, lifting the regular tray.
4. The paper height sensor [F] detects the edge [G] of the tray or the top of the
paper stack (!Paper Sensor). The lift motor stops.
SM
57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
REGULAR TRAY
Paper Sensor
As illustrated in the previous paragraph (! Ready Position), the paper height
sensor [F] can detect either the tray edge or the paper stack. Therefore, the signals
from the paper height sensor are not enough to let the controller know if any paper
is on the tray.
To find the paper on the regular tray, the controller references the paper sensor [E].
This sensor detects the paper but does not detect the tray.
Paper Full
While the stack-tray rollers and belts continue to transport the paper to the regular
tray, the ready position becomes lower (! Ready Position). When the number of
paper reaches about 500 sheets, the paper full sensor [B] is interrupted by its
actuator. When the number of paper reaches about 1,000 sheets, the lower limit
sensor [C] is interrupted by its actuator. To decide the paper-full status, the
controller considers these sensor signals and the paper sizes. The table lists the
paper sizes and the numbers of paper in the paper-full status.
Paper Size
A3, B4, DLT, LG
Smaller sizes
Number of Paper
About 500 sheets
About 1,000 sheets
Fail Safe Feature

When the regular tray reaches its uppermost position, the upper limit sensor [A]
detects it. The finisher stops its operation.
The regular tray does not reach this position in normal operations. The upper limit
sensor works as a failsafe feature. If the regular tray fails to actuate the paper
height sensor [F] because of some hardware error, this failsafe feature works.
B602
58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SADDLE STITCH
3.7 SADDLE STITCH

3.7.1 OVERVIEW
Booklet
Finisher
B602
B602D927.WMF
The saddle stitch process consists of the following four phases:

1. The stack tray aligns the paper (!3.7.2).
2. The stapler staples the paper (! 3.7.3).
3. The rollers and the sensor cooperate to transport the paper in the folding
position (! 3.7.4).
4. The folding plate and folder rollers cooperate to fold the paper and to transport
it to the booklet tray (! 3.7.5).
SM
59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SADDLE STITCH
3.7.2 STACK TRAY

The stack tray operates as follows:
[A]
[B]
1. The stack-tray stopper aligns the right

edges of the paper in the stack tray (!
Stack-Tray Stopper in 3.4.1).
2. The jogger fences adjust the position of
the paper (! 3.4.4).
3. When a specified number of paper [A] is
stacked, the paddle motor operates in
reverse to lower the stack-tray guide and
the stack-tray upper roller [B] onto the
paper.
[C]
4. The stack-tray exit motor drives the

stack-tray upper roller and lower roller to
transport the paper to the stapler unit.
B602D928.WMF
5. The booklet clutch [D] turns on. This

clutch transmits the driver power of the
transport motor to the stack-tray
transport roller [C].
[D]
B602D950.WMF
3.7.3 STAPLER
The stapler waits for the paper in the ready position, and operates when the paper
is set to the stapler positions (! 3.5.3). When the finisher is processing one sheet
of paper, the stapler does not staple the paper.
B602
60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SADDLE STITCH
3.7.4 PAPER TRANSPORT
[A]
B602D931.WMF
B602D930.WMF
The rollers and the sensor cooperate to transport the paper as follows:
1. When the leading edge of the paper stack reaches the folder home position
sensor [A], the controller starts to count the pulses of the transport motor.
2. When the pulse count reaches the number equivalent to the distance [B]
between the stapler and the folding plate, the transport motor stops. The center
of the paper is in the folding position.
SM
61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet
Finisher
B602
[B]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SADDLE STITCH
3.7.5 PAPER OUTPUT

Folding Plate Mechanism
[E]
[A]
[F]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B602D932.WMF
B602D933.WMF
The folding plate is driven by the stapler/folder motor. The folding plate operates as
follows:
1. The folding plate waits for the stack-tray transport roller to transport the paper.
2. When the center of the paper is set in the folding position, the stapler/folder
motor drives the folding plate [C] and the folder rollers [D]. The folding plate
presses the paper between the folder rollers.
3. The folder rollers feed the paper about 10 mm, the folding plate returns to its
home position. The folder rollers keep feeding the paper.
Folding Plate Home Position

The home position of the folding plate is detected by the folder home position
sensor [E]. The actuator [F] is linked to the folding plate by way of cam [A] and
lever [B] (though they are separated in the diagram).
The sensor also detects the home position of the folder rollers (! Folder Rollers
Home Position).
B602
62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SADDLE STITCH
Folder Rollers Mechanism

[F]
[A]
[G]
[B]
[H]
[C]
[E]
B602D935.WMF
B602D934.WMF
The folder rollers are driven by the stapler/folder motor. The folder rollers operate
as follows:
1. The folder rollers [B] feed the paper pressed by the folding plate.
2. The folder rollers and the booklet exit rollers [C] feed the paper [D] and
transport it to the booklet tray [E].
Folder Rollers Home Position

The home position of the folder rollers is detected by the folder home position
sensor [F]. The folder home position sensor blade [A] is linked to the folder rollers
by way of the gears [G][H] (though they are separated in the diagram).
The sensor also detects the home position of the folding plate (! Folding Plate
Home Position).
SM
63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet
Finisher
B602
[D]
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SADDLE STITCH
Shape of Folder Rollers

Folding Plate
[A]
B602D936.WMF
Viewed from the front or rear, each folder rollers is a half-circle [A] except both
ends and middle. This structure prevents the rollers from crumpling the paper stack.
B602
64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

3.8.1 REGISTRATION
[C]
Slide Unit
The slide unit includes the punch motor
[C], the punch [A], and paper edge and
size sensors [B]. This unit is driven by the
registration motor [E].
[B]
[A]
Home Position
The home position of the slide unit (in
other words, the home position of the
paper edge sensors) is detected by the
registration home position sensor [F].
[F]
Registration
Booklet
Finisher
B602
B602D937.WMF
[E]
Registration is executed as follows:

1. When the paper [D] comes from the main
unit, the leading edge [I] of the paper is
detected by the paper edge sensor [H].
[G]
[D]
2. The registration motor starts to operate.

The slide unit [G] moves to the front.
[H]
[I]
SM
65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602D938.WMF
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3. One of the paper size sensors [A] that

corresponds to the paper size detects the
rear end [B] of the paper.
[A]
[B]
4. When the slide unit is set in place, the

registration motor stops its operations.
B602D939.WMF
5. When the paper edge sensor [C] detects the

trailing edge of the paper, the transport
motor [D] (of the finisher) stops.
[C]
B602D940.WMF
[D]
B602D941.WMF
B602
66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.8.2 PUNCH
Types of Punch Unit
There are four types:
2 holes
2 or 3 holes (The user can select 2-hole punching or 3-hole punching from
the operation panel or the printer driver.)
4 holes
4 holes
There are two 4-hole types: for the North Europe models and for the other models.
Drive
[C]
[A]
Booklet
Finisher
B602
[D]
[B]
B602D942.WMF
The diagram shows the 2 or 3 holes type, which has five punch cams [B]: two of
them are for 2-hole punching and the other three are for 3-hole punching. The
punch motor [A] drives the punch cams.
Home Position
The controller uses two sensors, the home position sensor [D] and the encoder
sensor [C], to set the punch cams in the home position. The controller fine-adjusts
the home position by referencing the encoder sensor signals.
SM
67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Two Holes and Four Holes

When the finisher punches holes, the punch motor drives all punches at the same
time.
[A]
Phase 1
1) The punch is in the home position.
1)
The punch home position sensor [A]
is on. When the first sheet of paper is
set, the punch cam starts a forward
turn.
2) When the punch cam has made a
90-degree turn, a hole is punched.
180-degree turn, the punch comes
back to the home position. Note that
the punch cam [B] is not in the
previous position.
Phase 2
4)
4) The punch is in the home position.
The punch home position sensor is
on. When the second sheet of paper
is set, the punch cam starts a
backward turn.
5) When the punch cam has made a 90degree turn, a hole is punched.
6) When the punch cam has made 180degree turn, the punch comes back
to its home position. Note that the
punch cam is not in the previous
position but in the same position as
the start fo phase 1.
2)
3)
[B]
B602D943.WMF
5)
6)
B602D944.WMF
Phase 3
Phase 1 and phase 2 are alternately executed.
B602
68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Two or Three Holes

There are five punches. When the finisher punches holes, the punch drives all
punches at the same time. But three of them do not reach the paper (when the
finisher is punching two holes), or two of them do not reach the paper (when the
finisher is punching three holes).
Phase 1
1)
2)
3)
1)
2)
3)
[A]
B602D946.WMF
Standby
Working
Standby punches operate as

follows:
1) When the first sheet of paper is
set, the punch cam starts a
forward turn.
90-degree turn, the punch is away
from the paper.
180-degree turn, the punch is
back to the home position.
Working punches operate as

follows:
1) The punch is in the home
position. The punch home
position sensor [A] is on. When
the first sheet of paper is set, the
punch cam starts a forward turn.
180-degree turn, a hole is
punched.
180-degree turn, the punch
comes back to the home position.
Note that the punch cam [B] is not
in the previous position.
SM
69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B602
Booklet
Finisher
B602
[B]
B602D945.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Phase 2
4)
5)
6)
4)
5)
6)
[A]
B602D948.WMF
[B]
B602D947.WMF
Standby
Working
Working punches operate as

follows:
4) The punch is in the home
position. The punch home
position sensor [A] is on. When
the next sheet of paper is set, the
punch cam starts a backward
turn.
90-degree turn, a hole is
punched.
180-degree turn, the punch
Note that the punch cam [B] is not
in the previous position but in the
same position as the start of
phase 1.
Standby punches operate as

follows:
4) When the next sheet of paper is
set, the punch cam starts a
backward turn.
90-degree turn, the punch is away
from the paper.
180-degree turn. the punch
Phase 3
Phase 1 and phase 2 are alternately executed.
B602
70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
FAX OPTION TYPE 3245
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
1.1 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW .......................................................................... 1
1.2 FAX UNIT ..................................................................................................... 3
Accessory Check ..................................................................................... 3
Installation Procedure .............................................................................. 4
When you use the hand set or an external telephone:............................. 5
1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT .................................................................................. 6
Accessory Check ..................................................................................... 6
Installation Procedure .............................................................................. 7
Do the procedures below for either single port or double ports................ 8
1.4 EXPANSION MEMORY ............................................................................. 11
1.5 HANDSET .................................................................................................. 12
Accessory Check ................................................................................... 12
Installation Procedure ............................................................................ 13
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........................................14

2.1 NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT............................................. 14
3. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................15
3.1 ERROR CODES......................................................................................... 15
3.2 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES......................................... 27
3.3 FAX SC CODES......................................................................................... 30
3.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 30
3.3.2 SC1201.............................................................................................. 30
3.3.3 FAX SC CODE TABLE ...................................................................... 31
4. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................32
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE..................................................................... 32
4.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION...................................... 32
Entering and Exiting SP Mode ............................................................... 32
SP Mode Button Summary .................................................................... 33
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ............ 34
Selecting the Program Number.............................................................. 34
4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ............................................. 35
4.2 BIT SWITCHES .......................................................................................... 41
4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ........................................................................ 41
4.2.2 I-FAX SWITCHES.............................................................................. 51
4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES ....................................................................... 57
4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES........................................................ 63
4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES .................................................................................. 71
4.2.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES............................................................................ 78
4.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES ............................................................... 84
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES........................................................... 84
4.2.9 IP FAX SWITCHES ........................................................................... 84
4.3 NCU PARAMETERS .................................................................................. 90
4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ......................................... 99
4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ....................................................... 99
4.4.2 PARAMETERS ................................................................................ 100
4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES.................................................................. 103
5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS .......................................112

5.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................................. 112
5.2 BOARDS .................................................................................................. 113
5.2.1 FCU ................................................................................................. 113
5.2.2 MBU................................................................................................. 114
5.2.3 SG3 BOARD.................................................................................... 115
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH ................................................................................. 116
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION ............................................................................. 116
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission.................. 117
Immediate Transmission...................................................................... 117
JBIG Transmission............................................................................... 117
Adjustments ......................................................................................... 117
5.3.2 RECEPTION.................................................................................... 118
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES ...................................................... 119
5.4.1 MULTI-PORT................................................................................... 119
5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER .................................................................... 120
5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION ............................................. 121
Mail Transmission ................................................................................ 121
Mail Reception ..................................................................................... 122
Handling Mail Reception Errors ........................................................... 124
Secure Internet Reception ................................................................... 124
Transfer Request ................................................................................. 125
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode) ............................................................ 126
Subject and Level of Importance ......................................................... 126
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type .................................. 126
Subjects Displayed on the PC ............................................................. 126
E-mail Messages ................................................................................. 127
Message Disposition Notification (MDN).............................................. 128
Handling Reports ................................................................................. 129
5.5 IP-FAX ...................................................................................................... 130
What is IP-FAX? .................................................................................. 130
T.38 Packet Format ............................................................................. 130
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................131
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B712
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................... 131

CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS .......................................... 132
IFAX SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. 133
IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................... 134
MACHINE CONFIGURATION .................................................................... 135
ii
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
WARNING
1. Never install telephone during a lightning storm.
2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is
specifically designed for wet locations.
3. Never touch un-insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
4. Use caution when you install or modify telephone lines.
5. Do not use the telephone (other than a cordless type) during an
electrical storm. There may be remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
6. Do not use a telephone or cellular phone to report a gas leak in the
vicinity of the leak.
CAUTION
1. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord before you
install the fax unit.
2. The fax unit contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if
a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same
or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacture. Discard
batteries in accordance with the manufactures instructions and local
regulations.
NOTE FOR AUSTRALIA
Unit must be connected to Telecommunication Network through a line
cord, which meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
The flowchart shows the installation procedure.
Start
Do you install the

expansion memory?
No
Yes
Install the fax unit
in the copier.
Install the expansion

memory in the fax unit.
Do you install
the handset?
No
Yes
Install the handset
in the copier.
Specify necessary
settings.
Do you install
the optional G3 unit?
No
Check the operations.
Yes
Install the optional G3
unit in the fax unit.
End
B712I910.WMF
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
1.2 FAX UNIT

Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the following accessories:
Description
Qty
1. Fax key ................................................................................2

2. Fax panel.............................................................................1
3. Stamp ..................................................................................1
4. G3 decal ..............................................................................1
5. Serial number decal.............................................................1
6. FCC decal (for North America model only) ..........................1
7. Cable holder ........................................................................1
8. Base bracket (for North America model only) ......................1
9. Core.....................................................................................1
10.Telephone line (for North America model only) ..................1
1
6
4
7
5
10
B712I906.WMF
NOTE: You need the cable holder when you install the optional handset (North
America model only).
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT
CAUTION
Do the following before you install this option:
1. Print out all data in the printer buffer if there is a printer option in the
machine.
2. Press the operation switch to the standby mode. Make sure the power
LED is not lit. Then turn off the main switch and disconnect the power
cord and the network cable.
1. Remove the option cover [A]

( x 2).
2. Change the position of the jogger
switch [B] from "OFF" to "ON".
3. Carefully press down the MBU.
NOTE: Make sure that the MBU is
seated correctly. If not, SC819
occurs.
[D]
4. Install the fax unit [C] ( x 2).
5. Attach the serial number decal [D] on [B]
the rear cover.
[A]
6. Attach the FCC decal on the rear

cover (only for USA/Canada).
[C]
[E]
B712I001.WMF
[F]
[H]
7. Remove the key cover [E]. Then

install one of the fax keys [F].
[G]
8. Remove the panel cover [G]. Then

install the fax panel [H].
B603I902.WMF
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX UNIT
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
9. Attach the G3 decal [A].
[A]
B603I903.WMF
10. Install the stamp [B] to the ADF [C] (if installed).
11. Connect the telephone line to LINE 1 jack at the
left of the machine.
[C]
[B]
13. Make sure that the date and time are correctly set.
G307I105.WMF
14. Enter the service mode. Then program the serial number into the fax unit (SP3102-000). You can find the serial number on the serial number decal (attached
to the machine in step 5).
When you use the hand set or an external telephone:
Put the core [A] to the telephone line for the handset or an
external telephone as shown.
[A]
B178I564.WMF
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT

Accessory Check
Description
Qty
1. G3 board..............................................................................1
2. Interface board ....................................................................1
3. CCU drive board ..................................................................1
4. Cable ...................................................................................1
5. Flat cable .............................................................................1
6. Clamp ..................................................................................1
7. Screw M3 x 6 .......................................................................10
8. Telephone line (for North America model only) ...................1
B712
B713I101.WMF
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
CAUTION
1. Print out all data in the printer buffer if there is a printer option in the
machine.
2. Press the operation switch to the standby mode. Make sure the power
LED is not lit. Then turn off the main switch and disconnect the power
cord and the network cable.
[B]
[A]
B713I001.WMF
1. Remove the fax controller board [A] from the fax controller base [B] ( x 3,
x 6).
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
Do the procedures below for either single port or double ports.

For Single Port Installation
[A]
[B]
[G]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[C]
B713I002.WMF
1. Install the CCU drive board [A] on the spacers ( x 4).

2. Install the flat cable [B] to the CCU drive board.
NOTE: Make sure that the blue side of the flat cable faces up.
3. Connect the G3 board [C] to the interface board [D].
4. Remove the "LINE 2" cover [E].
5. Attach the interface board and G3 board to the spacers ( x 6).
6. Connect the cable [F] to the interface board and CCU drive board.
7. Attach the clamp [G] and bind the cable [F] with this clamp.
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
For Dual Port Installation

[A]
[B]
[H]
[G]
[E]
[F]
[D]
[C]
B713I003.WMF
1. Install the CCU drive board [A] on the spacers ( x 4).

2. Install the flat cable [B] to the CCU drive board.
3. Connect the two G3 boards [C] to the interface board [D].
4. Remove the "LINE 2" cover [E] and the "LINE 3" cover [F].
5. Attach the interface board and two G3 boards to the spacers ( x 8).
6. Connect the cable [G] to the interface board and CCU drive board.
7. Attach the clamp [H] and bind the cable [G] with this clamp.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3 INTERFACE UNIT
For Single and Dual Ports Installation

1. Install the fax-controller board to the fax-controller base ( x 6, x 3).
2. Carefully press down the MBU.
NOTE: Make sure that the MBU is seated correctly. If not, SC819 occurs. Also
make sure that the jumper switch on the MBU is set to "ON".
3. Connect the flat cable to the fax controller board.
4. Install the fax unit to the copier.
6. Enter the service mode. Set bit 1 of communication switch 16 to 1.
7. Set bit 3 of communication switch 16 to "1" (SP1-104-023) if you installed two
G3 boards.
9. Print out the system parameter list. Then check that G3 shows as an option.
10. Set up and program the items required for PSTN-2 communications.
B712
10
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
EXPANSION MEMORY
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
1.4 EXPANSION MEMORY

CAUTION
1. Print out all data in the printer buffer.
2. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the
network cable.
[A]
B712I002.WMF
1. Install the expansion memory [A] into the memory slot.

2. Assemble the copier.
3. Print out the system parameter list, and check that the correct memory size is
shown (Fax SP6-101).
SM
11
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
HANDSET
1.5 HANDSET
The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.
Accessory Check
Description
Qty
1. Handset cradle ....................................................................1

2. Handset ...............................................................................1
3. Screw M3 x 8 .......................................................................2
4. Screw M3 x 14 .....................................................................2
B433I909.WMF
B712
12
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
HANDSET
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
[E]
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[G]
[F]
B603I907.WMF
1. Make two holes [A] in the scanner left cover.

2. Attach the bracket [B] enclosed with the fax unit ( x 2) as shown.
3. Remove the label [C] from the handset cradle [D].
4. Attach the cradle to the bracket [B] ( x 2). Then replace the label [C].
5. Install the handset [E] on the cradle.
6. Connect the cable [F] to the TEL jack at the rear of the machine.
7. Attach the cable holder [G].
NOTE: The cable holder is distributed with the fax unit (not with the handset).
8. Fix the cable to the holder.
SM
13
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT

2.1 NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT
1. When replacing the FCU board, remove the MBU board from the old FCU
board and install it on the new FCU board.
2. Adjust the date and time (UP System Settings Timer Setting Set
Date/Set Time).
NOTE: 1) Do not turn off the battery switch (SW1).
2) Print out the system parameter list (SP6-101) to confirm the settings.
B712
14
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to
fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the
error code display and on the service report.
Code
0-00
Meaning
DIS/NSF not detected within
40 s of Start being pressed
0-01
DCN received unexpectedly
0-03
Incompatible modem at the

other end
CFR or FTT not received
after modem training
0-04
0-05
SM
Unsuccessful after modem

training at 2400 bps
Suggested Cause/Action
Check the line connection.
Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
The machine at the other end may be
incompatible.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.
The other party is out of paper or has a jammed
printer.
The other party pressed Stop during
communication.
The other terminal is incompatible.
Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
Replace the FCU or NCU.
The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to
another machine.
If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be
a bad line.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.
Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.
15
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
ERROR CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
0-06
Meaning
The other terminal did not
reply to DCS
0-07
No post-message response
from the other end after a
page was sent
0-08
The other end sent RTN or

PIN after receiving a page,
because there were too
many errors
0-14
Non-standard post message

response code received
B712
Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
The other end may be defective or incompatible;
try sending to another machine.
Cross reference
The other end may have jammed or run out of
paper.
The other end user may have disconnected the
call.
Check for a bad line.
The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.
The other end may have jammed, or run out of
paper or memory space.
settings.
The other end may have a defective
modem/NCU/FCU; try sending to another
machine.
Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try
sending to another machine.
Noisy line: resend.
settings.
Cross reference
16
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
0-15
Meaning
The other terminal is not
capable of specific
functions.
0-16
CFR or FTT not detected

after modem training in
confidential or transfer mode
0-20
Facsimile data not received

within 6 s of retraining
0-21
EOL signal (end-of-line)

from the other end not
received within 5 s of the
previous EOL signal
0-22
The signal from the other

end was interrupted for
more than the acceptable
modem carrier drop time
(default: 200 ms)
SM
The other terminal is not capable of accepting the
following functions, or the other terminals memory
is full.
Confidential rx
Transfer function
SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
settings.
The other end may have disconnected, or it may
be defective; try calling another machine.
If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a line
problem.
Cross reference
Try calling another fax machine.
Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first
line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Check the connections between the FCU, NCU, &
line.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
The remote machine may be defective or may
have disconnected.
Cross reference
Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
Defective remote terminal.
Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Cross reference
Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch
0A, bits 0 and 1
17
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
ERROR CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
0-23
Meaning
Too many errors during
reception
0-30
The other terminal did not

reply to NSS(A) in AI short
protocol mode
0-32
The other terminal sent a

DCS, which contained
functions that the receiving
machine cannot handle.
Polarity changed during
communication
FCE does not detect the
SG3-V34.
0-52
0-55
0-56
0-70
The stored message data

exceeds the capacity of the
mailbox in the SG3-V34.
The communication mode
specified in CM/JM was not
available
(V.8 calling and called
terminal)
0-74
The calling terminal fell back

to T.30 mode, because it
could not detect ANSam
after sending CI.
0-75
The called terminal fell back

could not detect a CM in
response to ANSam
(ANSam timeout).
B712
Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or
rx error criteria.
Cross reference
Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0
and 1
settings.
The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
Check the protocol dump list.
Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.

Retry communication.
FCU firmware or board defective.
SG3-V34 firmware or board defective.
SG3-V34 firmware or board defective.
The other terminal did not have a compatible
communication mode (e.g., the other terminal was
a V.34 data modem and not a fax modem.)
A polling tx file was not ready at the other terminal
when polling rx was initiated from the calling
terminal.
The calling terminal could not detect ANSam due
to noise, etc.
ANSam was too short to detect.
Check the line connection and condition.
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
The terminal could not detect ANSam.
Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
18
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
0-76
0-77
0-79
0-80
0-81
0-82
0-83
0-84
0-85
0-86
0-87
0-88
SM
Meaning
The calling terminal fell back
could not detect a JM in
response to a CM
(CM timeout).
The called terminal fell back
could not detect a CJ in
response to JM
(JM timeout).
The called terminal detected
CI while waiting for a V.21
signal.
The line was disconnected
due to a timeout in V.34
phase 2 line probing.
due to a timeout in V.34
phase 3 equalizer training.
due to a timeout in the V.34
phase 4 control channel
start-up.
due to a timeout in the V.34
control channel restart
sequence.
due to abnormal signaling in
V.34 phase 4 control
channel start-up.
due to abnormal signaling in
V.34 control channel restart.
because the other terminal
requested a data rate using
MPh that was not available
in the currently selected
symbol rate.
The control channel started
after an unsuccessful
primary channel.
because PPR was
transmitted/received 9
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.
The called terminal could not detect a CM due to
noise, etc.
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to
noise, etc.
A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot pass
JM to the other end.
Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back to
T.30 mode.
The guard timer expired while starting these
phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or low
signal level can cause these errors.
If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
Try making a call at a later time.
Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
dedicated tx parameters.
Try increasing the tx level.
Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.
Try increasing the tx level.
Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same
error is frequent when receiving from multiple
senders.
The signal did not stop within 10 s.
Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
The signal did not stop within 10 s.

If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
The other terminal was incompatible.
Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
The receiving terminal restarted the control

channel because data reception in the primary
channel was not successful.
This does not result in an error communication.
Try using a lower data rate at the start.
Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
19
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
ERROR CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-23
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-50
2-51
2-53
4-01
4-10
5-10
5-20
5-21
Meaning
Only one V.21 connection
flag was received
Modem clock irregularity
Modem initialization error
JBIG compression or
reconstruction error
JBIG ASIC error
JBIG data reconstruction
error (BIH error)
error (Float marker error)
error (End marker error)
error (Timeout)
JBIG trailing edge maker
error
The machine resets itself for
a fatal FCU system error
The machine resets itself
because of a fatal
communication error
Snd msg() in the manual
task is an error because the
mailbox for the operation
task is full.
Line current was cut
Communication failed
because of an ID Code
mismatch (Closed Network)
or Tel. No./CSI mismatch
(Protection against Wrong
Connections)
DCR timer expired
Storage impossible because
of a lack of memory
Memory overflow
5-23
Print data error when

printing a substitute rx or
confidential rx message
5-25
6-00
SAF file access error

G3 ECM - T1 time out
during reception of facsimile
data
B712
Replace the FCU.
Replace the FCU.

Update the modem ROM.
Replace the FCU.

JBIG data error
Check the senders JBIG function.
Update the MBU ROM.
FCU defective
Check the destination device.
If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
FCU.
If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
FCU.
The user did the same operation many times, and

this gave too much load to the machine.
Check the line connector.

Check the connection between FCU and NCU.
Replace the FCU or the NCU.
Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs
programmed correctly, then resend.
The machine at the other end may be defective.
Replace the FCU.

Temporary memory shortage.
Test the SAF memory.
Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board
Test the SAF memory.
Ask the other end to resend the message.
Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board.
Replace the FCU or EXMEM board.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
20
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
6-02
6-04
Meaning
G3 ECM - no V.21 signal
was received
G3 ECM - EOR was
received
G3 ECM - RTC not detected
6-05
G3 ECM - facsimile data

frame not received within 18
s of CFR, but there was no
line fail
6-06
G3 ECM - coding/decoding
error
6-08
G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received

in reply to PPS.NULL
6-09
G3 ECM - ERR received
6-10
G3 ECM - error frames still

received at the other end
after all communication
attempts at 2400 bps
6-21
V.21 flag detected during

high speed modem
communication
The machine resets the
sequence because of an
abnormal handshake in the
V.34 control channel
6-22
6-99
13-17
V.21 signal not stopped

within 6 s
SIP user name registration
error
13-18
SIP server access error
14-00
SMTP Send Error
SM
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
Code
6-01

Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
Cross reference
Defective FCU.
The other terminal may be defective.
The other end pressed Stop during
communication.
The other terminal may be defective.
Check for a noisy line.
Adjust the tx levels of the communicating
machines.
See code 6-05.
Check for line noise.
Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the
dedicated tx parameter for that address).
The other terminal may be defective or
incompatible.
Check for line noise.
If the same error occurs frequently, replace the
FCU.
Replace the FCU.
Double registration of the SIP user name.
Capacity for user-name registration in the SIP
server is not sufficient.
Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.
Defective SIP server.
Error occurred during sending to the SMTP server.
Occurs for any error other than 14-01 to 16. For
example, the mail address of the system
administrator is not registered.
21
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
14-01
Meaning
SMTP Connection Failed
14-02
No Service by SMTP
Service (421)
Access to SMTP Server
Denied (450)
14-03
14-04
14-05
14-06
14-07
Rev. 05/2006
Access to SMTP Server

Denied (550)
SMTP Server HDD Full
(452)
User Not Found on SMTP

Server (551)
Data Send to SMTP Server
Failed (4XX)
14-08
Data Send to SMTP Server

Failed (5XX)
14-09
14-10
Authorization Failed for

Sending to SMTP Server
Addresses Exceeded
14-11
Buffer Full
14-12
Data Size Too Large
14-13
Send Cancelled
14-14
Internal processing error
14-15
Email parameter error
14-16
Email partitioning error
14-17
Defective authentication
ticket
B712
Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout)
because the server could not be found.
The IP address for the SMTP server is not stored
in the machine.
The DNS IP address is not registered.
Network not operating correctly.
Defective PC that does file transfer
SMTP server operating incorrectly.
Failed to access the SMTP server because the
access is denied.
SMTP server operating incorrectly
Failed to access the SMTP server because the HDD
is full.
SMTP Server hard disk full.
Insufficient HDD space in the PC that does file
transfer
The user does not exist locally.
transmission fails.
transmission fails.
POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization failed.
Incorrect setting for file transfer
Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the limit
for the SMTP server.
The send buffer is full so the transmission could not
be completed. Buffer is full due to using Scan-toEmail while the buffer is being used send mail at the
same time.
Transmission was cancelled because the detected
size of the file was too large.
Processing is interrupted because the user pressed
Stop.
Update the Fax and FCU firmware to the latest
version.
version.
version.
version.
22
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
14-18
Meaning
Internal processing error
14-30
MCS File Creation Failed
14-31
UFS File Creation Failed
14-32
Cancelled the Mail Due to

Error Detected by NFAX
No Mail Address For the
Machine
Mail Job Task Error
14-33
14-50
14-51
UCS Destination Download

Error
14-60
Send Cancel Failed
14-61
Notification Mail Send Failed

for All Destinations
POP3/IMAP4 Server Not
Registered
15-01
15-02
15-03
15-10
15-11
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account

Information Not Registered
Mail Address Not Registered
DCS Mail Receive Error
Connection Error
15-12
Authorization Error
SM
version.
Failed to create the MCS file because:
The number of files created with other
applications on the Document Server has
exceeded the limit.
HDD is full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
UFS file could not be created:
Not enough space in UFS area to handle both
Scan-to-Email and IFAX transmission.
HDD full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
Error detected with NFAX and send was cancelled
due to a software error.
Neither the mail address of the machine nor the mail
address of the network administrator is registered.
Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send was
cancelled:
Address book was being edited during creation of
the notification mail.
Software error.
Not even one return notification can be downloaded:
The address book was being edited.
The number for the specified destination does not
exist (it was deleted or edited after the job was
created).
The cancel operation by the user failed to cancel the
send operation.
All addresses for return notification mail failed.
At startup, the system detected that the IP address
of the POP3/IMAP4 server has not been registered
in the machine.
The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not been
registered.
The mail address has not been registered.
Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.
The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be
found:
The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server is
not stored in the machine.
The DNS IP address is not registered.
Network not operating correctly.
POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:
Incorrect IFAX user name or password.
Access was attempted by another device, such as
the PC.
POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.
23
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
ERROR CODES
Rev. 05/2006
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Rev. 05/2006
Code
15-13
Meaning
Receive Buffer Full
15-14
Mail Header Format Error
15-15
Mail Divide Error
15-16
15-17
Mail Size Receive Error

Receive Timeout
15-18
15-31
Incomplete Mail Received

Final Destination for
Transfer Request Reception
Format Error
Send/Delivery Destination
Error
15-39
15-41
SMTP Receive Error
15-42
Off Ramp Gateway Error
15-43
Address Format Error
15-44
Addresses Over
15-61
15-62
Attachment File Format

Error
TIFF File Compatibility Error
15-63
TIFF Parameter Error
15-64
TIFF Decompression Error
B712
Occurs only during manual reception. Transmission
cannot be received due to insufficient buffer space.
The buffer is being used for mail send or Scan-toEmail.
The mail header is not standard format. For
example, the Date line description is incorrect.
The e-mail is not in standard format. There is no
boundary between parts of the e-mail, including the
header.
The mail cannot be received because it is too large.
May occur during manual receiving only because
the network is not operating correctly.
Only one portion of the mail was received.
The format of the final destination for the transfer
request was incorrect.
The transmission cannot be delivered to the final
destination:
Destination file format is incorrect.
Could not create the destination for the file
transmission.
Reception rejected because the transaction
exceeded the limit for the Auth. E-mail RX setting.
The delivery destination address was specified with
Off Ramp Gateway OFF.
Format error in the address of the Off Ramp
Gateway.
The number of addresses for the Off Ramp
Gateway exceeded the limit of 30.
The attached file is not TIFF format.
Could not receive transmission due to:
Resolution error
Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without
extended memory.
Resolution is not supported.
Page size error
The page size was larger than A3.
Compression error
File was compressed with other than MH, MR, or
MMR.
The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be
received because the TIFF header is incorrect:
The TIFF file attachment is a type not supported.
The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.
Software error.
The file received as an attachment caused the TIFF
decompression error:
The TIFF format of the attachment is corrupted.
Software error.
24
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Code
15-71
Meaning
Not Binary Image Data
15-73
MDN Status Error
15-74
MDN Message ID Error
15-80
Mail Job Task Read Error
15-81
Repeated Destination
Registration Error
15-91
Send Registration Error
15-92
Memory Overflow
15-93
Memory Access Error
15-94
Incorrect ID Code
15-95
Transfer Station Function
22-00
Original length exceeded the

maximum scan length
22-01
Memory overflow while

receiving
22-02
Tx or rx job stalled due to

line disconnection at the
other end
The machine cannot store
received data in the SAF
22-04
SM
The file could not be received because the
attachment was not binary image data.
Could not find the Disposition line in the header of
the Return Receipt, or there is a problem with the
firmware.
Could not find the Original Message ID line in the
header of the Return Receipt, or there is a problem
with the firmware.
Could not receive the transmission because the
destination buffer is full and the destination could
not be created (this error may occur when receiving
a transfer request or a request for notification of
reception).
Could not repeat receive the transmission because
the destination buffer is full and the destination
could not be created (this error may occur when
receiving a transfer request or a request for
notification of reception).
Could not receive the file for transfer to the final
destination:
The format of the final destination or the transfer
destination is incorrect.
Destinations are full so the final and transfer
destinations could not be created.
Transmission could not be received because
memory overflowed during the transaction.
Transaction could not complete due to a malfunction
of SAF memory.
The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
transfer request, because the ID code in the
incoming e-mail did not match the ID code
registered in the machine.
The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
transfer because the transfer function was
unavailable.
Divide the original into more than one page.
Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower the
scan resolution if possible.
Add optional page memory.
Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
Delete unnecessary files from memory.
Transfer the substitute reception files to an another
fax machine, if the machines printer is busy or out
of order.
Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk.
The job started normally but did not finish normally;
data may or may not have been received fully.
Restart the machine.
Update the ROM
Replace the FCU.
25
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
ERROR CODES
Rev. 05/2006
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
ERROR CODES
Code
22-05
23-00
25-00
F0-xx
F6-xx
B712
Rev. 05/2006
Meaning
No G3 parameter
confirmation answer
Data read timeout during
construction
The machine software
resets itself after a fatal
transmission error occurred
V.34 modem error
SG3-V34 modem error
Defective FCU board or firmware.
Restart the machine.
Replace the FCU
Update the ROM
Replace the FCU.
Replace the FCU.
Update the SG3-V34 modem ROM.
Replace the SG3-V34 board.
Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.
26
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.2 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of
the network is causing the problem.
Communication
Route
Item
Action
Remarks
Check that the LAN

cable is connected to
the machine.
Check that the LEDs
on the hub are lit.
2. LAN activity
Check that other
devices connected to
the LAN can
communicate through
the LAN.
1. Network settings on Check the network
Is the IP address
the PC
settings on the PC.
registered in the
TCP/IP properties in
the network setup
correct? Check the IP
address with the
administrator of the
network.
2. Check that PC can Use the ping
At the MS-DOS
connect with the
command on the PC
prompt, type ping then
machine
to contact the
the IP address of the
machine.
machine, then press
Enter.
3. LAN settings in the Check the LAN
Use the Network
machine
parameters
function in the User
Tools.
Check if there is an IP
address conflict with
If there is an IP
other PCs.
address conflict,
inform the
administrator.
1. LAN settings in the Check the LAN
Use the Network
machine
parameters
function in the User
Tools.
Check if there is an IP
address conflict with
If there is an IP
other PCs.
address conflict,
inform the
administrator.
1. Connection with
the LAN
General LAN
Between IFAX
and PC
Between
machine and email server
SM
27
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Communication
Route
Item
2. E-mail account on
the server
Between
machine and email server
3. E-mail server
1. E-mail account on
the Server
2. E-mail server
Between e-mail
server and
internet
3. Destination e-mail
address
B712
Action
Make sure that the
machine can log into
the e-mail server.
Check that the
account and
password stored in
the server are the
same as in the
machine.
Make sure that the
client devices which
have an account in
the server can
send/receive e-mail.
Remarks
Ask the administrator
to check.

to check.
Send a test e-mail
with the machines
own number as the
destination. The
machine receives the
returned e-mail if the
communication is
performed
successfully.
Make sure that the PC Ask the administrator
to check.
can log into the e-mail
server.
Check that the
account and
password stored in
the server are the
same as in the
machine.
Make sure that the
to check.
client devices which
have an account in
Send a test e-mail
the server can
with the machines
send/receive e-mail.
own number as the
destination. The
machine receives the
returned e-mail if the
communication is
performed
successfully.
Make sure that the email address is actually
used.
Check that the e-mail
address contains no
incorrect characters
such as spaces.
28
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Communication
Route
Item
4. Router settings
Between e-mail
server and
internet
Between e-mail
server and
internet
SM
1. Error message by
e-mail from the
network of the
destination.
Action
Remarks
Use the ping command Ask the administrator

to contact the router.
of the server to check.
Check that other devices
connected to the router
can sent data over the
router.
Check whether e-mail Inform the
can be sent to another
administrator of the
LAN.
address on the same
network, using the
application e-mail
software.
Check the error e-mail
message.
29
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX SC CODES
3.3 FAX SC CODES

3.3.1 OVERVIEW
When the FCU detects a Fax SC Code condition, it resets itself automatically
(default setting). This initializes the FCU without erasing files in the SAF memory or
resetting the switches.
For details on Fax SC Codes 1201, refer to the following sections.
If bit 7 of System Switch 1F is changed to 1, when the FCU detects a Fax SC
Code condition, it displays the code on the display and stops working until the fax
unit is initialized using one of the following methods:
Hold down the 7 and 9 keys for more than
10 s.
Turn off the main power switch and turn it
back on.
3.3.2 SC1201
When the FCU detects an unrecoverable error in the SRAM, which requires a
complete SRAM initialization, the fax unit displays this SC Code and stops.
There is no way to recover from this error condition without a complete SRAM
initialization (all the user and service programmed data will be erased).
The possible causes are:
SRAM backup battery defect, or SW1 on the MBU is at the OFF position.
The SRAM on the MBU has a physical defect.
SD card connection was loose.
B712
30
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3.3.3 FAX SC CODE TABLE

SC Code
1001
FCU error
1201
Unrecoverable FCU SRAM error

Software error
1299
1305
1310
1311
1312
1401
1405
SM
Description
Suggested
Action
Initialize the fax unit.
(See section 2.3.1.for
the initialization
procedure)
Refer to section 2.3.2.
Initialize the fax unit.
Sys Switch
1F bit 7 = 0
Automatic
reset
Sys Switch
1F bit 7 = 1
SC Code
display
Service Call
display
Automatic
reset
31
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
FAX SC CODES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4. SERVICE TABLES
CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power
switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then
switch the main power switch off.
NOTE: The main power LED (
) lights or flashes while the platen cover or
ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile
or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or
memory for reading or writing data.
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

4.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes,
and adjust values.
Entering and Exiting SP Mode
1.
Press the Clear Mode key.
2. Use the keypad to enter 107.
3.
Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.
Fax SP
4.
5.
On the touch-panel, press Fax SP.

Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
Exit
B712
32
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
B750S500.WMF
Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
Press twice to leave the SP mode return to the copy window to resume normal operation.
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.
SM
Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
Not used for the Fax SP mode.
Enter the SP mode directly with the number keys if you know the SP number and then
press . (SP Mode must be highlighted before you can enter the number. Just press SP
Mode if it is not highlighted.)
Press any Group number to open a list of SP modes and titles for that group. For
example, to open the SP mode list for SP1-nnn , press Group1. If an SP has sublevels,
click the appropriate button to expand the list.
Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
Press to move to the highlight to the previous or next selection in the list on the left.
33
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing

1) In the SP mode, select the test print and then press Copy Window.
2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings
(paper size, etc.) for the test print.
3) Press Start to execute the test print.
4) Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat
from step 1.
Selecting the Program Number
Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Before you begin, refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to
adjust. ( 4.1.2)
2. Click the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP
that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the
SP number that you want to open, and then press that number to expand the
list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item
that you want to set and press. The small entry box on the right is activated and
displays the default or the current setting below.
B712S501.WMF
NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings. ( 4.1.2)
1. To enter a setting
Press to toggle between plus and minus and then use the keypad to enter
the appropriate number. The number you enter write over the previous
setting.
Press to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the
key press is ignored.)
When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes.
2. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
B712
34
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES

SP1-XXX (Bit Switches) Section 3.2 Bit Switches
1
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
111
Mode No.
System Switch
001 032
00 1F
Function
Change the bit switches for system settings
for the fax option
Section 4.2 Bit Switches
Ifax Switch
001 016
00 0F
Change the bit switches for internet fax

settings for the fax option
Printer Switch
001 016
00 0F
Change the bit switches for printer settings

for the fax option
Communication Switch
001 032
00 1F
Change the bit switches for communication

settings for the fax option
G3-1 Switch
001 016
00 0F
Change the bit switches for the protocol

settings of the standard G3 board
G3-2 Switch
001 016
00 0F

settings of the optional G3 board
G3-3 Switch
001 016
00 0F

settings of the optional G3 board
G4 Internal Switch
001 032
00 1F
G4 Parameter Switch
001 016
00 0F
IP fax Switch
001 016
00 0F
Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

Change the bit switches for optional IP fax
parameters
SP2-XXX (RAM Data)

2
101
102
SM
Mode No.
RAM Read/Write
001
Memory Dump
001
G3-1 Memory Dump
Function
Change RAM data for the fax board directly.
Section 4.5 Service RAM Addresses
Print out RAM data for the fax board.
Section 4.5 Service RAM Addresses
35
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
2
102
103
104
105
002
Mode No.
G3-2 Memory Dump
003
G3-3 Memory Dump
004
G4 Memory Dump
G3-1 NCU Parameters

001 023 CC, 01 22
G3-2 NCU Parameters
001 023 CC, 01 22
G3-3 NCU Parameters
001 023 CC, 01 22
Function
Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
board.
Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
board.
Print out RAM data for the SiG4 board.
NCU parameter settings for the standard

G3 board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters
NCU parameter settings for the optional G3
board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters
NCU parameter settings for the optional G3
board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters
SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings)

3
101
102
103
104
B712
Mode No.
Service Station
001
Fax Number
002
Select Line
Serial Number
000
PSTN-1 Port Settings
001
Select Line
002
PSTN Access Number
003
Memory Lock
Disabled

001
Select Line
Function
Enter the fax number of the service station.
Select the line type.
Enter the fax units serial number.
Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line.
If the machine is installed on a PABX line,
select PABX, PABX(GND) or
PABX(FLASH).
Enter the PSTN access number for the
G3-1 line.
If the customer does not want to receive
transmissions using Memory Lock on this
line, turn this SP on.
Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If
the machine is installed on a PABX line,
PABX(FLASH).
002
PSTN Access Number
Enter the PSTN access number for the G32 line.
003
Memory Lock
Disabled
004
Transmission
Disabled

line, change this SP to on.
If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
send any fax messages on the G3-2 line.
36
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
3
105
Mode No.
001
Select Line
002
PSTN Access Number
003
Memory Lock
Disabled
004
106
107
201
Transmission
Disabled
ISDN Port Settings
001
Select Line
002
PSTN Access Number
003
Memory Lock
Disabled
004
Transmission
Disabled
IPFAX Port Settings
001
H323 Port
002
SIP Port
003
RAS Port
004
Gatekeeper port
005
T.38 Port
006
SIP Server Port
007
IPFAX Protocol
Priority
FAX SW
001 032 00 1F
Function
Select the line setting for the G3-3 line. If
the machine is installed on a PABX line,
PABX(FLASH).
Enter the PSTN access number for the G33 line.
line, change this SP to on.
If you turn this SP on, the machine does not
send any fax messages on the G3-3 line.
Select "H323" or "SAP".
SP4-XXX (ROM Versions)

4
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
SM
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
Mode No.
FCU ROM Version
Error Codes
G3-1 ROM Version
G3-2 ROM Version
G3-3 ROM Version
G4 ROM Version
Charge ROM Version
Function
Displays the FCU ROM version.
Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
Displays the G3-1 modem version.
37
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP5-XXX (Initializing)
5
101
102
103
104
Mode No.
Initialize SRAM
000
Erase All Files
000
Reset Bit Switches
000
Function
Initializes the bit switches and user
parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in
the SAF memory, and clock.
Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
Resets the bit switches and user
parameters.
Factory setting
000
Resets the bit switches and user

parameters, user data in the SRAM and
files in the SAF memory.
SP6-XXX (Reports)
6
101
102
103
103
104
B712
Mode No.
System Parameter List
000
Service Monitor Report
000
G3 Protocol Dump List
001
G3 All
Communications
002
G3-1 (All
Communications)
003
G3-1
(1 Communication)
004
G3-2
(All Communications)
005
G3-2
(1 Communication)
006
G3-3
(All Communications)
007
G3-3
(1 Communication)
G4 Protocol Dump List
001
Dch + Bch 1
002
Dch
003
Bch 1 Link Layer
004
Dch Link Layer
005
Dch +Bch 2
006
Bch 2 Link Layer
Function
Touch the ON button to print the system
parameter list.
Touch the ON button to print the service
monitor report.
Prints the protocol dump list of all
communications for all G3 lines.
communications for the G3-1 line.
Prints the protocol dump list of the last
communication for the G3-1 line.
38
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6
105
106
Mode No.
All Files print out
000
Journal Print out

001
All Journals
002
107
108
Log List Print out

001
All log files
002
Printer
003
SC/TRAP Stored
004
Decompression
005
Scanner
006
JOB/SAF
007
Reconstruction
008
JBIG
009
Fax Driver
010
G3CCU
011
Fax Job
012
CCU
013
Scanner Condition
IP Protocol Dump List
001
All Communications
002
SM
Specified Date
1 Communication
Function
Prints out all the user files in the SAF
memory, including confidential messages.
NOTE: Do not use this function, unless the
customer is having trouble printing
confidential messages or recovering
files stored using the memory lock
feature.
The machine prints all the communication
records on the report.
The machine prints all communication
records after the specified date.
These log print out functions are for
designer use only.

communications for the IP fax line.
communication for the IP fax line.
39
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP7-XXX (Test Modes)

These are the test modes for PTT approval.
7
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
Function
G3-1 Modem Tests
G3-1 DTMF Tests
Ringer Test
G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)
G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)
G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)
G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)
G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)
Recorded Message Test
G3-2 Modem Tests
G3-2 DTMF Tests
G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)
G3-2 V34 (S2800baud)
G3-2 V34 (S3000baud)
G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)
G3-2 V34 (S3429baud)
G3-3 Modem Tests
G3-3 DTMF Tests
G3-3 V34 (S2400baud)
G3-3 V34 (S2800baud)
G3-3 V34 (S3000baud)
G3-3 V34 (S3200baud)
G3-3 V34 (S3429baud)
IG3-1 Modem Tests - Not used
IG3-1 DTMF Tests - Not used
IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used
IG3-2 Modem Tests - Not used
IG3-2 DTMF Tests - Not used
SP9-XXX (Design Switch Mode)

9
702
B712
Mode No.
Design Switch DFU
Function
40
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.2 BIT SWITCHES

WARNING
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as Not used,
as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner
that is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other
areas, such as Japan.
NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the
System Parameter List printed by the machine.
4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

System Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0
Dedicated transmission
parameter programming
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1
Confidential RX message print

out without the password.
Technical data printout on the

Journal
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SP No. 1-101-001
COMMENTS
Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated
transmission parameters.
Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated
transmission parameters.
1: Confidential RX messages can be printed out
without the password. Use this bit if the customer
forgot the password for the confidential messages.
Reset this bit to 0 after printing confidential RX
messages.
1: Instead of the personal name, the following data
are listed on the Journal for each G3
communication.
e.g. 0000 32V34 288/264 L0100 03 04

(1) (2)(3) (4) (5) (6)
(7) (8)
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
Note:
EQM and rx level are fixed at FFFF in tx mode.
The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at 00 for transmission records and
ECM reception records.
SM
41
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
2
Rx level calculation
SP No. 1-101-001
COMMENTS
Example: 0000 32 V34 288/264 L 01 00 03 04

The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after L indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by 16 to get the rx level.
3
4
5
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.

So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
Not used
Do not change this setting.
Line error mark print
When "1" is selected, a line error mark is printed on
the printout if a line error occurs during reception.
0: OFF, 1: ON (print)
G3/G4 communication
This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key
parameter display
parameters (see below). This is normally disabled
0: Disabled
because it cancels the CSI display for the user.
1: Enabled
Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.
Protocol dump list output after
This is only used for communication
each communication
troubleshooting. It shows the content of the
0: Off
transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always reset
1: On
this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at 1, the list is only
printed if there was an error during the
communication.
Not used
Do not change the setting.
G3 Communication Parameters
Modem rate
Resolution
Compression mode
Communication
mode
B712
336: 33600 bps

168: 16800 bps
312: 31200 bps
144: 14400 bps
288: 28800 bps
120: 12000 bps
264: 26400 bps
96: 9600 bps
240: 24000 bps
72: 7200 bps
216: 21600 bps
48: 4800 bps
192: 19200 bps
24: 2400 bps
S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)
D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)
SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)
MMR: MMR compression
MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)
JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)
ECM: With ECM
NML: With no ECM
42
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
I/O rate
A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction

B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction
0: 0 ms/line
10: 10 ms/line
25: 2.5 ms/line
20: 20 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line
40: 40 ms/line
Note:
40 is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI short
protocol.
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
Width and
reduction
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0-3 Not used
4
File retention time
0: Depends on User Parameter
24 [18(H)]
1: No limit
5
Not used
6-7 Memory read/write by RDS
Bit 7 6
Setting
0
0
Always disabled
0
1
User selectable
1
0
User selectable
1
1
Always enabled
System Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
Length of time that RDS is
to temporarily switched on when
7
bits 6 and 7 of System Switch
02 are set to User selectable
System Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0-2 Not used
3
Printing dedicated tx
parameters on Quick/Speed
Dial Lists
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SM
SP No. 1-101-003
COMMENTS
Do not change these settings.
1: A file that had a communication error will not be
erased unless the communication is successful.

(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out,
but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow
RDS operations to take place. RDS will
automatically be locked out again after a certain
time, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note that
if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switch
off until this time limit has expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
machine.
SP No. 1-101-004
COMMENTS
00 - 99 hours (BCD).
This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System
Switch 02 are set to User selectable.
The default setting is 24 hours.
SP No. 1-101-005
COMMENTS
1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is
printed with the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes
each).
The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed
dedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are
printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for service
technicians).
43
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
4-7 Not used
SP No. 1-101-005
COMMENTS
System Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0
Margin setting for Create
to Margin Transmission
7
SP No. 1-101-007
COMMENTS
71 to 99 (BCD) %. This setting determines the
reduction ratio when the user uses the Create
Margin Transmission feature.
Default setting:1001 0011 (93%)
System Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
0
Addition of image data from
confidential transmissions on
the transmission result report
1
Inclusion of communications on
the Journal when no image
data was exchanged.
2
Automatic error report printout

Printing of the error code on the

error report
0: No 1: Yes
Not used
Power failure report
4
5
B712
Conditions for printing the

protocol dump list
0: Print for all communications
1: Print only when there is a
communication error
SP No. 1-101-010
COMMENTS
If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first
page of confidential messages will be printed on
transmission result reports.
0: Communications that reached phase C (message
tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
1: Communications that reached phase A (call
setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
This will include telephone calls.
0: Error reports will not be printed.
1: Error reports will be printed automatically after
failed communications.
1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.

1: A power failure report will be automatically printed
after the power is switched on if a fax message
disappeared from the memory when the power was
turned off last.
This switch becomes effective only when system
switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol
dump list only for communications with errors.
44
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
7
Priority given to various types
of remote terminal ID when
printing reports
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.
number
1: Dial label > Tel. number >
RTI > CSI
System Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
0
Automatic port selection
1-2 Not used
3
Continuous polling reception
Dialing on the ten-key pad

when the external telephone is
off-hook
On hook dial
Not used
6-7
SP No. 1-101-010
COMMENTS
This bit determines which set of priorities the
machine uses when listing remote terminal names
on reports.
Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the
Quick/Speed Dial number.
SP No. 1-101-011
COMMENTS
When "1" is selected, a suitable port is automatically
selected if the selected port is not used.
This feature allows a series of stations to be polled
in a continuous cycle. This will continue until the
polling reception file is erased.
The dialing interval is the same as memory
transmission.
0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the
external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when
the external telephone is not by the machine, or if a
wireless telephone is connected as an external
telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machines ten-key pad
when the handset is off-hook.
0: On hook dial is disabled.
Do not change the factory settings
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E
No
FUNCTION
0-2 Not used
3
Action when the external
handset goes off-hook
0: Manual tx and rx operation
1: Memory tx and rx operation
(the display remains the same)
4-7
SM
Not used
SP No. 1-101-015
COMMENTS
Do not change the settings.
0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the external
handset is off-hook. However, memory tx is not
possible.
1: The display stays in standby mode even when
the external handset is used, so that other people
can use the machine for memory tx operation.
Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with this
setting.
45
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0
Country/area code for
to functional settings (Hex)
7
00: France 11: USA
01: Germany 12: Asia
02: UK
13: Japan
03: Italy
14: Hong Kong
04: Austria 15: South Africa
05: Belgium 16: Australia
06: Denmark 17: New Zealand
07: Finland 18: Singapore
08: Ireland
19: Malaysia
09: Norway 1A: China
0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan
0B: Switz.
1C: Korea
0C: Portugal 20: Turkey
0D: Holland 21: Greece
0E: Spain
22: Hungary
0F: Israel
23: Czech
10: Canada 24: Poland
System Switch 10
No
FUNCTION
0
Threshold memory level for
to parallel memory transmission
7
System Switch 11
No
FUNCTION
0
TTI printing position
0: Superimposed on the page
data
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
1
TSI (G3) printing position
0: Superimposed on the page
data
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
2
Not used
3
TTI used for broadcasting
0: The TTIs selected for each
Quick/Speed dial are used
1: The same TTI is used for all
destinations
B712
SP No. 1-101-016
COMMENTS
This country/area code determines the factory
settings of bit switches and RAM addresses.
However, it has no effect on the NCU parameter
settings and communication parameter RAM
addresses.
Cross reference
NCU country code:
SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1
SP No. 2-104-001 for G3-2
SP No. 2-105-001 for G3-3
SP No. 1-101-017
COMMENTS
Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB
N can be between 00 - FF(H)
Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB
SP No. 1-101-018
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information
that the customer considers to be important (G3
transmissions).
Change this bit to 1 if the TSI (G3) overprints

information that the customer considers to be
important.
Do not change the factory settings.
1: The TTI (TTI_1 or TTI_2) which is selected for all
destinations during broadcasting.
46
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 11
No
FUNCTION
4
Type of TTI used for
transmission using the ten-key
pad
0: TTI_1
1: TTI_2
5-7 Not used
SP No. 1-101-018
COMMENTS
1: The machine uses TTI_2 when the user dials the
destination using the ten-key pad. It is also used for
polling transmission and manual transmission using
the handset.
System Switch 12
No
FUNCTION
0
TTI printing position in the main
to scan direction
7
SP No. 1-101-019
COMMENTS
TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
Input even numbers only.
This setting determines the print start position for
the TTI from the left edge of the paper. If the TTI is
moved too far to the right, it may overwrite the file
number which is on the top right of the page. On an
A4 page, if the TTI is moved over by more than 50
mm, it may overwrite the page number.
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 15
No
FUNCTION
0
Not used
1
Going into the Energy Saver
mode automatically
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2-3 Not used
4-5 Interval for preventing the
machine from entering Energy
Saver mode if there is a
pending transmission file.
Bit 5 4
Setting
0 0
1 min
0 1
30 min
1 0
1 hour
1 1
24 hours
6
Print user codes on reports.
7
Not used
SM
SP No. 1-101-022
COMMENTS
1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver
mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is
active even in the Energy Saver mode.
If there is a file waiting for transmission, the machine
does not go to Energy Saver mode during the
selected period.
After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting for
transmission, the machine goes to the Energy Saver
mode.
1: User codes are printed out on the Journal or

other reports.
47
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 16
No
FUNCTION
0
Parallel Broadcasting
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
Priority setting for the G3 line.
0: PSTN-1 > PSTN-2 or 3
1: PSTN-2 or 3 > PSTN-1
2-7 Not used
SP No. 1-101-023
COMMENTS
1: The machine sends messages simultaneously
using all available ports during broadcasting.
This function allows the user to select the default G3
line type. The optional SG3 unit(s) are required to
use the PSTN-2 or 3 setting.

System Switch 19
No
FUNCTION
0-5 Not used
6
Extended scanner page
memory after memory option
is installed
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Special Original mode

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SP No. 1-101-026
COMMENTS
0: After installing the memory expansion option, the
scanner page memory is extended to 4 MB from 2
MB.
1: If this bit is set to 1 after installing the memory
expansion option, the scanner page memory is
extended to 12 MB. But the SAF memory decreases
to 18 MB.
1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form
or letterhead which has a colored or printed
background, change this bit to 1. Original 1 and
Original 2 can be selected in addition to the Text,
Text/Photo and Photo modes.
System Switch 1A - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1D
No
FUNCTION
0
RTI/CSI/CPS display
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
Not used
2
Destination telephone number
display limitation
0: OFF, 1: ON
3-7 Not used
B712
SP No. 1-101-030
COMMENTS
1: RTI/CSI/CPS is displayed on the top line of the
LCD panel during communication.
When "1" is selected, the destination telephone
number display is limited and redial is disabled.
48
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
System Switch 1E
No
FUNCTION
0
Communication after the
Journal data storage area has
become full
0: Impossible
1: Possible
Action when the SAF memory

has become full during
scanning
0: The current page is erased.
1: The entire file is erased.
RTI/CSI display priority

0: RTI 1: CSI
File No. printing

0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Action when authorized
reception is enabled but
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not
yet programmed
0: All fax reception is disabled

1: Faxes can be received if the
sender has an RTI or CSI
6-7
SM
Address display priority in the

AI redial mode
0: RTI/CSI
1: Telephone number
Not used
SP No. 1-101-031
COMMENTS
This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal
printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the
report (e.g., no paper).
0: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal has become full, fax
communications will become impossible, to prevent
overwriting the communication records before the
machine prints them out.
1: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal is full, fax communications
are still possible. But the machine will overwrite the
oldest communication records.
Cross Reference
Automatic Journal output - User switch 03 bit 7
Number of communication records for the
Journal:
200 records (standard)
1000 records (with the Function Upgrade unit
installed)
0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
the successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,
the file is erased and no pages are transmitted.
This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory
transmission.
This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is
displayed on the LCD while the machine is
communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
If authorized reception is enabled but the user has
stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the
machine will not be able to receive any fax
messages.
If the customer wishes to receive messages from
any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block
messages from senders that do not include an RTI
or CSI, change this bit to 1, then enable
Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at 0 (default setting).
0: When the machine has both RTI/CSI and the
telephone number information, the machine displays
RTI/CSI.
1: The machine always displays the telephone
number.
Do not change the settings
49
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 1F
No
FUNCTION
0
Not used
1
Report printout after an original
jam during SAF storage or if
the SAF memory fills up
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2
3
4-6
7
Not used
Received fax print start timing
(G3 reception)
0: After receiving each page
1: After receiving all pages
Not used
Action when a fax SC has
occurred
0: Automatic reset
1: Fax unit stops
SP No. 1-101-032
COMMENTS
0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory
overflows during scanning, a report will be printed.
Change this bit to 1 if the customer does not want
to have a report in these cases.
Memory tx Memory storage report
Parallel memory tx Transmission result report
0: The machine prints each page immediately after
the machine receives it.
1: The machine prints the complete message after
the machine receives all the pages in the memory.
0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other
than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automatically
resets itself.
1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the
fax unit stops.
Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See Troubleshooting
B712
50
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.2.2 I-FAX SWITCHES

I-fax Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
Original Width of TX
Attachment File
0
1
2
3-6
7
SP No. 1-102-001
COMMENTS
This setting sets the maximum size of the original
that the destination can receive. (Bits 3~7 are
reserved for future use or not used.)
0: Off, 1: On
NOTE: If more than one of these three bits is set to
1, the larger size has priority. For example,
if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to 1 then the
maximum size is A3 (Bit 2).
A4
B4
A3
Reserved
Not used
When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the

receiving machine at the destination, so the sending
machine cannot make a selection for the receiving
capabilities (original width setting) of the receiving
machine. The original width selected with this switch
is used as the RX machines original width setting,
and the original is reduced to this size before
sending. The default is A4.
If the width selected with this switch is higher than
the receiving machine can accept, the machine
detects this and this causes an error.
I-fax Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
Original Line Resolution of TX
Attachment File
0
200x100 Standard
200x200 Detail
200x400 Fine
Reserved
400 x 400 Super Fine
5-6
SP No. 1-102-002
COMMENTS
This setting sets the maximum resolution of the
original that the destination can receive.
Reserved
0: Not selected, 1: Selected
NOTE: If more than one of these three bits is set to 1, the higher resolution has priority.
For example, if both Bit 3 and Bit 2 are set to 1 then the resolution is set for
"Reserve (300 x 300)" (Bit 3).
SM
51
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
I-fax Switch 01
7
mm/inch
This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.
0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)
SP No. 1-102-002
When on (set to 1), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.
There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.
NOTE: Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver
to determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the
mm/inch selection is determined by the sender fax.
When this switch is Off (0):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.
When this switch is On (1):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are converted to inches.
I-fax Switch 02
SP No. 1-102-003
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
RX Text Mail Header Processing
This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails
when they are received.
0: Prints only text mail.
1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.
When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the From address and
Subject address are printed as header information.
When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this
setting is ignored and no header is printed.
B712
Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error

This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail
attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs. This
allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their intended
destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example.
0: Prints 1st page only.
1: Prints all pages.
52
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
I-fax Switch 02
SP No. 1-102-003
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
2-3 Text String for Return Receipt
This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the
transmission was received normally at the destination.
5-6
7
SM
00: Dispatched
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
dispatched in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The dispatched string is included in the Subject string.
01: Displayed
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
displayed in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The displayed string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
NOTE: A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to
00 (for dispatched) received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error.
If any setting other than displayed (01) causes a problem, change the setting
to 01 to enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.
Media accept feature
This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to
confirm a reception.
0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail
1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.
NOTE: Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer
mail, which contains the media accept feature field.
Not Used
Image Resolution of RX Text Mail
This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.
0: 200 x 200
1: 400 x 400
NOTE: The 1 setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to
have enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x
400 resolution.
53
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
I-fax Switch 03
SP No. 1-102-004
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Original Output at Transfer Station
This setting determines whether the original is output at the transfer station when it is
received from the sender that initiated the transfer transmission. This feature is the
same as for G3 transfer transmissions.
0: Received original not output at the transfer station.
1: Received original output. The original is printed after the transfer station has
transferred it to the destinations, so its output confirms that the original has been
transferred.
1
Transfer Result Report
This setting determines when a Transfer Result Report is generated and returned to
the transfer requestor.
0: Returns the report after each transfer.
1: Returns the report only if an error occurred during transfer.
4-7
B712
Destination Error Handling for Reception Transfer Request

This setting restricts transfer transmission based on whether the final destinations are
correct or not.
0: The transfer station transmits to correct destinations only (addresses with no errors
in them).
1: If any address has an error in it, the transfer station transfers no transmissions and
returns a transfer transmission failure report to the requestor that initiated the
transfer.
There is no negotiation between the transfer initiator and the transfer station to
determine whether the final destination addresses are correct or not. This setting
determines whether or not the transfer station transfers the transmissions if there is a
mistake in even one of the final destination addresses.
Polling ID Check for Reception of Transfer Request
This setting determines whether the polling IDs of incoming transmissions are checked
to ensure that the polling IDs match.
0: Receives and transfers only messages that have matching polling IDs.
1: Receives and transfers all messages, even if the polling IDs do not match.
Not Used
54
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
I-fax Switch 04
SP No. 1-102-005
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer
This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI
of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI
or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
1-7
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the
Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determine
automatically the destination folder for each e-mail.
Not Used
I-fax Switch 05
SP No. 1-102-006
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients
Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive
transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.
For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a broadcast
to 9 destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
1-7 Not Used
I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)
SP No. 1-102-007
SP No. 1-102-008
I-fax Switch 08
SP No. 1-102-009
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0-7 Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception
This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF stores
fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and also holds
incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF memory
available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received; received mail is then
stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)
NOTE: The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the
amount of memory.
SM
55
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
I-fax Switch 09
No
FUNCTION
0-3 Not used
4-7 Restrict TX Retries
SP No. 1-102-010
COMMENTS
This setting determines the number of retries when
connection and transmission fails due to errors.
01-F (1-15 Hex)
I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)

I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
SP No. 1-102-011
SP No. 1-102-012
SP No. 1-102-013
SP No. 1-102-014
SP No. 1-102-015
I-fax Switch 0F
SP No. 1-102-016
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files
This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or
output immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.
1-7 Not used
B712
56
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES

Printer Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0
Page separation mark
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SP No. 1-103-001
Repetition of data when the

received page is longer than
the printer paper
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Prints the date and time on

received fax messages
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3-7
Not used
Printer Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0-2 Not used
3-4 Maximum print width used in
the setup protocol
Bit 4 3
Setting
0 0
Not used
0 1
A3
1 0
B4
1 1
A4
5-6 Not used
7
Received message width
restriction in the protocol signal
to the sender
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SM
COMMENTS
0: No marks are printed.
1: If a received page has to be printed out on two
sheets, an asterisk inside square brackets is printed
at the bottom right hand corner of the first sheet,
and a 2 inside a small box is printed at the top right
hand corner of the second sheet. This helps the
user to identify pages that have been split.
0: The next page continues from where the previous
page left off.
1: The final few mm of the previous page are
repeated at the top of the next page. The amount of
repeated data depends on printer switch 04, bits 5
and 6.
This switch is only effective when user parameter 02
- bit 2 (printing the received date and time on
received fax messages) is enabled.
1: The machine prints the received and printed date
and time at the bottom of each received page.
SP No. 1-103-002
COMMENTS
These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer
switch 01 is 1.

0: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
the print width depending on the paper size
available from the paper feed stations.
Refer to the table on the next page for how the
machine chooses the paper width used in the setup
protocol (NSF/DIS).
1: The machine informs the transmitting machine of
the fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3 and
4 above.
57
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the
setup protocol
Available Paper Size
A4 or 8.5" x 11"
B5
A5 or 8.5" x 5.5"
No paper available (Paper end)
Printer Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
1st paper feed station usage for
fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
1
2nd paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2
3rd paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
3
4th paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4
LCT usage for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
5-7 Not used
B712
Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)

297 mm width
256 mm width
216 mm width
216 mm width
SP No. 1-103-003
COMMENTS
0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax
messages and reports.
1: The specified paper feed station will not be used
for printing fax messages and reports.
Note: Do not disable usage for a paper feed station
which has been specified by User Parameter Switch
0F (15), or which is used for the Specified Cassette
Selection feature.
58
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Printer Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
Length reduction of received
data
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1-3
4
to
7
SP No. 1-103-004
COMMENTS
0: Incoming pages are printed without length
reduction.
(Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4
to 7)
1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04,
bits 0 to 4)
Not used
Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with switch 03-0 above)
If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the length of copy paper, the excess
portion will not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the
length of copy paper, the excess portion will be printed on the next page.
The value of x is determined by these four bits.
Hex value of bits 4 to 7 x (mm)
0
0
1
1
and so on until
F
15
Default setting: 6 mm
Cross reference
Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0
Printer Switch 04
SP No. 1-103-005
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above.
to <Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm)
4
N is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm
0 0 1 0 0 20 mm (default setting)
1 1 1 1 1 155 mm
5
6
For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper

<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)
Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken
place.
0
1
0
1
=4 mm, =10 mm, =15 mm, = Not used
0
0
1
1
7
SM
Not used.
59
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0
Printing while a paper cassette
is pulled out, when the Just
Size Printing feature is
enabled.
0: Printing will not start
1: Printing will start if another
cassette has a suitable size of
paper, based on the paper size
selection priority tables.
1-7 Not used.
Printer Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
0
Reduction for Journal printing
0: Off
1: On
2-3 Not used.
4
List of destinations in the
Communication Failure Report
for broadcasting
0: All destinations
1: Only destinations where
communication failure occurred
5-7 Not used.
SP No. 1-103-007
COMMENTS
Cross reference
Just size printing on/off User switch 05, bit 5

SP No. 1-103-008
COMMENTS
1: The Journal is reduced to 91% to ensure that
there is enough space in the left margin for punch
holes or staples.
1: Only destinations where communication failure
occurred are printed on the Communication Failure
Report.

Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
B712
60
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Printer Switch 0E
No
FUNCTION
0
Paper size selection priority
0: Width
1: Length
1
3
to
4
5-6
7
SM
Paper size selected for

printing A4 width fax data
0: 8.5" x 11" size
1: A4 size
Page separation
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Printing the sample image on

reports
Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting
0
0
The upper half
only
0
1
50% reduction
in sub-scan only
1
0
Same size
1
1
Not used
Not used
Equalizing the reduction ratio
among separated pages
(Page Separation)
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
SP No. 1-103-015
COMMENTS
0: A paper size that has the same width as the
received data is selected first.
1: A paper size which has enough length to print all
the received lines without reduction is selected first.
This switch determines which paper size is selected
for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine has
both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.
1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page
separation to print a received fax message, the
machine does not print the message (Substitute
Reception is used).
After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the
machine automatically prints the fax message.
Same size means the sample image is printed at
100%, even if page separation occurs.
User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to
0 to enable this switch.
Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on
this feature.

0: When page separation has taken place, all the
pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.
1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected
paper size when page separation has taken place.
Other pages are printed without reduction.
61
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0
Smoothing feature
to Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
1
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Disabled
1
0
Enabled
1
1
Not used
2
Duplex printing
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3
Binding direction for Duplex
printing
0: Left binding
1: Top binding
4
Printing fax messages in user
code mode
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
5-7
B712
Not used
SP No. 1-103-016
COMMENTS
(0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine
receives halftone images from other manufacturers
fax machines frequently.
1: The machine always prints received fax

messages in duplex printing mode:
1: The machine holds the received fax messages

until the machine exits the restricted access mode
(user code or key counter).
If the machine enters the restricted access mode
again while printing fax messages, the machine
stops printing the machine exits the mode again.
62
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES

Communication Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0
Compression modes available
to in receive mode
1
Bit 1 0 Modes
0
0 MH only
0
1 MH/MR
1
0 MH/MR/MMR
1
1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
2
to in transmit mode
3
Bit 3 2 Modes
0
0 MH only
0
1 MH/MR
1
0 MH/MR/MMR
1
1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
4
Not used
5
JBIG compression method:
Reception
0: Only basic supported
1: Basic and optional both
supported
6
JBIG compression method:
Transmission
0: Basic mode priority
1: Optional mode priority
7
Closed network (reception)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SM
SP No. 1-104-001
COMMENTS
These bits determine the compression capabilities
to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30
protocol.
These bits determine the compression capabilities

to be used in the transmission and to be declared in
phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.

Change the setting when communication problems
occur using JBIG compression.
Change the setting when communication problems

occur using JBIG compression.
1: Reception will not go ahead if the ID code of the

other terminal does not match the ID code of this
terminal. This function is only available in NSF/NSS
mode.
63
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
No
FUNCTION
0
ECM
0: Off 1: On
1
2
to
3
4-5
6
to
7
Not used
Wrong connection prevention
method
Bit 3 Bit 2
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
8 digit CSI
1
0
4 digit CSI
1
1
CSI/RTI
Not used
Maximum printable page length
available
Bit 7 6 Setting
0
0 No limit
0
1 B4 (364 mm)
1
0 A4 (297 mm)
1
1 Not used
No
FUNCTION
0
Burst error threshold
0: Low 1: High
1
2
B712
Acceptable total error line ratio

0: 5% 1: 10%
Treatment of pages received
with errors during G3 reception
0: Deleted from memory
without printing
1: Printed
SP No. 1-104-002
COMMENTS
If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all
communications.
In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are
switched off automatically.
(0,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
sending a fax message, if the last 8 digits of the
received CSI do not match the last 8 digits of the
dialed telephone number. This does not work when
manually dialed.
(1,0) - The same as above, except that only the last
4 digits are compared.
(1,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without
sending a fax message, if the other end does not
identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will always
go ahead.
Note: This function does not work when dialing is
done from the external telephone.
The setting determined by these bits is informed to
the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
SP No. 1-104-003
COMMENTS
If there are more consecutive error lines in the
received page than the threshold, the machine will
send a negative response.
The Low and High threshold values depend on the
sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.
Resolution 100 dpi200 dpi
400 dpi
3.85 l/mm 7.7 l/mm
15.4 l/mm
Low settings 6
12
24
High settings 12
24
48
If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the
acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.
0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
64
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
No
FUNCTION
3
Hang-up decision when a
negative code (RTN or PIN) is
received during G3 immediate
transmission
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
4-7
SP No. 1-104-003
COMMENTS
0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is
received.
1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it
receives RTN or PIN.
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if
ECM is being used.
Not used
No
FUNCTION
0
Maximum number of page
to retransmissions in a G3
7
memory transmission
SP No. 1-104-004
COMMENTS
00 - FF (Hex) times.
This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
Default setting - 03(H)
Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
0
Point of resumption of memory
transmission upon redialing
0: From the error page
1: From page 1
1-6 Not used
7
Emergency calls using 999
0: Enabled 1: Disabled
SM
SP No. 1-104-011
COMMENTS
0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission failed the previous time.
1: Transmission begins from the first page, using
normal memory transmission.
If this bit is at 1, the machine will not allow you to
dial 999 at the auto-dialer. This is a PTT
requirement in the Hong Kong.
65
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
0
Use of Economy Transmission
during a Transfer operation to
end receivers
1
Use of Economy Transmission
during a Transfer operation to
the Next Transfer Stations
2
Use of Label Insertion for the
End Receivers in a Transfer
operation
3
Conditions required for
Transfer Result Report
transmission
0: Always transmitted
1: Only transmitted if there was
an error
4
Printout of the message when

acting as a Transfer Station
Action when there is no fax

number in the programmed
Quick/Speed dials which meets
the requesting terminals own
fax number
0: Transfer is disabled
1: Transfer is enabled
6-7
B712
Not used
SP No. 1-104-012
COMMENTS
These bits determine whether the machine uses the
Economy Transmission feature when it is carrying
out a Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
This bit determines whether the machine uses the

Label Insertion feature when it is carrying out a
Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
0: When acting as a Transfer Station, the machine
will always send a Transfer Result Report back to
the Requesting Station after completing the Transfer
Request, even if there were no problems.
1: The machine will only send back a Transfer
Result Report if there were errors during
communication, meaning one or more of the End
Receivers could not be contacted.
When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station,
this bit determines whether the machine prints the
fax message coming in from the Requesting
Terminal.
After the machine receives a transfer request, the
machine compares the last N digits of the
requesting terminals own fax number with all the
Quick/Speed dials programmed in the machine. (N
is the number programmed in communication switch
0C.)
0: If there is no matching number programmed in
the machine, the machine rejects the transfer
request.
1: Even if there is no matching number programmed
in the machine, the machine accepts the transfer
request. The result report will be printed at the
transfer terminal, but will not be sent back to the
requesting terminal.
66
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Communication Switch 0C
No
FUNCTION
0
Number of digits compared to
to find the requesters fax number
4
from the programmed
Quick/Speed Dials when acting
as a Transfer Station
5-7
Not used
Communication Switch 0D
No
FUNCTION
0
The available memory
to threshold, below which ringing
7
detection (and therefore
reception into memory) is
disabled
Communication Switch 0E
No
FUNCTION
0
Minimum interval between
to automatic dialing attempts
7
SP No. 1-104-013
COMMENTS
00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)
After the machine receives a transfer request, the
machine compares the own telephone number sent
from the Requesting Terminal with all Quick/Speed
Dials programmed in the machine, starting from
Quick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed Dials.
This number determines how many digits from the
end of the telephone numbers the machine
compares.
If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report to
the first Quick/Speed Dial that the machine
compared. If Quick Dial 01 is programmed, the
machine will send the report to Quick 01. If Quick
Dial 01 through 04 are not programmed and Quick
Dial 05 is programmed, the machine will send the
report to Quick 05.
Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digits
SP No. 1-104-014
COMMENTS
00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes
(e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
One page is about 24 kbytes.
The machine refers to this setting before each fax
reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
below this threshold, the machine cannot receive
any fax messages.
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if
there is no memory available. This will result in
communication failure.
SP No. 1-104-015
COMMENTS
06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
(e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
This value is the minimum time that the machine
waits before it dials the next destination.
Communication Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings.)
SM
67
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
No
FUNCTION
0
Memory transmission:
to Maximum number of dialing
7
attempts to the same
destination
SP No. 1-104-017
COMMENTS
01 - FE (Hex) times
Communication Switch 11 - Not used (do not change the settings.)

No
FUNCTION
0
Memory transmission: Interval
to between dialing attempts to the
7
same destination
SP No. 1-104-019
COMMENTS
01 - FF (Hex) minutes
Communication Switch 13 - Not used (do not change the settings.)

No
FUNCTION
0
Inch-to-mm conversion during
transmission
1-5
6
to
7
Not used
Available unit of resolution in
which fax messages are
received
Bit 7 Bit 6
Unit
0
0
mm
0
1
inch
1
0
mm and inch
(default)
1
1
Not used
SP No. 1-104-021
COMMENTS
0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch
format are transmitted without conversion.
In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF
memory in mm format are transmitted without
conversion.
Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF
memory, the fax unit always converts the data into
mm format.
1: The machine converts the scanned data or stored
data in the SAF memory to the format which was
specified in the set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before
transmission.
For the best performance, do not change the factory
settings.
The setting determined by these bits is informed to
the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
B712
68
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
No
FUNCTION
0
Not used
1
Optional G3 unit (G3-2)
0: Not installed
1: Installed
2-7 Not used
SP No. 1-104-023
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 when installing the first optional
G3 unit.
No
FUNCTION
0
SEP reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
SUB reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2
PWD reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3-6 Not used
7
Action when there is no box
with an F-code that matches
the received SUB code
0: Disconnect the line
1: Receive the message
(using normal reception mode)
SP No. 1-104-024
COMMENTS
0: Polling transmission to another makers machine
using the SEP (Selective Polling) signal is disabled.
0: Confidential reception to another makers
machine using the SUB (Sub-address) signal is
disabled.
0: Disables features that require PWD (Password)
signal reception.
Change this setting when the customer requires.

Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM
69
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 1B
No
FUNCTION
0
Extension access code (0 to 7)
to to turn V.8 protocol On/Off
7
0: On
1: Off
Communication Switch 1C
No
FUNCTION
0
Extension access code (8 and
to 9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off
1
0: On
1: Off
2-7
Not used
SP No. 1-104-028
COMMENTS
If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol
procedure, set this bit to 1 to disable V.8.
Example: If 0 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
to 1. When the machine detects 0 as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (Alternatively, if 3 is the PSTN access
code, set bit 3 to 1.)
SP No. 1-104-029
COMMENTS
Refer to communication switch 1B.
Example: If 8 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
to 1. When the machine detects 8 as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (If 9 is the PSTN access code, use bit 1.)
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
B712
70
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES
G3 Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0
Monitor speaker during
1
communication (tx and rx)
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Up to Phase B
1
0
All the time
1
1
Not used
2
memory transmission
3-7 Not used
G3 Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0-3 Not used
4
DIS frame length
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes
5
6
Not used
CED/ANSam transmission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Not used
G3 Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
G3 protocol mode used
0: Standard and non-standard
1: Standard only
1-4
5
Not used
Use of modem rate history for
transmission using
Quick/Speed Dials
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
AI short protocol (transmission

and reception)
Short preamble
SM
SP No. 1-105-001
COMMENTS
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
the communication.
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
the T.30 protocol.
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
all through the communication. Make sure that you
reset these bits after testing.
1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
transmission.
SP No. 1-105-002
COMMENTS
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
Do not change this setting, unless the
communication problem is caused by the
CED/ANSam transmission.
SP No. 1-105-003
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
only communicate with machines that send T.30standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
start from the highest modem rate.
1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
communications with the same machine when
determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
Manual for details about Short Preamble.
71
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
DIS detection number
(Echo countermeasure)
0: 1
1: 2
1
V.8 protocol in manual
reception
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2
V.8 protocol
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
ECM frame size

0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
CTC transmission conditions
0: Ricoh mode (PPR x 1)
1: ITU-T mode (PPR x 4)
Modem rate used for the next
page after receiving a negative
code (RTN or PIN)
0: No change 1: Fallback
V.8 protocol in manual
transmission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Not used
G3 Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0
Training error detection
to threshold
3
4-7
B712
Not used
SP No. 1-105-004
COMMENTS
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
DIS frame twice.
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
0: The machine sends CED instead of ANSam
when starting a manual reception.
1: The machine sends ANSam during manual
reception.
0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
Note:
Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
When using ECM, the machine will choose a slower

modem rate after receiving PPR once (Ricoh mode)
or four times (ITU-T mode).
This bit is ineffective in V.34 communications.
1: The machines tx modem rate will fall back before
sending the next page if a negative code is
received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
1: The machine detects either ANSam or CED
during manual transmission.
SP No. 1-105-005
COMMENTS
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
72
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3 Switch 05
No
FUNCTION
0
Initial Tx modem rate
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
Other settings - Not used
4
Initial modem type for 9.6 k or
to 7.2 kbps.
5
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0
0
V.29
0
1
V.17
1
0
V.34
1
1
Not used
6-7 Not used
SP No. 1-105-006
COMMENTS
These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
transmission.
G3 Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0
Initial Rx modem rate
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
SP No. 1-105-007
SM
Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you

need to change this for specific receivers.
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
protocol should be disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
COMMENTS
reception.
Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
during reception.
Cross reference
73
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
4
Modem types available for
to reception
7
Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V.33
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
G3 Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
0 PSTN cable equalizer
to (tx mode: Internal)
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
2
to
3
5
67
B712
SP No. 1-105-007
COMMENTS
The setting of these bits is used to inform the
transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
disabled manually.
Cross reference
SP No. 1-105-008
COMMENTS
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
frequencies because of the length of wire between
the modem and the telephone exchange.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
specific receivers.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: This setting is not effective in V.34
communications.
PSTN cable equalizer

(rx mode: Internal)
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High

Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.

(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
(V.34 rx mode; External)
Not used

communications.
Keep this bit at 1.
Keep this bit at 1.

74
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
0
Maximum allowable carrier
1
drop during image data
reception
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms)
0
0
200
0
1
400
1
0
800
1
1
Not used
2-3 Not used
4
Maximum allowable frame
interval during image data
reception.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s
5
6
Not used
Reconstruction time for the first
line in receive mode
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
Not used
SM
SP No. 1-105-011
COMMENTS
These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
frequent.

This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
(end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
between ECM frames from the other end.
frequent.
When the sending terminal is controlled by a
computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
75
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
0
Protocol requirements: Europe
1
Protocol requirements: Spain
2
Protocol requirements:
Germany
3
Protocol requirements: France
4
PTT requirements: Germany
5
PTT requirements: France
6
Not used
7
DTS requirements : Germany
G3 Switch 0C
No
FUNCTION
0
Pulse dialing method
1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Normal(P=N)
0
1
Oslo (P=10 - N)
1
0
Sweden
(N+1)
1
1
Not used
2-7 Not used
G3 Switch 0D
No
FUNCTION
0-1 Not used
2
Data rate threshold during V.34
to reception
5
Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 0 Normal
0 1 1 1 Lower by
one step
1 1 1 1 Lower by
two steps
6
Not used
7
B signal detection time for V.34
polling transmission
0: 75 ms (default setting)
1: 65 ms
SP No. 1-105-012
COMMENTS
The machine does not automatically reset these bits
for each country after a country code (System
Switch 0F) is programmed.
Change the required bits manually at installation.

Change this bit manually if required.
SP No. 1-105-013
COMMENTS
P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.

SP No. 1-105-014
COMMENTS
The machine changes the modulation parameters in
the MPh signal to lower the initial modem rate
during V.34 reception. If this switch is set to 0111,
the machine lowers the initial speed one step, for
example, from 28,800 to 26,400 bps.
This switch reduces transmission time if the
machine frequently sends PPR signals during V.34
reception.
Change this switch only when there are
communication errors during V.34 polling
transmission to a machine with a Panasonic
modem.
G3 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)

B712
76
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3 Switch 0F
No
FUNCTION
0
Alarm when an error occurred
in Phase C or later
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
Alarm when the handset is offhook at the end of
communication
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2-7 Not used
SM
SP No. 1-105-016
COMMENTS
If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each
error communication, change this bit to 1.
If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the

handset is off-hook at the end of fax communication,
change this bit to 1.
77
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES

These switches require an optional G3 interface unit.
G3-3 switches are the same as for G3-2 switches.
G3-2 Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
0-1 Monitor speaker during
communication (tx and rx)
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Disabled
0
1
Up to Phase B
1
0
All the time
1
1
Not used
2
memory transmission
3-6 Not used
SP No. 1-106-001
COMMENTS
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
the communication.
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
the T.30 protocol.
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
all through the communication. Make sure that you
reset these bits after testing.
1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
transmission.
G3-2 Switch 01
No
FUNCTION
0-3 Not used
4
DIS frame length
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes
SP No. 1-106-002
COMMENTS
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will
not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
Do not change this setting, unless the
communication problem is caused by the
CED/ANSam transmission.
5
6
Not used
CED/ANSam transmission
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Not used
G3-2 Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
G3 protocol mode used
0: Standard and non-standard
1: Standard only
1-4
5
Not used
Use of modem rate history for
transmission using
Quick/Speed Dials
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
AI short protocol (transmission

and reception)
Short preamble
B712
SP No. 1-106-003
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
only communicate with machines that send T.30standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always
start from the highest modem rate.
1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for
communications with the same machine when
determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
Manual for details about Short Preamble.
78
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3-2 Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
DIS detection number
(Echo countermeasure)
0: 1
1: 2
1
Not used
2
V.8 protocol
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SP No. 1-106-004
ECM frame size

0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
CTC transmission conditions
0: After one PPR signal
received
1: After four PPR signals
received (ITU-T standard)
COMMENTS
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same
DIS frame twice.
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
Note:
Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps
or lower.
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)

mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
N Transmit NRe send

NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames
NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to
drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
6
7
Modem rate used for the next

page after receiving a negative
code (RTN or PIN)
0: No change
1: Fallback
Not used
Not used
G3-2 Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0
Training error detection
to threshold
3
4-7
SM
Not used
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

1: The machines tx modem rate will fall back before
sending the next page if a negative code is
received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
SP No. 1-106-005
COMMENTS
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
79
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 05
No
FUNCTION
0
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
4
Initial modem type for 9.6 k or
to 7.2 kbps.
5
Bit 5 Bit 4
Setting
0
0
V.29
0
1
V.17
1
0
V.34
1
1
Not used
6-7 Not used
SP No. 1-106-006
COMMENTS
transmission.
G3-2 Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
0
Initial Rx modem rate
3
0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k
0 0 1 1 7.2 k
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k
0 1 1 0 14.4 k
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k
1 0 0 1 21.6 k
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
SP No. 1-106-007
B712
Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you

need to change this for specific receivers.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
COMMENTS
reception.
Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
during reception.
Cross reference
80
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3-2 Switch 06
No
FUNCTION
4
Modem types available for
to reception
7
Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V.33
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
G3-2 Switch 07
No
FUNCTION
0
to (tx mode: Internal)
1
Bit 1 Bit 0
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High
2
to
3
5
6-7
SM

(rx mode: Internal)
Bit 3 Bit 2
Setting
0
0
None
0
1
Low
1
0
Medium
1
1
High

(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
(V.34 rx mode; External)
Not used
SP No. 1-106-007
COMMENTS
The setting of these bits is used to inform the
transmitting terminal of the available modem type for
the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
disabled manually.
Cross reference
SP No. 1-106-008
COMMENTS
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
specific receivers.
Communication error
communications.
0-20, 0-23, etc.
communications.
Keep this bit at 1.
Keep this bit at 1.

81
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
G3-2 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0A
No
FUNCTION
0
Maximum allowable carrier
1
drop during image data
reception
Bit 1 Bit 0
Value (ms)
0
0
200
0
1
400
1
0
800
1
1
Not used
2-3 Not used
4
Maximum allowable frame
interval during image data
reception.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s
5
6
Not used
Reconstruction time for the first
line in receive mode
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
Not used
B712
SP No. 1-106-011
COMMENTS
These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
time.
frequent.

This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
(end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
between ECM frames from the other end.
frequent.
When the sending terminal is controlled by a
computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
82
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
G3-2 Switch 0B
No
FUNCTION
0
Protocol requirements: Europe
1
Protocol requirements: Spain
2
Protocol requirements:
Germany
3
Protocol requirements: France
4
PTT requirements: Germany
5
PTT requirements: France
6
Not used
7
Not used
G3-2 Switch 0C
No
FUNCTION
0
Pulse dialing method
1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Normal(P=N)
0
1
Oslo (P=10 - N)
1
0
Sweden
(N+1)
1
1
Not used
2-7 Not used
SP No. 1-106-012
COMMENTS
The machine does not automatically reset these bits
for each country after a country code (System
Switch 0F) is programmed.
Change the required bits manually at installation.

SP No. 1-106-013
COMMENTS
P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.
G3-2 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM
83
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES

The G4 internal switches (SW00 to 1F) are displayed but do not change these
settings.
4.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES

The G4 parameter switches (SW00 to 0F) are displayed but do not change these
settings.
4.2.9 IP FAX SWITCHES

IP Fax Switch 00
No.
FUNCTION
0
Not used
IP Fax Transport
1
0: TCP, 1: UDP
IP Fax single port selection
2
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
IP Fax double ports (single data
port) selection
3
IP Fax Gatekeeper
4
IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse
5
0: LSB first, 1: MSB first
IP Fax max bit rate setting
0: Not affected, 1: Affected
6
B712
IP Fax received telephone number

confirmation
0: No confirmation, 1: Confirmation
SP No. 1-111-001
COMMENTS
Reverses the T30 bit signal.

When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does
not affect the value of the DIS/DCS.
When "1" is selected, the max bit rate affects
the value of the DIS/DCS.
When "0" is selected, fax data is received
without checking the telephone number.
When "1" is selected, fax data is received only
when confirming that the telephone number
from the sender matches the registered
telephone number in this machine. If this
confirmation fails, the line is disconnected.
84
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IP Fax Switch 01
No.
FUNCTION
IP Fax delay level setting
Selects the acceptable delay level.
Level 0 is the highest quality
0-3 Default is "0000" (level 0).
IP Fax preamble wait time setting
4-7
SP No. 1-111-002
COMMENTS
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
Bit 2
0
0
0
0
Bit 1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
Level 0
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Selects the preamble wait time.

[00 to 0f]
There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary switch
combination.
Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms
Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)
The default is "0000" (00H).
IP Fax Switch 02
No.
FUNCTION
0
IP Fax bit signal reverse setting
0: Maker code setting
1: Internal bit switch setting
3-7
SM
IP Fax transmission speed setting

0: Modem speed
1: No limitation
SIP transport setting
0: TCP
1: UDP
Not used
SP No. 1-111-003
COMMENTS
When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse
method is decided by the maker code.
When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse
method is decided by the internal bit switch.
NOTE: When communicating between IP Fax
devices, LSB first is selected.)
Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax
communication.
This bit switch sets the transport that has
priority for receiving IP Fax data.
This function is activated only when the
sender has both TCP and UDP.
85
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
IP Fax Switch 03
No.
FUNCTION
0
Effective field limitation for G3
standard function information
0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)
1
Switching between G3 standard
and G3 non standard
0: Enable switching
1: G3 standard only
2
AI modem rate function
3
ECM frame size selection at
transmitting
0: 256byte, 1: 64byte
4
DIS detection times for echo
prevention
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
5
CTC transmission selection
0: PPRx1
1: PPRx4
6
Shift down setting at receiving

negative code
0: OFF, 1: ON
Not used
IP Fax Switch 04
No.
FUNCTION
TCF error threshold
0
1
2
3
4-7 Not used
B712
SP No. 1-111-004
COMMENTS
When "0" is selected, the transmission

condition is decided by error frame numbers.
When "1" is selected, the transmission
condition is based on the ITU-T method.

SP No. 1-111-005
COMMENTS
Sets the TCF error threshold level.
[00 to 0f]
The default is "1111" (0fH).
86
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IP Fax Switch 05
SP No. 1-111-006
No.
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Modem bit rate setting for transmission
Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
0-3
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 2
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Bit 1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
Bit 0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12.0K bps
14.4K bps
16.8K bps
19.2K bps
21.6K bps
24.0K bps
26.4K bps
28.8K bps
31.2K bps
33.6K bps
Modem setting for transmission

Sets the modem for transmission.
The default is "00" (V29).
Bit 5
0
0
1
1
4-5
6-7
SM
Not used
Bit 4
0
1
0
1
V29
V17
V34
Not used
87
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BIT SWITCHES
IP Fax Switch 06
SP No. 1-111-007
No.
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Modem bit rate setting for reception
Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
0-3
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 2
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Bit 1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
Bit 0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12.0K bps
14.4K bps
16.8K bps
19.2K bps
21.6K bps
24.0K bps
26.4K bps
28.8K bps
31.2K bps
33.6K bps
Modem setting for reception

Sets the modem for reception. The default is "0010" (V27ter, V29).
4-7
Bit 7
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 6
0
0
0
1
1
Bit 5
0
1
1
0
0
Bit 4
1
0
1
0
1
V27ter
V27ter, V29
V27ter, V29, V33 (invalid)
V27ter, V29, V17
V27ter, V29, V17, V34
IP Fax Switch 07
No.
FUNCTION
0
TSI information
0: Not added, 1: Added
1
DCN transmission setting at T1
timeout
0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted
2
Not used
3
Hang up setting at DIS reception
disabled
0: No hang up
1: Hang up after transmitting DCN
4
Number of times for training
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
5
Space CSI transmission setting at
no CSI registration
0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted
6-7 Not used
B712
SP No. 1-111-008
COMMENTS
Adds or does not add TSI information to
NSS(S).
Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1
timeout.
Selects the number of times training is done at

the same bit rate.
When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.
When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is
all spaces.
88
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IP Fax Switch 08
No.
FUNCTION
0-1 T1 timer adjustment
Adjusts the T1 timer.
The default is "00" (35 seconds).
2-3
4-5
T4 timer adjustment
Adjust the T4 timer.
SP No. 1-111-009
COMMENTS
Bit 1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
35 sec
40 sec
50 sec
60 sec
Bit 3
0
0
1
1
Bit 2
0
1
0
1
3 sec
3.5 sec
4 sec
5 sec
T0 timer adjustment
Bit 5 Bit 4
0
0
75 sec
0
1
120 sec
1
0
180 sec
1
1
240 sec
Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets the interval between "setup" data
transmission and T.38 phase decision.
If your destination return is late on the network or G3 fax return is late, adjust the
longer interval timer.
6-7
Not used
IP Fax Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

IP Fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM
89
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SP No. 1-111-010
SP No. 1-111-011
SP No. 1-111-012
SP No. 1-111-013
SP No. 1-111-014
SP No. 1-111-015
SP No. 1-111-016
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
BIT SWITCHES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
4.3 NCU PARAMETERS

The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units
that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The
factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by
RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using NCU Parameter
programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104 and 105 can be used, this
will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code
unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.
NOTE: The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.
Change the fourth digit from 5 to 6 (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for the
settings for the first optional G3 interface unit and from 5 to 7 (e.g.
680700) for the settings for the second optional G3 interface unit.
B712
90
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Address
680500
Function
Unit
Remarks
Country/Area code for NCU
parameters
Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this address, or
use the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001
Country/Area
France
Germany
UK
Italy
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Ireland
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
Portugal
Holland
Spain
Israel
USA
Asia
Decimal Hex
00
00
01
01
02
02
03
03
04
04
05
05
06
06
07
07
08
08
09
09
10
0A
11
0B
12
0C
13
0D
14
0E
15
0F
17
11
18
12
Hong Kong 20
South Africa 21
Australia
22
New Zealand 23
Singapore 24
Malaysia
25
China
26
Taiwan
27
Korea
28
Greece
33
Hungary
34
Czech
35
Poland
36
680501
680502
680503
Line current detection time

Line current wait time
Line current drop detect time
20 ms
680504
Hz (BCD)
680508
680509
68050A
68050B
68050C
PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit

(high byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit
(low byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit
(high byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit
(low byte)
PSTN dial tone detection time
PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW)
PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH)
PSTN dial tone continuous tone time
PSTN dial tone permissible drop time
68050D
68050E
68050F
PSTN wait interval (LOW)

PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
PSTN ring-back tone detection time
680510
PSTN ring-back tone off detection

time
680505
680506
680507
SM
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
21
22
23
24
Line current detection is

disabled.
Line current is not
detected if 680501
contains FF.
If both addresses contain
FF(H), tone detection is
disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
20 ms
If 680508 contains FF(H),

the machine pauses for
the pause time (address
68050D / 68050E).
Italy: See Note 2.
20 ms
Detection is disabled if
this contains FF.
20 ms
91
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
NCU PARAMETERS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
680511
680512
680513
680514
680515
680516
680517
680518
680519
Function
PSTN detection time for silent period
after ring-back tone detected (LOW)
PSTN detection time for silent period
after ring-back tone detected (HIGH)
PSTN busy tone frequency upper
limit (high byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency upper
limit (low byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower
limit (low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper limit
(high byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper limit
(low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency lower limit
(high byte)
68051A
PABX dial tone frequency lower limit

(low byte)
68051B
68051C
68051D
68051E
68051F
680520
680521
680522
680523
PABX dial tone detection time

PABX dial tone reset time (LOW)
PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)
PABX dial tone continuous tone time
PABX dial tone permissible drop time
PABX wait interval (LOW)
PABX wait interval (HIGH)
PABX ringback tone detection time
PABX ringback tone off detection
time
PABX detection time for silent
period after ringback tone detected
(LOW)
PABX detection time for silent
period after ringback tone detected
(HIGH)
PABX busy tone frequency upper
limit (high byte)
PABX busy tone frequency upper
limit (low byte)
PABX busy tone frequency lower
limit (high byte)
PABX busy tone frequency lower
limit (low byte)
Busy tone ON time: range 1
Busy tone OFF time: range 1
680524
680525
680526
680527
680528
680529
68052A
68052B
68052C
68052D
68052E
B712
Unit
20 ms
Remarks
20 ms
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
20 ms
If 68051B contains FF,

the pause time (680520 /
680521).
20 ms
20 ms

disabled.
disabled.
20 ms
20 ms
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
20 ms
92
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Address
68052F
680530
680531
680532
680533
Function
Unit
Remarks
20 ms
Busy tone continuous tone detection
time
Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ONOFF must be detected twice).
Tolerance ()
Bit
1 0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
680534
680535
680536
680537
680538
680539
68053A
68053B
68053C
68053D
68053E
68053F
680540
680541
680542
680543
680544
680545
680546
SM
75% Bits 2 and 3 must always

50% be kept at 0.
25%
12.5%
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection

Hz (BCD)
International dial tone frequency
upper limit (high byte)
disabled.
upper limit (low byte)
Hz (BCD)
lower limit (high byte)
disabled.
lower limit (low byte)
International dial tone detection time 20 ms
If 680538 contains FF,
International dial tone reset time
the pause time (68053D /
(LOW)
68053E).
International dial tone reset time
(HIGH)
Belgium: See Note 2.
International dial tone continuous
tone time
International dial tone permissible
drop time
International dial wait interval (LOW)
International dial wait interval (HIGH)
Hz (BCD)
Country dial tone upper frequency
limit (HIGH)
disabled.
Country dial tone upper frequency
limit (LOW)
Country dial tone lower frequency
limit (HIGH)
disabled.
Country dial tone lower frequency
limit (LOW)
Country dial tone detection time
20 ms
If 680543 contains FF,
Country dial tone reset time (LOW)
the pause time (680548 /
Country dial tone reset time (HIGH)
680549).
Country dial tone continuous tone
time
93
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
NCU PARAMETERS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
680547
68054B
Function
Country dial tone permissible drop
time
Country dial wait interval (LOW)
Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
Time between opening or closing the
DO relay and opening the OHDI
relay
Break time for pulse dialing
68054C
Make time for pulse dialing
1 ms
68054D
Time between final OHDI relay

closure and DO relay opening or
closing
1 ms
68054E
20 ms
680550
Minimum pause between dialed

digits (pulse dial mode)
Time waited when a pause is
entered at the operation panel
DTMF tone on time
680551
DTMF tone off time
680552
Tone attenuation level of DTMF

signals while dialing
-N x 0.5 3.5
dBm
680553
Tone attenuation value difference

between high frequency tone and
low frequency tone in DTMF signals
-dBm x 0.5
680554
PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level

after dialling
ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level
after dialling
Not used
-N x 0.5 3.5
dBm
-dBm x 0.5
1 ms
680558
Time between 68054Dh (NCU

parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU
parameter 15)
Not used
680559
Grounding time (ground start mode)
20 ms
68055A
Break time (flash start mode)
1 ms
680548
680549
68054A
68054F
680555
680556
680557
B712
Unit
20 ms
1 ms
1 ms
1 ms
94
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Remarks
See Notes 3, 6 and 8.

SP2-103-012 (parameter
11).
See Note 3.
12).
See Note 3.
13).
See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
14).
This parameter is only
valid in Europe.
See Note 3 and 8. SP2103-016 (parameter 15).
16). See Note 3.
17).
18).
19).
See Note 5.
20).
The setting must be less
than 5dBm, and should
not exceed the setting at
680552h above.
See Note 5.
21). See Note 5.
See Note 5
Do not change the
settings.
This parameter takes
effect when the country
code is set to France.
Do not change the
setting.
The Gs relay is closed for
this interval.
The OHDI relay is open
for this interval.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Address
68055B
68055C
Function
International dial access code (High)
International dial access code (Low)
68055D
PSTN access pause time
68055E
Progress tone detection level, and

cadence detection enable flags
68055F
to
680564
680565
680566
Not used
Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.

Do not change the
settings.
Long distance call prefix (HIGH)

Long distance call prefix (LOW)
BCD
BCD
680567
to
680571
680572
Not used
For a code of 0:
680565 - FF
680566 - F0
Do not change the
settings.
Acceptable ringing signal frequency:

range 1, upper limit
range 1, lower limit
range 2, upper limit
range 2, lower limit
Number of rings until a call is
detected
1000/ N
(Hz).
680577
Minimum required length of the first

ring
20 ms
680578
Minimum required length of the

second and subsequent rings
Ringing signal detection reset time
(LOW)
Ringing signal detection reset time
(HIGH)
20 ms
02).
03).
04).
05).
06).
The setting must not be
zero.
See Note 4.
07).
08).
09).
10).
680573
680574
680575
680576
680579
68057A
SM
Unit
BCD
Remarks
For a code of 100:
68055B - F1
68055C - 00
20 ms
This time is waited for
each pause input after
the PSTN access code. If
this address contains
FF[H], the pause time
stored in address 68054F
is used.
Do not set a number
more than 7 in the UK.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm
0 0 0 -25.0
0 0 1 -35.0
0 1 0 -30.0
1 0 0 -40.0
1 1 0 -49.0
20 ms
95
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
NCU PARAMETERS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
Address
68057B
to
680580
680581
680582
Function
Unit
Not used
Interval between dialing the last digit 20 ms
and switching the Oh relay over to
the external telephone when dialing
from the operation panel in handset
mode.
Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time
Bit
1 0 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
Remarks
Do not change the
settings.
Factory setting: 500 ms
Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time

Bit
3 2 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
680583
to
6805A0
6805A1
6805A2
6805A3
6805A4
6805A5
6805A6
6805A7
6805A8
6805A9
6805AA
Bits 4 to 7 - Not used

Not used
Do not change the

settings.
Acceptable CED detection frequency

CED detection time
Acceptable CNG detection frequency
Not used
6805AB
6805AC
6805AD
CNG on time
CNG off time
Number of CNG cycles required for
detection
6805AE
Not used
B712
BCD (Hz)

disabled.
BCD (Hz)

disabled.
20 ms
20 ms
BCD (Hz)
BCD (Hz)
20 ms
20 ms
96
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

disabled.
disabled.
Do not change the
setting.
The data is coded in the
same way as address
680533.
Do not change the
settings.
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Address
6805AF
6805B0
6805B1
6805B2
6805B3
6805B4
6805B5
6805B6
6805B7
6805B8
6805B9
6805BD
6805BE
to
6805C6
6805C7
6805C8
to
6805D9
6805DA
6805E0
bit 3
6805E5
SM
Function
Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (high byte)
(800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (low byte)
(800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (high byte)
(800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (low byte)
Detection time for 800 Hz AI short
protocol tone
PSTN: Tx level from the modem
Unit
Hz (BCD)
Remarks
disabled.
Hz(BCD)

disabled.
20 ms
-N 3 dBm
01).
- N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 3.5 (dB)
See Note 7.
- N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 3 (dB)
See Note 7.
- dBm
- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission

level
PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
PABX: Tx level from the modem
PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission
level
PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission
level
Modem turn-on level (incoming
signal detection level)
Not used
- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)

-37-0.5N
(dBm)
Do not change the
settings.
Bits 0 to 3 Not used.

Bit 4 V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)
Bits 5 to 7 Not used.
Not used
Do not change the
settings.
T.30 T1 timer
Maximum wait time for post
message
1s
0: 12 s
1: 30 s
Signal Detection Method
80h: Auto
Edge
81h or 83h:
Fixed Edge
97
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
1: Maximum wait time for

post message
(EOP/EOM/MPS) can be
changed to 30 s.
Change this bit to 1 if
communication errors
occur frequently during
V.17 reception.
Signal detection method,
Auto Edge (80h) or Fixed
Edge (81h or 83h).
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
NCU PARAMETERS
Rev. 03/2006
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
NCU PARAMETERS
NOTES
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are
changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address
680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10
pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time
specified by this parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone: 0.5 x N680552/6805543.5 dBm
0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone: 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) 3.5 dBm
0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
NOTE: N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)
6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds
closing and Di opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds
opening and Di closing
7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI
short protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher
than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h.
8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the
sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and
68054E.
B712
98
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable
parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience
problems, store that terminals fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and
adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be
described.
4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.
2. Press "Dest. Management" in the facsimile standby mode.
3. Press "Program/Change/Delete Quick Dial".
4. Select the destination key you want to program.
5. When the programmed dial
number is displayed, press
Start.
Make sure that the LED of
the Start button is lit as
green.
B712S104.WMF
6. The settings for the switch

01 are now displayed.
Press the bit number that
you wish to change.
7. To scroll through the
parameter switches, either:
8. Select the next switch:
press Next
or
Select the previous switch: Prev. until the correct switch is displayed.
Then go back to step 6.
B712S105.WMF
9. After the setting is changed, press OK.

10. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.
SM
99
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.4.2 PARAMETERS
The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are
disabled.
Switch 01
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)
If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
0
Tx level
to Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
4
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 -1
0 0 0 1 0 -2
0 0 0 1 1 -3
0 0 1 0 0 -4
:
:
0 1 1 1 1 -15
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled
5
Cable equalizer
to Bit 7 6 5 Setting
7
0 0 0 None
0 0 1 Low
0 1 0 Medium
0 1 1 High
1 1 1 Disabled
COMMENTS
If communication with a particular remote terminal
often contains errors, the signal level may be
inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
communications with that terminal until the results
are better.
If the setting is Disabled, the NCU parameter 01
setting is used.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
left.
the modem and the telephone exchange when
calling the number stored in this Quick/Speed Dial.
0-20, 0-23, etc.
left.
If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is
used.
B712
100
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Switch 03
No
FUNCTION
0
to Bit3
2 1 0 Setting (bps)
3
0 0 0 0 Not used
0 0 0 1 2,400
0 0 1 0 4,800
0 0 1 1 7,200
0 1 0 0 9,600
0 1 0 1 12,000
0 1 1 0 14,400
0 1 1 1 16,800
1 0 0 0 19,200
1 0 0 1 21,600
1 0 1 0 24,000
1 0 1 1 26,400
1 1 0 0 28,800
1 1 0 1 31,200
1 1 1 0 33,600
1 1 1 1 Disabled
4-5
6
Other settings: Not used

Not used
AI short protocol
0: Off
1: Disabled
Not used
Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
0
Inch-mm conversion before tx
1
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0
0
Inch-mm
conversion
available
0
1
Inch only
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled
2
DIS/NSF detection method
to Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
3
0
0
First DIS or
NSF
0
1
Second DIS or
NSF
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled
SM
COMMENTS
If training with a particular remote terminal always
takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too
high. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these
bits.
For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit 4
must be changed to 0.
left.
used.

used.
COMMENTS
The machine uses inch-based resolutions for
scanning. If inch only is selected, the printed copy
may be slightly distorted at the other end if that
machine uses mm-based resolutions.
used.
(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are
interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
transmission. The machine will then wait for the
second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
used.
101
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
4
V.8 protocol
0: Off
1: Disabled
6
7

in transmit mode
0: MH only
1: Disabled
ECM during transmission
Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting
0
0
Off
0
1
On
1
0
Not used
1
1
Disabled
COMMENTS
If transmissions to a specific destination always end
at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
used.
This bit determines the capabilities that are informed
to the other terminal during transmission.
used.
For example, if ECM is switched on but is not
wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
the (0, 0) setting.
Note that V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression
are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled.
used.
Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

B712
102
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

CAUTION
Do not change the settings which are marked as Not used or Read only.
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)

680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680006 to 680015(H) - Machines serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches
6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches
6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used
6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bit 2: Reception time printing
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
Bit 5: CIL printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 6: TID printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 7: Not used
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report
printout)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Polling clear report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On
SM
103
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report

printout)
Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated
Bit 5: Include senders name on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages
(Paper end, toner end, jam, and during night mode)
Bit 2 1 Setting
0 0 The machine receives all the fax messages.
0 1 The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
1 0 The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
1 1 The machine does not receive anything.
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Just size printing
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Scan sequence in Book transmission
0: Left page then right page, 1: Right page then left page
Bit 7: Not used
Bits 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature
are accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature
are accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09) : Not used
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: 2 into 1 0: Off, 1: On
B712
104
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
Bit 2: Not used

Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Reception file printout 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Polling Standby duration 0: Once, 1: No limit
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used
6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)
Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection
0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log) up to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Batch transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer
/Scanner) is pressed
0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
Bit 7: Manual service call (sends the system parameter list to the service station)
0: Off, 1: On
SM
105
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)

Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
Bit 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 1 1st paper feed station
0 1 0 2nd paper feed station
0 1 1 3rd paper feed station
1 0 0 4th paper feed station
1 0 1 LCT
Other settings Not used
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
6800E0(H) User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size
paper is not available.
0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
6800E1(H) User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bit 2: Inclusion of the Add button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is
selected for broadcasting
0:Not needed, 1: Needed
Bit 7: Press Start key without an original when using the on hook dial or the
external telephone,
0: displays Cannot detect original size.
1: Receives fax messages.
6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)
Bit 0: TTI date
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number
0: Off, 1: On
B712
106
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

Bit 0: Offset sort function for the fax (only using the shift tray on the 1,000 sheet
finisher)
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, G3-3 and G4 communications
Bit 2: Action when the paper cassette that was selected by the specified cassette
selection feature becomes empty.
0: The machine will not print any received files until paper is added.
1: The machine will use other cassettes to print received files that are not
specified by this feature.
Bit 3: 90 image rotation during B5 portrait Tx
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and subscan directions. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the PC fax (LAN fax) error report
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Reprint the documents fail to print from PC fax (LAN fax) driver
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax
(LAN fax) driver
Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 0
0 min.
0 0 0 1
1 min.
1 1 1 0 14 min.
1 1 1 1 15 min.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used.
Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message
0: Disabled (print only when error occurs), 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1:PDF
Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed
Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
SM
107
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA

Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6800E7(H) User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17) : Not used
Bits 0 and 1: File retention time (Cross reference: System switch 02 bit 4)
Bit 1
0
Setting
0
0
File retention impossible
0
1
24 hours
1
0
File retention impossible
1
1
72 hours
Bit 0 and 1: Not used
Bit 2: Auto switching 0: Fax, 1: Telephone
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: RDS operation
0: Not acceptable
1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03
NOTE: This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user
(see system switch 02).
6800EA(H) to 6800EF(H) - User parameter switch 26 to 31 (SWUSR_1A to 1F)
: Not used
6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20)
Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the
specified type
0: Paper output priority
Priority order
1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3. E-mail address, 4. Folder
1: Electric putout order
Priority order
1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax destination, 4. Fax number
6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used
6800F2(H) - User parameter switch 34 (SWUSR_22)
Bit 0: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches
680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches
B712
108
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches

680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches
680190 to 6801AF(H) - Service stations fax number (SP3-101)
6801B0 to 6801B0(H) - Own fax PABX extension number
6801BA to 6801C3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN)
6801C4 to 6801D7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4)
6801D8 to 6801E3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3)
6801E4 to 6801EF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3)
6801F0 to 6801FB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4)
6801FC to 680207(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4)
680208 to 68021B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
68021C to 68022F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
680230 to 680246(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
680247 to 680286(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680307 to 68031A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
68031B to 68032E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
68032F to 680342(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
680343(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)
680344(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex)
680345(H) Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex)NOTE: If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for
TTI), add a stop code (FF[H]) after the last character.
680380 to 680387(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
680380(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM),
02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
680381(H) - Year (BCD)
680382(H) - Month (BCD)
680383(H) - Day (BCD)
680384(H) - Hour
680385(H) - Minute
680386(H) - Second
680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
680394(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings)
Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 1: SAF Memory
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bits 2 to 7; Not used
680395(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings)
Bit 4: G3-2
Bit 5: G3-3
Bit 6 and 7: Not used
SM
109
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
680406 to 68040A Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)

680406(H) - Suffix (BCD)
680407(H) - Version (BCD)
680408(H) - Year (BCD)
680409(H) - Month (BCD)
68040A(H) - Day (BCD)
68040B to 68040F Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only)
68040B(H) - Suffix (BCD)
68040C(H) - Version (BCD)
68040D(H) - Year (BCD)
68040E(H) - Month (BCD)
68040F(H) - Day (BCD)
680410(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only)
680420(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only)
680476(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
680477(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
680492(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680493(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680494(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680495(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680496(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)
680497(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H)
69ED04 to 69F003(H) - SIP server address (Read only)
69ED04(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69ED84(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EE04(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EE04(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EF04(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69EF04(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F004(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F084(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F104(H) - Arias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F184(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69F204(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A0DC0(H) - Stand-by port number for H.232 connection
6A0DC2(H) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection
6A0DC4(H) - RAS port number
6A0DC6(H) - Gatekeeper port number
6A0DC8(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38
6A0DCA(H) - Port number of SIP server
6A0DCC(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP
6A0DCD(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6A0DCE(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
B712
110
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
6A0DD0(H) - RAS/SIP back-up server: IP address (Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A0DD4(H) - SIP back-up server: Host name (Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A0E54(H) - RAS back-up server: gatekeeper address - Main
(Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A0ED4(H) - RAS back-up server: gatekeeper address - Sub
6A0F54(H) - SIP back-up server: registrar server address - Main
6A0FD4(H) - SIP back-up server: registrar server address - Sub
6A1054(H) - RAS back-up server: Arias number (Max. 128 characters- ASCII)
6A10D4(H) - RAS back-up server: Stand-by port number for H.232 connection
6A10D6(H) - RAS back-up server: RAS port number
SM
111
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
OVERVIEW

5.1 OVERVIEW
FCUIF
MBU
to IPU
CCUDRV
Memory DIMM
GWFCU3
CCUIF
SG3
SG3
B712D501.WMF
The basic fax unit consists of two PCBs: an FCU and an MBU.
The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with
the controller board. The MBU contains the ROM and SRAM. Also, the FCU has an
NCU circuit.
Fax Options:
1. Extra G3 Interface option: This provides one more analog line interface. This
allows full dual access. Two extra G3 interface options can be installed.
2. Memory Expansion: This expands the SAF memory and the page memory
(used for image rotation); without this expansion, the page memory is not big
enough for image rotation at 400 dpi, so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible.
B712
112
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARDS
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
5.2 BOARDS
5.2.1 FCU
SAF
BACKUP
SDRAM
(16MB)
DIMM
(32 MB)
FCU
FCUIF
IPU
DMA BUS
PCI BUS
FACE3
CPU BUS
SRAM
(256kB)
MBU
v.34
MODEM
FROM
(3MB)
Speaker
Drive
BACKUP
& RESET
CCUIF
G3
NCU
Circuit
Line
TEL
CCUDRV
G3
Speaker
B712D502.WMF
The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface
to the base copiers engine, and all the fax options.
FACE3 (Fax Application Control Engine)

CPU
Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
DMA control
Clock generation
DRAM backup control
Modem (FAME)
V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8
SM
113
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARDS
DRAM
The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.
SAF memory
: 4MB
Working memory : 8MB
Page memory
: 4MB
The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.
Memory back-up
A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 1 hour.
5.2.2 MBU
On this board, the flash ROM contains the FCU firmware, and the SRAM contains
the system data and user parameters. Even if the FCU is changed, the system
data and user parameters are kept on the MBU board.
ROM
3MB flash ROMs for system software storage
2MB (16bit x 1MB) + 1MB (16bit x 512K)
SRAM
The 256 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a
lithium battery.
Memory back-up
A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in
the SRAM, in case the base copier's main switch is turned off.
Switches
Item
SW1
B712
Description
Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.
114
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
BOARDS
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
5.2.3 SG3 BOARD

G3 Board
SG3-D
SG3-D
NCCP
FROM
(1MB)
CPU
(Ru30)
SDRAM
(8MB)
DPRAM
DMAC
FCU
DCR
Line
JBIG
CODEC
DSP
(modem)
+5V
REG
AFE
NCU
+3.3V
B712D902.WMF
The SG3 board allows up to three simultaneous communications when used in

combination with the FCU and optional G3 boards. The NCU is on the same board
as the common SG-3 board. This makes the total board structure smaller. But, the
specifications of the SG3 board do not change.
NCCP (New Communication Control Processor)
Controls the SG3 board.

CPU (RU30)
DPRAM (Dual Port RAM): Handshaking with the FCU is done through this block.
DMA controller
JBIG
DSP V34 modem (RL5T892): Includes the DTMF Receiver function
DCR for MH, MR, MMR, and JBIG compression and decompression
FROM
1Mbyte flash ROM for SG3 software storage and modem software storage
SDRAM
8Mbyte DRAM shared between ECM buffer, line buffer, and working memory
AFE (Analog Front End)
Analog processing
CODEC (COder-DECoder)
A/D & D/A conversions for modem
REG
Generates +3.3 V from the +5V from the FCU
SM
115
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
VIDEO DATA PATH
5.3
VIDEO DATA PATH
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION
SCANNER
IPU
FCU
FBI
FACE3
Page Memory
DCR
SAF
SG3
DCR
QM-CODER
DCR
QM-CODER
Modem
Modem
NCU
NCU
Analog G3
Analog G3
NCCP
B712D511.WMF
B712
116
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission

The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch
format. The IPU processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the IPU uses the MTF, independent dot
erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax units
scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.
Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR
or raw format to store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the
image is rotated in page memory before compression.
At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU
transmits the data to the line.
Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the
receiving terminal. The IPU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the IPU uses the MTF, independent dot
erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax units
scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.
Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for
transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.
JBIG Transmission
Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the DCR to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line.
When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line
type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.
Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the page memory to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the
line. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the
line type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.
Adjustments
Priority for the line used for G3 transmissions (PSTN 1/PSTN 2 or 3): System
switch 16 bit 1
SM
117
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
VIDEO DATA PATH
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
VIDEO DATA PATH
5.3.2 RECEPTION
Analog G3
Analog G3
NCU
NCU
Modem
Modem
QM-CODER
SAF
CCD (DCR)
DCR
DCR
QM-CODER
NCCP
Page Memory
FACE3
SG3
FBI
FCU
IPU
Printer
B712D512.WMF
First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAF
memory. (The data goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for error
lines/frames.)
The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image
rotation will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is
transferred to the IPU.
If the optional G3 unit is installed, the line that the message comes in on depends
on the telephone number dialed by the other party (the optional G3 unit has a
different telephone number from the main fax board).
JBIG Reception
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line),
the data is sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored in
the page memory, and transferred to the IPU.
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-2 (optional extra analog
line), the data is sent to the QM-CODER on the SG3 board for decompression.
B712
118
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

5.4.1 MULTI-PORT
When the optional extra G3 Interface Unit is installed, communication can take
place at the same time through the two or three lines at once.
Option
Available Line Type
Standard only
Extra G3 Interface Unit (single)
Extra G3 Interface Unit (double)
PSTN
PSTN + PSTN
PSTN + PSTN +PSTN
SM
119
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Available protocol
Combinations
G3
G3 + G3
G3 + G3 +G3
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER

Scanner
IPU
Controller
Comoressed
MMR
Page
Memory
HDD
FCU
FBI
FACE3
DCR
Modem
NCU
To
PSTN
DATA/ADDRESS BUS
B712D514.WMF
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution. The IPU
video processes the data and transfers it to the controller board.
Then the controller stores the data in the page memory for the copier function, and
compresses the data in MMR (by software) to store it in the HDD. If image rotation
will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory before compression.
For transmission, the stored image data is transferred to the FCU. The FCU
decompresses the image data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if
necessary for transmission. the NCU transmits the data to the line.
The documents can be stored in the HDD (Document Server) from the fax
application. The stored documents in the document sever can be used for the fax
transmission in many times. More than one document and the scanned document
can be combined into one file and then the file can be transmitted.
When using the document server, the SAF memory is not used.
The document is compressed with MMR and stored.
Up to 9,000 pages can be stored. (1 file: Up to 1,000 pages) from the fax
application.
Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted.
Scanned documents are given a name automatically, such as FAX001. But it is
possible to change the file name, user name and password.
Up to 30 files can be selected at once.
NOTE: 1) The compression method of the fax application is different from the copy
application. The storing time is longer than the copier storing.
2) When selecting Print 1st page, the stored document will be reduced to
A4 size.
B712
120
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

Mail Transmission
For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC
Internet/LAN Fax Boards Mail Transmission
Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file (only MH compression
can be used).
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field
From
Reply To
To
Bcc
Subject
Content Type
Content Transfer Encoding
Message Body
Content
Mail address of the sender
Destination requested for reply
Mail address of the destination
Backup mail address
From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Multipart/mixed
Attached files: image/tiff
Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how files
are attached to e-mail messages)
Selectable Options
These options are available for selection:
With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail.
Inch-mm conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution
will be used if Super Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled
with IFAX SW01.
The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory
capacity) are the same as for G3 fax memory tx.
The default compression is TIFF-F format.
IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending
IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination
Secure Internet Transmission

SMTP Authentication:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP Authentication
POP Before SMTP:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP
SM
121
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Mail Reception
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:
POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)
IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
Internet/LAN Fax Boards Mail Reception
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure

The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which is
adjustable in the range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> E-mail Reception Interval
SMTP Reception
The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS
server, and the address of the received mail must specify the IFAX.
Enable SMTP reception:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot be
received with SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled:
However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the
MX record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on
the setting:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Mail Delivery Conditions: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP

1) The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery:
User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery
Settings
2) If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only deliver
mail from designated senders, the machines Auth. E-mail RX feature must
be set (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings).
3) If the SMTP RX File Delivery Setting is set to 0 to prohibit SMTP receiving,
and if there is mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds with
an error. (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings)
4) If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mail
transmission is lost, and the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and
outputs an error report.
B712
122
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Auth. E-mail RX
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must
be limited using the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.
1) Access Limit Entry
For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:
gts@IFAX.ricoh.co.jp
Matches and is delivered.
gts@IFAX.abcde.co.jp
Does not match and is not delivered.
IFAX@ricoh.co.jp
Does not match and is not delivered.
2) Conditions
The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.
If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming
mail do not match, the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and
the SMTP server responds with an error. However, in this case an error
report is not output.
If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming
mail specifies a delivery destination, then the mail is delivered
unconditionally.
SM
123
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Handling Mail Reception Errors

Abnormal files
When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the
server to erase the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sends
information about the error by e-mail to the sender address (specified in the From
or Reply-to field of the message). If there is an incomplete received message in
the machine memory, it will be erased.
The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive error
notification after a certain number of attempts.
The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of the
following are detected:
1. Unsupported MIME headers.
Supported types of MIME header
Header
Content-Type
Charset
Content-Transfer-Encoding
Supported Types
Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff
US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be handled,
and some garbage may appear in the data.
Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
2. MIME decoding errors

3. File format not recognized as TIFF-F format
4. Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted
Remaining SAF capacity error

The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAF
capacity is less than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The email will be received when the SAF capacity increases (for example, after
substitute reception files have been printed). The error handling method for this
type of error is the same as for Abnormal files.
If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machine
operates in the same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to Abnormal
files above).
Secure Internet Reception

To enable password encryption and higher level security:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP3/IMAP4 Settings> Encryption
(set to On)
B712
124
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Transfer Request
Internet/LAN Fax Boards Transfer Request
Request by Mail
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field
From
To
Bcc
Subject
Content-Type
Content-Transfer-Encoding
Mail body (text part)
Message body
SM
Content
E-mail address of the requesting terminal
Destination address (Transfer Station address)
Backup mail address
From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Multipart/mixed
Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)
Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)
RELAY: #01#*X#**01.
MIME-converted TIFF-F.
125
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode)

The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject,
designating the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail.
Subject and Level of Importance

You can enter a subject message with: Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 64 characters. The subject
can also be prefixed with an Urgent or High notation.
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type

Mail Type
Subject Entry
---
No Subject
Entry
Confirmation
of Reception
Mail delivery,
memory
transfer,
SMTP
receiving and
delivery
Entry Condition
1. CSI (RTI)
2. RTI
3. CSI
4. None
1. CSI (RTI)
2. RTI
CSI not registered
3. CSI
RTI not registered
4. None
CSI, RTI not registered
From
From
RTI or CSI of
the station
designated for
delivery
RTI or CSI of
sender
Mail address
of sender
Mail address
of sender
Mail error
notification
CSI not registered

RTI not registered
CSI, RTI not registered
---
Fax Message No.

+
File No.
Normal:
Return Receipt
(dispatched).
You can select
displayed with IFAX
SW02 Bits 2 and 3.
Error:
Return Receipt
(processed/error)
Mail delivery
Mail sending from G3
memory
Fax Message No. + File

Number
Memory sending
SMTP receiving and
delivery (Off Ramp
Gateway)
Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)
Items of the table above are in the Subject.
Subjects Displayed on the PC
IFAXD919.WMF
B712
126
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
E-mail Messages
After entering the subject, you can enter a message with:
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail
Message
Limitations on Entries
Item
Number of Lines
Line Length
Name Length
SM
Maximum
5 lines
80 characters
20 characters
127
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Message Disposition Notification (MDN)

Internet/LAN Fax Boards E-mail Options
The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been
received correctly or not. This confirmation is done in four steps.
1. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this
request (known as MDN):
Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
2. Mail reception (receive confirmation request)
3. Send confirmation of mail reception
4. Receive confirmation of mail reception
The other partys machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions
below are met:
The other partys machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request.
The other partys machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification).
- Setting up the Receiving Party The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if:
1) The Disposition Notification To field is in the received mail header
(automatically inserted in the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page,
if MDN is enabled), and
2) Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter
Setting SW21 (15 [H]) Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response is
as follows:
B712
Normal reception:
Return Receipt (dispatched) in the Subject line
IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3)
Return Receipt (displayed) in the Subject line
Error:
Return Receipt (processed/error) in the Subject line
128
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
Handling Reports
1. Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail
After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail senders
journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a Q in the
Mode column.
2. Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt
Response
After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the
mail receivers journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column
and an A in the Mode column.
3. Receiving the Return Receipt Mail
After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail
senders journal about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is
annotated with OK in the Result column.
When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an E
in the Result column.
The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate
communication. Its arrival is only reported by the presence of OK or E in
the Result column.
If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group
destination; the machine sends the mail to more than one location. See How
to set up Mail Delivery), the Result column of the Journal is updated every
time a return receipt is received. For example, if the mailing list was to 5
destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the communication
with the 5th destination only. The results of the communications to the first 4
destinations are not shown.
Exceptions:
If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E,
even if subsequent communications were OK.
If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the
destination for the first error only.
Report Sample
DATE
MAY. 5
TIME
ADDRESS
MODE
TIME
PAGE
RESULT
10:15
fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co.
Mail SM
0'09"
--
10:16
fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co.
Mail SMQ 0'05"
--
10:17
s_tadashi@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'09"
OK
10:19
m_masataka@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMA 0'05"
--
IFAXD921.WMF
SM
129
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
IP-FAX
5.5 IP-FAX
What is IP-FAX?
Internet/LAN Fax Boards IP-FAX
T.38 Packet Format

TCP is selected by default for NIC FAX; you can change this to UDP with LAN
switch 10 bit 1.
UDP Related Switches
IP-Fax Switch 01
No.
FUNCTION
0-3 Select IP FAX Delay Level
Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 Level 0
0 0 0 1 Level 1
0 0 1 0 Level 2
0 0 1 1 Level 3
4-7
Not used.
COMMENTS
Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too
many transmission errors are occurring on the
network.
If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise this
setting on the T.30 machine. Increasing the delay
time allows the recovery of more lost packets.
If only UDP is enabled, increase the number of
redundant packets.
Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets
Level 3:
4 Redundant packets
Settings
User parameter switch 32 (20[H]), bit 0
IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage
0: No, 1: Yes
LAN switches 10 to 12: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)
B712
130
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Type:
Desktop type transceiver
Circuit:
PSTN (max. 3ch.)

PABX
Connection:
Direct couple
Original Size:
Book (Face down)

Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]
Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]
ARDF (Face up)
(single sided document)
Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
(double sided document)
Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
Scanning Method:
Flat bed, with CCD
Resolution:
G3
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)
8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) Note1
16 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note.
Transmission Time:
200 x 100 dpi (Standard)

200 x 200 dpi (Detail)
400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note.
NOTE: Note 1: Optional Expansion Memory required
G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using
memory for an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at
standard resolution
Data Compression:
MH, MR, MMR

JBIG
Protocol:
Group 3 with ECM
Modulation:
V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),

V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM)
Data Rate:
G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback
I/O Rate:
With ECM: 0 ms/line

Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
SM
131
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Memory Capacity:
ECM: 128 KB
SAF
Standard: 4 MB
With optional Expansion Memory: 28 MB (4 MB+ 24 MB)
Page Memory
Standard: 4 MB (Print: 2 MB + Scanner: 2 MB)
With optional Expansion Memory: 12 MB (8 MB + 4 MB)
(Print 8 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)
2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS

The following table shows how the capabilities of each programmable item will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit is installed.
Item
Quick Dial
Groups
Destination per Group
Destinations dialed from the ten-key pad overall
Programs
Auto Document
Communication records for Journal stored in the
memory
Specific Senders
Standard
2000
100
500
500
100
6
200
30
The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will
change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memory
are installed.
Memory
Transmission file
Maximum number of
page for memory
transmission
Memory capacity for
memory transmission
(Note1)
Without the
Expansion Memory
With the
Expansion
Memory
400
400
1,000
1,000
320
2,240
NOTE: 1) Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at the

standard resolution, the auto image density mode and the Text mode.
B712
132
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
Type
Fax Unit and Printer/Scanner Unit
Connectivity
Local area network
Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394)
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
Connection
100base-Tx/10base-T direct
connection
Resolution
Main scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi
Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi
NOTE: To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit
4 must be set to 1 or "Full
mode" in the address book of a
client pc must be selected with
Web Image Monitor.
Transmission Time
1 s (through a LAN to the server)
Condition: ITU-T #1 test document
(Selerexe Letter)
MTF correction: OFF
TTI: None
Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi
Communication speed: 10 Mbps
Correspondent device: E-mail server
Line conditions: No terminal access
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
3. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS
E-mail File Format
Single/multi-part
MIME conversion
Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)
format only
Protocol
(Supported by TCP/IP protocol)
Transmission:
SMTP, TCP/IP
Reception:
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
Data rate
100 Mbps(100base-Tx)
10 Mbps (10base-T)
Authentication method
SMTP-AUTH
POP before SMTP
A-POP
Remark
The machine must be set up as an email client before installation. Any
client PCs connected to the machine
through a LAN must also be e-mail
clients, or some features will not work
(e.g. Autorouting).
Document Size
Maximum message width is A4/LT.
NOTE: To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX
SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2
(A3) must be set to 1 or "Full
mode" in the address book of a
client pc must be selected with
Web Image Monitor.
SM
133
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
4. IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS
Network:
LAN: Local Area Network

Ethernet/10Base-T, 100Base-TX,
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394),
IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN)
Scan line density:
8x3.85 lines/mm, 200x100 dpi (standard character),

8x7.7 lines/mm, 200x200 dpi (detail character),
8x15.4 lines/mm, 200x400 dpi (fine character),
16x15.4 lines/mm, 400x400dpi (super fine character)
Original size:
Maximum A3 or 11x17 (DLT)
Maximum scanning size:
Standard size: A3, 297mm x 432mm,

Irregular size 297 x 1200mm
Transmission protocols:
Recommendation: T.38 Annex protocol,

TCP, UDP/IP communication
Compatible machines:
IP-Fax compatible machines
IP-Fax transmission
function:
Specify IP address and send fax to an IP-Fax

compatible fax through a network.
Also capable of sending fax to G3 fax connected to
the public telephone lines via a VoIP gateway.
IP-Fax reception function:
Receive a fax sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax

through a network.
Also capable of receiving fax from a G3 fax
connected the public telephone lines via a VoIP
gateway.
B712
134
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SM
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
SPECIFICATIONS
[A]
[B]
Fax Option
Type 3245
B712
5. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
[C]
[D]
PPC
[G]
[F]
[E]
B712V101.WMF
Component
FCU
MBU
FCU Interface
Expansion Memory
CCU drive board
Interface Board
G3 Board
Handset Type 1018
Marker Type 30
SM
Machine
Code
Remarks
[A]
[F]
[G]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B712
G578
B713
B433
Included in the Fax unit.

Option
Included in the optional G3
unit.
USA only
Common with J-C1
Refill ink for stamp
Common with J-C1
H903
135
CPIA NO CONTROLADA
B712

AF3228C - AF3235C MS - v00

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AF3228C - AF3235C MS - v00

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CPIA NO CONTROLADA

It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained

2005 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

Installing the Multi-Bin Output Tray .....................................................1-38

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

PUNCH KIT B377

TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED B598

TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600

ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601

BOOKLET FINISHER B602

FAX OPTION TYPE 3245 B712

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

CAUTION- CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION

Symbols and Abbreviations

Short Edge Feed (SEF)

Long Edge Feed (LEF)

TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED B598

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601

B712 FAX OPTION TYPE 3245

10C to 32C (50F to 89.6F)

Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)

5. Do not exposed the machine to the following:

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT

A: Over 100 mm (3.9")

1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS

Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)

1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS

One from the four

Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)

OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS

1.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

Place the copier on the paper feed unit or

Install the copier.

The controller options installed?

Check magnification and registration.

Specify the settings relevant to the

The punch unit installed?

Install the punch unit.

1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION

1. Operating InstructionsSystem Setting................................1

1. Remove the tape and padding on the copier.

5. Shake the toner cartridge five or six

9. Attach the cloth holder [C] to the left side of the

11. Attach the duplex inverter guide [A].

13. Attach the correct model name decal [C] to the

NOTE: Paper tray number decals are also

16. Install the optional ARDF or the optional platen

17. Plug in the machine.

Settings Relevant to Contract

1.4.2 MOVING MACHINE

4. Remove the rear stand [B]

1.4.3 TRANSPORTING MACHINE

6. Make sure there is no paper left in

7. Empty out the waste toner bottle.

9. Do one of the following:

1.5 OPTIONAL UNIT

1. Securing Bracket ................................................................1

1. Remove all tape on the paper tray